HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535

Service Manual
Copyright and License Trademark Credits

© Copyright 2017 HP Development Company, Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are

L.P. trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and

without prior written permission is prohibited, Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks
except as allowed under the copyright laws. of Microsoft Corporation.

The information contained herein is subject to

change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed
as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.

Edition 1, 04/2017
Conventions used in this guide
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

ENWW iii
iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW
Table of contents

1 Precautions .................................................................................................................................................. 1
Safety warning ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
Caution for safety .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Toxic material ...................................................................................................................................... 3
Electric shock and fire safety precautions .......................................................................................... 3
Handling precautions .......................................................................................................................... 5
Removal and Replacement precautions ............................................................................................. 5
Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ............................................................................ 6
ESD precautions ..................................................................................................................................................... 6

2 Product specifications and description ............................................................................................................ 7

Product Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 8
Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 9
General Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 9
Print specifications ............................................................................................................................ 11
Scan specification .............................................................................................................................. 13
Copy specification .............................................................................................................................. 15
Paper handling specification ............................................................................................................. 17
Software and solution specification ................................................................................................. 22
Supplies ............................................................................................................................................. 23
Maintenance parts ............................................................................................................................. 23
Optional ............................................................................................................................................. 23
Machine external view ......................................................................................................................................... 28
Feeding system .................................................................................................................................................... 30
Feeding system overview .................................................................................................................. 30
Main components and functions ....................................................................................................... 31
Cassette (Tray 1, 2, 4, 5) .................................................................................................................... 33
Pickup unit ......................................................................................................................................... 34
Regisrtation (reg) unit ....................................................................................................................... 35
Tray 1 (multipurpose (MP) tray) feed assembly ............................................................................... 35
Image creation ..................................................................................................................................................... 37
Printing process overview ................................................................................................................. 37

ENWW v
 Imaging unit ...................................................................................................................................... 37
Imaging unit overview .................................................................................................... 37
Drum drive ....................................................................................................................... 38
Developer unit ................................................................................................................. 38
Fuser unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 40
Fuser unit overview ........................................................................................................................... 40
Fuser unit drive .................................................................................................................................. 41
Fuser unit temperature control ......................................................................................................... 41
Laser scanner assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 43
Laser scanner assembly overview .................................................................................................... 43
Laser scanning optical path .............................................................................................................. 44
Laser synchronizing detectors .......................................................................................................... 44
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................................ 46
Drive motors ...................................................................................................................................... 46
Main Drive Unit (OPC/DEVE/Registration/Tray 1/Feed) ................................................................... 47
Pickup Drive ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Duct Drive .......................................................................................................................................... 51
Fuser/Exit Drive ................................................................................................................................. 52
Toner supply drive ............................................................................................................................. 53
Flatbed Scanner System ...................................................................................................................................... 54
Flatbed scanner system overview .................................................................................................... 54
Scanning system components .......................................................................................................... 56
Caution for moving the scanner ........................................................................................................ 62
Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) z bundles (GX) .................................................................................... 64
Flow ADF overview ............................................................................................................................ 64
Sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 65
Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM) ............................................................................................................. 66
Flow ADF drive system ...................................................................................................................... 66
Flow ADF document lifting drive system ........................................................................ 67
Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System .............................................................. 67
Flow ADF specification .................................................................................................... 68
Flow ADF Registration ....................................................................................................................... 69
Flow ADF Scanning Position .............................................................................................................. 70
Mixed Size Original (MSO) .................................................................................................................. 70
Dual sensor cleaning method ........................................................................................................... 71
Flow ADF z bundles (GX) .................................................................................................................... 72
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn bundles (LX) ........................................................................................... 73
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) overview ................................................................................... 73
Electrical parts location .................................................................................................................... 73
ADF Registration ................................................................................................................................ 74
ADF drive system ............................................................................................................................... 74

vi ENWW
 ADF original pickup assembly ......................................................................................... 75
ADF registration (regi) drive assembly ........................................................................... 76
ADF Scanning position ....................................................................................................................... 77
ADF Specification ............................................................................................................................... 77
Hardware configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 78
Main controller (main board) ............................................................................................................. 81
Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)/Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS) ...................................... 84
Fuser drive board ............................................................................................................................... 85
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board ........................................................................................ 86
Eraser PCA ......................................................................................................................................... 88
Waste Sensor PCA ............................................................................................................................. 88
CRUM PCA .......................................................................................................................................... 89
Toner CRUM joint PCA ........................................................................................................................ 89
Paper Size sensor PCA ....................................................................................................................... 89
Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) unit .......................................................................................................................... 91
Inner finisher ........................................................................................................................................................ 95

3 Removal and replacement ............................................................................................................................ 99

For additional service and support ................................................................................................................... 102
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................... 102
Precautions when replacing parts .................................................................................................. 102
Precautions when assembling and disassembling ...................................................... 102
Precautions when handling PCA ................................................................................... 103
Releasing plastic latches .............................................................................................. 103
Before performing service .............................................................................................................. 104
After performing service ................................................................................................................. 104
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................. 104
Print-quality test .......................................................................................................... 104
Copy-quality test .......................................................................................................... 105
Fax-quality test ............................................................................................................. 105
Parts removal order ...................................................................................................... 105
Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Machine cleaning for maintenance ................................................................................................. 106
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and contact image sensor (CIS) .......... 107
Cleaning the scan glass ................................................................................................ 108
Cleaning the laser scanner assembly window ............................................................. 109
Cleaning the transfer roller .......................................................................................... 111
500 GB FIPS HDD ................................................................................................................................................ 112
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 112
Before performing service ............................................................................................ 112
Required tools ............................................................................................................... 112

ENWW vii
 After performing service .............................................................................................. 112
Post service test ........................................................................................................... 112
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover .............................................................................................. 113
Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ..................................................................................... 113
Formatter ........................................................................................................................................................... 114
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 114
Before performing service ............................................................................................ 114
Required tools ............................................................................................................... 114
After performing service .............................................................................................. 114
Post service test ........................................................................................................... 114
Step 1: Remove the rear covers ...................................................................................................... 115
Step 2: Remove the accelerator board ............................................................................................ 116
Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive ................................................................................................ 116
Step 4: Remove the Island of data (IOD) ......................................................................................... 117
Step 5: Remove the formater PCA .................................................................................................. 117
Step 6: Remove the formatter cage ................................................................................................ 118
Control panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 120
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 120
Before performing service ............................................................................................ 120
Required tools ............................................................................................................... 120
After performing service .............................................................................................. 120
Post service test ........................................................................................................... 120
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel ........................................................................................ 121
Step 2: Remove the control-panel .................................................................................................. 121
Keyboard ............................................................................................................................................................ 123
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 123
Before performing service ............................................................................................ 123
Required tools ............................................................................................................... 123
After performing service .............................................................................................. 123
Post service test ........................................................................................................... 123
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel ........................................................................................ 124
Step 2: Remove the keyboard ......................................................................................................... 124
Removal and replacement procedures ............................................................................................................. 126
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................... 126
Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module ................................................. 127
Introduction ................................................................................................ 127
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover .......................................................... 128
Step 2: Remove the main disk drive ........................................................... 128
Step 3: Remove the trusted platform module (TPM) ................................. 129
Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution .................................... 130
Introduction ................................................................................................ 130

viii ENWW
 Step 1: Unpack the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory ................. 131
Step 2: Install the FIH accessory ................................................................ 131
NFC Kit Installation ....................................................................................................... 132
Introduction ................................................................................................ 132
Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit ......................................................................... 133
Step 2: Install the NFC kit ........................................................................... 133
Replacement of maintenance parts ................................................................................................ 138
Drum unit ...................................................................................................................... 139
Introduction ................................................................................................ 139
Step 1: Remove the TCU ............................................................................. 140
Step 2: Remove the drum unit ................................................................... 141
Developer unit .............................................................................................................. 144
Introduction ................................................................................................ 144
Step 1: Remove the TCU ............................................................................. 145
Step 2: Remove the developer unit ............................................................ 146
Fuser unit ...................................................................................................................... 151
Introduction ................................................................................................ 151
Step 2: Remove the fuser unit .................................................................... 152
Transfer roller ............................................................................................................... 154
Introduction ................................................................................................ 154
Step 1: Remove the transfer roller ............................................................. 155
Pickup/Reverse/Feed roller .......................................................................................... 156
Introduction ................................................................................................ 156
Step 1: Remove the right door ................................................................... 157
Step 2: Remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller ......................................... 159
Multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller ............................................................. 161
Introduction ................................................................................................ 161
Step 1: Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller ................................... 162
Flow document feeder pickup roller assembly (DX document feeder) ....................... 165
Introduction ................................................................................................ 165
Step 1: Remove the flow document feeder pickup/reverse/feed rollers .. 166
Flow document feeder separation roller assembly (GX document feeder) ................. 170
Introduction ................................................................................................ 170
Step 1: Remove the flow document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller
assembly .................................................................................................... 171
Step 2: Remove the flow document feeder separation roller ................... 171
Document feeder pickup roller assembly (LX document feeder) ................................ 175
Introduction ................................................................................................ 175
Step 1: Remove the LX document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller
assembly .................................................................................................... 176
Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX document feeder) ......................... 179

ENWW ix
 Introduction ................................................................................................ 179
Step 1: Remove the LX document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller
assembly .................................................................................................... 180
Step 2: Remove the LX document feeder separation roller ...................... 180
Replacing the main SVC parts ........................................................................................................................... 183
Front cover open switch .................................................................................................................. 184
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 184
Before performing service ......................................................................... 184
Required tools ............................................................................................ 184
After performing service ............................................................................ 184
Post service test ......................................................................................... 184
Step 1: Remove the front cover open switch ............................................................... 185
Right door assembly ....................................................................................................................... 188
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 188
Before performing service ......................................................................... 188
Required tools ............................................................................................ 188
After performing service ............................................................................ 188
Post service test ......................................................................................... 188
Step 1: Remove the right door ...................................................................................... 189
Left cover ......................................................................................................................................... 192
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 192
Before performing service ......................................................................... 192
Required tools ............................................................................................ 192
After performing service ............................................................................ 192
Post service test ......................................................................................... 192
Step 1: Remove the left cover ...................................................................................... 193
Rear covers ...................................................................................................................................... 194
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 194
Before performing service ......................................................................... 194
Required tools ............................................................................................ 194
After performing service ............................................................................ 194
Post service test ......................................................................................... 194
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 195
Right door open switch ................................................................................................................... 197
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 197
Before performing service ......................................................................... 197
Required tools ............................................................................................ 197
After performing service ............................................................................ 197
Post service test ......................................................................................... 197
Step 1: Remove the right door open switch ................................................................. 197
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board ...................................................................................... 199

x ENWW
 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 199
Before performing service ......................................................................... 199
Required tools ............................................................................................ 199
After performing service ............................................................................ 199
Post service test ......................................................................................... 199
Step 1: Remove the left cover ...................................................................................... 200
Step 2: Remove the hig-voltage power supply (HVPS) ................................................ 200
Laser scanner assembly .................................................................................................................. 203
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 203
Before performing service ......................................................................... 203
Required tools ............................................................................................ 203
After performing service ............................................................................ 203
Post service test ......................................................................................... 203
Step 1: Remove the left cover ...................................................................................... 204
Step 2: Remove the HVPS ............................................................................................. 204
Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly ............................................................... 206
Main board ....................................................................................................................................... 208
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 208
Before performing service ......................................................................... 208
Required tools ............................................................................................ 208
After performing service ............................................................................ 208
Post service test ......................................................................................... 208
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 209
Step 2: Remove the formatter cage ............................................................................. 210
Step 3: Remove the main board ................................................................................... 211
Step 4: Remove the main board cage ........................................................................... 212
Developer fan .................................................................................................................................. 214
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 214
Before performing service ......................................................................... 214
Required tools ............................................................................................ 214
After performing service ............................................................................ 214
Post service test ......................................................................................... 214
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 215
Step 2: Remove the developer fan ............................................................................... 216
Scanner LVPS board ........................................................................................................................ 217
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 217
Before performing service ......................................................................... 217
Required tools ............................................................................................ 217
After performing service ............................................................................ 217
Post service test ......................................................................................... 217
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 218

ENWW xi
 Step 2: Remove the LVPS cover .................................................................................... 218
Step 3: Remove the scanner LVPS board ...................................................................... 219
Fuser drive assembly board ............................................................................................................ 220
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 220
Before performing service ......................................................................... 220
Required tools ............................................................................................ 220
After performing service ............................................................................ 220
Post service test ......................................................................................... 220
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 221
Step 2: Remove the LVPS cover .................................................................................... 222
Step 3: Remove the fuser drive assembly board ......................................................... 222
Fuser/exit drive assembly ............................................................................................................... 224
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 224
Before performing service ......................................................................... 224
Required tools ............................................................................................ 224
After performing service ............................................................................ 224
Post service test ......................................................................................... 224
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 225
Step 2: Remove the fuser/exit drive assembly ............................................................. 226
Main drive unit ................................................................................................................................. 227
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 227
Before performing service ......................................................................... 227
Required tools ............................................................................................ 227
After performing service ............................................................................ 227
Post service test ......................................................................................... 227
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 228
Step 2: Remove the main drive unit ............................................................................. 229
Pickup drive unit .............................................................................................................................. 230
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 230
Before performing service ......................................................................... 230
Required tools ............................................................................................ 230
After performing service ............................................................................ 230
Post service test ......................................................................................... 230
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 231
Step 2: Remove the pickup drive unit ........................................................................... 231
Toner duct drive unit ....................................................................................................................... 233
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 233
Before performing service ......................................................................... 233
Required tools ............................................................................................ 233
After performing service ............................................................................ 233
Post service test ......................................................................................... 233

xii ENWW
 Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 234
Step 2: Remove the toner duct drive unit ..................................................................... 235
Toner supply drive unit .................................................................................................................... 237
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 237
Before performing service ......................................................................... 237
Required tools ............................................................................................ 237
After performing service ............................................................................ 237
Post service test ......................................................................................... 237
Step 1: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 238
Step 2: Remove the toner supply drive unit ................................................................. 239
Toner duct ....................................................................................................................................... 240
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 240
Before performing service ......................................................................... 240
Required tools ............................................................................................ 240
After performing service ............................................................................ 240
Post service test ......................................................................................... 240
Step 1: Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit ................................................. 241
Step 2: Remove the rear covers .................................................................................... 241
Step 3: Remove the main drive unit ............................................................................. 242
Step 4: Remove the formater PCA ................................................................................ 242
Step 5: Remove the formatter cage ............................................................................. 243
Step 6: Remove the main board ................................................................................... 244
Step 7: Remove the main board cage ........................................................................... 245
Step 8: Remove the toner drive unit ............................................................................. 246
Step 9: Remove the toner duct ..................................................................................... 247
Toner collection unit sensor ............................................................................................................ 248
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 248
Before performing service ......................................................................... 248
Required tools ............................................................................................ 248
After performing service ............................................................................ 248
Post service test ......................................................................................... 248
Step 1: Remove the inner cover .................................................................................... 248
Step 2: Remove the TCU sensor .................................................................................... 249
Auto size sensor .............................................................................................................................. 251
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 251
Before performing service ......................................................................... 251
Required tools ............................................................................................ 251
After performing service ............................................................................ 251
Post service test ......................................................................................... 251
Step 1: Remove the auto size sensor ........................................................................... 252
Exit unit ........................................................................................................................................... 253

ENWW xiii
 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 253
Before performing service ......................................................................... 253
Required tools ............................................................................................ 253
After performing service ............................................................................ 253
Post service test ......................................................................................... 253
Step 1: Remove the exit unit ........................................................................................ 254
Fuser-out sensor ............................................................................................................................. 255
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 255
Before performing service ......................................................................... 255
Required tools ............................................................................................ 255
After performing service ............................................................................ 255
Post service test ......................................................................................... 255
Step 1: Remove the fuser out sensor ........................................................................... 256
Duplex sensor .................................................................................................................................. 258
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 258
Before performing service ......................................................................... 258
Required tools ............................................................................................ 258
After performing service ............................................................................ 258
Post service test ......................................................................................... 258
Step 1: Remove the duplex sensor ............................................................................... 259
Multipurpose (MP) unit and MP assemblies .................................................................................... 261
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 261
Before performing service ......................................................................... 261
Required tools ............................................................................................ 261
After performing service ............................................................................ 261
Post service test ......................................................................................... 261
Step 1: Remove the right door ...................................................................................... 262
Step 2: Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies ........................................ 265
Paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor ......................................................................... 273
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 273
Before performing service ......................................................................... 273
Required tools ............................................................................................ 273
After performing service ............................................................................ 273
Post service test ......................................................................................... 273
Step 1: Remove the right door ...................................................................................... 274
Step 2: Remove the paper trays ................................................................................... 276
Step 3: Remove the paper pickup assemblies .............................................................. 276
Step 4: Remove the empty and level sensor ................................................................ 277
Feed sensor 1 .................................................................................................................................. 279
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 279
Before performing service ......................................................................... 279

xiv ENWW
 Required tools ............................................................................................ 279
After performing service ............................................................................ 279
Post service test ......................................................................................... 279
Step 1: Remove the right door ...................................................................................... 280
Step 2: Remove the feed sensor ................................................................................... 282
Feed unit and feed sensor 2 ............................................................................................................ 284
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 284
Before performing service ......................................................................... 284
Required tools ............................................................................................ 284
After performing service ............................................................................ 284
Post service test ......................................................................................... 284
Step 1: Remove the right door ...................................................................................... 285
Step 2: Remove the feed unit and feed sensor 2 ......................................................... 287
Registration unit ............................................................................................................................. 289
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 289
Before performing service ......................................................................... 289
Required tools ............................................................................................ 289
After performing service ............................................................................ 289
Post service test ......................................................................................... 289
Step 1: Remove the right door ...................................................................................... 290
Step 2: Remove the TCU ................................................................................................ 292
Step 3: Remove the drum unit ...................................................................................... 293
Step 4: Remove the registration unit ........................................................................... 295
320 GB main disk drive .................................................................................................................... 297
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 297
Before performing service ......................................................................... 297
Required tools ............................................................................................ 297
After performing service ............................................................................ 297
Post service test ......................................................................................... 297
Step 1: Remove the main disk drive ............................................................................. 298
Document feeders ............................................................................................................................................. 300
Standard (dn bundles) document feeder ........................................................................................ 301
Document feeder whole unit (dn bundles) ................................................................... 302
Introduction ................................................................................................ 302
Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit ..................................... 303
Document feeder jam access cover .............................................................................. 306
Introduction ................................................................................................ 306
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 307
Step 2: Remove the document feeder jam access cover ........................... 307
Document feeder input tray ......................................................................................... 309
Introduction ................................................................................................ 309

ENWW xv
 Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover ..................................... 310
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 310
Step 3: Remove the document feeder input tray ....................................... 311
Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) .............................................................. 313
Introduction ................................................................................................ 313
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover ..................................... 314
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 314
Step 3: Remove the pickup and feed roller assembly ................................ 315
Step 4: Remove the paper path cover ........................................................ 316
Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly .............................................................. 317
Document feeder main motor ...................................................................................... 319
Introduction ................................................................................................ 319
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 320
Step 2: Remove the main motor ................................................................ 320
Document feeder feed motor ....................................................................................... 322
Introduction ................................................................................................ 322
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 322
Step 2: Remove the feed motor ................................................................. 323
Document feeder PCA ................................................................................................... 325
Introduction ................................................................................................ 325
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 325
Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA ................................................ 326
Document feeder white backing (dn bundles) ............................................................. 328
Introduction ................................................................................................ 328
Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing ................................ 329
Flow (z bundles) document feeder ................................................................................................. 331
Flow ADF whole unit ..................................................................................................... 331
Introduction ................................................................................................ 331
Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit ........................................................... 332
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly ............................................... 335
Document feeder jam access cover .............................................................................. 336
Introduction ................................................................................................ 336
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover ..................................... 337
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 337
Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover ........................... 338
Document feeder input tray ......................................................................................... 341
Introduction ................................................................................................ 341
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover ..................................... 342
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 342
Step 3: Remove the dampening unit .......................................................... 343
Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit .................................................. 344

xvi ENWW
 Step 5: Remove the input tray .................................................................... 345
Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) .............................................................. 346
Introduction ................................................................................................ 346
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover ..................................... 347
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 347
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly ............ 348
Step 4: Remove the paper path cover ........................................................ 349
Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly .............................................................. 349
Document feeder front motor ...................................................................................... 351
Introduction ................................................................................................ 351
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 352
Step 2: Remove the document feeder front motor ................................... 352
Document feeder rear motors ...................................................................................... 354
Introduction ................................................................................................ 354
Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors ........................................... 356
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 357
Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2 ................................................................. 358
Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors ...................................... 359
Step 5: Remove the exit motor .................................................................. 361
Step 6: Remove the document feeder feed motor .................................... 362
Step 7: Remove the REGI motor ................................................................. 363
Document feeder PCA fan ............................................................................................. 364
Introduction ................................................................................................ 364
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 365
Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan .......................................... 365
Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan ........................................................ 367
Introduction ................................................................................................ 367
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 368
Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan ........................................... 368
Document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA .............................................................. 370
Introduction ................................................................................................ 370
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover ..................................... 371
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ..................................... 371
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly ............ 372
Step 4: Remove the document feeder paper path cover ........................... 373
Step 5: Remove the document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA ........... 373
Document feeder white backing (z bundles) ................................................................ 376
Introduction ................................................................................................ 376
Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing ................................ 377
Scanner unit (image scanner unit) .................................................................................................................... 378
Scanner whole unit .......................................................................................................................... 379

ENWW xvii
 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 379
Before performing service ......................................................................... 379
Required tools ............................................................................................ 379
After performing service ............................................................................ 379
Post service test ......................................................................................... 379
Step 1: Remove the scanner whole unit ....................................................................... 379
Scan glass ........................................................................................................................................ 389
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 389
Before performing service ......................................................................... 389
Required tools ............................................................................................ 389
After performing service ............................................................................ 389
Post service test ......................................................................................... 389
Step 1: Remove the scanner glass ................................................................................ 389
Scanner LED lamp module .............................................................................................................. 391
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 391
Before performing service ......................................................................... 391
Required tools ............................................................................................ 391
After performing service ............................................................................ 391
Post service test ......................................................................................... 391
Step 1: Remove the scanner glass ................................................................................ 391
Step 2: Remove the scanner LED lamp module ........................................................... 393
Scanner imaging unit ...................................................................................................................... 394
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 394
Before performing service ......................................................................... 394
Required tools ............................................................................................ 394
After performing service ............................................................................ 394
Post service test ......................................................................................... 394
Step 1: Remove the scanner glass ................................................................................ 394
Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit .................................................................... 395
Scan joint board ............................................................................................................................... 397
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 397
Before performing service ......................................................................... 397
Required tools ............................................................................................ 397
After performing service ............................................................................ 397
Post service test ......................................................................................... 397
Step 1: Remove the scan joint board ............................................................................ 397
Scanner APS sensor ........................................................................................................................ 399
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 399
Before performing service ......................................................................... 399
Required tools ............................................................................................ 399
After performing service ............................................................................ 399

xviii ENWW
 Post service test ......................................................................................... 399
Step 1: Remove the scanner glass ................................................................................ 399
Step 2: Remove the scanner APS sensor ...................................................................... 400
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................ 402
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover ............................................................................................ 403
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 403
Before performing service ......................................................................... 403
Required tools ............................................................................................ 403
After performing service ............................................................................ 403
Post service test ......................................................................................... 403
Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover .......................................... 404
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door ............................................................................................ 405
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 405
Before performing service ......................................................................... 405
Required tools ............................................................................................ 405
After performing service ............................................................................ 405
Post service test ......................................................................................... 405
Step 1: Remove the DCF right door .............................................................................. 405
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor ................................................................................................... 408
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 408
Before performing service ......................................................................... 408
Required tools ............................................................................................ 408
After performing service ............................................................................ 408
Post service test ......................................................................................... 408
Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover .......................................... 409
Step 2: Remove the DCF motor ..................................................................................... 409
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor ....................................................................................... 411
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 411
Before performing service ......................................................................... 411
Required tools ............................................................................................ 411
After performing service ............................................................................ 411
Post service test ......................................................................................... 411
Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover .......................................... 412
Step 2: Remove the DCF pickup motor ......................................................................... 412
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA ...................................................................................................... 413
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 413
Before performing service ......................................................................... 413
Required tools ............................................................................................ 413
After performing service ............................................................................ 413
Post service test ......................................................................................... 413
Step 1: Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover ......................................... 414

ENWW xix
 Step 2: Remove the DCF PCA ........................................................................................ 414
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units ......................................................................................... 415
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 415
Before performing service ......................................................................... 415
Required tools ............................................................................................ 415
After performing service ............................................................................ 415
Post service test ......................................................................................... 415
Step 1: Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units ...................................... 416

4 Parts and diagrams .................................................................................................................................... 419

For additional service and support information ............................................................................................... 420
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................................. 421
Ordering ........................................................................................................................................... 421
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................................... 421
Related documentation and software ............................................................................................ 421
How to use the parts list and diagrams ............................................................................................................ 421
Main parts .......................................................................................................................................................... 422
Main assembly ................................................................................................................................. 422
Output ............................................................................................................................................. 424
First cassette ................................................................................................................................... 426
Second cassette .............................................................................................................................. 428
Main engine frame .......................................................................................................................... 430
Fuser output drive ........................................................................................................................... 432
Registration sub-frame ................................................................................................................... 434
Main frame pickup 1 and 2 .............................................................................................................. 436
Main frame pickup ........................................................................................................................... 438
Main frame pickup, upper ............................................................................................................... 440
Main frame ...................................................................................................................................... 442
Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 444
Right door ........................................................................................................................................ 446
MP tray ............................................................................................................................................ 448
Right door output ............................................................................................................................ 450
Right door duplex ............................................................................................................................ 452
ADF (dn models) .............................................................................................................................. 454
ADF exterior and ADF pickup assembly (dn models) ...................................................................... 456
ADF main frame assembly (dn models) .......................................................................................... 458
ADF image scanner (dn models) ..................................................................................................... 460
ADF image scanner, lower (dn models) .......................................................................................... 462
Flow ADF (z models) (GX) ................................................................................................................ 464
Flow ADF open cover (z models) ..................................................................................................... 466
Flow ADF upper pickup (z models) .................................................................................................. 468

xx ENWW
 Flow ADF stacker (z models) ........................................................................................................... 470
Flow ADF main frame (z models) .................................................................................................... 472
Flow ADF image scanner (z models) ............................................................................................... 474
Flow ADF image scanner, lower ...................................................................................................... 476
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................ 478
DCF main .......................................................................................................................................... 478
DCF main frame pickup 1 ................................................................................................................ 480
DCF main frame pickup ................................................................................................................... 482
DCF main frame pickup, upper ........................................................................................................ 484
Finishers ............................................................................................................................................................ 486
Booklet finisher ............................................................................................................................... 486
Mainline finisher 1 ........................................................................................................................... 488
Mainline finisher 2 ........................................................................................................................... 490
Mainline finisher 3 ........................................................................................................................... 492
Mainline finisher 4 ........................................................................................................................... 494
Mainline finisher 5 ........................................................................................................................... 496
Mainline finisher 6 ........................................................................................................................... 498
Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output ............................................ 500
Low output, hb motor, and top guide ............................................................................................. 502
SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide ................................................................................... 504
Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor .......................................................... 506
Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam ............................................................................................... 508
FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade ............................................................................. 510
Fold roller, main blade, and top frame ........................................................................................... 512
Three fold blade .............................................................................................................................. 514
Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide .......................................................................... 516
Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output ..................................................................................... 518
Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor ................................................. 520
Front alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................... 522
Rear alignment (tamper) ................................................................................................................. 524
Shield ............................................................................................................................................... 526
PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle ...................................................................................... 528
Finisher sub booklet ........................................................................................................................ 530
IPTU (bridge) .................................................................................................................................... 532
Inner finisher ...................................................................................................................................................... 534
Sub-inner finisher ........................................................................................................................... 534
Finisher sub 1 .................................................................................................................................. 536
Finisher sub 7 .................................................................................................................................. 538
Finisher sub 8 .................................................................................................................................. 540
Alphabetical parts list ........................................................................................................................................ 542
Numerical parts list ........................................................................................................................................... 562

ENWW xxi
 5 Problem solving ......................................................................................................................................... 583
Troubleshooting process ................................................................................................................................... 584
Determine the problem source ....................................................................................................... 584
Power subsystem ......................................................................................................... 584
Power-on checks ........................................................................................ 584
Control panel checks ..................................................................................................... 588
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts .......................................................... 588
Individual component diagnostics ............................................................................... 593
Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics ............................................... 593
Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics .......................................... 595
Tools for troubleshooting .......................................................................... 597
Tools for troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 598
Problem-solving checklist .............................................................................................................. 598
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on ................................................................... 598
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages .................................................... 598
Step 3: Test print functionality ..................................................................................... 598
Step 4: Test copy functionality ..................................................................................... 599
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality .................................................................... 599
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality .................................................................. 599
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer .......................................................... 599
Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality ................................. 599
Factors that affect printer performance ...................................................................... 599
Print menu map ............................................................................................................................... 601
Print current settings pages ........................................................................................................... 601
Print event log ................................................................................................................................. 601
Pre-boot menu options ................................................................................................................... 603
Remote Admin .............................................................................................................. 613
Required software and network connection ............................................. 613
Connect a remote connection .................................................................... 615
Disconnect a remote connection ................................................................ 619
Control panel menus ....................................................................................................................... 621
Reports menu ............................................................................................................... 621
Settings menu ............................................................................................................... 624
Copy menu (MFP only) .................................................................................................. 668
Scan menu (MFP only) .................................................................................................. 673
Fax menu (fax models only) ......................................................................................... 682
Print menu .................................................................................................................... 686
Supplies menu .............................................................................................................. 687
Trays menu ................................................................................................................... 688
Troubleshooting menu ................................................................................................. 689
Maintenance menu ....................................................................................................... 691

xxii ENWW
 Backup/Restore menu ................................................................................ 691
Calibration/Cleaning menu ......................................................................... 691
USB Firmware Upgrade menu .................................................................... 694
Clear paper jams ................................................................................................................................................ 695
Clear paper jams in the document feeder ...................................................................................... 695
Clear paper jams in Tray 1 ............................................................................................................... 699
Clear paper jams in Trays 2 or 3 ...................................................................................................... 700
Clear paper jams in Trays 4 or 5 ...................................................................................................... 702
Clear paper jams in the fuser area .................................................................................................. 704
Clear paper jams in an output bins ................................................................................................. 705
Service mode (tech mode) ................................................................................................................................. 707
Entering service mode .................................................................................................................... 707
Service mode menu tree ................................................................................................................. 707
Information tab ............................................................................................................................... 713
General .......................................................................................................................... 713
Supply Status ................................................................................................................ 713
Software Version .......................................................................................................... 714
Fault Log ....................................................................................................................... 714
Print Reports ................................................................................................................. 714
Maintenance Counts tab .................................................................................................................. 714
Fault Count .................................................................................................................... 714
Part Replacement Count ............................................................................................... 715
Diagnostics tab ................................................................................................................................ 715
Engine Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 715
Scanner Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 720
Adjustment ................................................................................................................... 725
Image Management ...................................................................................................... 731
Print Test Patterns ........................................................................................................ 732
Service Functions tab ...................................................................................................................... 732
Main Memory Clear ....................................................................................................... 732
Debug Log ..................................................................................................................... 732
Capture Log ................................................................................................................... 732
TR Control Mode ............................................................................................................ 733
Part Replacement Alert ................................................................................................ 734
Envelope Rotate ............................................................................................................ 734
Drain .............................................................................................................................. 734
Print quality troubleshooting guide .................................................................................................................. 736
Image quality problems and solutions (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535) .................. 736
Vertical black lines ........................................................................................................ 739
Vertical light or white lines ........................................................................................... 740
Horizontal periodic black lines, dots ............................................................................ 742

ENWW xxiii
 Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots ..................................................................... 743
Blurred image ............................................................................................................... 744
Foggy image ................................................................................................................. 745
Light image ................................................................................................................... 746
Uneven pitch and jitter image ....................................................................................... 746
Skewed image ............................................................................................................... 748
Poor fusing performance .............................................................................................. 749
Stain on the paper back side ........................................................................................ 750
Other Errors ..................................................................................................................................... 750
Image problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535) ..................................... 750
Fuser problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535) ...................................... 752
Scanner and ADF problems (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535) ................. 753
Drive unit problem ........................................................................................................ 761
Feeding system problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535) ..................... 762
Laser scanner assembly problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535) ........ 765
Electrical circuit problem .............................................................................................. 766
Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew ...................................................................................................................... 770

6 Diagrams .................................................................................................................................................. 775

Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................................ 776
Diagrams (FUSER EXIT) ................................................................................................................... 777
Diagrams (PICKUP/PH DRIVE/SIDE) ................................................................................................. 778
Diagrams (laser scanner assembly/HVPS) ..................................................................................... 779
Diagrams (toner) ............................................................................................................................. 780
Diagrams (FDB/LVPS) ...................................................................................................................... 781
Diagrams (UI) ................................................................................................................................... 782
Diagrams (FRONT/OPC) ................................................................................................................... 783
Diagrams (scanner) ......................................................................................................................... 784
Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder) ................................................................................................... 785

7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ......................................................................... 787

Precautions ........................................................................................................................................................ 788
Caution for safety ............................................................................................................................ 788
Electric shock and fire safety precautions ................................................................... 788
Handling precautions .................................................................................................... 789
Removal and replacement precautions ....................................................................... 790
Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ..................................................... 790
ESD precautions .............................................................................................................................. 791
Product specification and description ............................................................................................................... 792
Finisher system ............................................................................................................................... 792
Finisher sectional view ................................................................................................. 792

xxiv ENWW
 Sensor location ........................................................................................... 792
Roller location ............................................................................................ 793
Jam removal guide ..................................................................................... 795
Paper path ..................................................................................................................... 796
Electrical parts layout ................................................................................................... 797
Finisher and booklet module ..................................................................... 797
IPTU ............................................................................................................. 801
Punch unit ................................................................................................... 801
Each unit functions ....................................................................................................... 802
PCA connection information ......................................................................................... 803
Finisher PCA ................................................................................................ 803
Switch PCA .................................................................................................. 804
Booklet maker PCA ..................................................................................... 804
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................... 805
Precautions when replacing parts .................................................................................................. 805
Precautions when assembling and disassembling ...................................................... 805
Precautions when handling PCA ................................................................................... 805
Releasing plastic latches .............................................................................................. 806
Before performing service .............................................................................................................. 806
After performing service ................................................................................................................. 807
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................. 807
Print-quality test .......................................................................................................... 807
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ........................................................................................... 807
Ordering ........................................................................................................................ 807
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................. 807
Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) .............................................. 808
Top output bin ................................................................................................................................. 810
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 810
Before performing service ......................................................................... 810
Required tools ............................................................................................ 810
After performing service ............................................................................ 810
Post service test ......................................................................................... 811
Step 1: Remove the top output bin ............................................................................... 811
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 811
Right top cover ................................................................................................................................ 813
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 813
Before performing service ......................................................................... 813
Required tools ............................................................................................ 813
After performing service ............................................................................ 813
Post service test ......................................................................................... 814
Step 1: Remove the right top cover .............................................................................. 814

ENWW xxv
 Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 814
Top cover ......................................................................................................................................... 816
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 816
Before performing service ......................................................................... 816
Required tools ............................................................................................ 816
After performing service ............................................................................ 816
Post service test ......................................................................................... 817
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 817
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 817
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 819
Front door ........................................................................................................................................ 820
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 820
Before performing service ......................................................................... 820
Required tools ............................................................................................ 820
After performing service ............................................................................ 820
Post service test ......................................................................................... 821
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 821
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 821
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 823
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 825
Rear cover ........................................................................................................................................ 827
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 827
Before performing service ......................................................................... 827
Required tools ............................................................................................ 827
After performing service ............................................................................ 827
Post service test ......................................................................................... 828
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 828
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 828
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 830
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 831
Front cover ...................................................................................................................................... 832
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 832
Before performing service ......................................................................... 832
Required tools ............................................................................................ 832
After performing service ............................................................................ 832
Post service test ......................................................................................... 833
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 833
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 833
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 835
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 837
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 839

xxvi ENWW
 Front lower cover ............................................................................................................................ 840
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 840
Before performing service ......................................................................... 840
Required tools ............................................................................................ 840
After performing service ............................................................................ 841
Post service test ......................................................................................... 841
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 841
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 841
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 843
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 845
Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher) .......................................................... 847
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 847
Booklet tray ..................................................................................................................................... 849
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 849
Before performing service ......................................................................... 849
Required tools ............................................................................................ 849
After performing service ............................................................................ 849
Post service test ......................................................................................... 850
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray .................................................................................. 850
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 851
Caster cover ..................................................................................................................................... 852
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 852
Before performing service ......................................................................... 852
Required tools ............................................................................................ 852
After performing service ............................................................................ 852
Post service test ......................................................................................... 853
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only) ........................................... 853
Step 2: Remove the caster cover .................................................................................. 854
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 855
Lower shield assembly .................................................................................................................... 856
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 856
Before performing service ......................................................................... 856
Required tools ............................................................................................ 857
After performing service ............................................................................ 857
Post service test ......................................................................................... 857
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 857
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 857
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 859
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 861
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 863
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray .................................................................................. 864

ENWW xxvii
 Step 7: Remove the caster cover .................................................................................. 865
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 866
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 868
Upper shield assembly .................................................................................................................... 869
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 869
Before performing service ......................................................................... 869
Required tools ............................................................................................ 870
After performing service ............................................................................ 870
Post service test ......................................................................................... 870
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 870
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 870
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 872
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 874
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 876
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray .................................................................................. 877
Step 7: Remove the caster cover .................................................................................. 878
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 879
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 881
Step 10: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 883
Controller PCA ................................................................................................................................. 885
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 885
Before performing service ......................................................................... 885
Required tools ............................................................................................ 885
After performing service ............................................................................ 885
Post service test ......................................................................................... 886
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 886
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 886
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 888
Step 4: Remove the controller PCA ............................................................................... 889
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 890
Stapler unit ...................................................................................................................................... 891
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 891
Before performing service ......................................................................... 891
Required tools ............................................................................................ 891
After performing service ............................................................................ 892
Post service test ......................................................................................... 892
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 892
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 892
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 894
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 896
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 898

xxviii ENWW
 Step 6: Remove the staple unit .................................................................................... 899
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 901
Dummy feed guide .......................................................................................................................... 903
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 903
Before performing service ......................................................................... 903
Required tools ............................................................................................ 903
After performing service ............................................................................ 903
Post service test ......................................................................................... 904
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 904
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 904
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 906
Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher) ........................................................ 907
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 908
Top jam access cover ....................................................................................................................... 909
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 909
Before performing service ......................................................................... 909
Required tools ............................................................................................ 909
After performing service ............................................................................ 910
Post service test ......................................................................................... 910
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 910
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 910
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 912
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 914
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 916
Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor ............................................................................. 917
Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover .................................................................... 918
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 918
Top lower feed assembly ................................................................................................................ 920
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 920
Before performing service ......................................................................... 920
Required tools ............................................................................................ 920
After performing service ............................................................................ 921
Post service test ......................................................................................... 921
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 921
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 921
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 923
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 925
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 927
Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher) ............................................................. 928
Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover .................................................................... 929
Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) .............................................. 929

ENWW xxix
 Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly .................................................................. 932
Ejector unit ...................................................................................................................................... 933
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 933
Before performing service ......................................................................... 933
Required tools ............................................................................................ 934
After performing service ............................................................................ 934
Post service test ......................................................................................... 934
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 934
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 934
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 936
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 938
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 940
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher) .................................................................. 941
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher) .................................................................. 942
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 943
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 945
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher) .................................................................. 947
Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 956
Front tamper unit ............................................................................................................................ 958
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 958
Before performing service ......................................................................... 958
Required tools ............................................................................................ 959
After performing service ............................................................................ 959
Post service test ......................................................................................... 959
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 959
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 959
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 961
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 963
Step 5: Remove the rear cover ...................................................................................... 965
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher) .................................................................. 966
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher) .................................................................. 967
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 968
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 970
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher) .................................................................. 972
Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit ....................................................................... 981
Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 982
Rear tamper unit ............................................................................................................................. 983
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 983
Before performing service ......................................................................... 983
Required tools ............................................................................................ 984
After performing service ............................................................................ 984

xxx ENWW
 Post service test ......................................................................................... 984
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) .............................................................. 984
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ....................................................................... 984
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ...................................................................... 986
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................... 988
Step 5: Remove the rear cover ...................................................................................... 990
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher) .................................................................. 991
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher) .................................................................. 992
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 993
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) .................................................. 995
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher) .................................................................. 997
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit ....................................................................... 1006
Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly .............................................................. 1007
Feed entrance motor (M1) ............................................................................................................ 1008
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1008
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1008
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1008
After performing service .......................................................................... 1008
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1009
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1009
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1009
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .................................................................... 1011
Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1) .......................................................... 1012
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1013
Feed exit motor (M2) ..................................................................................................................... 1014
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1014
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1014
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1014
After performing service .......................................................................... 1014
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1015
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1015
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1015
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .................................................................... 1017
Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2) .................................................................. 1018
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1019
Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3) ............................................................................................ 1020
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1020
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1020
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1020
After performing service .......................................................................... 1020
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1021

ENWW xxxi
 Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1021
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1021
Step 3: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................. 1023
Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor .................................................. 1024
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1027
Front tamper motor (M6) .............................................................................................................. 1028
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1028
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1028
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1029
After performing service .......................................................................... 1029
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1029
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1029
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1030
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ................................................................... 1031
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................. 1033
Step 5: Remove the rear cover ................................................................................... 1035
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher) ................................................................ 1036
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher) ................................................................ 1037
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) ................................................ 1038
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) ............................................... 1040
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher) ............................................................... 1042
Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher) ............................................................. 1051
Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7) ......................................................... 1052
Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly .............................................................. 1053
Rear tamper motor (M7) ............................................................................................................... 1054
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1054
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1054
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1055
After performing service .......................................................................... 1055
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1055
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1055
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1056
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ................................................................... 1057
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................. 1059
Step 5: Remove the rear cover ................................................................................... 1061
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher) ................................................................ 1062
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher) ................................................................ 1063
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) ................................................ 1064
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) ............................................... 1066
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher) ............................................................... 1068
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher) ............................................................... 1077

xxxii ENWW
 Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7) ........................................................... 1078
Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly .............................................................. 1079
SCU motor (M10) ........................................................................................................................... 1080
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1080
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1080
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1081
After performing service .......................................................................... 1081
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1081
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1081
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1081
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ................................................................... 1083
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) .................................................................. 1085
Step 5: Remove the rear cover ................................................................................... 1087
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher) ................................................................ 1088
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher) ................................................................ 1089
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) ................................................ 1090
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) ............................................... 1092
Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10) ...................................................................... 1094
Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly .............................................................. 1096
Main tray moving motor (M11) ..................................................................................................... 1098
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1098
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1098
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1098
After performing service .......................................................................... 1098
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1099
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1099
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1099
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .................................................................... 1101
Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11) .................................................. 1102
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1106
Booklet finisher front cover .......................................................................................................... 1108
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1108
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1108
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1108
After performing service .......................................................................... 1108
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1109
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1109
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1109
Booklet finisher ............................................................................................................................. 1111
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1111
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1111

ENWW xxxiii
 Required tools .......................................................................................... 1111
After performing service .......................................................................... 1111
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1112
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1112
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1112
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .................................................................... 1114
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher .......................................................................... 1115
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1120
Booklet finisher PCA ...................................................................................................................... 1122
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1122
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1122
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1122
After performing service .......................................................................... 1122
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1123
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1123
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1123
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .................................................................... 1125
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher .......................................................................... 1126
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA ................................................................... 1131
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1133
Booklet finisher fold stopper unit ................................................................................................. 1134
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1134
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1134
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1134
After performing service .......................................................................... 1135
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1135
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1135
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1135
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .................................................................... 1137
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1138
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield ............................................. 1139
Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit ......................................................................... 1140
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1145
Booklet feed entrance motor (M13) ............................................................................................. 1146
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1146
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1146
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1146
After performing service .......................................................................... 1146
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1147
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1147
Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13) ........................................... 1147

xxxiv ENWW
 Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1148
TE presser motor (M14) ................................................................................................................ 1149
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1149
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1149
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1149
After performing service .......................................................................... 1149
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1150
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1150
Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14) ............................................................. 1150
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1151
Stopper moving motor (M16) ....................................................................................................... 1152
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1152
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1152
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1152
After performing service .......................................................................... 1152
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1153
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1153
Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield ............................................. 1153
Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16) ..................................................... 1155
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1155
Separate pawl motor (M17) .......................................................................................................... 1157
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1157
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1157
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1157
After performing service .......................................................................... 1157
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1158
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1158
Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17) ....................................................... 1158
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1159
Folding roller motor (M18) ............................................................................................................ 1160
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1160
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1160
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1160
After performing service .......................................................................... 1160
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1161
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ............................................................ 1161
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ..................................................................... 1161
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .................................................................... 1163
Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18) ......................................................... 1164
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1165
Blade motor (M19) ........................................................................................................................ 1166

ENWW xxxv
 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1166
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1166
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1166
After performing service .......................................................................... 1166
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1167
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1167
Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield ............................................. 1167
Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19) ..................................................................... 1169
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1169
C fold motor (M20) ........................................................................................................................ 1171
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1171
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1171
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1171
After performing service .......................................................................... 1171
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1172
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ....................................................... 1172
Step 2: Remove the C fold motor ................................................................................ 1172
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................ 1177
Problem solving ............................................................................................................................................... 1178
Control panel message document (CPMD) ................................................................................... 1179
Control-panel messages and event log entries ......................................................... 1179
Finisher system diagram ................................................................................................................................. 1180

8 Inner finisher ........................................................................................................................................... 1181

Precautions ...................................................................................................................................................... 1182
Caution for safety ......................................................................................................................... 1182
Electric shock and fire safety precautions ................................................................. 1182
Handling precautions ................................................................................................. 1183
Removal and replacement precautions ..................................................................... 1184
Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ................................................... 1184
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................ 1185
Product Specification and Description ............................................................................................................ 1186
Specification .................................................................................................................................. 1186
Finisher System ............................................................................................................................. 1191
Sectional view ............................................................................................................. 1191
Paper path .................................................................................................................. 1192
Electrical parts layout ................................................................................................. 1193
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................. 1195
PBA Connection Information ...................................................................................... 1195
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................. 1196
Precautions when replacing parts ................................................................................................ 1196

xxxvi ENWW
 Precautions when assembling and disassembling .................................................... 1196
Precautions when handling PCA ................................................................................. 1196
Releasing plastic latches ............................................................................................ 1197
Before performing service ............................................................................................................ 1197
After performing service ............................................................................................................... 1197
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................... 1197
Print-quality test ........................................................................................................ 1198
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ......................................................................................... 1198
Ordering ...................................................................................................................... 1198
Orderable parts ........................................................................................................... 1198
Removal and replacment (inner finisher) ....................................................................................................... 1199
Entrance sensor ............................................................................................................................ 1200
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1200
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1200
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1200
After performing service .......................................................................... 1200
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1200
Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor ......................................................................... 1201
Entrance motor ............................................................................................................................. 1204
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1204
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1204
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1204
After performing service .......................................................................... 1204
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1204
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1205
Step 2: Remove the entrance motor .......................................................................... 1208
Exit sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 1210
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1210
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1210
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1210
After performing service .......................................................................... 1210
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1210
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1211
Step 2: Remove the exit sensor .................................................................................. 1214
Exit motor ...................................................................................................................................... 1215
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1215
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1215
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1215
After performing service .......................................................................... 1215
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1215
Step 1: Remove the exit motor ................................................................................... 1216

ENWW xxxvii
 Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly ................................................................................................... 1218
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1218
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1218
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1218
After performing service .......................................................................... 1218
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1218
Step 1: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly ................................................. 1219
Front Jogger Motor ........................................................................................................................ 1222
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1222
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1222
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1222
After performing service .......................................................................... 1222
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1222
Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor ..................................................................... 1223
Front Jogger Home Sensor ........................................................................................................... 1234
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1234
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1234
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1234
After performing service .......................................................................... 1234
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1234
Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor .......................................................... 1235
Rear Jogger Motor ......................................................................................................................... 1246
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1246
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1246
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1246
After performing service .......................................................................... 1246
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1246
Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor ....................................................................... 1247
Rear Jogger Home Sensor ............................................................................................................. 1255
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1255
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1255
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1255
After performing service .......................................................................... 1255
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1255
Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor ............................................................ 1256
Stapler ........................................................................................................................................... 1261
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1261
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1261
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1261
After performing service .......................................................................... 1261
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1261

xxxviii ENWW
 Step 1: Remove the stapler ........................................................................................ 1262
Stapler position sensor assembly ................................................................................................ 1264
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1264
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1264
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1264
After performing service .......................................................................... 1264
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1264
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1265
Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly ................................................. 1268
Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly ............................................... 1271
Traverse Motor .............................................................................................................................. 1275
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1275
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1275
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1275
After performing service .......................................................................... 1275
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1275
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1276
Step 2: Remove the traverse motor ........................................................................... 1279
Stacker Motor ................................................................................................................................ 1280
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1280
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1280
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1280
After performing service .......................................................................... 1280
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1280
Step 1: Remove the stacker motor ............................................................................. 1281
Stacker Encoder Sensor ................................................................................................................ 1287
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1287
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1287
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1287
After performing service .......................................................................... 1287
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1287
Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor .............................................................. 1288
Stacker Lower Limit Switch ........................................................................................................... 1294
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1294
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1294
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1294
After performing service .......................................................................... 1294
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1294
Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch .......................................................... 1295
Stack Beam Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 1301
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1301

ENWW xxxix
 Before performing service ....................................................................... 1301
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1301
After performing service .......................................................................... 1301
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1301
Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor ..................................................................... 1302
Stack Position Sensor ................................................................................................................... 1306
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1306
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1306
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1306
After performing service .......................................................................... 1306
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1306
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1307
Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor ................................................................. 1310
Paper Holding Lever Solenoid ....................................................................................................... 1316
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1316
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1316
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1316
After performing service .......................................................................... 1316
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1316
Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid ..................................................... 1317
Paper Support Motor ..................................................................................................................... 1324
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1324
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1324
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1324
After performing service .......................................................................... 1324
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1324
Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor ................................................................. 1325
Step 2: Remove the paper support motor .................................................................. 1331
Paper Support Home Sensor ........................................................................................................ 1333
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1333
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1333
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1333
After performing service .......................................................................... 1333
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1333
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1334
Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor ................................................................. 1337
Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor ...................................................... 1343
Ejector Motor assembly ................................................................................................................ 1345
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1345
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1345
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1345

xl ENWW
 After performing service .......................................................................... 1345
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1345
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1346
Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor ................................................................. 1349
Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly ................................................... 1355
Main Paddle Motor ........................................................................................................................ 1359
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1359
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1359
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1359
After performing service .......................................................................... 1359
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1359
Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor ..................................................................... 1360
Main Paddle Home Sensor ............................................................................................................ 1361
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1361
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1361
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1361
After performing service .......................................................................... 1361
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1361
Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor ......................................................... 1362
Main Paddle ................................................................................................................................... 1363
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1363
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1363
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1363
After performing service .......................................................................... 1363
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1363
Step 1: Remove the main paddle ................................................................................ 1364
Ejector assembly ........................................................................................................................... 1365
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1365
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1365
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1365
After performing service .......................................................................... 1365
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1365
Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor ................................................................. 1366
Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly ................................................... 1372
Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly .............................................................. 1376
Punch Dust Full Sensor ................................................................................................................. 1377
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1377
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1377
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1377
After performing service .......................................................................... 1377
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1377

ENWW xli
 Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ............................................................... 1378
Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor ............................................................... 1381
Door Switch ................................................................................................................................... 1382
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1382
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1382
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1382
After performing service .......................................................................... 1382
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1382
Step 1: Remove the door switch ................................................................................. 1383
Top Door Switch ............................................................................................................................ 1386
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1386
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1386
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1386
After performing service .......................................................................... 1386
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1386
Step 1: Remove the top door switch .......................................................................... 1387
End Fence Home Sensor ............................................................................................................... 1391
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1391
Before performing service ....................................................................... 1391
Required tools .......................................................................................... 1391
After performing service .......................................................................... 1391
Post service test ....................................................................................... 1391
Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor ............................................... 1392
Problem solving ............................................................................................................................................... 1393
Control panel message document (CPMD) ................................................................................... 1179
Control-panel messages and event log entries ......................................................... 1394
Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................................. 1395

Appendix A Appendix: Printer specifications ................................................................................................. 1397

Printer dimensions and wieght ....................................................................................................................... 1398
Printer space requirements ............................................................................................................................. 1398
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ......................................................... 1398

Appendix B Glossary ................................................................................................................................... 1399

Glossary of terms ............................................................................................................................................ 1400

Index .......................................................................................................................................................... 1407

xlii ENWW
List of tables

Table 2-1 General specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 9

Table 2-2 Print specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 11
Table 2-3 Scan specification ............................................................................................................................................... 13
Table 2-4 Copy specification ............................................................................................................................................... 15
Table 2-5 Paper handling specification .............................................................................................................................. 17
Table 2-6 Software and solution specification ................................................................................................................... 22
Table 2-7 Maintenance parts .............................................................................................................................................. 23
Table 2-8 Option List ........................................................................................................................................................... 23
Table 2-9 Front view ........................................................................................................................................................... 28
Table 2-10 Rear view .......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Table 2-11 Inner view ......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Table 2-12 Drive motors ..................................................................................................................................................... 46
Table 2-13 Flow ADF overview ........................................................................................................................................... 64
Table 2-14 Flow ADF sensors ............................................................................................................................................. 65
Table 2-15 ADF overview .................................................................................................................................................... 73
Table 2-16 ADF electrical parts location ............................................................................................................................ 74
Table 2-17 Main controller connection information .......................................................................................................... 83
Table 3-1 Document feeder motors ................................................................................................................................. 356
Table 4-1 Main assembly .................................................................................................................................................. 423
Table 4-2 Output ............................................................................................................................................................... 425
Table 4-3 First cassette .................................................................................................................................................... 427
Table 4-4 Second cassette ................................................................................................................................................ 429
Table 4-5 Main engine frame ............................................................................................................................................ 431
Table 4-6 Fuser output drive ............................................................................................................................................ 433
Table 4-7 Registration sub-frame .................................................................................................................................... 435
Table 4-8 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................... 437
Table 4-9 Main pickup frame ............................................................................................................................................ 439
Table 4-10 Main frame pickup, upper .............................................................................................................................. 441
Table 4-11 Main frame ...................................................................................................................................................... 443
Table 4-12 Cover ............................................................................................................................................................... 445
Table 4-13 Right door ....................................................................................................................................................... 447
Table 4-14 MP tray ............................................................................................................................................................ 449

ENWW xliii
 Table 4-15 Right door output ........................................................................................................................................... 451
Table 4-16 Right door duplex ........................................................................................................................................... 453
Table 4-17 ADF (dn models) ............................................................................................................................................. 455
Table 4-18 ADF exterior and ADF pickup assembly (dn models) ..................................................................................... 457
Table 4-19 ADF main frame assembly (dn models) ......................................................................................................... 459
Table 4-20 ADF image scanner (dn models) .................................................................................................................... 461
Table 4-21 ADF image scanner, lower (dn models) ......................................................................................................... 463
Table 4-22 Flow ADF (z models) (GX) ............................................................................................................................... 465
Table 4-23 Flow ADF open cover (z models) .................................................................................................................... 467
Table 4-24 Flow ADF upper pickup (z models) ................................................................................................................. 469
Table 4-25 Flow ADF stacker (z models) .......................................................................................................................... 471
Table 4-26 Flow ADF main frame (z models) ................................................................................................................... 473
Table 4-27 Flow ADF image scanner (z models) .............................................................................................................. 475
Table 4-28 Flow ADF image scanner, lower (z models) ................................................................................................... 477
Table 4-29 DCF main ......................................................................................................................................................... 479
Table 4-30 DCF main frame pickup 1 ............................................................................................................................... 481
Table 4-31 DCF main frame pickup .................................................................................................................................. 483
Table 4-32 DCF main frame pickup, upper ....................................................................................................................... 485
Table 4-33 Booklet finisher .............................................................................................................................................. 487
Table 4-34 Mainline finisher 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 489
Table 4-35 Mainline finisher 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 491
Table 4-36 Mainline finisher 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 493
Table 4-37 Mainline finisher 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 495
Table 4-38 Mainline finisher 5 .......................................................................................................................................... 497
Table 4-39 Mainline finisher 6 .......................................................................................................................................... 499
Table 4-40 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output ........................................................... 501
Table 4-41 Low output, hb motor, and top guide ............................................................................................................ 503
Table 4-42 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide .................................................................................................. 505
Table 4-43 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor ......................................................................... 507
Table 4-44 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam .............................................................................................................. 509
Table 4-45 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade ............................................................................................ 511
Table 4-46 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame .......................................................................................................... 513
Table 4-47 Three fold blade ............................................................................................................................................. 515
Table 4-48 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide ......................................................................................... 517
Table 4-49 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output .................................................................................................... 519
Table 4-50 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor ................................................................. 521
Table 4-51 Front alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................................... 523
Table 4-52 Rear alignment (tamper) ................................................................................................................................ 525
Table 4-53 Shield .............................................................................................................................................................. 527
Table 4-54 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle ...................................................................................................... 529
Table 4-55 Finisher sub booklet ....................................................................................................................................... 531

xliv ENWW
Table 4-56 IPTU (bridge) ................................................................................................................................................... 533
Table 4-57 Sub-inner finisher ........................................................................................................................................... 535
Table 4-58 Finisher sub 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 537
Table 4-59 Finisher sub 7 ................................................................................................................................................. 539
Table 4-60 Finisher sub 8 ................................................................................................................................................. 541
Table 5-1 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 605
Table 5-2 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 606
Table 5-3 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 607
Table 5-4 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 608
Table 5-5 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 609
Table 5-6 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 610
Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 611
Table 5-8 Reports menu ................................................................................................................................................... 621
Table 5-9 Settings menu .................................................................................................................................................. 624
Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only) .................................................................................................................................... 668
Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) ............................................................................................................................................ 673
Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only) ........................................................................................................................... 682
Table 5-13 Print Options menu ........................................................................................................................................ 686
Table 5-14 Supplies menu ................................................................................................................................................ 687
Table 5-15 Trays menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 688
Table 5-16 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 689
Table 5-17 Backup/Restore menu .................................................................................................................................... 691
Table 5-18 Calibrate/Cleaning menu ................................................................................................................................ 692
Table 5-19 Service mode Information tab ....................................................................................................................... 707
Table 5-20 Service mode Maintenance Counts tab .......................................................................................................... 709
Table 5-21 Service mode Diagnostics tab ........................................................................................................................ 710
Table 5-22 Service functions ............................................................................................................................................ 711
Table 5-23 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 739
Table 5-24 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 741
Table 5-25 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 743
Table 5-26 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 744
Table 5-27 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 744
Table 5-28 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 745
Table 5-29 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 746
Table 5-30 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 746
Table 5-31 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 748
Table 5-32 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 749
Table 5-33 Troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................................................ 750
Table 7-1 Sensor locations ............................................................................................................................................... 792
Table 7-2 Roller location ................................................................................................................................................... 793
Table 7-3 Jam removal guide ........................................................................................................................................... 795

ENWW xlv
 Table 7-4 Paper path ........................................................................................................................................................ 796
Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout ...................................................................................................................................... 798
Table 7-6 IPTU ................................................................................................................................................................... 801
Table 7-7 Punch unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 801
Table 7-8 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 802
Table 7-9 Finisher PCA ...................................................................................................................................................... 803
Table 7-10 Switch PCA ...................................................................................................................................................... 804
Table 8-1 Paper Size Specification ................................................................................................................................. 1186
Table 8-2 Media performance ........................................................................................................................................ 1189
Table 8-3 Finisher system—sectional view ................................................................................................................... 1191
Table 8-4 Finisher system—paper path ........................................................................................................................ 1192
Table 8-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout ...................................................................................................... 1193
Table 8-6 Finisher system—PBA connection information ............................................................................................ 1195
Table A-1 Printer dimensions and wieght ...................................................................................................................... 1398

xlvi ENWW
List of figures

Figure 2-1 Basic Cassette ................................................................................................................................................... 34

Figure 2-2 Pickup unit 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 35
Figure 2-3 Pickup unit 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 35
Figure 2-4 Registration (Regi) roller ................................................................................................................................... 35
Figure 2-5 Tray 1 feed assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 36
Figure 2-6 Paper separation ............................................................................................................................................... 36
Figure 2-7 Printing process overview ................................................................................................................................. 37
Figure 2-8 Imaging unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 38
Figure 2-9 Drum drive ......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Figure 2-10 Developer unit ................................................................................................................................................. 39
Figure 2-11 Fuser unit overview ......................................................................................................................................... 40
Figure 2-12 Fuser duplex exit drive .................................................................................................................................... 41
Figure 2-13 Fuser unit temperature control ...................................................................................................................... 42
Figure 2-14 Laser scanner assembly overview .................................................................................................................. 43
Figure 2-15 Laser scanning optical path ............................................................................................................................ 44
Figure 2-16 Laser synchronizing detectors ....................................................................................................................... 45
Figure 2-17 Drive motors ................................................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-18 Main drive unit—front view ............................................................................................................................ 47
Figure 2-19 Main drive unit–rear view ............................................................................................................................... 47
Figure 2-20 Main drive (OPC/Deve motors) ........................................................................................................................ 48
Figure 2-21 Main drive (Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed 1, 2) .......................................................................................... 49
Figure 2-22 Pickup drive ..................................................................................................................................................... 50
Figure 2-23 Duct drive ........................................................................................................................................................ 51
Figure 2-24 Fuser/exit drive ............................................................................................................................................... 52
Figure 2-25 Toner supply drive ........................................................................................................................................... 53
Figure 2-26 Scanner system overview ............................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 2-27 Scan process ................................................................................................................................................... 55
Figure 2-28 Image processing ............................................................................................................................................ 56
Figure 2-29 Scanning system components ........................................................................................................................ 57
Figure 2-30 FR carriage ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Figure 2-31 HR carriage ...................................................................................................................................................... 59
Figure 2-32 Imaging unit .................................................................................................................................................... 59

ENWW xlvii
 Figure 2-33 Wire drive ........................................................................................................................................................ 60
Figure 2-34 Timing belt ...................................................................................................................................................... 61
Figure 2-35 Shading sheet ................................................................................................................................................. 62
Figure 2-36 Remove scan locking screw ............................................................................................................................ 62
Figure 2-37 Tighten scan locking screw ............................................................................................................................. 63
Figure 2-38 Flow ADF overview .......................................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 2-39 Flow ADF sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 65
Figure 2-40 Flow ADF Ultra Sonic Multifeed ....................................................................................................................... 66
Figure 2-41 Flow ADF drive system .................................................................................................................................... 66
Figure 2-42 Flow ADF document lifting drive system ........................................................................................................ 67
Figure 2-43 Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System .............................................................................................. 67
Figure 2-44 Flow ADF Registration ..................................................................................................................................... 69
Figure 2-45 Flow ADF Scanning Position ............................................................................................................................ 70
Figure 2-46 MSO 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 70
Figure 2-47 MSO 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 71
Figure 2-48 MSO 3 .............................................................................................................................................................. 71
Figure 2-49 Dual sensor cleaning method ......................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 2-50 Dual sensor cleaning method ......................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 2-51 ADF overview .................................................................................................................................................. 73
Figure 2-52 ADF electrical parts location ........................................................................................................................... 73
Figure 2-53 ADF registration .............................................................................................................................................. 74
Figure 2-54 ADF drive system ............................................................................................................................................ 75
Figure 2-55 ADF pickup assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Figure 2-56 ADF registration (regi) drive assembly ........................................................................................................... 76
Figure 2-57 ADF scanning position .................................................................................................................................... 77
Figure 2-58 Electronic circuit diagram ............................................................................................................................... 79
Figure 2-59 Circuit board locations .................................................................................................................................... 81
Figure 2-60 Main controller diagram .................................................................................................................................. 82
Figure 2-61 Main controller connection information ......................................................................................................... 83
Figure 2-62 MSOK ............................................................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 2-63 LVPS (SMPS) board .......................................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 2-64 Fuser drive board ............................................................................................................................................ 85
Figure 2-65 HVPS board ..................................................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 2-66 Eraser PCA (mono models) ............................................................................................................................. 88
Figure 2-67 Waste sensor PCA ........................................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 2-68 CRUM PCA ........................................................................................................................................................ 89
Figure 2-69 Toner CRUM joint PCA ...................................................................................................................................... 89
Figure 2-70 Paper size sensor PCA ..................................................................................................................................... 90
Figure 2-71 DCF front sectional view ................................................................................................................................. 91
Figure 2-72 DCF paper path ................................................................................................................................................ 92
Figure 2-73 DCF electrical parts layout .............................................................................................................................. 92

xlviii ENWW
Figure 2-74 DCF sensor and signal ..................................................................................................................................... 93
Figure 2-75 Plug and jack locations ................................................................................................................................... 94
Figure 2-76 Inner finisher sectional view ........................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 2-77 Inner finisher paper path ................................................................................................................................ 95
Figure 2-78 Electrical parts layout ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Figure 2-79 PCA connections .............................................................................................................................................. 98
Figure 3-1 Open document feeder unit ............................................................................................................................ 107
Figure 3-2 Clean document feeder white bar ................................................................................................................... 107
Figure 3-3 Open document feeder unit ............................................................................................................................ 108
Figure 3-4 Clean scanner glass ......................................................................................................................................... 108
Figure 3-5 Remove toner collection unit .......................................................................................................................... 109
Figure 3-6 Remove laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool ................................................................................. 109
Figure 3-7 Laser scanner assembly color entrances ....................................................................................................... 110
Figure 3-8 Open right door ............................................................................................................................................... 111
Figure 3-9 Transfer roller cleaning ................................................................................................................................... 111
Figure 3-10 Remove the formatter cover ........................................................................................................................ 113
Figure 3-11 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ............................................................................................................... 113
Figure 3-12 Remove the formatter cover ........................................................................................................................ 115
Figure 3-13 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................... 115
Figure 3-14 Remove the rear-top cover ........................................................................................................................... 116
Figure 3-15 Remove formatter screws ............................................................................................................................ 116
Figure 3-16 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ............................................................................................................... 117
Figure 3-17 Remove the IOD ............................................................................................................................................ 117
Figure 3-18 Remove the formatter connectors and screws ............................................................................................ 118
Figure 3-19 Remove the left-upper cover ........................................................................................................................ 118
Figure 3-20 Remove the formatter cage side screw ........................................................................................................ 118
Figure 3-21 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage .................................................................................. 119
Figure 3-22 Remove the document feeder bezel ............................................................................................................ 121
Figure 3-23 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors .................................................................... 122
Figure 3-24 Remove the USB interconnect cable ............................................................................................................. 122
Figure 3-25 Remove the document feeder bezel ............................................................................................................ 124
Figure 3-26 Disconnect one FFC ....................................................................................................................................... 124
Figure 3-27 Remove the control-panel keyboard ............................................................................................................ 125
Figure 3-28 Remove the formatter cover ........................................................................................................................ 128
Figure 3-29 Remove the main disk drive assembly. ........................................................................................................ 129
Figure 3-30 Locate the TPM ............................................................................................................................................. 129
Figure 3-31 Connect the FIH ............................................................................................................................................. 131
Figure 3-32 Remove the TCU ............................................................................................................................................ 140
Figure 3-33 Disconnect drum unit connector .................................................................................................................. 141
Figure 3-34 Remove drum unit ........................................................................................................................................ 141
Figure 3-35 Disconnect connector ................................................................................................................................... 141

ENWW xlix
 Figure 3-36 Remove rear cover screws ............................................................................................................................ 142
Figure 3-37 Remove rear cover ........................................................................................................................................ 142
Figure 3-38 Separate developer and drum units ............................................................................................................. 142
Figure 3-39 Remove the TCU ............................................................................................................................................ 145
Figure 3-40 Disconnect drum unit and remove two screws ............................................................................................ 146
Figure 3-41 Remove drum unit ........................................................................................................................................ 146
Figure 3-42 Disconnect connector ................................................................................................................................... 146
Figure 3-43 Remove rear cover screws ............................................................................................................................ 147
Figure 3-44 Remove rear cover ........................................................................................................................................ 147
Figure 3-45 Separate developer and drum units ............................................................................................................. 147
Figure 3-46 Unpack developer unit .................................................................................................................................. 148
Figure 3-47 Remove protective sheets ............................................................................................................................ 148
Figure 3-48 Fold protective sheet .................................................................................................................................... 148
Figure 3-49 Insert paper funnel into developer unit ....................................................................................................... 149
Figure 3-50 Fill developer unit with developer powder ................................................................................................... 149
Figure 3-51 Attach seal tape ............................................................................................................................................ 150
Figure 3-52 Remove arrow label ...................................................................................................................................... 150
Figure 3-53 Remove one screw ........................................................................................................................................ 152
Figure 3-54 Disconnect the connectors ........................................................................................................................... 152
Figure 3-55 Remove two fuser unit screws ..................................................................................................................... 153
Figure 3-56 Remove transfer roller .................................................................................................................................. 155
Figure 3-57 Remove cover ................................................................................................................................................ 157
Figure 3-58 Disconnect right door connector .................................................................................................................. 157
Figure 3-59 Release right hinge ....................................................................................................................................... 158
Figure 3-60 Release left dampener .................................................................................................................................. 158
Figure 3-61 Remove right door ........................................................................................................................................ 159
Figure 3-62 Remove the pickup assembly ....................................................................................................................... 159
Figure 3-63 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (1 of 2) ................................................................................................. 160
Figure 3-64 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (2 of 2) ................................................................................................. 160
Figure 3-65 Remove cover ................................................................................................................................................ 162
Figure 3-66 Remove cover ................................................................................................................................................ 163
Figure 3-67 MP tray flag orientation ................................................................................................................................ 163
Figure 3-68 Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller .................................................................................................. 164
Figure 3-69 Remove the pickup roller assembly ............................................................................................................. 166
Figure 3-70 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover .................................................................................................... 166
Figure 3-71 Remove the pickup roller components ......................................................................................................... 167
Figure 3-72 Remove the pickup roller assembly ............................................................................................................. 168
Figure 3-73 Pickup roller components-disassembled ..................................................................................................... 168
Figure 3-74 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws .......................................................... 171
Figure 3-75 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly ................................................................................ 171
Figure 3-76 Remove the separation roller cover ............................................................................................................. 172

l ENWW
Figure 3-77 Remove one plastic clip ................................................................................................................................ 172
Figure 3-78 Remove the separation roller ....................................................................................................................... 173
Figure 3-79 Remove the separation roller ....................................................................................................................... 173
Figure 3-80 Open the document feeder cover ................................................................................................................. 176
Figure 3-81 Remove the document feeder cover screws ................................................................................................ 176
Figure 3-82 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector ............................................................................................ 177
Figure 3-83 Document feeder pickup roller cover and roller assembly .......................................................................... 177
Figure 3-84 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket .......................................................................................... 178
Figure 3-85 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly clips ........................................................................ 178
Figure 3-86 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws .......................................................... 180
Figure 3-87 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly ................................................................................ 180
Figure 3-88 Remove the separation roller cover ............................................................................................................. 181
Figure 3-89 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly ................................................................... 181
Figure 3-90 Remove the separation roller assembly ...................................................................................................... 182
Figure 3-91 Separation roller assembly spring ............................................................................................................... 182
Figure 3-92 Open right door ............................................................................................................................................. 185
Figure 3-93 Remove screw-caps and screws ................................................................................................................... 185
Figure 3-94 Remove screw ............................................................................................................................................... 186
Figure 3-95 Remove front-top cover ................................................................................................................................ 186
Figure 3-96 Remove screws and front-inner cover ......................................................................................................... 186
Figure 3-97 Remove cover ................................................................................................................................................ 189
Figure 3-98 Disconnect right door connector .................................................................................................................. 189
Figure 3-99 Release right hinge ....................................................................................................................................... 190
Figure 3-100 Release left dampener ............................................................................................................................... 190
Figure 3-101 Remove right door ...................................................................................................................................... 191
Figure 3-102 Remove the left trim cover ......................................................................................................................... 193
Figure 3-103 Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................. 193
Figure 3-104 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 195
Figure 3-105 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 195
Figure 3-106 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 196
Figure 3-107 Remove rear cover and screw ..................................................................................................................... 198
Figure 3-108 Remove micro-switch ................................................................................................................................. 198
Figure 3-109 Remove the left trim cover ......................................................................................................................... 200
Figure 3-110 Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................. 200
Figure 3-111 Remove the bracket .................................................................................................................................... 201
Figure 3-112 Remove the HVPS board ............................................................................................................................. 201
Figure 3-113 Install a replacement HVPS ........................................................................................................................ 202
Figure 3-114 Remove the left trim cover ......................................................................................................................... 204
Figure 3-115 Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................. 204
Figure 3-116 Remove the bracket .................................................................................................................................... 205
Figure 3-117 Remove the HVPS board ............................................................................................................................. 205

ENWW li
 Figure 3-118 Install a replacement HVPS ........................................................................................................................ 206
Figure 3-119 Release the bracket .................................................................................................................................... 206
Figure 3-120 Remove the laser scanner assembly .......................................................................................................... 207
Figure 3-121 Disconnect the laser scanner assembly harness and FFC cable ................................................................ 207
Figure 3-122 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 209
Figure 3-123 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 209
Figure 3-124 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 210
Figure 3-125 Remove the left-upper cover ..................................................................................................................... 210
Figure 3-126 Remove the formatter cage side screw ..................................................................................................... 211
Figure 3-127 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage ................................................................................ 211
Figure 3-128 Remove the main board connectors and screws ....................................................................................... 212
Figure 3-129 MSOK installation orientation .................................................................................................................... 212
Figure 3-130 Remove the ground strap ........................................................................................................................... 213
Figure 3-131 Remove the main board cage screws ......................................................................................................... 213
Figure 3-132 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 215
Figure 3-133 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 215
Figure 3-134 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 216
Figure 3-135 Remove developer fan ................................................................................................................................ 216
Figure 3-136 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 218
Figure 3-137 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 218
Figure 3-138 Remove the LVPS cover .............................................................................................................................. 219
Figure 3-139 Remove the scanner LVPS board ................................................................................................................ 219
Figure 3-140 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 221
Figure 3-141 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 221
Figure 3-142 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 222
Figure 3-143 Remove the LVPS cover .............................................................................................................................. 222
Figure 3-144 Remove the fuser-drive assembly board ................................................................................................... 223
Figure 3-145 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 225
Figure 3-146 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 225
Figure 3-147 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 226
Figure 3-148 Remove screws and fuser/exit drive unit ................................................................................................... 226
Figure 3-149 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 228
Figure 3-150 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 228
Figure 3-151 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 229
Figure 3-152 Remove screws and main drive unit ........................................................................................................... 229
Figure 3-153 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 231
Figure 3-154 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 231
Figure 3-155 Remove screws and pickup drive unit ........................................................................................................ 232
Figure 3-156 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 234
Figure 3-157 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 234
Figure 3-158 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 235

lii ENWW
Figure 3-159 Remove screw ............................................................................................................................................. 235
Figure 3-160 Disconnect connector ................................................................................................................................. 236
Figure 3-161 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 238
Figure 3-162 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 238
Figure 3-163 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 239
Figure 3-164 Remove toner supply drive unit and disconnect connector ....................................................................... 239
Figure 3-165 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................... 241
Figure 3-166 Remove the rear-bottom cover .................................................................................................................. 241
Figure 3-167 Remove the rear-top cover ......................................................................................................................... 242
Figure 3-168 Remove screws and main drive unit ........................................................................................................... 242
Figure 3-169 Remove the formatter connectors and screws .......................................................................................... 243
Figure 3-170 Remove the left-upper cover ..................................................................................................................... 243
Figure 3-171 Remove the formatter cage side screw ..................................................................................................... 243
Figure 3-172 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage ................................................................................ 244
Figure 3-173 Remove the main board connectors and screws ....................................................................................... 244
Figure 3-174 MSOK installation orientation .................................................................................................................... 245
Figure 3-175 Remove the ground strap ........................................................................................................................... 245
Figure 3-176 Remove the main board cage screws ......................................................................................................... 246
Figure 3-177 Remove toner supply drive unit and disconnect connector ....................................................................... 246
Figure 3-178 Remove screws and toner duct .................................................................................................................. 247
Figure 3-179 Remove the toner cartridge and TCU ......................................................................................................... 249
Figure 3-180 Remove the inner cover .............................................................................................................................. 249
Figure 3-181 Disconnect connector and remove sensor ................................................................................................. 250
Figure 3-182 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 252
Figure 3-183 Disconnect exit unit connector and cable restraints .................................................................................. 254
Figure 3-184 Remove screws and exit unit ...................................................................................................................... 254
Figure 3-185 Lift right-door ............................................................................................................................................. 256
Figure 3-186 Remove right-door exit .............................................................................................................................. 256
Figure 3-187 Remove screws and separate right-door exit ............................................................................................ 257
Figure 3-188 Disconnect connector and remove fuser-out sensor ................................................................................. 257
Figure 3-189 Remove transfer roller assembly ............................................................................................................... 259
Figure 3-190 Open guide-transfer roller upper ............................................................................................................... 259
Figure 3-191 Disconnect connector and remove duplex sensor ..................................................................................... 260
Figure 3-192 Remove cover ............................................................................................................................................. 262
Figure 3-193 Disconnect right door connector ................................................................................................................ 262
Figure 3-194 Release right hinge ..................................................................................................................................... 263
Figure 3-195 Release left dampener ............................................................................................................................... 263
Figure 3-196 Remove right door ...................................................................................................................................... 264
Figure 3-197 Remove MP front cover .............................................................................................................................. 265
Figure 3-198 Open MP tray and release link .................................................................................................................... 265
Figure 3-199 Remove screws and cable cover ................................................................................................................. 265

ENWW liii
 Figure 3-200 Remove screws and cable cover lower ....................................................................................................... 266
Figure 3-201 Remove screw and prop up hinge .............................................................................................................. 266
Figure 3-202 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 266
Figure 3-203 Remove screw ............................................................................................................................................. 267
Figure 3-204 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 267
Figure 3-205 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 267
Figure 3-206 Remove hinge pin ....................................................................................................................................... 268
Figure 3-207 Lift right door duplex lower ........................................................................................................................ 268
Figure 3-208 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 268
Figure 3-209 Disconnect connectors ............................................................................................................................... 269
Figure 3-210 Remove screw and MP unit ......................................................................................................................... 269
Figure 3-211 Remove MP-cover base .............................................................................................................................. 269
Figure 3-212 Remove e-ring and gear ............................................................................................................................. 270
Figure 3-213 Remove e-ring and bushing ....................................................................................................................... 270
Figure 3-214 Remove screw and bracket-solenoid ......................................................................................................... 271
Figure 3-215 Release MP bracket pickup and release cable from harness ..................................................................... 271
Figure 3-216 Release cable and remove MP solenoid ..................................................................................................... 272
Figure 3-217 Remove cover ............................................................................................................................................. 274
Figure 3-218 Disconnect right door connector ................................................................................................................ 274
Figure 3-219 Release right hinge ..................................................................................................................................... 275
Figure 3-220 Release left dampener ............................................................................................................................... 275
Figure 3-221 Remove right door ...................................................................................................................................... 276
Figure 3-222 Remove the paper pickup assembly screw(s) ............................................................................................ 276
Figure 3-223 Remove the feed sensor bar ....................................................................................................................... 277
Figure 3-224 Remove the paper pickup assemblies ........................................................................................................ 277
Figure 3-225 Release the empty and level sensor .......................................................................................................... 278
Figure 3-226 Remove cover ............................................................................................................................................. 280
Figure 3-227 Disconnect right door connector ................................................................................................................ 280
Figure 3-228 Release right hinge ..................................................................................................................................... 281
Figure 3-229 Release left dampener ............................................................................................................................... 281
Figure 3-230 Remove right door ...................................................................................................................................... 282
Figure 3-231 Remove sensor cover ................................................................................................................................. 282
Figure 3-232 Remove feed sensor ................................................................................................................................... 283
Figure 3-233 Remove cover ............................................................................................................................................. 285
Figure 3-234 Disconnect right door connector ................................................................................................................ 285
Figure 3-235 Release right hinge ..................................................................................................................................... 286
Figure 3-236 Release left dampener ............................................................................................................................... 286
Figure 3-237 Remove right door ...................................................................................................................................... 287
Figure 3-238 Remove screw and feed unit ...................................................................................................................... 287
Figure 3-239 Remove screws and bracket ....................................................................................................................... 288
Figure 3-240 Remove feed sensor ................................................................................................................................... 288

liv ENWW
Figure 3-241 Remove cover ............................................................................................................................................. 290
Figure 3-242 Disconnect right door connector ................................................................................................................ 290
Figure 3-243 Release right hinge ..................................................................................................................................... 291
Figure 3-244 Release left dampener ............................................................................................................................... 291
Figure 3-245 Remove right door ...................................................................................................................................... 292
Figure 3-246 Remove the TCU .......................................................................................................................................... 292
Figure 3-247 Disconnect drum unit connector ................................................................................................................ 293
Figure 3-248 Remove drum unit ...................................................................................................................................... 293
Figure 3-249 Disconnect connector ................................................................................................................................. 294
Figure 3-250 Remove rear cover screws .......................................................................................................................... 294
Figure 3-251 Remove rear cover ...................................................................................................................................... 294
Figure 3-252 Separate developer and drum units ........................................................................................................... 295
Figure 3-253 Remove screws and guide feed roller ........................................................................................................ 295
Figure 3-254 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 296
Figure 3-255 Remove registration sensor ....................................................................................................................... 296
Figure 3-256 Remove the power-switch cover ................................................................................................................ 298
Figure 3-257 Remove screw-caps and screws ................................................................................................................. 298
Figure 3-258 Remove the cover exit right ....................................................................................................................... 298
Figure 3-259 Remove screws and cover exit rear ............................................................................................................ 299
Figure 3-260 Remove screws, disconnect cable and remove main disk drive assembly ................................................ 299
Figure 3-261 Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover ............................................................................. 303
Figure 3-262 Remove the document feeder connector cover ......................................................................................... 303
Figure 3-263 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire ........................................................................... 304
Figure 3-264 Release the document feeder hinge screws .............................................................................................. 304
Figure 3-265 Lift and remove the document feeder ....................................................................................................... 305
Figure 3-266 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 307
Figure 3-267 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 307
Figure 3-268 Remove the jam access cover screw .......................................................................................................... 308
Figure 3-269 Remove the jam access cover ..................................................................................................................... 308
Figure 3-270 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws ............................................................................... 310
Figure 3-271 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 310
Figure 3-272 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 311
Figure 3-273 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 311
Figure 3-274 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin ............................................................................ 312
Figure 3-275 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws ............................................................................... 314
Figure 3-276 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 314
Figure 3-277 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 315
Figure 3-278 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 315
Figure 3-279 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws ........................................................ 316
Figure 3-280 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly .............................................................................. 316
Figure 3-281 Remove the separation roller assembly screws ........................................................................................ 317

ENWW lv
 Figure 3-282 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws .......................................................................................... 317
Figure 3-283 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin ........................................................................... 318
Figure 3-284 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 320
Figure 3-285 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 320
Figure 3-286 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws ........................................................................... 321
Figure 3-287 Main motor and gear belt ........................................................................................................................... 321
Figure 3-288 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 323
Figure 3-289 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 323
Figure 3-290 Feed motor cable guide .............................................................................................................................. 324
Figure 3-291 Remove the feed motor .............................................................................................................................. 324
Figure 3-292 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 326
Figure 3-293 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 326
Figure 3-294 Document feeder PCA ................................................................................................................................. 327
Figure 3-295 Close the document feeder cover ............................................................................................................... 329
Figure 3-296 Smooth the white backing .......................................................................................................................... 330
Figure 3-297 Remove document feeder connector cover ............................................................................................... 332
Figure 3-298 Remove the cable choke ............................................................................................................................. 333
Figure 3-299 Disconnect document feeder harness ........................................................................................................ 333
Figure 3-300 Alignment marks ........................................................................................................................................ 334
Figure 3-301 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 334
Figure 3-302 Release the document feeder .................................................................................................................... 335
Figure 3-303 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws ............................................................................... 337
Figure 3-304 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 337
Figure 3-305 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 338
Figure 3-306 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 338
Figure 3-307 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 339
Figure 3-308 Remove the jam access cover ground wire ................................................................................................ 339
Figure 3-309 Remove the jam access cover door arm support ....................................................................................... 340
Figure 3-310 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws ............................................................................... 342
Figure 3-311 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 342
Figure 3-312 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 343
Figure 3-313 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 343
Figure 3-314 Remove the document feeder damping unit ............................................................................................. 344
Figure 3-315 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws ........................................................ 344
Figure 3-316 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly .............................................................................. 345
Figure 3-317 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector ....................................................................................... 345
Figure 3-318 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws ............................................................................... 347
Figure 3-319 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 347
Figure 3-320 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 348
Figure 3-321 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 348
Figure 3-322 Remove the pickup roller assembly ........................................................................................................... 349

lvi ENWW
Figure 3-323 Remove the document feeder paper path cover ....................................................................................... 349
Figure 3-324 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws .......................................................................................... 350
Figure 3-325 Remove the CIS ........................................................................................................................................... 350
Figure 3-326 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 352
Figure 3-327 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 352
Figure 3-328 Remove the document feeder front motor ................................................................................................ 353
Figure 3-329 Document feeder motors ........................................................................................................................... 356
Figure 3-330 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 357
Figure 3-331 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 357
Figure 3-332 Remove the motor ...................................................................................................................................... 358
Figure 3-333 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 359
Figure 3-334 Pickup motor ............................................................................................................................................... 360
Figure 3-335 Pre-REGI motor ........................................................................................................................................... 360
Figure 3-336 Remove the main fan .................................................................................................................................. 361
Figure 3-337 Remove the motor ...................................................................................................................................... 361
Figure 3-338 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 362
Figure 3-339 Remove the motor ...................................................................................................................................... 362
Figure 3-340 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 365
Figure 3-341 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 365
Figure 3-342 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector ..................................................................................... 366
Figure 3-343 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 368
Figure 3-344 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 368
Figure 3-345 Remove the document feeder PCA fan ...................................................................................................... 369
Figure 3-346 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws ............................................................................... 371
Figure 3-347 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 371
Figure 3-348 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ............................................................................... 372
Figure 3-349 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ........................................................................ 372
Figure 3-350 Remove the pickup roller assembly ........................................................................................................... 373
Figure 3-351 Remove the document feeder paper path cover ....................................................................................... 373
Figure 3-352 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 374
Figure 3-353 Remove the pick/feed cover ....................................................................................................................... 374
Figure 3-354 Remove the ultrasonic sensor .................................................................................................................... 375
Figure 3-355 Close the document feeder cover ............................................................................................................... 377
Figure 3-356 Smooth the white backing .......................................................................................................................... 377
Figure 3-357 Remove document feeder connector cover ............................................................................................... 380
Figure 3-358 Remove the cable choke ............................................................................................................................. 380
Figure 3-359 Disconnect document feeder harness ........................................................................................................ 381
Figure 3-360 Alignment marks ........................................................................................................................................ 381
Figure 3-361 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 382
Figure 3-362 Release the document feeder .................................................................................................................... 382
Figure 3-363 Remove three screws ................................................................................................................................. 383

ENWW lvii
 Figure 3-364 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 383
Figure 3-365 Remove USB interconnect cable ................................................................................................................. 384
Figure 3-366 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover ................................................................. 385
Figure 3-367 Release scan-left cover .............................................................................................................................. 385
Figure 3-368 Remove scan-right cover ............................................................................................................................ 386
Figure 3-369 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 386
Figure 3-370 Disconnect scan cables ............................................................................................................................... 387
Figure 3-371 Remove screws ........................................................................................................................................... 387
Figure 3-372 Remove three screws ................................................................................................................................. 388
Figure 3-373 Remove scan glass ..................................................................................................................................... 390
Figure 3-374 Remove scan glass ..................................................................................................................................... 392
Figure 3-375 Remove transparent tape ........................................................................................................................... 393
Figure 3-376 Disconnect cable ......................................................................................................................................... 393
Figure 3-377 Remove screws and release LED lamp module .......................................................................................... 393
Figure 3-378 Remove scan glass ..................................................................................................................................... 395
Figure 3-379 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover ........................................................................................ 395
Figure 3-380 Disconnect flat cable .................................................................................................................................. 395
Figure 3-381 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit .................................................................................... 396
Figure 3-382 Remove screws and release scan joint board ............................................................................................ 398
Figure 3-383 Remove scan glass ..................................................................................................................................... 400
Figure 3-384 Remove joint board cover ........................................................................................................................... 400
Figure 3-385 Remove screw ............................................................................................................................................. 400
Figure 3-386 Disconnect harness ..................................................................................................................................... 401
Figure 3-387 Remove screws and release APS sensor .................................................................................................... 401
Figure 3-388 Remove the DCF rear cover ........................................................................................................................ 404
Figure 3-389 Remove the lower right cover .................................................................................................................... 406
Figure 3-390 Slide the hinge pin ...................................................................................................................................... 406
Figure 3-391 Remove the DCF right door ......................................................................................................................... 407
Figure 3-392 Remove the DCF rear cover ........................................................................................................................ 409
Figure 3-393 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer ................................................................................... 409
Figure 3-394 Remove the feed drive unit ........................................................................................................................ 410
Figure 3-395 Remove the feed motor .............................................................................................................................. 410
Figure 3-396 Remove the DCF rear cover ........................................................................................................................ 412
Figure 3-397 Remove the DCF pickup motor ................................................................................................................... 412
Figure 3-398 Remove the DCF rear cover ........................................................................................................................ 414
Figure 3-399 Remove the DCF PCA .................................................................................................................................. 414
Figure 3-400 Remove two screws and the cable cover ................................................................................................... 416
Figure 3-401 Remove five screws and two brackets ....................................................................................................... 416
Figure 3-402 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws ............................................................................... 417
Figure 3-403 Remove the pickup units ............................................................................................................................ 417
Figure 4-1 Main assembly ................................................................................................................................................ 422

lviii ENWW
Figure 4-2 Output ............................................................................................................................................................. 424
Figure 4-3 First cassette ................................................................................................................................................... 426
Figure 4-4 Second cassette .............................................................................................................................................. 428
Figure 4-5 Main engine frame .......................................................................................................................................... 430
Figure 4-6 Fuser output drive ........................................................................................................................................... 432
Figure 4-7 Registration sub-frame .................................................................................................................................. 434
Figure 4-8 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 .............................................................................................................................. 436
Figure 4-9 Main pickup frame ........................................................................................................................................... 438
Figure 4-10 Main frame pickup, upper ............................................................................................................................. 440
Figure 4-11 Main frame .................................................................................................................................................... 442
Figure 4-12 Cover ............................................................................................................................................................. 444
Figure 4-13 Right door ..................................................................................................................................................... 446
Figure 4-14 MP tray .......................................................................................................................................................... 448
Figure 4-15 Right door output ......................................................................................................................................... 450
Figure 4-16 Right door duplex ......................................................................................................................................... 452
Figure 4-17 ADF (dn models) ............................................................................................................................................ 454
Figure 4-18 ADF exterior and ADF pickup assembly (dn models) .................................................................................... 456
Figure 4-19 ADF main frame assembly (dn models) ........................................................................................................ 458
Figure 4-20 ADF image scanner (dn models) ................................................................................................................... 460
Figure 4-21 ADF image scanner, lower (dn models) ........................................................................................................ 462
Figure 4-22 Flow ADF (z models) (GX) .............................................................................................................................. 464
Figure 4-23 Flow ADF open cover (z models) ................................................................................................................... 466
Figure 4-24 Flow ADF upper pickup (z models) ............................................................................................................... 468
Figure 4-25 Flow ADF stacker (z models) ......................................................................................................................... 470
Figure 4-26 Flow ADF main frame (z models) .................................................................................................................. 472
Figure 4-27 Flow ADF image scanner (z models) ............................................................................................................. 474
Figure 4-28 Flow ADF image scanner, lower (z models) .................................................................................................. 476
Figure 4-29 DCF main ....................................................................................................................................................... 478
Figure 4-30 DCF main frame pickup 1 .............................................................................................................................. 480
Figure 4-31 DCF main frame pickup ................................................................................................................................. 482
Figure 4-32 DCF main frame pickup, upper ..................................................................................................................... 484
Figure 4-33 Booklet finisher ............................................................................................................................................. 486
Figure 4-34 Mainline finisher 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 488
Figure 4-35 Mainline finisher 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 490
Figure 4-36 Mainline finisher 3 ......................................................................................................................................... 492
Figure 4-37 Mainline finisher 4 ......................................................................................................................................... 494
Figure 4-38 Mainline finisher 5 ......................................................................................................................................... 496
Figure 4-39 Mainline finisher 6 ......................................................................................................................................... 498
Figure 4-40 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output .......................................................... 500
Figure 4-41 Low output, hb motor, and top guide ........................................................................................................... 502
Figure 4-42 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide ................................................................................................. 504

ENWW lix
 Figure 4-43 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor ........................................................................ 506
Figure 4-44 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam ............................................................................................................. 508
Figure 4-45 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade .......................................................................................... 510
Figure 4-46 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame ......................................................................................................... 512
Figure 4-47 Three fold blade ............................................................................................................................................ 514
Figure 4-48 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide ........................................................................................ 516
Figure 4-49 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output .................................................................................................. 518
Figure 4-50 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor ............................................................... 520
Figure 4-51 Front alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................................. 522
Figure 4-52 Rear alignment (tamper) .............................................................................................................................. 524
Figure 4-53 Shield ............................................................................................................................................................. 526
Figure 4-54 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle .................................................................................................... 528
Figure 4-55 Finisher sub booklet ..................................................................................................................................... 530
Figure 4-56 IPTU (bridge) ................................................................................................................................................. 532
Figure 4-57 Sub-inner finisher ......................................................................................................................................... 534
Figure 4-58 Finisher sub 1 ................................................................................................................................................ 536
Figure 4-59 Finisher sub 7 ................................................................................................................................................ 538
Figure 4-60 Finisher sub 8 ................................................................................................................................................ 540
Figure 5-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) ................................................................................................. 589
Figure 5-2 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ......................................................................................................... 590
Figure 5-3 No control panel sound ................................................................................................................................... 591
Figure 5-4 Home button is unresponsive ......................................................................................................................... 592
Figure 5-5 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) ......................................... 593
Figure 5-6 LEDs ................................................................................................................................................................. 593
Figure 5-7 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock ...................................................................................................... 595
Figure 5-8 Defeat the front door interlock ....................................................................................................................... 596
Figure 5-9 Open the Pre-boot menu ................................................................................................................................ 603
Figure 5-10 Pre-boot menu .............................................................................................................................................. 604
Figure 5-11 Open the Pre-boot menu .............................................................................................................................. 605
Figure 5-12 Open the Control Panel ................................................................................................................................. 614
Figure 5-13 Turn Windows features on or off .................................................................................................................. 614
Figure 5-14 Enable the telnet client feature .................................................................................................................... 615
Figure 5-15 Select the +3:Administrator item ................................................................................................................. 616
Figure 5-16 Select the +A:Remote Admin item ................................................................................................................ 616
Figure 5-17 Select the 1:Start Telnet item ....................................................................................................................... 616
Figure 5-18 Telnet connecting message .......................................................................................................................... 616
Figure 5-19 Telnet error message .................................................................................................................................... 617
Figure 5-20 Telnet server function initialized .................................................................................................................. 617
Figure 5-21 Open a command window ............................................................................................................................ 618
Figure 5-22 Start a telnet session .................................................................................................................................... 618
Figure 5-23 Establish a telnet connection ....................................................................................................................... 618

lx ENWW
Figure 5-24 Enter the PIN ................................................................................................................................................. 619
Figure 5-25 Remote Admin window ................................................................................................................................. 619
Figure 5-26 Access the administrator menu .................................................................................................................... 620
Figure 5-27 Access the remote admin menu ................................................................................................................... 620
Figure 5-28 Terminate the telnet connection .................................................................................................................. 621
Figure 5-29 Open the ADF cover ....................................................................................................................................... 695
Figure 5-30 Remove jam from ADF .................................................................................................................................. 696
Figure 5-31 Open input tray ............................................................................................................................................. 696
Figure 5-32 Remove jam from ADF .................................................................................................................................. 697
Figure 5-33 Open ADF ....................................................................................................................................................... 698
Figure 5-34 Remove jam from the feed area ................................................................................................................... 699
Figure 5-35 Remove paper ............................................................................................................................................... 700
Figure 5-36 Open right door ............................................................................................................................................. 700
Figure 5-37 Remove jam .................................................................................................................................................. 701
Figure 5-38 Remove jam .................................................................................................................................................. 702
Figure 5-39 Open bottom right door ................................................................................................................................ 703
Figure 5-40 Remove jam .................................................................................................................................................. 703
Figure 5-41 Open right door ............................................................................................................................................. 704
Figure 5-42 Remove jam .................................................................................................................................................. 705
Figure 5-43 Remove paper ............................................................................................................................................... 705
Figure 5-44 Bin full sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 706
Figure 5-45 A/S chart (A3) ................................................................................................................................................ 736
Figure 5-46 A/S chart ....................................................................................................................................................... 737
Figure 5-47 Defect analysis flowchart ............................................................................................................................. 738
Figure 5-48 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 739
Figure 5-49 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 740
Figure 5-50 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 742
Figure 5-51 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 743
Figure 5-52 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 744
Figure 5-53 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 745
Figure 5-54 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 746
Figure 5-55 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 746
Figure 5-56 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 748
Figure 5-57 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 749
Figure 5-58 Typical faulty images .................................................................................................................................... 750
Figure 5-59 Paper edge contamination ........................................................................................................................... 752
Figure 5-60 Paper guide rib contamination ..................................................................................................................... 752
Figure 5-61 CCD lock ......................................................................................................................................................... 754
Figure 5-62 Bend FR carriage spring ................................................................................................................................ 755
Figure 5-63 Remove ADF connector cover ....................................................................................................................... 755
Figure 5-64 Remove connector and screw ....................................................................................................................... 756

ENWW lxi
 Figure 5-65 Remove ADF unit ........................................................................................................................................... 756
Figure 5-66 Open ADF assembly cover ............................................................................................................................ 757
Figure 5-67 Remove guide pickup .................................................................................................................................... 757
Figure 5-68 Check all 24V output channels ..................................................................................................................... 758
Figure 5-69 Check 24V on/off signal pin .......................................................................................................................... 758
Figure 5-70 Check Sponge-Damper Separation position ................................................................................................ 760
Figure 5-71 Remove screws ............................................................................................................................................. 760
Figure 5-72 Remove linker and front cover ..................................................................................................................... 760
Figure 5-73 Remove screws ............................................................................................................................................. 761
Figure 5-74 Remove pickup assembly ............................................................................................................................. 761
Figure 5-75 Replace housing separation ......................................................................................................................... 761
Figure 5-76 Tray does not open ....................................................................................................................................... 762
Figure 5-77 Remove toner powder .................................................................................................................................. 763
Figure 5-78 Open right door and push cover switch ........................................................................................................ 764
Figure 5-79 Check feed rollers ......................................................................................................................................... 765
Figure 5-80 Right door sensor spring plate is damaged ................................................................................................. 766
Figure 5-81 Right door open sensor assembly ................................................................................................................ 767
Figure 5-82 Check all 24V output channels ..................................................................................................................... 767
Figure 5-83 Check 24V output channels .......................................................................................................................... 768
Figure 5-84 Open ADF and loosen screws ........................................................................................................................ 770
Figure 5-85 Adjust ADF hinge ........................................................................................................................................... 771
Figure 5-86 Adjust hinge .................................................................................................................................................. 772
Figure 5-87 Adjust hinge .................................................................................................................................................. 773
Figure 6-1 Connection diagram ........................................................................................................................................ 776
Figure 6-2 Fuser exit diagram .......................................................................................................................................... 777
Figure 6-3 Pickup/PH drive/side diagram ........................................................................................................................ 778
Figure 6-4 Laser scanner assembly/HVPS diagram ......................................................................................................... 779
Figure 6-5 Toner diagram ................................................................................................................................................. 780
Figure 6-6 FDB/LVPS diagram .......................................................................................................................................... 781
Figure 6-7 Front/OPC diagram ......................................................................................................................................... 783
Figure 6-8 Scanner diagram ............................................................................................................................................. 784
Figure 6-9 2x520 sheet feeder diagram .......................................................................................................................... 785
Figure 7-1 Sensor locations .............................................................................................................................................. 792
Figure 7-2 Roller location ................................................................................................................................................. 793
Figure 7-3 Jam removal guide .......................................................................................................................................... 795
Figure 7-4 Paper path ....................................................................................................................................................... 796
Figure 7-5 Electrical parts layout (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................................ 797
Figure 7-6 Electrical parts layout (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................................ 798
Figure 7-7 IPTU ................................................................................................................................................................. 801
Figure 7-8 Punch unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 801
Figure 7-9 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 802

lxii ENWW
Figure 7-10 Finisher PCA .................................................................................................................................................. 803
Figure 7-11 Switch PCA ..................................................................................................................................................... 804
Figure 7-12 Booklet maker PCA ....................................................................................................................................... 804
Figure 7-13 Remove the top output bin ........................................................................................................................... 811
Figure 7-14 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 814
Figure 7-15 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 817
Figure 7-16 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 818
Figure 7-17 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 818
Figure 7-18 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................... 819
Figure 7-19 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 821
Figure 7-20 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 822
Figure 7-21 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 822
Figure 7-22 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................... 823
Figure 7-23 Lift the top hinge pin ..................................................................................................................................... 823
Figure 7-24 Remove the top hinge pin ............................................................................................................................. 824
Figure 7-25 Release the lower hinge pin .......................................................................................................................... 824
Figure 7-26 Remove the lower hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 825
Figure 7-27 Remove one screw and the front door ......................................................................................................... 825
Figure 7-28 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 828
Figure 7-29 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 829
Figure 7-30 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 829
Figure 7-31 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................... 830
Figure 7-32 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................... 830
Figure 7-33 Remove four screws and the rear cover ....................................................................................................... 831
Figure 7-34 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 833
Figure 7-35 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 834
Figure 7-36 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 834
Figure 7-37 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................... 835
Figure 7-38 Lift the top hinge pin ..................................................................................................................................... 835
Figure 7-39 Remove the top hinge pin ............................................................................................................................. 836
Figure 7-40 Release the lower hinge pin .......................................................................................................................... 836
Figure 7-41 Remove the lower hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 837
Figure 7-42 Remove one screw and the front door ......................................................................................................... 837
Figure 7-43 Remove the jam-access knob ....................................................................................................................... 838
Figure 7-44 Remove one screw ........................................................................................................................................ 838
Figure 7-45 Remove five screws and the front cover ...................................................................................................... 839
Figure 7-46 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 841
Figure 7-47 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 842
Figure 7-48 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 842
Figure 7-49 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................... 843
Figure 7-50 Lift the top hinge pin ..................................................................................................................................... 843

ENWW lxiii
 Figure 7-51 Remove the top hinge pin ............................................................................................................................. 844
Figure 7-52 Release the lower hinge pin .......................................................................................................................... 844
Figure 7-53 Remove the lower hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 845
Figure 7-54 Remove one screw and the front door ......................................................................................................... 845
Figure 7-55 Remove the jam-access knob ....................................................................................................................... 846
Figure 7-56 Remove one screw ........................................................................................................................................ 846
Figure 7-57 Remove five screws and the front cover ...................................................................................................... 847
Figure 7-58 Remove three screws and the front lower cover ......................................................................................... 847
Figure 7-59 Remove the booklet tray .............................................................................................................................. 850
Figure 7-60 Install the booklet tray ................................................................................................................................. 851
Figure 7-61 Remove the booklet tray .............................................................................................................................. 853
Figure 7-62 Install the booklet tray ................................................................................................................................. 854
Figure 7-63 Remove four screws ..................................................................................................................................... 854
Figure 7-64 Remove the caster cover .............................................................................................................................. 855
Figure 7-65 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 857
Figure 7-66 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 858
Figure 7-67 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 858
Figure 7-68 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................... 859
Figure 7-69 Lift the top hinge pin ..................................................................................................................................... 859
Figure 7-70 Remove the top hinge pin ............................................................................................................................. 860
Figure 7-71 Release the lower hinge pin .......................................................................................................................... 860
Figure 7-72 Remove the lower hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 861
Figure 7-73 Remove one screw and the front door ......................................................................................................... 861
Figure 7-74 Remove the jam-access knob ....................................................................................................................... 862
Figure 7-75 Remove one screw ........................................................................................................................................ 862
Figure 7-76 Remove five screws and the front cover ...................................................................................................... 863
Figure 7-77 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................... 863
Figure 7-78 Remove four screws and the rear cover ....................................................................................................... 864
Figure 7-79 Remove the booklet tray .............................................................................................................................. 864
Figure 7-80 Install the booklet tray ................................................................................................................................. 865
Figure 7-81 Remove four screws ..................................................................................................................................... 865
Figure 7-82 Remove the caster cover .............................................................................................................................. 866
Figure 7-83 Remove four screws ..................................................................................................................................... 866
Figure 7-84 Release the lower shield ............................................................................................................................... 867
Figure 7-85 Disconnect two connectors .......................................................................................................................... 867
Figure 7-86 Locate sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 868
Figure 7-87 Remove six screws and the right top cover .................................................................................................. 870
Figure 7-88 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 871
Figure 7-89 Remove six screws ........................................................................................................................................ 871
Figure 7-90 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................... 872
Figure 7-91 Lift the top hinge pin ..................................................................................................................................... 872

lxiv ENWW
Figure 7-92 Remove the top hinge pin ............................................................................................................................. 873
Figure 7-93 Release the lower hinge pin .......................................................................................................................... 873
Figure 7-94 Remove the lower hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 874
Figure 7-95 Remove one screw and the front door ......................................................................................................... 874
Figure 7-96 Remove the jam-access knob ....................................................................................................................... 875
Figure 7-97 Remove one screw ........................................................................................................................................ 875
Figure 7-98 Remove five screws and the front cover ...................................................................................................... 876
Figure 7-99 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................... 876
Figure 7-100 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 877
Figure 7-101 Remove the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................ 877
Figure 7-102 Install the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................... 878
Figure 7-103 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 878
Figure 7-104 Remove the caster cover ............................................................................................................................ 879
Figure 7-105 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 879
Figure 7-106 Release the lower shield ............................................................................................................................. 880
Figure 7-107 Disconnect two connectors ........................................................................................................................ 880
Figure 7-108 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 881
Figure 7-109 Lower the output tray ................................................................................................................................. 881
Figure 7-110 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 882
Figure 7-111 Release the shield ....................................................................................................................................... 882
Figure 7-112 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 883
Figure 7-113 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 883
Figure 7-114 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 886
Figure 7-115 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 887
Figure 7-116 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 887
Figure 7-117 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 888
Figure 7-118 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 888
Figure 7-119 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 889
Figure 7-120 Remove the controller PCA ......................................................................................................................... 889
Figure 7-121 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 892
Figure 7-122 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 893
Figure 7-123 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 893
Figure 7-124 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 894
Figure 7-125 Lift the top hinge pin .................................................................................................................................. 894
Figure 7-126 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................... 895
Figure 7-127 Release the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 895
Figure 7-128 Remove the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 896
Figure 7-129 Remove one screw and the front door ....................................................................................................... 896
Figure 7-130 Remove the jam-access knob ..................................................................................................................... 897
Figure 7-131 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 897
Figure 7-132 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................... 898

ENWW lxv
 Figure 7-133 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 898
Figure 7-134 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 899
Figure 7-135 Move the staple unit to the front ................................................................................................................ 899
Figure 7-136 Remove the staple cartridge ...................................................................................................................... 900
Figure 7-137 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws .............................................................................. 900
Figure 7-138 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws ................................................................................... 901
Figure 7-139 Remove the staple unit ............................................................................................................................... 901
Figure 7-140 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 904
Figure 7-141 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 905
Figure 7-142 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 905
Figure 7-143 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 906
Figure 7-144 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 906
Figure 7-145 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 907
Figure 7-146 Remove two screws and the feed guide ..................................................................................................... 907
Figure 7-147 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 910
Figure 7-148 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 911
Figure 7-149 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 911
Figure 7-150 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 912
Figure 7-151 Lift the top hinge pin .................................................................................................................................. 912
Figure 7-152 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................... 913
Figure 7-153 Release the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 913
Figure 7-154 Remove the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 914
Figure 7-155 Remove one screw and the front door ....................................................................................................... 914
Figure 7-156 Remove the jam-access knob ..................................................................................................................... 915
Figure 7-157 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 915
Figure 7-158 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................... 916
Figure 7-159 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 916
Figure 7-160 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 917
Figure 7-161 Remove the feed exit motor ....................................................................................................................... 917
Figure 7-162 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 918
Figure 7-163 Remove the top jam access cover .............................................................................................................. 918
Figure 7-164 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 921
Figure 7-165 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 922
Figure 7-166 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 922
Figure 7-167 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 923
Figure 7-168 Lift the top hinge pin .................................................................................................................................. 923
Figure 7-169 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................... 924
Figure 7-170 Release the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 924
Figure 7-171 Remove the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 925
Figure 7-172 Remove one screw and the front door ....................................................................................................... 925
Figure 7-173 Remove the jam-access knob ..................................................................................................................... 926

lxvi ENWW
Figure 7-174 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 926
Figure 7-175 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................... 927
Figure 7-176 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 927
Figure 7-177 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 928
Figure 7-178 Remove the feed exit motor ....................................................................................................................... 928
Figure 7-179 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 929
Figure 7-180 Remove the top jam access cover .............................................................................................................. 929
Figure 7-181 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 930
Figure 7-182 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector ................................................................................ 930
Figure 7-183 Remove three screws ................................................................................................................................. 931
Figure 7-184 Remove the feed assembly ........................................................................................................................ 931
Figure 7-185 Locate sensors and connector .................................................................................................................... 932
Figure 7-186 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 934
Figure 7-187 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 935
Figure 7-188 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 935
Figure 7-189 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 936
Figure 7-190 Lift the top hinge pin .................................................................................................................................. 936
Figure 7-191 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................... 937
Figure 7-192 Release the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 937
Figure 7-193 Remove the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 938
Figure 7-194 Remove one screw and the front door ....................................................................................................... 938
Figure 7-195 Remove the jam-access knob ..................................................................................................................... 939
Figure 7-196 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 939
Figure 7-197 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................... 940
Figure 7-198 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 940
Figure 7-199 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 941
Figure 7-200 Remove the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................ 941
Figure 7-201 Install the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................... 942
Figure 7-202 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 942
Figure 7-203 Remove the caster cover ............................................................................................................................ 943
Figure 7-204 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 943
Figure 7-205 Release the lower shield ............................................................................................................................. 944
Figure 7-206 Disconnect two connectors ........................................................................................................................ 944
Figure 7-207 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 945
Figure 7-208 Lower the output tray ................................................................................................................................. 945
Figure 7-209 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 946
Figure 7-210 Release the shield ....................................................................................................................................... 946
Figure 7-211 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 947
Figure 7-212 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 947
Figure 7-213 Move the staple unit to the center ............................................................................................................. 948
Figure 7-214 Disconnect three connectors ...................................................................................................................... 948

ENWW lxvii
 Figure 7-215 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 949
Figure 7-216 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 949
Figure 7-217 Rotate the sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 950
Figure 7-218 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 950
Figure 7-219 Remove the front tamper shaft ................................................................................................................. 951
Figure 7-220 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws .............................................................................. 951
Figure 7-221 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 952
Figure 7-222 Remove the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................... 952
Figure 7-223 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 953
Figure 7-224 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 953
Figure 7-225 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 954
Figure 7-226 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 954
Figure 7-227 Lift the edges of the tampers ..................................................................................................................... 955
Figure 7-228 Remove the ejector unit ............................................................................................................................. 955
Figure 7-229 Reinstall the front tamper shaft ................................................................................................................ 956
Figure 7-230 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft .................................................................................................................. 956
Figure 7-231 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 959
Figure 7-232 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 960
Figure 7-233 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 960
Figure 7-234 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 961
Figure 7-235 Lift the top hinge pin .................................................................................................................................. 961
Figure 7-236 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................... 962
Figure 7-237 Release the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 962
Figure 7-238 Remove the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 963
Figure 7-239 Remove one screw and the front door ....................................................................................................... 963
Figure 7-240 Remove the jam-access knob ..................................................................................................................... 964
Figure 7-241 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 964
Figure 7-242 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................... 965
Figure 7-243 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 965
Figure 7-244 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 966
Figure 7-245 Remove the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................ 966
Figure 7-246 Install the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................... 967
Figure 7-247 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 967
Figure 7-248 Remove the caster cover ............................................................................................................................ 968
Figure 7-249 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 968
Figure 7-250 Release the lower shield ............................................................................................................................. 969
Figure 7-251 Disconnect two connectors ........................................................................................................................ 969
Figure 7-252 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 970
Figure 7-253 Lower the output tray ................................................................................................................................. 970
Figure 7-254 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 971
Figure 7-255 Release the shield ....................................................................................................................................... 971

lxviii ENWW
Figure 7-256 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 972
Figure 7-257 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 972
Figure 7-258 Move the staple unit to the center ............................................................................................................. 973
Figure 7-259 Disconnect three connectors ...................................................................................................................... 973
Figure 7-260 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 974
Figure 7-261 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 974
Figure 7-262 Rotate the sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 975
Figure 7-263 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 975
Figure 7-264 Remove the front tamper shaft ................................................................................................................. 976
Figure 7-265 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws .............................................................................. 976
Figure 7-266 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 977
Figure 7-267 Remove the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................... 977
Figure 7-268 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 978
Figure 7-269 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 978
Figure 7-270 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 979
Figure 7-271 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 979
Figure 7-272 Lift the edges of the tampers ..................................................................................................................... 980
Figure 7-273 Remove the ejector unit ............................................................................................................................. 980
Figure 7-274 Reinstall the front tamper shaft ................................................................................................................ 981
Figure 7-275 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft .................................................................................................................. 981
Figure 7-276 Remove the front tamper ........................................................................................................................... 982
Figure 7-277 Remove six screws and the right top cover ................................................................................................ 984
Figure 7-278 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 985
Figure 7-279 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 985
Figure 7-280 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ........................................................................................ 986
Figure 7-281 Lift the top hinge pin .................................................................................................................................. 986
Figure 7-282 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................... 987
Figure 7-283 Release the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 987
Figure 7-284 Remove the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................... 988
Figure 7-285 Remove one screw and the front door ....................................................................................................... 988
Figure 7-286 Remove the jam-access knob ..................................................................................................................... 989
Figure 7-287 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 989
Figure 7-288 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................... 990
Figure 7-289 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................. 990
Figure 7-290 Remove four screws and the rear cover ..................................................................................................... 991
Figure 7-291 Remove the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................ 991
Figure 7-292 Install the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................... 992
Figure 7-293 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 992
Figure 7-294 Remove the caster cover ............................................................................................................................ 993
Figure 7-295 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................... 993
Figure 7-296 Release the lower shield ............................................................................................................................. 994

ENWW lxix
 Figure 7-297 Disconnect two connectors ........................................................................................................................ 994
Figure 7-298 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 995
Figure 7-299 Lower the output tray ................................................................................................................................. 995
Figure 7-300 Remove six screws ...................................................................................................................................... 996
Figure 7-301 Release the shield ....................................................................................................................................... 996
Figure 7-302 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................... 997
Figure 7-303 Locate sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 997
Figure 7-304 Move the staple unit to the center ............................................................................................................. 998
Figure 7-305 Disconnect three connectors ...................................................................................................................... 998
Figure 7-306 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................... 999
Figure 7-307 Remove one screw ...................................................................................................................................... 999
Figure 7-308 Rotate the sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 1000
Figure 7-309 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1000
Figure 7-310 Remove the front tamper shaft ............................................................................................................... 1001
Figure 7-311 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws ............................................................................ 1001
Figure 7-312 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1002
Figure 7-313 Remove the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................. 1002
Figure 7-314 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1003
Figure 7-315 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1003
Figure 7-316 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1004
Figure 7-317 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1004
Figure 7-318 Lift the edges of the tampers ................................................................................................................... 1005
Figure 7-319 Remove the ejector unit ........................................................................................................................... 1005
Figure 7-320 Reinstall the front tamper shaft .............................................................................................................. 1006
Figure 7-321 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................ 1006
Figure 7-322 Remove the rear tamper .......................................................................................................................... 1007
Figure 7-323 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1009
Figure 7-324 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1010
Figure 7-325 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1010
Figure 7-326 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1011
Figure 7-327 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1011
Figure 7-328 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1012
Figure 7-329 Remove the feed entrance motor ............................................................................................................ 1012
Figure 7-330 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1015
Figure 7-331 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1016
Figure 7-332 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1016
Figure 7-333 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1017
Figure 7-334 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1017
Figure 7-335 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1018
Figure 7-336 Remove the feed exit motor ..................................................................................................................... 1018
Figure 7-337 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1021

lxx ENWW
Figure 7-338 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1022
Figure 7-339 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1022
Figure 7-340 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1023
Figure 7-341 Remove the jam-access knob ................................................................................................................... 1023
Figure 7-342 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1024
Figure 7-343 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................. 1024
Figure 7-344 Disconnect two connectors and remove two screws ............................................................................... 1025
Figure 7-345 Slide the gear off of the shaft .................................................................................................................. 1025
Figure 7-346 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1026
Figure 7-347 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1026
Figure 7-348 Remove the buffer motor ......................................................................................................................... 1027
Figure 7-349 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1029
Figure 7-350 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1030
Figure 7-351 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1030
Figure 7-352 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1031
Figure 7-353 Lift the top hinge pin ................................................................................................................................ 1031
Figure 7-354 Remove the top hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 1032
Figure 7-355 Release the lower hinge pin ..................................................................................................................... 1032
Figure 7-356 Remove the lower hinge pin ..................................................................................................................... 1033
Figure 7-357 Remove one screw and the front door ..................................................................................................... 1033
Figure 7-358 Remove the jam-access knob ................................................................................................................... 1034
Figure 7-359 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1034
Figure 7-360 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................. 1035
Figure 7-361 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1035
Figure 7-362 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1036
Figure 7-363 Remove the booklet tray .......................................................................................................................... 1036
Figure 7-364 Install the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................. 1037
Figure 7-365 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1037
Figure 7-366 Remove the caster cover .......................................................................................................................... 1038
Figure 7-367 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1038
Figure 7-368 Release the lower shield ........................................................................................................................... 1039
Figure 7-369 Disconnect two connectors ...................................................................................................................... 1039
Figure 7-370 Locate sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 1040
Figure 7-371 Lower the output tray ............................................................................................................................... 1040
Figure 7-372 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1041
Figure 7-373 Release the shield ..................................................................................................................................... 1041
Figure 7-374 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1042
Figure 7-375 Locate sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 1042
Figure 7-376 Move the staple unit to the center ........................................................................................................... 1043
Figure 7-377 Disconnect three connectors .................................................................................................................... 1043
Figure 7-378 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1044

ENWW lxxi
 Figure 7-379 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1044
Figure 7-380 Rotate the sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 1045
Figure 7-381 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1045
Figure 7-382 Remove the front tamper shaft ............................................................................................................... 1046
Figure 7-383 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws ............................................................................ 1046
Figure 7-384 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1047
Figure 7-385 Remove the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................. 1047
Figure 7-386 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1048
Figure 7-387 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1048
Figure 7-388 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1049
Figure 7-389 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1049
Figure 7-390 Lift the edges of the tampers ................................................................................................................... 1050
Figure 7-391 Remove the ejector unit ........................................................................................................................... 1050
Figure 7-392 Reinstall the front tamper shaft .............................................................................................................. 1051
Figure 7-393 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................ 1051
Figure 7-394 Remove the front tamper ......................................................................................................................... 1052
Figure 7-395 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1052
Figure 7-396 Release the belt and remove the motor ................................................................................................... 1053
Figure 7-397 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1055
Figure 7-398 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1056
Figure 7-399 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1056
Figure 7-400 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1057
Figure 7-401 Lift the top hinge pin ................................................................................................................................ 1057
Figure 7-402 Remove the top hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 1058
Figure 7-403 Release the lower hinge pin ..................................................................................................................... 1058
Figure 7-404 Remove the lower hinge pin ..................................................................................................................... 1059
Figure 7-405 Remove one screw and the front door ..................................................................................................... 1059
Figure 7-406 Remove the jam-access knob ................................................................................................................... 1060
Figure 7-407 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1060
Figure 7-408 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................. 1061
Figure 7-409 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1061
Figure 7-410 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1062
Figure 7-411 Remove the booklet tray .......................................................................................................................... 1062
Figure 7-412 Install the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................. 1063
Figure 7-413 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1063
Figure 7-414 Remove the caster cover .......................................................................................................................... 1064
Figure 7-415 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1064
Figure 7-416 Release the lower shield ........................................................................................................................... 1065
Figure 7-417 Disconnect two connectors ...................................................................................................................... 1065
Figure 7-418 Locate sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 1066
Figure 7-419 Lower the output tray ............................................................................................................................... 1066

lxxii ENWW
Figure 7-420 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1067
Figure 7-421 Release the shield ..................................................................................................................................... 1067
Figure 7-422 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1068
Figure 7-423 Locate sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 1068
Figure 7-424 Move the staple unit to the center ........................................................................................................... 1069
Figure 7-425 Disconnect three connectors .................................................................................................................... 1069
Figure 7-426 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1070
Figure 7-427 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1070
Figure 7-428 Rotate the sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 1071
Figure 7-429 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1071
Figure 7-430 Remove the front tamper shaft ............................................................................................................... 1072
Figure 7-431 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws ............................................................................ 1072
Figure 7-432 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1073
Figure 7-433 Remove the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................. 1073
Figure 7-434 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1074
Figure 7-435 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1074
Figure 7-436 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1075
Figure 7-437 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1075
Figure 7-438 Lift the edges of the tampers ................................................................................................................... 1076
Figure 7-439 Remove the ejector unit ........................................................................................................................... 1076
Figure 7-440 Reinstall the front tamper shaft .............................................................................................................. 1077
Figure 7-441 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................ 1077
Figure 7-442 Remove the rear tamper .......................................................................................................................... 1078
Figure 7-443 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1078
Figure 7-444 Release the belt and remove the motor ................................................................................................... 1079
Figure 7-445 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1081
Figure 7-446 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1082
Figure 7-447 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1082
Figure 7-448 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1083
Figure 7-449 Lift the top hinge pin ................................................................................................................................ 1083
Figure 7-450 Remove the top hinge pin ......................................................................................................................... 1084
Figure 7-451 Release the lower hinge pin ..................................................................................................................... 1084
Figure 7-452 Remove the lower hinge pin ..................................................................................................................... 1085
Figure 7-453 Remove one screw and the front door ..................................................................................................... 1085
Figure 7-454 Remove the jam-access knob ................................................................................................................... 1086
Figure 7-455 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1086
Figure 7-456 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................. 1087
Figure 7-457 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1087
Figure 7-458 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1088
Figure 7-459 Remove the booklet tray .......................................................................................................................... 1088
Figure 7-460 Install the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................. 1089

ENWW lxxiii
 Figure 7-461 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1089
Figure 7-462 Remove the caster cover .......................................................................................................................... 1090
Figure 7-463 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1090
Figure 7-464 Release the lower shield ........................................................................................................................... 1091
Figure 7-465 Disconnect two connectors ...................................................................................................................... 1091
Figure 7-466 Locate sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 1092
Figure 7-467 Lower the output tray ............................................................................................................................... 1092
Figure 7-468 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1093
Figure 7-469 Release the shield ..................................................................................................................................... 1093
Figure 7-470 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1094
Figure 7-471 Locate sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 1094
Figure 7-472 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1095
Figure 7-473 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1095
Figure 7-474 Remove two screws and the motor .......................................................................................................... 1096
Figure 7-475 Install the motor and bracket ................................................................................................................... 1096
Figure 7-476 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1099
Figure 7-477 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1100
Figure 7-478 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1100
Figure 7-479 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1101
Figure 7-480 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1101
Figure 7-481 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1102
Figure 7-482 Lower the output tray ............................................................................................................................... 1102
Figure 7-483 Open two retainers ................................................................................................................................... 1103
Figure 7-484 Disconnect three connectors .................................................................................................................... 1103
Figure 7-485 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................ 1104
Figure 7-486 Remove four screws and the motor assembly ......................................................................................... 1104
Figure 7-487 Remove the motor assembly ................................................................................................................... 1105
Figure 7-488 Remove the bushing ................................................................................................................................. 1105
Figure 7-489 Install the bushing .................................................................................................................................... 1106
Figure 7-490 Install the motor assembly ...................................................................................................................... 1106
Figure 7-491 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1109
Figure 7-492 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1112
Figure 7-493 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1113
Figure 7-494 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1113
Figure 7-495 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1114
Figure 7-496 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1114
Figure 7-497 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1115
Figure 7-498 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher .................................................................................... 1115
Figure 7-499 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw .................................................................................. 1116
Figure 7-500 Release the metal bracket ........................................................................................................................ 1116
Figure 7-501 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1117

lxxiv ENWW
Figure 7-502 Slide the right rail ..................................................................................................................................... 1117
Figure 7-503 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1118
Figure 7-504 Remove the booklet finisher .................................................................................................................... 1118
Figure 7-505 Position the hooks .................................................................................................................................... 1119
Figure 7-506 Align arrows .............................................................................................................................................. 1119
Figure 7-507 Align arrows .............................................................................................................................................. 1120
Figure 7-508 Extend the right rail .................................................................................................................................. 1120
Figure 7-509 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1123
Figure 7-510 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1124
Figure 7-511 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1124
Figure 7-512 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1125
Figure 7-513 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1125
Figure 7-514 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1126
Figure 7-515 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher .................................................................................... 1126
Figure 7-516 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw .................................................................................. 1127
Figure 7-517 Release the metal bracket ........................................................................................................................ 1127
Figure 7-518 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1128
Figure 7-519 Slide the right rail ..................................................................................................................................... 1128
Figure 7-520 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1129
Figure 7-521 Remove the booklet finisher .................................................................................................................... 1129
Figure 7-522 Position the hooks .................................................................................................................................... 1130
Figure 7-523 Align arrows .............................................................................................................................................. 1130
Figure 7-524 Align arrows .............................................................................................................................................. 1131
Figure 7-525 Extend the right rail .................................................................................................................................. 1131
Figure 7-526 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1132
Figure 7-527 Remove one screw and the metal cover .................................................................................................. 1132
Figure 7-528 Remove four screws and the PCA ............................................................................................................. 1133
Figure 7-529 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1135
Figure 7-530 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1136
Figure 7-531 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1136
Figure 7-532 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1137
Figure 7-533 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1137
Figure 7-534 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1138
Figure 7-535 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1138
Figure 7-536 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1139
Figure 7-537 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1139
Figure 7-538 Remove the lower right shield ................................................................................................................. 1140
Figure 7-539 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1140
Figure 7-540 Raise the jam access cover ....................................................................................................................... 1141
Figure 7-541 Raise the booklet width guide .................................................................................................................. 1141
Figure 7-542 Disconnect three connectors .................................................................................................................... 1142

ENWW lxxv
 Figure 7-543 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1142
Figure 7-544 Release the guide arm .............................................................................................................................. 1143
Figure 7-545 Lower the width guide .............................................................................................................................. 1143
Figure 7-546 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1144
Figure 7-547 Remove the fold stopper unit ................................................................................................................... 1144
Figure 7-548 Adjust the alignment gauge ..................................................................................................................... 1145
Figure 7-549 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1147
Figure 7-550 Remove the booklet feed entrance motor ............................................................................................... 1148
Figure 7-551 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1150
Figure 7-552 Remove the TE presser motor .................................................................................................................. 1151
Figure 7-553 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1153
Figure 7-554 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1154
Figure 7-555 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1154
Figure 7-556 Remove the lower right shield ................................................................................................................. 1155
Figure 7-557 Remove the stopper moving motor ......................................................................................................... 1155
Figure 7-558 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1158
Figure 7-559 Remove the separate pawl motor ............................................................................................................ 1159
Figure 7-560 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................. 1161
Figure 7-561 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1162
Figure 7-562 Remove six screws ................................................................................................................................... 1162
Figure 7-563 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ...................................................................................... 1163
Figure 7-564 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................. 1163
Figure 7-565 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................... 1164
Figure 7-566 Remove the folding roller motor .............................................................................................................. 1164
Figure 7-567 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1167
Figure 7-568 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1168
Figure 7-569 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1168
Figure 7-570 Remove the lower right shield ................................................................................................................. 1169
Figure 7-571 Remove the blade motor .......................................................................................................................... 1169
Figure 7-572 Remove five screws and the cover ........................................................................................................... 1172
Figure 7-573 Check arrow alignment ............................................................................................................................. 1173
Figure 7-574 Disconnect two connectors ...................................................................................................................... 1173
Figure 7-575 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1174
Figure 7-576 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt ............................................................................................................ 1174
Figure 7-577 Remove the bracket and motor ................................................................................................................ 1175
Figure 7-578 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1175
Figure 7-579 Install one screw ....................................................................................................................................... 1176
Figure 7-580 Check arrow alignment ............................................................................................................................. 1176
Figure 7-581 Align arrows .............................................................................................................................................. 1177
Figure 7-582 Finisher system diagram .......................................................................................................................... 1180
Figure 8-1 Finisher system—sectional view ................................................................................................................. 1191

lxxvi ENWW
Figure 8-2 Finisher system—paper path ....................................................................................................................... 1192
Figure 8-3 Finisher system—electrical parts layout ..................................................................................................... 1193
Figure 8-4 Finisher system—block diagram ................................................................................................................. 1195
Figure 8-5 Finisher system—PBA connection information ........................................................................................... 1195
Figure 8-6 Remove the entrance sensor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................... 1201
Figure 8-7 Remove the entrance sensor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................... 1201
Figure 8-8 Remove the entrance sensor (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................... 1202
Figure 8-9 Remove the entrance sensor (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................... 1202
Figure 8-10 Remove the entrance sensor (5 of 7) ......................................................................................................... 1203
Figure 8-11 Remove the entrance sensor (6 of 7) ......................................................................................................... 1203
Figure 8-12 Remove the entrance sensor (7 of 7) ......................................................................................................... 1203
Figure 8-13 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1205
Figure 8-14 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1205
Figure 8-15 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1206
Figure 8-16 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1206
Figure 8-17 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1207
Figure 8-18 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1208
Figure 8-19 Remove the entrance motor (6 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1208
Figure 8-20 Remove the entrance motor (7 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1209
Figure 8-21 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1211
Figure 8-22 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1211
Figure 8-23 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1212
Figure 8-24 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1212
Figure 8-25 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1213
Figure 8-26 Remove the exit sensor .............................................................................................................................. 1214
Figure 8-27 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3) .................................................................................................................. 1216
Figure 8-28 Remove the exit motor (2 of 3) .................................................................................................................. 1216
Figure 8-29 Remove the exit motor (3 of 3) .................................................................................................................. 1217
Figure 8-30 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (1 of 6) ................................................................................ 1219
Figure 8-31 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (2 of 6) ................................................................................ 1219
Figure 8-32 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6) ................................................................................ 1220
Figure 8-33 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6) ................................................................................. 1220
Figure 8-34 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6) ................................................................................. 1221
Figure 8-35 Remove the front jogger motor (1 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1223
Figure 8-36 Remove the front jogger motor (2 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1223
Figure 8-37 Remove the front jogger motor (3 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1224
Figure 8-38 Remove the front jogger motor (4 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1224
Figure 8-39 Remove the front jogger motor (5 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1225
Figure 8-40 Remove the front jogger motor (6 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1225
Figure 8-41 Remove the front jogger motor (7 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1226
Figure 8-42 Remove the front jogger motor (8 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1226

ENWW lxxvii
 Figure 8-43 Remove the front jogger motor (9 of 22) ................................................................................................... 1227
Figure 8-44 Remove the front jogger motor (10 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1227
Figure 8-45 Remove the front jogger motor (11 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1228
Figure 8-46 Remove the front jogger motor (12 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1228
Figure 8-47 Remove the front jogger motor (13 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1229
Figure 8-48 Remove the front jogger motor (14 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1229
Figure 8-49 Remove the front jogger motor (15 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1230
Figure 8-50 Remove the front jogger motor (16 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1230
Figure 8-51 Remove the front jogger motor (17 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1231
Figure 8-52 Remove the front jogger motor (18 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1231
Figure 8-53 Remove the front jogger motor (19 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1232
Figure 8-54 Remove the front jogger motor (20 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1232
Figure 8-55 Remove the front jogger motor (21 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1233
Figure 8-56 Remove the front jogger motor (22 of 22) ................................................................................................. 1233
Figure 8-57 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1235
Figure 8-58 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1235
Figure 8-59 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1236
Figure 8-60 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1236
Figure 8-61 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1237
Figure 8-62 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1237
Figure 8-63 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1238
Figure 8-64 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1238
Figure 8-65 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1239
Figure 8-66 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1239
Figure 8-67 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1240
Figure 8-68 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (1 of 6) ................................................................................. 1240
Figure 8-69 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (2 of 6) ................................................................................. 1241
Figure 8-70 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (3 of 6) ................................................................................. 1241
Figure 8-71 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6) ................................................................................. 1242
Figure 8-72 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6) ................................................................................. 1242
Figure 8-73 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1243
Figure 8-74 Remove the front jogger home sensor (11 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1243
Figure 8-75 Remove the front jogger home sensor (12 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1244
Figure 8-76 Remove the front jogger home sensor (13 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1244
Figure 8-77 Remove the front jogger home sensor ...................................................................................................... 1245
Figure 8-78 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1247
Figure 8-79 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) .......................................................................................................... 1247
Figure 8-80 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1248
Figure 8-81 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1248
Figure 8-82 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1249
Figure 8-83 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1249

lxxviii ENWW
Figure 8-84 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1250
Figure 8-85 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1250
Figure 8-86 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 15) ........................................................................................ 1251
Figure 8-87 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3) ....................................................................................................... 1251
Figure 8-88 Remove the rear jogger motor (2 of 3) ....................................................................................................... 1252
Figure 8-89 Remove the rear jogger motor (3 of 3) ....................................................................................................... 1252
Figure 8-90 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3) ....................................................................................................... 1253
Figure 8-91 Remove the rear jogger motor (2 of 3) ....................................................................................................... 1253
Figure 8-92 Remove the rear jogger motor (3 of 3) ....................................................................................................... 1254
Figure 8-93 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 11) ........................................................................................................ 1256
Figure 8-94 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 11) ........................................................................................................ 1256
Figure 8-95 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 11) ........................................................................................ 1257
Figure 8-96 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 11) ........................................................................................ 1257
Figure 8-97 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 11) ........................................................................................ 1258
Figure 8-98 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 11) ........................................................................................ 1258
Figure 8-99 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 11) ........................................................................................ 1259
Figure 8-100 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 11) ..................................................................................... 1259
Figure 8-101 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 11) ................................................................................... 1260
Figure 8-102 Remove the rear jogger home sensor (11 of 11) ..................................................................................... 1260
Figure 8-103 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3) ................................................................................................................ 1262
Figure 8-104 Remove the exit motor (2 of 3) ................................................................................................................ 1262
Figure 8-105 Remove the stapler (1 of 2) ...................................................................................................................... 1263
Figure 8-106 Remove the stapler (2 of 2) ...................................................................................................................... 1263
Figure 8-107 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1265
Figure 8-108 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1265
Figure 8-109 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1266
Figure 8-110 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1266
Figure 8-111 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1267
Figure 8-112 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (1 of 6) .............................................................................. 1268
Figure 8-113 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (2 of 6) .............................................................................. 1268
Figure 8-114 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6) .............................................................................. 1269
Figure 8-115 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6) ............................................................................... 1269
Figure 8-116 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6) ............................................................................... 1270
Figure 8-117 Remove the stapler position sensor (1 of 7) ............................................................................................ 1271
Figure 8-118 Remove the stapler position sensor (2 of 7) ............................................................................................ 1271
Figure 8-119 Remove the stapler position sensor (3 of 7) ............................................................................................ 1272
Figure 8-120 Remove the stapler position sensor (4 of 7) ............................................................................................ 1272
Figure 8-121 Remove the stapler position sensor (5 of 7) ............................................................................................ 1273
Figure 8-122 Remove the stapler position sensor (6 of 7) ............................................................................................ 1273
Figure 8-123 Remove the stapler position sensor (7 of 7) ............................................................................................ 1274
Figure 8-124 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1276

ENWW lxxix
 Figure 8-125 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1276
Figure 8-126 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1277
Figure 8-127 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1277
Figure 8-128 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1278
Figure 8-129 Remove the traverse motor (1 of 2) ......................................................................................................... 1279
Figure 8-130 Remove the traverse motor (2 of 2) ......................................................................................................... 1279
Figure 8-131 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1281
Figure 8-132 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1281
Figure 8-133 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1282
Figure 8-134 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1282
Figure 8-135 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1283
Figure 8-136 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1283
Figure 8-137 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1284
Figure 8-138 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1284
Figure 8-139 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1285
Figure 8-140 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1285
Figure 8-141 Remove the stacker motor ....................................................................................................................... 1286
Figure 8-142 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1288
Figure 8-143 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1288
Figure 8-144 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1289
Figure 8-145 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1289
Figure 8-146 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1290
Figure 8-147 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1290
Figure 8-148 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1291
Figure 8-149 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1291
Figure 8-150 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1292
Figure 8-151 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1292
Figure 8-152 Remove the stacker encoder sensor ........................................................................................................ 1293
Figure 8-153 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1295
Figure 8-154 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1295
Figure 8-155 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1296
Figure 8-156 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1296
Figure 8-157 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1297
Figure 8-158 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1297
Figure 8-159 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1298
Figure 8-160 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1298
Figure 8-161 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1299
Figure 8-162 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1299
Figure 8-163 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 1300
Figure 8-164 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 1300
Figure 8-165 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1302

lxxx ENWW
Figure 8-166 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1302
Figure 8-167 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1303
Figure 8-168 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1303
Figure 8-169 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1304
Figure 8-170 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1304
Figure 8-171 Remove the stack beam sensor ............................................................................................................... 1305
Figure 8-172 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1307
Figure 8-173 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1307
Figure 8-174 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1308
Figure 8-175 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1308
Figure 8-176 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1309
Figure 8-177 Remove the tray ....................................................................................................................................... 1310
Figure 8-178 Remove the sub-tray ................................................................................................................................ 1310
Figure 8-179 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1311
Figure 8-180 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1311
Figure 8-181 Remove the sub-stacker plate ................................................................................................................. 1312
Figure 8-182 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly ............................................................................ 1312
Figure 8-183 Release the motor paddle sub assembly ................................................................................................. 1313
Figure 8-184 Remove the guide harness front .............................................................................................................. 1313
Figure 8-185 Release the finisher sub-motor tray ........................................................................................................ 1314
Figure 8-186 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1314
Figure 8-187 Release the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1315
Figure 8-188 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1315
Figure 8-189 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1317
Figure 8-190 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1317
Figure 8-191 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1318
Figure 8-192 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1318
Figure 8-193 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1319
Figure 8-194 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1319
Figure 8-195 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1320
Figure 8-196 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1320
Figure 8-197 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1321
Figure 8-198 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15) ..................................................................................... 1321
Figure 8-199 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4) ................................................................................... 1322
Figure 8-200 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4) ................................................................................... 1322
Figure 8-201 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4) ................................................................................... 1323
Figure 8-202 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4) ................................................................................... 1323
Figure 8-203 Remove the tray ....................................................................................................................................... 1325
Figure 8-204 Remove the sub-tray ................................................................................................................................ 1325
Figure 8-205 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1326
Figure 8-206 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1326

ENWW lxxxi
 Figure 8-207 Remove the sub-stacker plate ................................................................................................................. 1327
Figure 8-208 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly ............................................................................ 1327
Figure 8-209 Release the motor paddle sub assembly ................................................................................................. 1328
Figure 8-210 Remove the guide harness front .............................................................................................................. 1328
Figure 8-211 Release the finisher sub-motor tray ........................................................................................................ 1329
Figure 8-212 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1329
Figure 8-213 Release the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1330
Figure 8-214 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1330
Figure 8-215 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1334
Figure 8-216 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1334
Figure 8-217 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1335
Figure 8-218 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1335
Figure 8-219 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1336
Figure 8-220 Remove the tray ....................................................................................................................................... 1337
Figure 8-221 Remove the sub-tray ................................................................................................................................ 1337
Figure 8-222 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1338
Figure 8-223 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1338
Figure 8-224 Remove the sub-stacker plate ................................................................................................................. 1339
Figure 8-225 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly ............................................................................ 1339
Figure 8-226 Release the motor paddle sub assembly ................................................................................................. 1340
Figure 8-227 Remove the guide harness front .............................................................................................................. 1340
Figure 8-228 Release the finisher sub-motor tray ........................................................................................................ 1341
Figure 8-229 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1341
Figure 8-230 Release the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1342
Figure 8-231 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1342
Figure 8-232 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4) .................................................................................... 1343
Figure 8-233 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4) .................................................................................... 1343
Figure 8-234 Remove the paper support home sensor (3 of 4) .................................................................................... 1344
Figure 8-235 Remove the paper support home sensor (4 of 4) .................................................................................... 1344
Figure 8-236 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1346
Figure 8-237 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1346
Figure 8-238 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1347
Figure 8-239 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1347
Figure 8-240 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1348
Figure 8-241 Remove the tray ....................................................................................................................................... 1349
Figure 8-242 Remove the sub-tray ................................................................................................................................ 1349
Figure 8-243 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1350
Figure 8-244 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1350
Figure 8-245 Remove the sub-stacker plate ................................................................................................................. 1351
Figure 8-246 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly ............................................................................ 1351
Figure 8-247 Release the motor paddle sub assembly ................................................................................................. 1352

lxxxii ENWW
Figure 8-248 Remove the guide harness front .............................................................................................................. 1352
Figure 8-249 Release the finisher sub-motor tray ........................................................................................................ 1353
Figure 8-250 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1353
Figure 8-251 Release the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1354
Figure 8-252 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1354
Figure 8-253 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4) .................................................................................... 1355
Figure 8-254 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4) .................................................................................... 1355
Figure 8-255 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6) ........................................................................................... 1356
Figure 8-256 Remove the ejector motor assembly (2 of 6) ........................................................................................... 1356
Figure 8-257 Remove two belt-timing gears ................................................................................................................. 1357
Figure 8-258 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw ........................................................................................... 1357
Figure 8-259 Disconnect connectors ............................................................................................................................. 1358
Figure 8-260 Remove the motor assembly ................................................................................................................... 1358
Figure 8-261 Remove the motor assembly ................................................................................................................... 1360
Figure 8-262 Remove the main paddle motor ............................................................................................................... 1360
Figure 8-263 Remove the bracket-paddle sensor ......................................................................................................... 1362
Figure 8-264 Remove the main paddle home sensor .................................................................................................... 1362
Figure 8-265 Remove the main paddle .......................................................................................................................... 1364
Figure 8-266 Remove the tray ....................................................................................................................................... 1366
Figure 8-267 Remove the sub-tray ................................................................................................................................ 1366
Figure 8-268 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1367
Figure 8-269 Remove the PBA ....................................................................................................................................... 1367
Figure 8-270 Remove the sub-stacker plate ................................................................................................................. 1368
Figure 8-271 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly ............................................................................ 1368
Figure 8-272 Release the motor paddle sub assembly ................................................................................................. 1369
Figure 8-273 Remove the guide harness front .............................................................................................................. 1369
Figure 8-274 Release the finisher sub-motor tray ........................................................................................................ 1370
Figure 8-275 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1370
Figure 8-276 Release the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1371
Figure 8-277 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1371
Figure 8-278 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4) .................................................................................... 1372
Figure 8-279 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4) .................................................................................... 1372
Figure 8-280 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6) ........................................................................................... 1373
Figure 8-281 Remove the ejector motor assembly (2 of 6) ........................................................................................... 1373
Figure 8-282 Remove two belt-timing gears ................................................................................................................. 1374
Figure 8-283 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw ........................................................................................... 1374
Figure 8-284 Disconnect connectors ............................................................................................................................. 1375
Figure 8-285 Remove the motor assembly ................................................................................................................... 1375
Figure 8-286 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................. 1376
Figure 8-287 Remove the ejector assembly .................................................................................................................. 1376
Figure 8-288 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1378

ENWW lxxxiii
 Figure 8-289 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1378
Figure 8-290 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1379
Figure 8-291 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1379
Figure 8-292 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7) ........................................................................................................ 1380
Figure 8-293 Remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly .................................................................................. 1381
Figure 8-294 Remove the punch dust full sensor .......................................................................................................... 1381
Figure 8-295 Remove three screws ............................................................................................................................... 1383
Figure 8-296 Remove the e-ring .................................................................................................................................... 1383
Figure 8-297 Remove the sheet-punch front ................................................................................................................ 1384
Figure 8-298 Remove the punch dummy ....................................................................................................................... 1384
Figure 8-299 Remove the bracket-SPT B ....................................................................................................................... 1385
Figure 8-300 Remove the door switch ........................................................................................................................... 1385
Figure 8-301 Remove the cover-rear ............................................................................................................................. 1387
Figure 8-302 Remove the finisher sub-cover middle and finisher sub-cover compile ................................................. 1387
Figure 8-303 Remove the tray ....................................................................................................................................... 1388
Figure 8-304 Remove the finisher sub-tray frame ........................................................................................................ 1388
Figure 8-305 Remove the PBA cover .............................................................................................................................. 1389
Figure 8-306 Remove four screws ................................................................................................................................. 1389
Figure 8-307 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................... 1390
Figure 8-308 Remove the switch assembly ................................................................................................................... 1390
Figure 8-309 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................... 1390
Figure 8-310 Remove the end fence home sensor ........................................................................................................ 1392

lxxxiv ENWW
1 Precautions

Please read the precautions listed below and follow them closely in order to prevent accidents or damage to
the printer.

● Safety warning

● Caution for safety

● ESD precautions

ENWW 1
 Safety warning
1. Service should be performed by a factory trained service technician.

This printer contains high voltages and lasers which are dangerous. This printer should only be serviced
by a factory trained service technician.

2. Use HP replacement parts.

There are no customer serviceable parts inside the printer. Do not make any unauthorized changes or
additions to the printer as these could cause the printer to malfunction and create an electric shock or
fire hazard.

3. Laser Safety Statement.

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter
J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the
requirements of IEC 60825-1. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser
system and printer are designed so that there is never human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance or a prescribed service condition.

● Wavelength: 800 nm

● Beam divergence

● Parallel: 11 degrees

● Perpendicular: 35 degrees

● Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW

WARNING! Do not operate or service the printer when the protective cover is removed from the laser/
scanner assembly. The reflected laser, although invisible, can cause eye damage.

Following these safety precautions will reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury.

4. Lithium battery not replaceable by user.

2 Chapter 1 Precautions ENWW

Caution for safety
Toxic material
This printer contains toxic materials which could cause illness if ingested.

● Keep the imaging unit and toner cartridge away from children. The toner powder in the imaging unit and
the toner cartridge might be harmful. If the toner powder is swallowed, contact a doctor.

Electric shock and fire safety precautions

Failure to follow these instructions could result in electric shock or cause a fire.

1. Use the correct voltage. Failure to do so could damage the printer and cause fire or electric shock.

2. Use the power cable supplied with the printer. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause
overheating and fire.

3. Do not overload the power socket. This could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and cause
fire.

4. Keep water and other liquids, paper clips, pins, and other foreign objects away from the printer. Contact
with liquids or these objects might cause electric shock or fire.

5. Do not touch the plugs on the ends of the power cable with wet hands. When servicing the printer,
remove the power plug from the wall socket.

6. Use caution when plugging or unplugging the power cable.

ENWW Caution for safety 3

 7. Take care of the power cable. Do not allow the power cable to become twisted or sharply bent around
corners as this will cause damage. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. Damage to the power
cable might cause overheating and fire. Exposed cables might cause electric shock. Replace damaged
power cable immediately. Do not reuse or repair a damaged power cable. Certain chemicals can damage
the coating on the power cable, weakening the coating or exposing cables which might cause electric
shock or fire.

8. Make sure that the power outlet and plugs are not cracked or broken. Repair these defects as soon as
possible. Be careful to not cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the printer.

9. Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. HP recommends the printer be disconnected from the
power source when thunder or lightning is expected. Do not touch the machine or the power cable if it is
still connected to the power outlet during these weather conditions.

10. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas. Install the printer in a clean, well-ventilated location. Do
not position the machine near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust build up
inside the printer can lead to overheating and cause fire or rust.

11. Do not place the printer in direct sunlight. Direct sunlight can cause the temperature inside the printer to
rise causing failure to work properly, and in extreme conditions, might lead to fire.

12. Do not insert metal objects into the printer through the ventilator fan or other parts of the casing. Doing
so could lead to the metal object making contact with the high voltage conductor inside the printer,
causing electric shock.

13. Wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cable before replacing the SMPS board to avoid electric
shock.

4 Chapter 1 Precautions ENWW

Handling precautions
The following instructions are for the user’s personal safety, to avoid injury, and to avoid damage to the
printer.

1. Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface capable of supporting the weight of the printer. Failure
to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall.

2. The printer contains rollers, gears, and fans. Make sure to not catch fingers, hair, or clothing in any these
rotating devices.

3. Do not place any small metal objects, or containers of water, chemicals, or other liquids close to the
printer. If spilled, these objects or liquids could get into the printer and cause damage, or cause electric
shock or fire.

4. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas, near an open window, or close to a humidifier or heater.
These conditions can cause damage to the printer.

5. Do place candles or burning cigarettes on the printer. Doing so could cause fire.

6. Make sure that the printer is installed and operated in an area that meets temperature and humidity
specifications.

● The printer cannot be used immediately after being stored at below zero Celsius for long periods of
time. Doing so could cause malfunction. Place the printer in an area where it can reach room
temperature before operation.

Removal and Replacement precautions

1. Use caution when replacing parts. Always use HP parts. Make sure to note the exact location of parts
and cable routing before dismantling any part of the printer. Make sure all parts and cables are replaced
correctly. Complete the following procedures before dismantling the printer or replacing any parts.

2. Make sure that the power cable is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.

3. Disconnect interface cables and power cables.

4. Use approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, printer name, voltage, and current or
temperature ratings are correct.

5. Do not excessive force to remove or refit parts, especially when fitting screws into plastic.

6. Make sure not to drop any small parts into the printer.

7. Be careful when handling the OPC drum:

● The OPC Drum can be permanently damaged if exposed to light. Be careful not to expose the OPC
Drum to direct sunlight, fluorescent light, or incandescent room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5
minutes can damage the surface of the photoconductive properties and will result in print quality
degradation. Be careful when servicing the printer. Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black
bag or other lightproof container. Be careful when working with the printer if the covers, especially
the top cover, are open, as light is admitted to the OPC area and can damage the OPC Drum.

● Make sure not to scratch the green surface of the OPC Drum Unit. If the green surface of the Drum
Cartridge is scratched or touched, the print quality will be compromised.

ENWW Caution for safety 5

 Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury
1. Be careful with high temperature parts.

The fuser unit operates at high temperatures. Wait for the fuser unit to cool down before disassembly.

2. Keep fingers, hair, and clothes away from moving parts.

To avoid injury, do not put fingers, hair, or clothes near moving parts such as the paper feeding entrance,
motor, and fan.

3. Use safe lifting and handling techniques to move the printer.

The printer is heavy. To avoid injury, use the lifting handles located on each side of the printer and lift
carefully.

4. Make sure the printer is installed safely.

Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface that is capable of supporting the weight of the printer.
Failure to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall, possibly causing personal injury or damage to the
printer.

5. Do not install the printer on a sloping or unstable surface. After installation, make sure that the printer is
stable.

ESD precautions
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching
an ESD-sensitive assembly.

Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

6 Chapter 1 Precautions ENWW

2 Product specifications and description

● Product Overview

● Specifications

● Machine external view

● Feeding system

● Image creation

● Fuser unit

● Laser scanner assembly

● Drive system

● Flatbed Scanner System

● Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) z bundles (GX)

● Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn bundles (LX)

● Hardware configuration

● Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) unit

● Inner finisher

ENWW 7
 Product Overview
● Printing Speed

◦ HP LaserJet MFP E72525

● Up to 25 ppm in A4/Letter

◦ HP LaserJet MFP E72530

● Up to 30 ppm in A4/Letter

◦ HP LaserJet MFP E72535

● Up to 35 ppm in A4/Letter

● Processor

◦ Dual Core 1.2 GHz

● Memory

◦ Flow 7 GB, non-flow 6 GB

● ADF

◦ Flow ADF

◦ ADF

● Control Panel

◦ 20.3 cm (8 in) Color Graphics Display (CGD) Touch

Screen

8 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Specifications
Product specifications are subject to change without notice.

General Specifications
Table 2-1 General specifications
Item Specification

Processor CPU 1.2 GHz

User Interface Control Panel Flow: 20.3 cm (8 in) Color Graphics Display
(CGD) with touchscreen; rotating
(adjustable angle) display; illuminated
Home button (for quick return to the Home
menu); USB High-speed 2.0 port; Hardware
Integration Pocket; Extended Keyboard

Non-Flow: 20.3 cm (8 in) Color Graphics

Display (CGD) with touchscreen; rotating
(adjustable angle) display; illuminated
Home button (for quick return to the Home
menu); USB High-speed 2.0 port; Hardware
Integration Pocket

LED 2 (Power/Status)

Key/Button 1 (Power)

Memory Standard Flow 7 GB, Managed 6 GB

Storage Standard One 320 GB Standard, embedded HP High-

Performance Secure Hard Disk; AES 256
hardware encryption or greater; Secure
erase capabilities (Secure File Erase-
Temporary Job Files, Secure Erase-Job
Data, Secure ATA Erase-Disk).

NOTE: US Government SKU uses 500 GB

FIPS 140–2 validated hard disk.

Optional N/A

Interface USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 2.0)

USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 2.0)

USB (EDI) N/A

Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)

Additional Wired LAN Support Optional

Wireless LAN Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC Active

Type

NFC Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC Active

Type

Other N/A

Warmup Time From Ready Less than 25 seconds

From Sleep Less than 23 seconds

ENWW Specifications 9
 Table 2-1 General specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Power Consumption Ready Less than 250 Wh

Normal operation Less than 800 Wh

Max/Peak Less than 1200 Wh

Sleep Less than 1.5 Wh

Power Off Less than 0 W

TEC ● E72525: Less than 1.478 Wh

● E72530: Less than 1.798

● E72535: Less than 2.279 Wh

Default Sleep Delay Time 2 minutes

Maximum Sleep Delay Time ● E72525/E72530: 60 minutes

● E72535: 120 minutes

Power Requirement ● Input Voltage (Europe): AC 187—253 V (-10%-6%)

● Input voltage (USA): AC 93.5–137 V (-10%-6%)

● Input Voltage (Korea): AC 187–253 V (-10%-6%)

● Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz

Acoustic Noise Level (Power) Power Emissions ● E72525: 6.5 Bel (A) , printing mono
simplex, A4 at 25 ppm

● E72530: 6.6 Bel (A), printing mono

simplex, A4 at 30 ppm

● E72535: 6.8 Bel (A), printing mono

simplex, A4 at 25 ppm

Acoustic Power Emissions (ready) Inaudible

Acoustic Power Emissions (active, copy) ● E72525: 6.7 Bel (A), ADF copy mono
simplex

● E72530: 6.8 Bell (A), ADF copy mono

simplex

● E72535: 6.8 Bel (A), ADF copy mono

simplex

Acoustic Power Emissions (active, scan) ● E72525, E72530, E72535: 6.2 Bel (A),
ADF scan mono simplex at 44 ipm

6.9 Bel (A), ADF scan mono simplex at

85 ipm

NOTE: Acoustic values are subject to change. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support.

10 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-1 General specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Acoustic Noise Level (Pressure) Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander ● E72525: 49 dB(A), printing mono
(active, printing) simplex, A4 at 25 ppm

● E72530: 50 dB(A), printing mono

simplex, A4 at 30 ppm

● E72535: 51 dB(A), printing mono

simplex, A4 at 25 ppm

Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander Inaudible

(ready)

Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander E72525, E72530, E72535: 52 dB(A), ADF

(active, copy) copy mono simplex

Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander E72525, E72530, E72535: 47 dB(A), ADF

(active, scan) scan mono simplex at 44 ipm

54 dB(A), ADF scan mono simplex at 85

ipm

Dimensions (W x D x H) LX set (including ADF hinge depth) 566 x 724 x 829 mm (22.3 x 28.5 x 32.6 in)

GX 585 x 775.9 x 878 mm (23 x 30.5 x 34.6 in)

Weight Net (SET with supplies) ● E72525: 66.195 kg (145.93 lb)

● E72530: 68.13 kg (150.2 lb)

● E72535: 68.13 kg (145.93 lb)

Recommended ● E72525: 5000 pages

● E72530: 6000 pages

● E72535: 7000 pages

Max Monthly Duty Cycle Up to 50,000 recommended monthly page volume

Print specifications
Table 2-2 Print specifications
Item Specification

Print Speed Simplex ● E72525

◦ Up to 25 ppm

● E72530

◦ Up to 30 ppm

● E72535

◦ Up to 35 ppm

FPOT From Ready ● E72525: Less than 8.5 seconds

● E72530: Less than 8.0 seconds

● E72535: Less than 7.5 seconds

ENWW Specifications 11
 Table 2-2 Print specifications (continued)

Item Specification

From Sleep ● E72525: Less than 31.5 seconds

● E72530: Less than 30 seconds

● E72535: Less than 30.5 seconds

Resolution Optical 600 x 600 dpi

Enhanced Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi with reduced speed

Printer Language HP PCL 6/HP PCL 5c/HP PostScript Level 3

Emulation/PDF (v1.7)/AirPrint™
compatible

Font 84 scalable TrueType fonts

Supported Operating Systems Windows ● Windows XP (32–bit, 64–bit)

● Windows 2003 Server (32–bit, 64–

bit)

● Windows Vista (32–bit, 64–bit)

● Windows 2008 Server (32–bit, 64–

bit)

● Windows 7 (32–bit, 64–bit)

● Windows 2008 Server R2 (64–bit)

● Windows 8 (32–bit, 64–bit)

● Windows 8.1 (32–bit, 64–bit)

● Windows Server 2012 (64–bit)

● Windows Server 2012 R2 (64–bit)

Linux ● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6

● Fedora 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,

19

● openSUSE 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3,

11.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3

● Ubuntu 10.04, 10.10, 11.04, 11.10,

12.04, 12.10, 13.04

● SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11

● Debian 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 7.1

● Mint 13, 14, 15

UNIX ● Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC)

● HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3

(PA-RISC, Itanium)

● IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 7.1

(PowerPC)

Mac OS X OS X 10.5–10.9

12 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-2 Print specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Network Protocol ● IP Management (DHCP, BOOTP, AutoIP, SetIP, Static)

● Discovery Protocol (SLP, UPnP, Bonjour, DNS, WINS)

● Printing Protocol (TCP/IP, LPR, IPP, WSD)

● Management Protocol (SNMP v1.2, SNMP3, SMTP, Talnet)

● Scan Protocol (SMTP, FTP, SMB, WSD)

● Security Protocol (SMB, Kerberos, LDAP, IPsec, EAP)

Duplex Print Built in

Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS

Print Features ● WSD print

● Secure print

● Stored print

● Booklet

● N-up

● Cover page

● Insert page

● Except page

● Barcode

● Eco

● Poster

● Glossy

● Watermark

● Tray priority setting

● Auto tray setting

● Tray protection

● USB print

● Secure PDF print

● Google Cloud print

Scan specification
Table 2-3 Scan specification
Item Specification

Scan method MMT

ENWW Specifications 13
 Table 2-3 Scan specification (continued)

Item Specification

Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network SANE

Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color

Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds (hardware) DN bundles (black and white, gray scale,
and color):

● Simplex up to 80 ipm @ 600 dpi

● Duplex up to 120 ipm @ 600 dpi

Z bundles (black and white, gray scale, and

color)

● Simplex up to 120 ipm @ 600 dpi

● Duplex up to 240 ipm @ 600 dpi

File Formats ● PDF

● Searchable PDF

● Compact PDF

● PDF Encryption

● Digital Signature in PDF

● PDF/A

● Single-Page PDF

● Multi-Page PDF

● TIFF

● Single-Page TIFF

● Multi-Page TIFF

● XPS

● Single-Page XPS

● Multi-Page XPS

● JPEG

● PNG

Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Optical (flatbed) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Enhanced (flatbed) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Scan Destinations Email/FTP/SMB/HDD/USB/WSD/PC

Multiple Destinations Yes

14 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-3 Scan specification (continued)

Item Specification

Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/TLS)

● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)

● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)

● WSD

● T4Net

Scan Size ADF Minimum for dn bundles: 128 x 140 mm (5

x 5.5”)

Minimum for z bundles: 105 x 148 mm

(4.13 x 5.82 in)

Maximum 297 x 437 mm (11.7 x 17.2 in)

Flatbed Maximum 297 x 437 mm (11.7 x 17.2 in)

Scan Original Types Text/Text and Photo/Photo

Copy specification
Table 2-4 Copy specification
Item Specification

Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E72525: Up to 25 cpm

● E72530: Up to 30 cpm

● E72535: Up to 35 cpm

FCOT From Ready ● E72525: Less than 6.2 seconds

● E72530: Less than 5.5 seconds

● E72535: Less than 4.9 seconds

Resolution ADF (Flow ADF/ADF) ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Flatbed ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Reduce/Enlarge ADF (Flow ADF/ADF) 25–400%

Flatbed 25–400%

ENWW Specifications 15
 Table 2-4 Copy specification (continued)

Item Specification

Copier Settings ● 2–sided copying

● Scalability

● Image adjustments (darkness, contrast, background clean up, sharpness)

● Optimized text/picture (text, mixed, printed picture, photograph)

● N-Up

● N or Z-ordering

● Content orientation

● Collation

● Booklet

● ID scan

● Job build

● Job storage

● Watermark

● Stamps

● Book mode scans

● Erase edges

● Automatically detect color/mono

● Image preview

16 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-4 Copy specification (continued)

Item Specification

Copy Original Type ● Text

● Text and Printed Photo

● Text and Glossy Photo

● Newspaper

● Printed Photo

● Glossy Photo

● Copied Original

● Map

● Light Original

● ID Copy

● N-up

● Booklet

● Image Repeat

● Auto Fit

● Book Copy

● Poster Copy

● Watermark

● Image Overlay

● Stamp

● Covers

● Job Build

● Preview

● Erase Edge

● Image Shift

● Image Adjustment

● Background Adjustment

Paper handling specification

Table 2-5 Paper handling specification
Item Specification

Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets

Multipurpose 100 sheets

ENWW Specifications 17
 Table 2-5 Paper handling specification (continued)

Item Specification

Other Options Dual Cassette Feeder (2 x 520 sheets)

Bottom HCI 2000 sheets, A4 only

Maximum 1040 Std + 100 Tray 1 + 2000 bHCI

Standard Cassette Tray Capacity 520 sheets x 2

Media Sizes ● Cassette 1: 148.5 x 210 mm — 297 x

354 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in — 11.7 x 14 in)

● Cassette 1: 148.5 x 210 mm — 297 x

432 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in — 11.7 x 17 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin CardStock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Envelope

● Label

18 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-5 Paper handling specification (continued)

Item Specification

Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m² (18.5-24 lb/

Duplex)

● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m² (25-28 lb /

Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m²

(Duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper :

177-220 g/m²

● Thin Paper: 60-69 g/m² (16-19 lb/

Duplex)

● Cotton paper : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Colored : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Pre-Printed : 71-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Recycled : 60-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Bond Paper: 105-120 g/m² (Duplex)

● Letterhead : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Hole Punched Paper: 75-90 g/m²

(Duplex)

● Thin CardStock : 105-163 g/m²

(Duplex)

● Thin Glossy : 106-163 g/m² (Duplex)

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: Yes

Tray 1 Capacity 100 sheets

Media Sizes 98 x 148 mm — 297 x 432 mm (3.8 x 5.8 in

— 11.7 x 17 in)

ENWW Specifications 19
 Table 2-5 Paper handling specification (continued)

Item Specification

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin CardStock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Envelope

● Label

● Card transparency

Media Weight 60 to 176 g/m² (16 to 47 lb): Simplex,

Duplex Envelope (75 to 90 g/m²)

Label (120 to 150 g/m²): Simplex

Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes

Paper Size Detect: Yes

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Capacity 250 sheets

Duplex Document Scanning Yes

Document Size ● Width: 128 — 297 mm (5 — 11.7 in)

● Length: 140 — 432 mm (5.5 — 17 in)

Document Weight ● E72525

◦ Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m² (11.25

— 43.25 lb)

◦ Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m² (12.25

— 34 lb)

● E72530, E72535

20 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-5 Paper handling specification (continued)

Item Specification

◦ Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m² (11.25

— 43.25 lb)

◦ Duplex: 50 — 163 g/m² (13.25

— 34 lb)

Sensor Document Size Sensing: Potentiometer

Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/Statement/

Folio/Executive

Printer Output Capacity Standard 500 sheets, face down

Maximum 615 sheets [500 sheets (Standard) + 125

sheets (Job Separator)]

Printing Size Maximum Size 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in)

Minimum Size 98 x 148 mm (3.8 x 5.8 in)

Maximum Printing Area Trays 1–3 Top: 4.23 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.23 +/- 1.5
mm

Simplex from optional trays Top and Left: 4.23 +/- 2 mm

Duplex Top: 4.23 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.23 +/- 2 mm

Duplex Printing Support Built-in

Media Sizes 148.5 x 210 mm — 297 x 432 mm (5.8 x

8.2 in — 11.7 x 17 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin CardStock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Heavy Weight

60 to 176 g/m² (16 to 47 lb)

ENWW Specifications 21
 Software and solution specification
Table 2-6 Software and solution specification

Item Specification

Application Anyweb Print N/A

Easy Printer Manager Windows/Mac

Easy Color Manager N/A

Easy Document Creator Windows

Net PC Fax Windows/Mac

Direct Printing Utility Windows

Easy Deployment Manager Windows

Easy Eco Driver Windows

Universal Printer Driver Windows

Universal Scan Driver Windows

Scan HP Scan

Mobile Printing Google Cloud Print (GCP) Yes

AirPrint Yes (‘14.09)

Solution Device Management SyncThru 6.0

Output Management CounThru Enterprise/Pro

Document Management and Distribution SmarThru Workflow 3.0

Security SecuThru Pro 1.0

Mobility SCP 1.0 (‘14.09)

Security Authentication (Local) Yes

Authentication (Network) Yes (SMB/Kerberos/LDAP/IPSec/EAP)

IP Address Filtering Yes (IPv4 Filtering/IPv6 Filtering/MAC

Filtering)

HDD Overwrite (Standard) Yes

HDD Overwrite (Maximum Overwrites) 9

Secure Print Yes

Encrypted Secure Print Yes

Encrypted PDF Mode (Encrypted Scanning) Yes

IP Sec Yes

Smart Card Authentication Yes

22 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Supplies
Item Part number Estimated life

HP Black Managed LJ Toner W9005MC 35,000 pages

Cartridge

HP Managed LJ Toner Collection W9007MC 100,000 pages

Unit

NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.

Maintenance parts
Table 2-7 Maintenance parts

Item Part Number Life

HP Black Managed LJ Imaging Drum W9006MC 200,000 pages

HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit W9007MC 100,000 pages

HP LaserJet Black Developer Unit Z9M05A 300,000 pages

HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Assembly Z9M06A 250,000 pages

HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Assembly Z9M07A 250,000 pages

HP LaserJet Transfer Roller Z9M08A 150,000 pages

HP LaserJet Trays 2–x Rollers Z7Y83A 200,000 pages

HP LaserJet Tray 1 Roller Z7Y88A 150,000 pages

HP LaserJet Flow ADF Pick Roller Z8W50A 200,000 pages

HP LaserJet Flow ADF Separation Roller Z8W51A 200,000 pages

HP LaserJet ADF Pick Roller Z7Y64A 200,000 pages

HP LaserJet ADF Separation Roller Z7Y65A 200,000 pages

NOTE: Depending on the print patterns and job mode used, the lifespan can differ.

Optional
Table 2-8 Option List
Image Item Model E72535 E72530 E72525

HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Y1F97A Yes Yes Yes

Workgroup Feeder

ENWW Specifications 23
 Table 2-8 Option List (continued)

Image Item Model E72535 E72530 E72525

HP LaserJet Workgroup Cabinet Y1G17A Yes Yes Yes

HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Y1F99A Yes Yes Yes

Capacity Tray WG (available April
2017)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A Yes Yes Yes

HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A Yes Yes No

HP LaserJet Job Separator WG Y1G15A Yes Yes Yes

HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Y1G14A Yes Yes Yes

Finisher Staples

HP LaserJet Inner/Booklet Y1G13A Yes Yes Yes

Finisher Staples

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole Y1G02A Yes Yes Yes

2/3 Punch

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole Y1G03A Yes Yes Yes

2/4 Punch

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G04A Yes Yes Yes

Swedish Punch

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Y1G10A Yes Yes Yes

Accessory

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Y1G11A Yes Yes Yes

Accessory

HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Y1G12A Yes Yes Yes

Accessory

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A Yes Yes Yes

WG

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A#BGJ Yes Yes Yes

Accessory WG 110V

24 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-8 Option List (continued)

Image Item Model E72535 E72530 E72525

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A#B19 Yes Yes Yes

Accessory WG 220V

HP Second Exit Y1G23A Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: Required if attaching an

external finisher.

HP Spacer Y1G24A Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: Required if attaching an

external finisher to a
monochrome printer.

Item Specification

HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Model Name Y1F97A

Workgroup Feeder
Capacity 520 x 2 sheets

Media Sizes ● Cassette 1: 98 x 219 mm — 320 x 354 mm (3.85 x 8.2 in —

12.6 x 14 in)

● Cassette 2: 98 x 219 mm — 320 x 432 mm (3.85 x 8.2 in —

12.6 x 17 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin CardStock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Extra Heavy Weight

ENWW Specifications 25
 Item Specification

Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m² (18.5-24 lb/Duplex)

● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m² (25-28 lb/Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper: 106-176 g/m² (Duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper: 177-220 g/m²

● Thin Paper: 60-69 g/m² (16-19 lb/ Duplex)

● Cotton paper: 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Colored: 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Pre-Printed: 71-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Recycled : 60-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Bond Paper: 105-120 g/m² (Duplex)

● Letterhead: 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Hole Punched Paper: 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)

● Thin CardStock: 105-163 g/m² (Duplex)

● Thin Glossy: 106-163 g/m² (Duplex)

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect: Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: Yes

Dimensions 566 x 610 x 265 mm (22.3 x 24 x 10.4 in)

Weight Net 20 kg (44.09 lb), With Packaging 23.5 kg (51.81 lb)

HP LaserJet Workgroup Cabinet Model Name Y1G17A

Dimensions 566 x 610 x 265 mm (22.3 x 24 x 10.4 in)

Weight 15 kg (33.07 lb)

HP LaserJet Job Separator WG Model Name Y1G15A

Capacity 125 sheets

Dimensions 464 x 394.7 x 124.5 mm (18.3 x 15.5 x 4.9 in)

Weight 2.36 kg (5.2 lb)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Model Name Y1G00A

Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm

Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open

Media Sizes ● Main: 148 to 320 mm x 140 — 457.2 mm (58.3 — 126 x

55.1 — 180 in)

● Top: 98 — 297 x 140 — 432 mm (38.6 — 116.9 x 55.1 —

170.1 in)

26 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Item Specification

Media Types ● Plain

● Thick

● Heavy Weight

● Thin

● Cotton

● Colored

● Recycled

● Bond

● Archive

● Pre-Punched

● Card Stock

● Glossy

● Envelope

Media Weight ● Main: 52 — 256 gsm (13.9 — 68.3 lb)

● Top: 52 — 325 gsm (13.9 — 86.7 lb)

Bins 2 (main/top)

Dimensions 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18 x 19.3 x 6.8 in)

Weight 15 kg (33 lb)

Tray 2 Finishing Capacity 50 sheets @ 80 gsm

Tray 2 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Center)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)

Tray 3 Finishing Capacity 500 sheets @ 80 gsm

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole Model Name Y1G02A

2/3 Punch
Type 2/3 hole punch

Paper Weight 256 gsm (68.3 lb)

Dimensions 440 x 105 x 75 mm (17.3 x 4.1 x 3 in)

Weight 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole Model Name Y1G03A

2/4 Punch
Type 2/4 hole punch

Paper Weight 256 gsm (68.3 lb)

Dimensions 440 x 105 x 75 mm (17.3 x 4.1 x 3 in)

Weight 82 g (0.18 lb)

ENWW Specifications 27
 Machine external view
Front view

1 2
3
4
17
5
16 6
7
15 8
9
10

12
14 13
11
Table 2-9 Front view

Item Description

1 Flow ADF (E72535/E72530)/ADF (E72525) cover

2 Flow ADF (E72535/E72530)/ADF (E72525) width guides

3 Flow ADF (E72535/E72530)/ADF (E72525) input tray

4 Flow ADF (E72535/E72530)/ADF (E72525) output tray

5 Control panel with color touchscreen display

6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only)

7 Right door

8 On/off button

9 Tray 1

10 Power switch

11 Power connection

12 Front door

13 Tray 2

14 Tray 3

15 Output bin

16 Easy-access USB port

17 Hardware integration pocket

28 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Rear view

3
Table 2-10 Rear view

Item Description

1 Formatter cover

2 Interface ports

3 Serial and product number label

Inner view

2 3

Table 2-11 Inner view

Item Description

1 Imaging unit (behind cover)

2 Toner cartridges

3 Toner collection unit

ENWW Machine external view 29

 Feeding system
Feeding system overview
The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism inside
the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller assembly, and exit
unit.

30 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Main components and functions
Rollers

Item Description

1 Tray 2

2 Tray 3

3 Tray 4 (optional)

4 Tray 5 (optional)

5 Tray 2 pickup/separation/feed rollers

6 Tray 3 pickup/separation/feed rollers

ENWW Feeding system 31

 Item Description

7 Tray 4 pickup/separation/feed rollers (optional)

8 Tray 5 pickup/separation/feed rollers (optional)

9 Tray 1 pickup/separation/feed rollers

10 Tray 2 feed roller

11 Tray 3 feed roller

12 Tray 4 feed roller (optional)

13 Tray 5 feed roller (optional)

14 Sensor registration

15 Roller registration

16 Roller transfer

17 Roller output 1st

18 Roller output 2nd (optional)

19 Roller invert (optional)

20 Roller duplex 1

21 Roller duplex 2

● Pickup roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)

◦ This roller picks up the paper from the tray.

● Feed roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)

◦ This roller is placed against the separation roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the
feed roller.

● Separation roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)

◦ This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed roller.
When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of the
torque limiter of the separation roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of
paper. As a result, the separation roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.

● Feed roller

◦ This roller transfers the paper sent from the forward/separation roller to the registration roller.

● Registration roller

◦ This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.

Sensor, Motor, Solenoid

32 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Cassette (Tray 1, 2, 4, 5)
The cassette stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.

ENWW Feeding system 33

 Figure 2-1 Basic Cassette

Item Description

1 Structure: Drawer Type

2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80g/m2 (21 lb) paper standard)

NOTE: Tray 2 does not support A3 or 11 x 17 paper,

3 Paper type

● Plain paper: A5, A4, A3, B5, B4, Letter, 11 x 17 (Ledger), Statement, Legal

NOTE: Tray 2 does not support A3 or 11 x 17 paper.

4 Paper weight

● Plain paper: 60-216 g/m2 (17-58 lb)

5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

Pickup unit
When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of the
paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down. The feed
and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and that the feed
roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.

NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.

34 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-2 Pickup unit 1

Figure 2-3 Pickup unit 2

Regisrtation (reg) unit

The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor. The registration roller clutch is
located between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on the transfer belt (for color), and it
controls power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the
predetermined registration point.

Figure 2-4 Registration (Regi) roller

Tray 1 (multipurpose (MP) tray) feed assembly

The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.

ENWW Feeding system 35

 Figure 2-5 Tray 1 feed assembly

Specification
● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m2 (21 lb) paper standard)

● Media Size: Maximum 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in)/ Minimum 98 x 148 mm (3.87 x 5.8 in)

● Media Weight: Plain paper 60-176 g/m²

● Feeding speed: 35 ppm (E72535), 30 ppm (E72530), 25 ppm (E72525) Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge
Feeding)

Paper Separation

Figure 2-6 Paper separation

When the Tray 1 paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 printing job, the Tray
1 solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in Tray 1.

This machine uses an FSR (Feed and Separation Roller) system for feeding paper. The friction between the
separation roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

36 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Image creation
Printing process overview
This printer uses one imaging unit and one laser for mono printing. The imaging unit consists of a drum unit
and developer unit.

The drum unit consists of an OPC drum, charging roller, and cleaning blade.

Figure 2-7 Printing process overview

The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed to light from the laser scanner assembly
(B). The light produced by a laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The
negatively charged toners are attracted to the latent image by an electric field. The toners (real image) on the
OPC drum are transferred to the transfer media by the positive bias applied to the transfer roller.

1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.

2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.

3. Development: The developing roller transfers negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface.

4. Transfer: The transfer roller opposite the OPC drum transfers toner from the drum to the paper.

5. Cleaning for OPC drum: The cleaning blade removes remaining toner on the drum surface after image
transfer to the paper.

6. Erasing for OPC drum: Discharge cleaning is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the
cleaning lamp at the end of every job.

Imaging unit
Imaging unit overview
The imaging unit consists of the drum unit and the developer unit.

The diameter of the drum is 30 mm and the circumference is approximately 94.2 mm.

The developing gap between a drum and the corresponding magnetic roller cannot be adjusted. The CRUM
chip is the subpart of the drum unit. The CRUM chip stores job count information and other data.

ENWW Image creation 37

 Figure 2-8 Imaging unit

Drum drive
The OPC drum and magnetic roller are driven by one BLDC motor and supplied with power from the coupling.

The drive shaft is directly inserted into the OPC drum to fix the drum unit. This structure provides stable
printing quality.

Figure 2-9 Drum drive

Developer unit
This printer uses a dual-component development system.

The developer unit contains 345 g of toner carrier that is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller by the
two mixing augers. The diameter of the magnetic roller is 18.2 mm.

38 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 The developer unit has a toner concentration (TC) sensor. The TC sensor is used for controlling the operating
range of toner density.

Figure 2-10 Developer unit

Developer Circulation

Two mixing augers circulate the developer forward and backward in order to sufficiently mix the toner and
developer.

This occurs at the following times:

● During the process control self-checking

● During toner supply job

● During development job

The developer unit must be stored below 50°C or the toner will harden and not work properly.

ENWW Image creation 39

 Fuser unit
Fuser unit overview
This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.

This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper by applying heat and
pressure. The printer uses a two-roller fusing system and thinner heat roller to decrease warm-up time.

Figure 2-11 Fuser unit overview

Item Description

1 Halogen Lamp

The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One lamp heats the center of the heat roller, and the other lamp heats the end of
axial direction. The halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the heat roller. Each lamp has its coil in a different location.
The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center. The coils of the side heater lamp are located on both sides. The lamps
are fixed inside of the heat roller. The lamps do not rotate when the heat roller rotates.

2 Heat Roller

The aluminum heat roller transfers heat from the halogen lamp to the toner and paper. The thinner heat roller reduces
the time needed to warm-up and switch modes. To prevent the heat roller from adhering to the toner, its surface has a
PFA coating. The heat roller is rotated by a gear located on the side of the roller.

3 Pressure Roller

The pressure roller is made of rubber, which ensures proper nip width between the pressure roller and the heat roller.
The force applied by the pressure roller ensures toner effectively adheres to the paper.

4 Non-Contact (NC) Sensor

NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors) are located near the center and the end of the heat roller and control the
temperature of the heat roller.

40 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Item Description

5 Thermistor

The thermistor detects the temperature on the surface of the heat roller and controls the halogen lamp.

6 Thermostat

The thermostats cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the heat roller becomes
abnormally hot as a result of problems such as a NC sensor malfunction. The force applied by the pressure roller ensures
toner effectively adheres to the paper.

Fuser unit drive

Figure 2-12 Fuser duplex exit drive

The fuser motor (A) drives the heat roller (C) through the gear train. The pressure roller is pressurized and
rotated by the heat roller.

Fuser unit temperature control

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors
detect the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing temperature.

ENWW Fuser unit 41

 Figure 2-13 Fuser unit temperature control

Overheat Protection

The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases :

● The temperature detected by the NC sensor stays higher than 240°C for 20 seconds.

The following components are used when the thermistor overheat protection fails:

● Two thermostats are in line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.

● If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, power is cut to the fusing lamp. If
the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it will also cut power to the fusing lamp.

42 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Laser scanner assembly
Laser scanner assembly overview
The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and one laser diodes (LD) unit. The laser scanner
assembly forms a latent image on the surface of the OPC drum. For this process, the laser scanner assembly
has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, and an F-Theta lens on an optical path for each color.

The laser scanner assembly has cover glass to protect the glass on the optical path from contamination. The
LD PCA interfaces with the printer.

Figure 2-14 Laser scanner assembly overview

Item Description

1 LD PCA

2 P/Mirror Motor

3 F1 Lens

ENWW Laser scanner assembly 43

 Item Description

4 F2 Lens

5 Cover Glass

Laser scanning optical path

The laser moves from the polygon motor (A) to the OPC drum (D). The F1 lens (B) and F2 lens (C) determine
the scanning line and the image position. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer.

Figure 2-15 Laser scanning optical path

Laser synchronizing detectors

The laser scanner assembly has a beam detector sensor board (PD PCA). The PD PCA (A) detects the scanning
start point.

Main Scan Start Detection

The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal (Hsync).

The following diagram shows the data scanning direction.

44 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-16 Laser synchronizing detectors

ENWW Laser scanner assembly 45

 Drive system
Drive motors
The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.

Figure 2-17 Drive motors

Table 2-12 Drive motors

Number Motor Motor type Quantity Function

1 Exit PM-STEP 1 Exit drive

(Reverse drive at duplex job)

2 Fuser BLDC 1 Fuser drive/Fuser pressure mode

(Reverse drive at pressure mode)

3 OPC/DEVE BLDC 4 OPC/DEVE drive

4 Registration (Regi)/ BLDC 1 Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed 1, 2

Tray 1 drive

Feed 1, 2 E-Clutch 3 Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed

drive control

5 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roll/Tray 2 and 3 lift drive

46 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Table 2-12 Drive motors (continued)

Number Motor Motor type Quantity Function

6 Toner supply DC 41 Toner cartridge drive

7 Toner Duct PM-STEP 1 Toner transport in toner cartridge

drive duct

Main Drive Unit (OPC/DEVE/Registration/Tray 1/Feed)

Figure 2-18 Main drive unit—front view

Figure 2-19 Main drive unit–rear view

ENWW Drive system 47

 Figure 2-20 Main drive (OPC/Deve motors)

Power Train Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/pickup: BLDC motor drive, Clutch

drive control

● 1 → 2 → 3 (OPC drive)

● 1 → 4 → 5 → 6 (Magnetic roller drive)

48 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-21 Main drive (Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed 1, 2)

Power Train Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed 1, 2: BLDC motor drive, clutch

drive control

● 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 Clutch/Gear (registration (Regi) input)

● 1 → 2 → 5 → 6 → 7 Clutch/Gear (Tray 1 input)

● 1 → 2 → 5 → 6 → 8 Clutch/Gear (feed 1 input) → 9 → 10 (feed 2 input)

ENWW Drive system 49

 Pickup Drive
Figure 2-22 Pickup drive

Power Train Pickup: rotating (pickup/input)/counter rotating (tray lift

input)

● Step → Forward rotation → Gear 1 → Gear 2 (pickup)

● Step → Reverse rotation → Gear 1 → Gear 3 → Gear 4 → Gear 5 → Gear 6 (tray lift)

50 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Duct Drive
Figure 2-23 Duct drive

Power Train DUCT: PM-STEP motor drive

● 1 PM-Step motor → 2 gear → gear duct drive

ENWW Drive system 51

 Fuser/Exit Drive
Figure 2-24 Fuser/exit drive

Power Train ● Fuser: BLDC motor drive

● Exit: Step motor drive

● Fuser and fuser release: One-way gear is used

● 1 BLDC Motor → counterclockwise rotation (CCW) → 2 clockwise rotations (CW) → 3 (CW) (Fuser drive)

● 1 BLDC Motor → 1 clockwise rotation (CW) → 4 (CCW) → 5 (CW) → 6 (CW) (Fuser release drive)

● 7 Step Motor →8 RDCN Exit (Exit drive)

52 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Toner supply drive
Figure 2-25 Toner supply drive

Power Train Toner cartridge drive

● 1 DC Motor → 2 gear-M RDCN supply → 3 gear-M supply (toner cartridge drive)

ENWW Drive system 53

 Flatbed Scanner System
This section describes the scanner system, parts, and functions for both color and monochrome printers.

Flatbed scanner system overview

The scanner converts a hardcopy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and Charge
Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage space or transfers
the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.

For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved by a
wire. It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.

The scanner system consists of the three following modules:

● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.

● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.

● Imaging module: Makes an image on the CCD.

The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This maintains a constant
distance between the original and the imaging lens.

Figure 2-26 Scanner system overview

The following describes the scan process:

54 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.

2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.

3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.

4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.

To make a stable image, a constant distance must be maintained between the original and the lens. To
maintain a constant distance, the HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.

Figure 2-27 Scan process

The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.

Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.

The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the green
color from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical image.

ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 55

 The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to the
processor.

The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor consists of
approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the FR carriage and
HR carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.

Scan resolution is 600 dpi.

Figure 2-28 Image processing

Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.

To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed. The
motor drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the carriage.

The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and drive unit.

56 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-29 Scanning system components

● FR Carriage

ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 57

 Figure 2-30 FR carriage

◦ LED lamp module

This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module. The
original is illuminated by the light-guide.

● Light-guide

The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.

● White LED

The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat
deterioration.

● Reflection holder

The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.

◦ Mirror #1

Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.

HR Carriage (mirror unit)

58 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-31 HR carriage

● Mirror #2 and #3

Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light. The
reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.

● Pulley

The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage
move. The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.

Imaging unit

The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.

Figure 2-32 Imaging unit

● Imaging lens

The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed CCD
sensor and pixel size.

● CCD PCA

The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD consists of
three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the image depends on the
voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal. The digital signal makes
the scanned image.

Wire drive

ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 59

 To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and releases
the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.

Figure 2-33 Wire drive

Scanner glass (flatbed glass)

The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of tempered glass
and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.

Drive motor

60 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the position and
maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing belt and pulley.

Timing belt

The timing belt transfers the motor power to the pulley.

Figure 2-34 Timing belt

Paper size sensor

The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size
sensor uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.

Home sensor

The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photosensor.

Cover open sensor #1

When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size sensor is on
or off.

Cover open sensor #2

The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using a magnetic field.

ADF glass

ADF glass scans the original through the ADF unit. The FR carriage reads the original as it passes. If the ADF
glass is contaminated, a horizontal black or white line might appear.

Shading sheet

ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 61

 The shading sheet detects white color in the base. Before every scan job, the scan module reads the shading
sheet to scan the image with the same color and brightness. If the shading sheet is contaminated, a vertical
image might occur.

Figure 2-35 Shading sheet

Caution for moving the scanner

Lock the FR and HR carriages to prevent damage when shipping or moving the printer.

When installing

After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking screw is
not removed scanner failure will occur.

1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.

2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.

Figure 2-36 Remove scan locking screw

62 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 When moving

When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.

1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the home position.

2. Remove the screw cap.

3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.

Figure 2-37 Tighten scan locking screw

ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 63

 Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) z bundles (GX)
Flow ADF overview
Figure 2-38 Flow ADF overview
R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4

Table 2-13 Flow ADF overview

Part Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOCU F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICKUP ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLERr Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)

R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)

R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)

R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit

R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the duplex white-roller

R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller

R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

64 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Sensors
Figure 2-39 Flow ADF sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width

9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration

3.LIFT

PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT

Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER

16. Exit

14. SIM Scan

Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan

11. Pre Registration

10. MSO

Table 2-14 Flow ADF sensors

Callout Item Function

1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paperlength

2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paperwidth

3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position

4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation

5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position

7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation

8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed

9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path

10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size

11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path

12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path

13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation

14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path

15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path

16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) z bundles (GX) 65

 Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM)
Figure 2-40 Flow ADF Ultra Sonic Multifeed
Tx Sensor

Rx Sensor

● This sensor detects multi-feeds.

● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)

● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.

● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.

● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.

Flow ADF drive system

The flow ADF drive system consists of eight motors.

Figure 2-41 Flow ADF drive system

Pre-Registration Drive section

Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section

Scan Drive section

Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section

Exit Drive section

The Flow ADF drive system has eight sections: Pickup Release Drive, Pickup Drive, Pre-Regi Drive, Regi Drive,
Scan-in Roller Release Drive, Scan Drive, Exit Drive, and Lift Drive sections.

66 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Flow ADF document lifting drive system
Figure 2-42 Flow ADF document lifting drive system

● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR

● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray

● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray

● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement

● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.

Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System

Figure 2-43 Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System

ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) z bundles (GX) 67

 ● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality

● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER

● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper

Flow ADF specification

Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)

Scan Speed 120/240 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 2 times registration

Motor 8 each

Stacker Lifting

Scanning White Roller/White Bar

MSO Support

68 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Flow ADF Registration
Figure 2-44 Flow ADF Registration
Registration Sensor
Registration Roller

Pre Registration Roller

Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor

Registration
Roller

The Flow ADF has two times registration.

ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) z bundles (GX) 69

 Flow ADF Scanning Position
Figure 2-45 Flow ADF Scanning Position

6LPSOH[
'XSOH[

Type Simplex Duplex

Scanning Z-GX White Roller White Bar

Mixed Size Original (MSO)

The MSO detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.

Figure 2-46 MSO 1

70 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-47 MSO 2
3UH5HJLVWUDWLRQ6HQVRU
062 6HQVRU

Figure 2-48 MSO 3

Dual sensor cleaning method

● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.

● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.

● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.

● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.

ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) z bundles (GX) 71

 Figure 2-49 Dual sensor cleaning method

3XOOWKHOHYHU

Figure 2-50 Dual sensor cleaning method

Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Model Engine Scanner

Platen Z-GX

Color 40 ppm Same at whole Scan Speed USM Capacity

machine
50 ppm 120/240 ipm O 250 sheet

60 ppm

Mono 40 ppm

50 ppm

60 ppm

72 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn bundles (LX)
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) overview
Figure 2-51 ADF overview

Table 2-15 ADF overview

Part Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICKUP ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 REGISTRATION (REGI) ROLLER Original paper alignment roller

R7 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R8 SIMPLEX WHITE-BAR Support of scanning unit

R9 SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller

R10 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R11 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Electrical parts location

Figure 2-52 ADF electrical parts location
Pickup Roller
4. Paper Length
3.Detect Pickup
2, RegistraƟon Feed Out

RegistraƟon 5. Paper Width

1. Cover Open
Roller
Exit{Roller

7. Exit Idle
Scan In 6. Exit

Scan Out

Scan Scan CCD

ENWW Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn bundles (LX) 73

 Table 2-16 ADF electrical parts location

Callout Item Function

1 Cover Open Detects if cover is open or closed

2 Registration (Regi) Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the registration path

3 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

4 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length

5 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width

6 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

7 Exit Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Exit Roller’ rotation

ADF Registration
Figure 2-53 ADF registration
Registra on Sensor
Registra on Roller

ADF (dn bundles) (LX)

Registration 1 times registration

ADF drive system

The ADF drive system consists of one motor and two clutches to transfer the paper.

74 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-54 ADF drive system
Pickup Drive secƟon

RegistraƟon Motor secƟon

Feed Drive secƟon

The ADF (DSDF) drive system consists of two motors (BLDC and STEP) and one clutch that moves the paper.

● BLDC Motor > Feed and pickup

● STEP Motor > Regi

● Clutch > Pickup

There are three sections: pickup drive section, registration (regi) motor section, and feed drive section.

The pickup drive section has three assemblies: pickup drive assembly, pickup assembly, and guide pickup
assembly.

The registration motor section has the regi motor, trans gear, regi roller, regi-idle roller, regi sensor, and
actuator.

ADF original pickup assembly

Figure 2-55 ADF pickup assembly
Pickup Drive secƟon

Pickup Drive Assy

Pickup Assy

Guide pickup Assy

After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system.

ENWW Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn bundles (LX) 75

 The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.

The CLUTCH cannot rotate inversely. The spring that is included in the ADF GUIDE PICKUP ASSEMBLY is
connected to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, stand-by status occurs and stops the operation.

The ADF roller and pickup roller are connected by the belt.

The ADF roller is provided with power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the registration roller.
When the pickup drive is stopped and the registration roller is driven, the ADF roller becomes idle.

The normal process is:

● When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated and the printing job starts. The motor and
pickup clutch begin working. The pickup roller then moves down and contacts the original in the tray.

● When the registration sensor detects paper, the pickup clutch stops.

● When the detect-sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the printer enters stand-by
status.

ADF registration (regi) drive assembly

Figure 2-56 ADF registration (regi) drive assembly
istraƟon(V)$)/(+'-$%)"
RegistraƟon Motor secƟon

The registration drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the registration roller and transfer the paper to the
ROLLER FEED.

The registration roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When the original is placed in the nip, the roller
is rotated for alignment.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC repeats on/off to align each original.

76 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

ADF Scanning position
Figure 2-57 ADF scanning position

6LPSOH[ 'XSOH[

:KLWH5ROOHU

:KLWH5ROOHU
3DSHU
*ODVV
Type Simplex Duplex

Scanning DN-LX White Bar White Bar

ADF Specification
dn bundles (LX)

Capacity 100 pages

Scan Speed 80/160 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 1 times registration

Motor 2 each

Stacker —

Scanning White Bar

MSO —

ENWW Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn bundles (LX) 77

 Hardware configuration
The electronic circuit system consists of the following:

● Main controller (main board)

● Control panel

● Document feeder (flow document feeder/document feeder) controller

● High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board

● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS-SMPS) board

● Fuser drive assembly

78 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Electronic circuit diagram

Figure 2-58 Electronic circuit diagram

The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.

The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives copy data
from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video bitmap data. It
controls all modules required to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN, fuser, and so on.

ENWW Hardware configuration 79

 The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the life of the toner
cartridge, drum, and developer units through I2C.

The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 320 GB SATA HDD
to control the engine drive, video signal processing, and user interface.

A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy saving
algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to display the
system information on the control panel.

The document feeder controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the document
feeder. The document feeder controller communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.

The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls power to
the fuser lamp. The LVPS (SMPS) board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.

Circuit Board Locations

The following diagram shows the location of the printer circuit boards.

80 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-59 Circuit board locations

HP FORMATTER

Main controller (main board)

The main controller consists of the main processor (Chrous4N), memory (DDR3 2 GB), flash (128 MB), 1 G
Ethernet PHY, USB 2.0 HUB, Micom (power/fuser control), can/video/UI/fax signal interface connection, motor
drive IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

The main processor (Dual Core 1 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with various
devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by SATA cable and to other devices (ADF, dual cassette
feeder, finisher, modem) by UART.

ENWW Hardware configuration 81

 Figure 2-60 Main controller diagram

Main controller connection information

82 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-61 Main controller connection information

● Connection

Table 2-17 Main controller connection information

1 EXIT 12 HVPS MONO 23 2nd GIGA NPC

2 HDD POWER 13 Laser scanner 24 MSOK I/F

assembly MONO

3 HDD I/F 14 Fuser drive 25 MODEM JOINT

assembly I/F

4 Image scanner 15 POWER I/F 26 Dual cassette

CCDM feeder I/F

5 Flow ADF DCIS 16 FRONT MONO 27 FINISHER

6 FRONT USB HUB 17 Right door

7 OPE POWER I/F 18 PICKUP

8 Not used 19 PH DRIVER

9 GIGA N/W RJ45 20 TONER I/F MONO

10 USB HOST 1/2 21 FUSER

11 USB DEVICE 22 SCAN I/F

ENWW Hardware configuration 83

 ● Information

◦ Part number: SAM-JC92-02746A

◦ Part name: PCA-MAIN

Master System Operation Key (MSOK)

The MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM and an
X-CRUM. The flash memory (4MB), EEPROM (256Kb), and X-CRUM are used for all system operations (system
parameter, device status, tech information, and service information).

NOTE: When a main board needs to be replaced, the MSOK PCA should be reinstalled to the new main board
to retain the system information.

Figure 2-62 MSOK

NOTE: The MSOK is not an available part.

● Information

◦ Part number: Not applicable

◦ Part name: PCA-MSOK

Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)/Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS)

The Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS-SMPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other
boards. The voltage provided includes +5V, and +24V from a 110V/220V power input. It has safety protection
modes for over current and overload.

84 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Figure 2-63 LVPS (SMPS) board

● Specification

General input/output voltage

◦ AC 110V (90V-135V)

◦ AC 220V (180V-270V)

◦ Input current: 13.7A (110V)/6.8A (220V)

◦ Output power: 1500W

● DC 5V: 55W/DC 5VS: 30W/DC 24V: 432W

Fuser drive board

This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.

Figure 2-64 Fuser drive board

● Information

ENWW Hardware configuration 85

 110V 220V

Part name Fuser drive assembly V1 Fuser drive assembly V2

● Connection

1 Heater I/F

2 Fuser AC

3 Fuser drive PCA I/F

4 Type 5

5 Main S/W

6 Inlet

7 Heater S/W

High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board

The HVPS generates 5 high-voltage channels, including FUSER, SAW, AC/DC, T2+/-, and MHV.

Figure 2-65 HVPS board

Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24V, 3.3V

● Output voltage:

◦ MHV: —1200V

◦ DEV DC: —497V, AC: Vpp 1000V

◦ THV+: 39.6uA, THV-: —1300V

86 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 ◦ SAW: —990V

◦ FUSER: 400V

Connection
●
CN1

Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN

Output voltage FUSER 1

Output voltage SAW 2

CN2

Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN

Output voltage AC/DC 1, 2

CN3

Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN

Output voltage T2 +/- 1

CN4

Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN

Output voltage MHV 1, 2

CN5

Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN

PWM signal PWM SAW 1

PWM signal PWM DEVE AC 2

PWM signal PWM FUSER BIAS 3

PWM signal PWM VPP AC 4

PWM signal PWM MHV 5

nEN signal nEN DEVE AC 6

Output signal ADC MHV READ 7

PWM signal PWM DEVE DC 8

nEN signal nEN MHV 9

nEN signal nEN THV 10

ENWW Hardware configuration 87

 CN5

Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN

Input voltage 3.3V PS 11

PWM signal PWM THV 12

Output signal ADC_HVPS_24V 13

Output signal ADC THV READ 14

GND GND 15, 16, 17

— NC 18

Input voltage 24V 19, 20

Eraser PCA
The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after
printing.

Figure 2-66 Eraser PCA (mono models)

Information
● Part number:

● Part name: PCA-ERASER

Waste Sensor PCA

The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.

Figure 2-67 Waste sensor PCA

88 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Information
● Part number:

● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX

CRUM PCA
THE CRUM PCA includes memory for the drum, toner cartridge, and fuser.

Figure 2-68 CRUM PCA

Information
● Part number: SAM-JC92-02164A

● Part name: PCA-ZCRUM

Toner CRUM joint PCA

The toner CRUM joint PCA is the interface PCA between the toner cartridge and the printer.

Figure 2-69 Toner CRUM joint PCA

Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.

ENWW Hardware configuration 89

 Figure 2-70 Paper size sensor PCA

90 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) unit
The DCF is an optional device that stores additional paper.

Front sectional view

Figure 2-71 DCF front sectional view

Item Description Item Description

1 Global HCI to tray 7 HCI 4 pickup assembly

2 Feed roller (HCI 3) 8 Feed roller (HCI 4)

3 Idle roller (HCI 3) 9 Idle roller (HCI 4)

4 Feed roller (HCI 3) 10 Feed roller (HCI 4)

5 Separation roller (HCI 3) 11 Separation roller (HCI 4)

6 Pickup roller (HCI 3) 12 Pickup roller (HCI 4)

Paper path

ENWW Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) unit 91

 Figure 2-72 DCF paper path

1 Tray 4 paper path

2 Tray 5 paper path

Layout of electrical parts

Figure 2-73 DCF electrical parts layout

92 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Item Description Part number DC controller PCA

M1 Feed motor 9 CN5 3 to 6

M2 Tray 4 pickup motor 10 CN5 9 to 12

M3 Tray 5 pickup motor 11 CN5 13 to 16

SW1 Tray 4 auto size switch 12 CN9 1 to 4

SW2 Tray 5 auto size switch CN9 5 to 8

S1 Tray 4 feed sensor CN6 7 to 9

S2 Tray 4 limit sensor CN6 4 to 6

S3 Tray 4 paper empty sensor CN6 1 to 3

S4 Tray 5 feed sensor CN6 16 to 18

S5 Tray 5 limit sensor CN6 13 to 15

S6 Tray 5 paper empty sensor CN6 10 to 12

S7 Door open sensor CN3 1 to 2

Sensor and signal

Figure 2-74 DCF sensor and signal

Item Sensor Signal

1 P_Size_DCF 1 Tray 4 paper size analog signal

3 nP_Empty_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 paper empty signal

4 Limit_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 paper limit signal

5 Feed_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 feed signal

6 P_Size_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper size analog signal

8 nP_Empty_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper empty signal

9 Limit_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper limit signal

ENWW Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) unit 93

 Item Sensor Signal

10 Feed_DCF 2 Tray 5 feed signal

11 nDoor_open Door open signal

Plug and jack location list

Figure 2-75 Plug and jack locations

Number Connection

CN1 Download tool I/F (minicube)

CN2 Debug I/F

CN3 Cover open switch (24V interlock switch)

CN4 USB I/F

CN5 EMPTY/LIFT/FEED (Tray 4 and 5) sensor

CN6 FEED/PICKUP 3, 4 motor

CN7 Interface with main

CN9 Paper size sensor (Tray 4 and 5)

94 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Inner finisher
Sectional view

Figure 2-76 Inner finisher sectional view

1 Entrance sensor 8 Front door open sensor

2 Passthru sensor 9 Stacker tray home sensor

3 Paddle home sensor 10 Paper feed roller

4 Alignment home_F sensor 11 Paper exit roller

5 Alignment home_r sensor 12 Turning knob

6 Eject home sensor

7 Jam door open sensor

Paper path

Figure 2-77 Inner finisher paper path

ENWW Inner finisher 95

 1 Finisher main tray — staple/offset/punch

2 Finisher top tray — stack only

Electrical parts layout

Figure 2-78 Electrical parts layout

Callout Part number Part name

S1 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Entrance sensor

S2 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Shaft docking sensor

S3 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Dust box sensor

S4 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Sub stay sensor

S5 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler position sensor rear

S6 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple position sensor center 1

S7 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple position sensor center 2

S8 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Exit sensor

S9 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler position sensor front

S10 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) End defence sensor

96 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

 Callout Part number Part name

S11 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject sensor

S12 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper support sensor

S13 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject 2 motor sensor

S14 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Alignment position sensor rear

S15 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper holder position sensor

S16 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tray home position sensor

S17 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Alignment position sensor front

S18 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Main paddle position sensor

S19 JC81-07403A AS- sensor

S20 JC81-07403A AS- sensor

S21 JC39-01610A Switch front cover open

S22 JC39-02175A Switch jam door open

M1 JC31-00169A Entrance motor

M2 JC31-00009C EJECTOR_1 motor

M3 Mabuchi EJECTOR_2 motor

M4 JC31-00149A Alignment motor front

M5 JC31-00149A Alignment motor rear

M6 JC31-00149A Paper support

M7 KIG Tray motor

M8 JC31-00149A Main paddle motor

M9 JC31-00169A Exit motor

M10 JC31-00149A Traverse motor

M11 TDS-10SL Paper holder solenoid

PCA connections

ENWW Inner finisher 97

 Figure 2-79 PCA connections

Number Connection

1 CN3: REAR joint I/F

2 CN1: REAR sensor

3 CN10: Traverse mid sensor

4 CN8: Debug

5 CN2: REAR I/F

6 CN7: FRONT I/F

7 CN6: Stacker switch

8 CN9: Solenoid

9 CN4: Ejector and supporter I/F

10 CN5: Main I/F

98 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

3 Removal and replacement

● For additional service and support

● Service approach

— Precautions when replacing parts

— Before performing service

— After performing service

— Post-service test

● Maintenance

— Machine cleaning for maintenance

● 500 GB FIPS HDD

— Introduction

— Step 1: Remove the formatter cover

— Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

● Formatter

— Introduction

— Step 1: Remove the rear covers

— Step 2: Remove the accelerator board

— Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive

— Step 4: Remove the Island of data (IOD)

— Step 5: Remove the formater PCA

— Step 6: Remove the formatter cage

● Control panel

— Introduction

— Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel

— Step 2: Remove the control-panel

ENWW 99
 ● Keyboard

— Introduction

— Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel

— Step 2: Remove the keyboard

● Removal and replacement procedures

— Accessories

— Replacement of maintenance parts

● Replacing the main SVC parts

— Front cover open switch

— Right door assembly

— Left cover

— Rear covers

— Right door open switch

— High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board

— Laser scanner assembly

— Main board

— Developer fan

— Scanner LVPS board

— Fuser drive assembly board

— Fuser/exit drive assembly

— Main drive unit

— Pickup drive unit

— Toner duct drive unit

— Toner supply drive unit

— Toner duct

— Toner collection unit sensor

— Auto size sensor

— Exit unit

— Fuser-out sensor

— Duplex sensor

— Multipurpose (MP) unit and MP assemblies

100 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 — Paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor

— Feed sensor 1

— Feed unit and feed sensor 2

— Registration unit

— 320 GB main disk drive

● Document feeders

— Standard (dn bundles) document feeder

— Flow (z bundles) document feeder

● Scanner unit (image scanner unit)

— Scanner whole unit

— Scan glass

— Scanner LED lamp module

— Scanner imaging unit

— Scan joint board

— Scanner APS sensor

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF)

— Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

— Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

— Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

— Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

— Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

— Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

ENWW 101
 For additional service and support
HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Workbench (SAW) at http://sawpro.glb.itcs.hp.com.

Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at www.hp.com/partners/csn .

At these locations, find information on the following topics:

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Service advisories

● Warranty and regulatory information

Channel partners, access training materials in the HP University and Partner Learning Center at
https://content.ext.hp.com/sites/LMS/HPU.page.

To access HP PartSurfer information from any mobile device, go to http://partsurfermobile.hp.com/ or scan

the Quick Response (QR) code below.

Service approach
Precautions when replacing parts
Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine,
circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains 19 different screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or electric
shock.

102 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 ● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

◦ Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

◦ Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

◦ Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

◦ Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

◦ Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a
PCA.

◦ Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.

◦ Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in
their original positions.

◦ Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully.
To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

ENWW Service approach 103

 Before performing service
● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridge.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

After performing service

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

104 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Copy-quality test
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.

2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results

Fax-quality test
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.

2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.

3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.

Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the front of
the printer for correct orientation.

ENWW Service approach 105

 Maintenance
Machine cleaning for maintenance
● Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and contact image sensor (CIS)

● Cleaning the scan glass

● Cleaning the laser scanner assembly window

● Cleaning the transfer roller

106 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and contact image sensor (CIS)
1. Open the document feeder unit.

Figure 3-1 Open document feeder unit

2. Clean the document feeder white bar and CIS using a lint-free cloth.

Figure 3-2 Clean document feeder white bar

ENWW Maintenance 107

 Cleaning the scan glass
1. Open the document feeder unit.

Figure 3-3 Open document feeder unit

2. Clean the scanner glass using a lint-free cloth.

Figure 3-4 Clean scanner glass

108 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Cleaning the laser scanner assembly window
1. Open the front cover. Remove the toner collection unit.

Figure 3-5 Remove toner collection unit

2. Remove the laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool located on the front cover.

Figure 3-6 Remove laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool

ENWW Maintenance 109

 3. Insert the laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool into each color entrance.

Slowly remove and reinsert the cleaning tool.

Figure 3-7 Laser scanner assembly color entrances

4. Repeat the previous step at least five times for each laser scanner assembly window.

110 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Cleaning the transfer roller
1. Open the right door.

Figure 3-8 Open right door

2. Clean the transfer roller (A) using a lint-free cloth.

Figure 3-9 Transfer roller cleaning

ENWW Maintenance 111

 500 GB FIPS HDD
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover

● Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Introduction
This procedure is for removing the 500 GB FIPS HDD installed on the formatter.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Hard disk drive (HDD) assembly part number

500 GB FIPS HDD

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

112 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-10 Remove the formatter cover

Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

▲ Release one retainer, and then remove the HDD.

IMPORTANT: The HDD and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.

Figure 3-11 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

ENWW 500 GB FIPS HDD 113

 Formatter
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the accelerator board

● Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive

● Step 4: Remove the Island of data (IOD)

● Step 5: Remove the formater PCA

● Step 6: Remove the formatter cage

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the formatter assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Formatter assembly part number

Formatter whole unit

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

114 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-12 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-13 Remove the rear-bottom cover

ENWW Formatter 115

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-14 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the accelerator board

1. Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage.

2. Disconnect one connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently pry the accelerator board by
the edges.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

Figure 3-15 Remove formatter screws

Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive

▲ Release one retainer, and then remove the HDD.

116 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 IMPORTANT: The HDD and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.

Figure 3-16 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Step 4: Remove the Island of data (IOD)

▲ Disconnect one connector and remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

IMPORTANT: The HDD and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.

Figure 3-17 Remove the IOD

Step 5: Remove the formater PCA

▲ Disconnect seven connectors and eight screws, and then remove formatter PCA.

ENWW Formatter 117

 Figure 3-18 Remove the formatter connectors and screws

Step 6: Remove the formatter cage

1. Disconnect ten connectors and two cable restraints.

2. Remove four screws and screw-caps, and then remove the left-upper cover.

Figure 3-19 Remove the left-upper cover

3. Remove one screw from the side of the formatter cage (beneath the left-upper cover location).

Figure 3-20 Remove the formatter cage side screw

118 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 4. Remove three screws from the formatter cage face, and then release one tab to remove the formatter
cage.

Figure 3-21 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage

ENWW Formatter 119

 Control panel
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel

● Step 2: Remove the control-panel

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the control panel assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Control panel assembly part number

Control panel assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

120 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 3-22 Remove the document feeder bezel

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

Step 2: Remove the control-panel

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

ENWW Control panel 121

 2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on
the control-panel frame.

Figure 3-23 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 3-24 Remove the USB interconnect cable

4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

122 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Keyboard
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel

● Step 2: Remove the keyboard

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the keyboard assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Keyboardr assembly part number

Keyboard

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Keyboard 123

 Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 3-25 Remove the document feeder bezel

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

Step 2: Remove the keyboard

1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 3-26 Disconnect one FFC

124 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

Figure 3-27 Remove the control-panel keyboard

ENWW Keyboard 125

 Removal and replacement procedures
Accessories
● Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module

● Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution

● NFC Kit Installation

126 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover

● Step 2: Remove the main disk drive

● Step 3: Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the trusted platform module (TPM).

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: This part contains components that are electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive. To reduce
the possibility of ESD damage, always touch the sheet-metal chassis to ground yourself before touching an
ESD sensitive part.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
http://h20141.www2.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.

Imaging unit number

F5S62-61001 Imaging unit

Required tools
● No special tools are required to install this kit.

After performing service

Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after replacing
it.

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 127

 Post service test

Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.

Step 1: Remove the formatter cover

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-28 Remove the formatter cover

Step 2: Remove the main disk drive

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

▲ Release one retainer, and then remove the main disk drive assembly.

IMPORTANT: The main disk drive and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.

128 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-29 Remove the main disk drive assembly.

Step 3: Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

1. Locate the TPM component on the formatter.

Figure 3-30 Locate the TPM

2. Pull the TPM straight off the formatter to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 129

 Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution
● Introduction

● Step 1: Unpack the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory

● Step 2: Install the FIH accessory

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) part number

B5L31A (accessory) Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) (accessory) with instruction guide

B5L31-90902 (service kit) Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) (service) with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.

130 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Unpack the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory

Step 2: Install the FIH accessory

▲ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector

Figure 3-31 Connect the FIH

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 131

 NFC Kit Installation
● Introduction

● Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit

● Step 2: Install the NFC kit

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) part number

B5L31A (accessory) Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) (accessory) with instruction guide

B5L31-90902 (service kit) Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) (service) with instruction guide

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.

132 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit

Step 2: Install the NFC kit

1. Turn off the power to the product.

2. Remove the HIP cover.

3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP and attach the appropriate USB cable:

a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle (callout 1.1)
is the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 1.2) is used.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 133

 b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.

134 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 c. Plug the USB cable into the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may face
down on some models of printers/MFPs.

4. Attach the power and grounding ends of the USB cable:

NOTE: Before connecting the NFC accessory to the USB connector, verify that the product power is
turned off.

a. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the underside
of the NFC accessory with the contacts facing down.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 135

 b. Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the underside of the

5. Insert the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.

a. Insert the NFC accessory into the HIP recess using the hook-shaped clips first.

136 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place within the
recess.

6. Turn ON the power to the product. The NFC accessory will light up to confirm the installation is correct. A
wireless network icon will also appear on the control panel.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 137

 Replacement of maintenance parts
● Drum unit

● Developer unit

● Fuser unit

● Transfer roller

● Pickup/Reverse/Feed roller

● Multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller

● Flow document feeder pickup roller assembly (DX document feeder)

● Flow document feeder separation roller assembly (GX document feeder)

● Document feeder pickup roller assembly (LX document feeder)

● Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX document feeder)

138 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Drum unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the TCU

● Step 2: Remove the drum unit

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the drum unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Drum unit assembly part number

Drum unit

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 139

 Step 1: Remove the TCU
▲ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit (callout A).

Figure 3-32 Remove the TCU

140 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 2: Remove the drum unit

1. Disconnect the drum unit connector. Remove two screws.

Figure 3-33 Disconnect drum unit connector

2. Remove the drum unit.

Figure 3-34 Remove drum unit

3. Disconnect the connector.

Figure 3-35 Disconnect connector

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 141

 4. Remove six screws securing the rear cover.

Figure 3-36 Remove rear cover screws

5. Remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-37 Remove rear cover

6. Separate the developer unit (B) from the drum unit (A). Remove the cable from its guide.

Figure 3-38 Separate developer and drum units

7. Replace with the new drum unit. Installation is the same steps as removal in reverse order.

142 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 NOTE: The replacement drum unit ships with a dummy rear cover for support. Do not use the dummy
rear cover in the product. It is missing the gear necessary to drive the developing unit.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 143

 Developer unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the TCU

● Step 2: Remove the developer unit

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the formatter assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Developer unit part number

Developer unit

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

144 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the TCU
▲ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit (callout A).

Figure 3-39 Remove the TCU

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 145

 Step 2: Remove the developer unit

1. Disconnect the drum unit connector. Remove two screws.

Figure 3-40 Disconnect drum unit and remove two screws

2. Remove the drum unit by pulling the gray tab.

Figure 3-41 Remove drum unit

3. Disconnect the connector.

Figure 3-42 Disconnect connector

146 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 4. Remove six screws securing the rear cover.

Figure 3-43 Remove rear cover screws

5. Remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-44 Remove rear cover

6. Separate the developer unit (B) from the drum unit (A). Remove the cable from the guide

Figure 3-45 Separate developer and drum units

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 147

 7. Unpack the developer unit box and check the components (four items).

Figure 3-46 Unpack developer unit

8. Remove two protective sheets.

NOTE:

● When removing the first protective sheet, make sure the magnetic roller is not contaminated.

● When removing the second protective sheet, make sure to avoid grease contamination.

Figure 3-47 Remove protective sheets

9. Fold the sheet into a funnel shape as shown in the following graphic.

Figure 3-48 Fold protective sheet

148 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 10. Insert the paper funnel into the developer unit hole.

Figure 3-49 Insert paper funnel into developer unit

11. Pour the developer powder into the funnel.

NOTE: When filling the developer, intermittently lean the developer unit to avoid overflow.

Figure 3-50 Fill developer unit with developer powder

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 149

 12. After filling the developer, attach the seal tape to the developer unit hole.

Figure 3-51 Attach seal tape

13. Remove the arrow label horizontally.

CAUTION: Do not remove the arrow label in a downward direction. Do not lean or tip the unit, as the
developer will leak.

Figure 3-52 Remove arrow label

14. Install the developer unit and drum unit in the reverse order of removal.

150 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Fuser unit
● Introduction

● Step 2: Remove the fuser unit

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the formatter assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Fuser unit part number

Fuser unit

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 151

 Step 2: Remove the fuser unit

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-53 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect two bulkhead connectors at the top and one high voltage connector at the bottom.

IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the inline connector.

Figure 3-54 Disconnect the connectors

152 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 4. Remove two screws, and then remove the fuser unit.

Figure 3-55 Remove two fuser unit screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 153

 Transfer roller
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the transfer roller

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the transfer roller.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Transfer roller assembly part number

Transfer roller assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

154 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the transfer roller

1. Open the right door.

2. Hold and release both sides of the transfer roller to remove.

Figure 3-56 Remove transfer roller

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 155

 Pickup/Reverse/Feed roller
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door

● Step 2: Remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the pickup/reverse/feed roller.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Pickup/Reverse/Feed roller assembly part number

Pickup/Reverse/Feed roller assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

156 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the right door

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-57 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 3-58 Disconnect right door connector

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 157

 3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge
to avoid injury.

Figure 3-59 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 3-60 Release left dampener

158 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to
clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 3-61 Remove right door

Step 2: Remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller

1. Remove one screw and disconnect one connector. Remove the pickup assembly.

Figure 3-62 Remove the pickup assembly

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 159

 2. Release the small tab and remove the pickup/reverse/feed roller. Note the location of the clutches and
gears.

Figure 3-63 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (1 of 2)

Figure 3-64 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (2 of 2)

NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.

3. Enter service mode. Select the “Field Replacement Unit” menu item for the pickup/reverse/feed roller
(Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit). Select “Reset” to reset the current count to “0”.

160 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly part number

Multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 161

 Step 1: Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller

1. Open the multipurpose (MP) tray. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side
of the cover.

NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.

Figure 3-65 Remove cover

162 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 2. Remove the cover shown (B) using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of
the cover.

Figure 3-66 Remove cover

Note the orientation of the flag.

Figure 3-67 MP tray flag orientation

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 163

 3. Release the small tab and remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller. Use caution and remove slowly to
avoid loosening the parts behind the rollers. If these parts come loose, they might fall into the printer
and will be difficult to retrieve. Note the location of all components.

Figure 3-68 Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller

NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

Special installation instructions: MP pickup/reverse/feed roller

▲ After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

ii. Select the Service menu.

iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.

iv. Select the Service Tools menu.

v. Select the Supply Status menu.

vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.

vii. Select Tray X Rollers.

viii. Select Tray 1 Roller Kit.

ix. Select Reset.

164 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Flow document feeder pickup roller assembly (DX document feeder)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the flow document feeder pickup/reverse/feed rollers

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the flow document feeder pickup roller assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Flow document feeder pickup roller assembly (DX document feeder) part number

J8A10-67901 Flow document feeder pickup roller assembly (DX document feeder)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 165

 Step 1: Remove the flow document feeder pickup/reverse/feed rollers

1. Open the document feeder top cover.

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:

▲ Remove four screws (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and one ground wire (callout
3), and then remove the pickup roller assembly.

Figure 3-69 Remove the pickup roller assembly

3. Remove the pickup rollers:

a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.

Figure 3-70 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

166 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the shaft
coupler.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Figure 3-71 Remove the pickup roller components

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 167

 c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.

Figure 3-72 Remove the pickup roller assembly

Figure 3-73 Pickup roller components-disassembled

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

Special installation instructions: Flow ADF pickup roller

▲ After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

ii. Select the Service menu.

iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.

168 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 iv. Select the Service Tools menu.

v. Select the Supply Status menu.

vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.

vii. Select ADF Pickup Roller.

viii. Select ADF Pickup Roller.

ix. Select Reset.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 169

 Flow document feeder separation roller assembly (GX document feeder)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the flow document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

● Step 2: Remove the flow document feeder separation roller

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the flow document feeder separation roller assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Flow document feeder separation roller assembly (GX document feeder) part number

Flow document feeder separation roller assembly (GX document feeder)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

170 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the flow document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

1. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover.

Figure 3-74 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws

2. Remove four screws in the sheet-metal roller bracket, rotate the roller assembly over, and then
disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly.

Figure 3-75 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Step 2: Remove the flow document feeder separation roller

1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 171

 Figure 3-76 Remove the separation roller cover

2. Remove one plastic clip.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Figure 3-77 Remove one plastic clip

172 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.

Figure 3-78 Remove the separation roller

Figure 3-79 Remove the separation roller

NOTE: Ensure the sponge washer (circled above) is retained during the removal of the roller assembly–
it may fall off.

Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

Special installation instructions: Flow ADF separation roller

▲ After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

ii. Select the Service menu.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 173

 iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.

iv. Select the Service Tools menu.

v. Select the Supply Status menu.

vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.

vii. Select ADF Separation (Reverse) Roller.

viii. Select ADF Separation Roller.

ix. Select Reset.

174 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder pickup roller assembly (LX document feeder)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the LX document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Document feeder pickup roller assembly (LX document feeder) part number

Z7Y64A Document feeder pickup roller assembly (LX document feeder)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 175

 Step 1: Remove the LX document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

1. Open the document feeder cover.

Figure 3-80 Open the document feeder cover

2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover.

NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)

Figure 3-81 Remove the document feeder cover screws

176 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 3-82 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

4. NOTE: The figure below shows the roller cover and the roller assembly when removed.

Figure 3-83 Document feeder pickup roller cover and roller assembly

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 177

 5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on both
sides of the assembly) are correctly isntalled and move freely.

Figure 3-84 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide the
shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.

NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

Figure 3-85 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly clips

178 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX document feeder)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the LX document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

● Step 2: Remove the LX document feeder separation roller

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder separation roller assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX document feeder) part number

Z7Y65A Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX document feeder)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 179

 Step 1: Remove the LX document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

1. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover.

Figure 3-86 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws

2. Remove four screws in the sheet-metal roller bracket, rotate the roller assembly over, and then
disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly.

Figure 3-87 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Step 2: Remove the LX document feeder separation roller

1. Rotate the separation roller cover up to release it, and then remove the cover.

180 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-88 Remove the separation roller cover

2. NOTE: The figure below shows the roller cover and the roller assembly when removed.

Figure 3-89 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 181

 3. Release two claws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.

NOTE: The separation roller assembly spring under the roller is not captive.

Figure 3-90 Remove the separation roller assembly

4. When the assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly seated in the holder.

Figure 3-91 Separation roller assembly spring

182 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Replacing the main SVC parts
● Front cover open switch

● Right door assembly

● Left cover

● Rear covers

● Right door open switch

● High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board

● Laser scanner assembly

● Main board

● Developer fan

● Scanner LVPS board

● Fuser drive assembly board

● Fuser/exit drive assembly

● Main drive unit

● Pickup drive unit

● Toner duct drive unit

● Toner supply drive unit

● Toner duct

● Toner collection unit sensor

● Auto size sensor

● Exit unit

● Fuser-out sensor

● Duplex sensor

● Multipurpose (MP) unit and MP assemblies

● Paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor

● Feed sensor 1

● Feed unit and feed sensor 2

● Registration unit

● 320 GB main disk drive

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 183

 Front cover open switch
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the front cover open switch

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the front cover open switch assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Scanner front cover open switch assembly part number

Scanner front cover open switch assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

184 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the front cover open switch
1. Open the right door.

Figure 3-92 Open right door

2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws.

NOTE: Do not dislodge the power button (callout 2) when the cover is removed.

Figure 3-93 Remove screw-caps and screws

1
2

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 185

 3. Remove one screw.

Figure 3-94 Remove screw

4. Remove the front-top cover.

Figure 3-95 Remove front-top cover

5. Open the front door. Remove the toner collection unit. Remove the toner cartridge.

6. Remove the imaging unit.

7. Remove eight screws. Release the front-inner cover.

Figure 3-96 Remove screws and front-inner cover

186 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 8. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover-open switch.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 187

 Right door assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the right door assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Right door assembly part number

Right door assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

188 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the right door
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-97 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 3-98 Disconnect right door connector

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 189

 3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge
to avoid injury.

Figure 3-99 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 3-100 Release left dampener

190 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to
clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 3-101 Remove right door

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 191

 Left cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the left cover

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the left cover assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Left cover assembly part number

Left cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

192 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the left cover
▲ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 3-102 Remove the left trim cover

Figure 3-103 Remove the left cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 193

 Rear covers
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the rear covers.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Rear cover assembly part numbers

Rear-upper cover

Rear-lower cover

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

194 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-104 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-105 Remove the rear-bottom cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 195

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-106 Remove the rear-top cover

196 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Right door open switch
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door open switch

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the right door open switch.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Right door open switch part number

Right door open switch part number

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right door open switch

1. Remove the rear cover. Remove one screw securing the sensor.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 197

 Figure 3-107 Remove rear cover and screw

2. Remove the micro-switch.

Figure 3-108 Remove micro-switch

198 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the left cover

● Step 2: Remove the hig-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board part number

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 199

 Step 1: Remove the left cover
▲ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 3-109 Remove the left trim cover

Figure 3-110 Remove the left cover

Step 2: Remove the hig-voltage power supply (HVPS)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the bracket (callout 2).

200 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-111 Remove the bracket

2. Remove one ground screw, and then disconnect all of the connectors on the HVPS board. Remove the
HVPS board and holder.

TIP: To easily disconnect the connectors, remove the LSU.

Figure 3-112 Remove the HVPS board

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 201

 3. To install a replacement HVPS: Remove one screw and the ground wire, and then release the board
from the holder.

NOTE: Install the ground wire on the replacement board.

Figure 3-113 Install a replacement HVPS

202 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Laser scanner assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the left cover

● Step 2: Remove the HVPS

● Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the laser scanner assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Laser scanner assembly part number

Laser scanner assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 203

 Step 1: Remove the left cover
▲ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 3-114 Remove the left trim cover

Figure 3-115 Remove the left cover

Step 2: Remove the HVPS

1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the bracket (callout 2).

204 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-116 Remove the bracket

2. Remove one ground screw, and then disconnect all of the connectors on the HVPS board. Remove the
HVPS board and holder.

TIP: To easily disconnect the connectors, remove the LSU.

Figure 3-117 Remove the HVPS board

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 205

 3. To install a replacement HVPS: Remove one screw and the ground wire, and then release the board
from the holder.

NOTE: Install the ground wire on the replacement board.

Figure 3-118 Install a replacement HVPS

Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly

1. Remove two screws, and then release the bracket.

Figure 3-119 Release the bracket

206 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 2. Remove two screws and disconnect one sensor.

Figure 3-120 Remove the laser scanner assembly

3. Disconnect the laser scanner assembly harness at the left, and then partially remove the assembly from
the chassis. Disconnect the FFC cable, and then remove the laser scanner assembly completely.

CAUTION: If the laser scanner assembly is removed too rough or fast, the harness can be damaged.

Figure 3-121 Disconnect the laser scanner assembly harness and FFC cable

4. Complete a laser scanner assembly adjustment after a new laser scanner assembly has been installed.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 207

 Main board
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the formatter cage

● Step 3: Remove the main board

● Step 4: Remove the main board cage

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the main board.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main board part number

J8A10-67901 Main board

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

208 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-122 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-123 Remove the rear-bottom cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 209

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-124 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the formatter cage

1. Disconnect ten connectors and two cable restraints.

2. Remove four screws and screw-caps, and then remove the left-upper cover.

Figure 3-125 Remove the left-upper cover

210 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Remove one screw from the side of the formatter cage (beneath the left-upper cover location).

Figure 3-126 Remove the formatter cage side screw

4. Remove three screws from the formatter cage face, and then release one tab to remove the formatter
cage.

Figure 3-127 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage

Step 3: Remove the main board

1. Disconnect 19 connectors, a ground wire, and three FFCs on the main board.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 211

 Figure 3-128 Remove the main board connectors and screws

2. Remove nine screws, and then remove the main board.

3. Disconnect the MSOK from the removed main board, noting its orientation. Transfer the MSOK to the
replacement main board and install it using the same orientation.

TIP: The main board is marked to show the correct orientation of the MSOK when installed.

Figure 3-129 MSOK installation orientation

Reinstallation tip: See the screen-printed icon on the main board to ensure that the MSOK is aligned
correctly during reinstallation.

Step 4: Remove the main board cage

1. Remove the FFC retainer at the bottom-right.

212 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 2. Pinch the ground strap (callout 1) to remove it from the top of the cage.

Figure 3-130 Remove the ground strap

3. Open seven cable retainers.

4. Remove four screws.

Figure 3-131 Remove the main board cage screws

5. Lift the main board cage up slightly to release one bracket, and then pull out to remove.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 213

 Developer fan
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the developer fan

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the developer fan assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Developer fan assembly part number

Developer fan assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

214 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-132 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-133 Remove the rear-bottom cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 215

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-134 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the developer fan

NOTE: The fan shown below might look slightly different than the one found in the printer. However, the
removal steps are correct for this printer.

1. Release the cable restraint. Disconnect the in line connector and remove one screw. Remove the
developer fan.

Figure 3-135 Remove developer fan

2. Remove one screw.

3. Separate the plastic housing.

4. Remove fan.

216 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Scanner LVPS board
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the LVPS cover

● Step 3: Remove the scanner LVPS board

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner LVPS board.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

CAUTION: Wait five minutes after disconnecting the power cable before replacing the LVPS board. Not
waiting long enough after disconnecting the power cable can cause electric shock.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Scanner LVPS board part number

Scanner LVPS board

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 217

 Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-136 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-137 Remove the rear-bottom cover

Step 2: Remove the LVPS cover

▲ Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS cover.

218 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-138 Remove the LVPS cover

Step 3: Remove the scanner LVPS board

▲ Disconnect four connectors, including one fuser-drive assembly connector and four other connectors, on
the LVPS PCA. Remove four screws, and then remove the scanner LVPS board.

Figure 3-139 Remove the scanner LVPS board

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 219

 Fuser drive assembly board
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the LVPS cover

● Step 3: Remove the fuser drive assembly board

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser drive assembly board.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

CAUTION: Wait five minutes after disconnecting the power cable before replacing the fuser drive
assembly board. Not waiting long enough after disconnecting the power cable can cause electric shock.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Fuser drive assembly board part number

Fuser drive assembly board

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

220 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-140 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-141 Remove the rear-bottom cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 221

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-142 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the LVPS cover

▲ Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS cover.

Figure 3-143 Remove the LVPS cover

Step 3: Remove the fuser drive assembly board

▲ Disconnect seven connectors and cable restraints on the fuser-drive assembly board. Remove four
screws, and then remove the fuser-drive assembly board.

NOTE: Several of the connectors have tabs that need to be pressed in order to release.

222 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-144 Remove the fuser-drive assembly board

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 223

 Fuser/exit drive assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the fuser/exit drive assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser/exit drive assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Fuser/exit drive assembly part number

Fuser/exit drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

224 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-145 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-146 Remove the rear-bottom cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 225

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-147 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the fuser/exit drive assembly

▲ Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

Figure 3-148 Remove screws and fuser/exit drive unit

226 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Main drive unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the main drive unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the main drive unit assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main drive unit assembly part number

Main drive unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 227

 Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-149 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-150 Remove the rear-bottom cover

228 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-151 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the main drive unit

1. Open the right door.

2. Disconnect five connectors and release eleven cable restraints. Remove five screws and then remove the
main drive unit.

Figure 3-152 Remove screws and main drive unit

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 229

 Pickup drive unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the pickup drive unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the pickup drive unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Pickup drive unit assembly part number

Pickup drive unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

230 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-153 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-154 Remove the rear-bottom cover

Step 2: Remove the pickup drive unit

▲ Release the cable restraint. Disconnect the connector and remove three screws. Remove the pickup
drive unit.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 231

 Figure 3-155 Remove screws and pickup drive unit

232 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Toner duct drive unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the toner duct drive unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner duct drive unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Toner duct drive unit assembly part number

Toner duct drive unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 233

 Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-156 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-157 Remove the rear-bottom cover

234 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-158 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the toner duct drive unit

1. Loosen the PCA cage. Remove two screws on the lower edge of the cage to allow access to the duct
drive.

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 3-159 Remove screw

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 235

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 3-160 Disconnect connector

4. Remove four screws. Loosen the PCA by removing nine screws, enabling access to the screw located
behind the board. Remove the toner duct drive unit and disconnect the second connector.

236 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Toner supply drive unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear covers

● Step 2: Remove the toner supply drive unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner supply drive unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Toner supply drive unit assembly part number

Toner supply drive unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 237

 Step 1: Remove the rear covers
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-161 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-162 Remove the rear-bottom cover

238 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-163 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 2: Remove the toner supply drive unit

1. Loosen the PCA cage by removing the two bottom screws. This enables access to the supply drive.

2. Release the cable restraint.

3. Disconnect the connector and remove three screws (callout 1). Remove the toner supply drive unit.
Disconnect the second connector.

Figure 3-164 Remove toner supply drive unit and disconnect connector

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 239

 Toner duct
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit

● Step 2: Remove the rear covers

● Step 3: Remove the main drive unit

● Step 4: Remove the formater PCA

● Step 5: Remove the formatter cage

● Step 6: Remove the main board

● Step 7: Remove the main board cage

● Step 8: Remove the toner drive unit

● Step 9: Remove the toner duct

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner duct assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Toner duct assembly part number

Toner duct assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

240 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit
▲ Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit.

Step 2: Remove the rear covers

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then
to the right to remove.

Figure 3-165 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 3-166 Remove the rear-bottom cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 241

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 3-167 Remove the rear-top cover

Step 3: Remove the main drive unit

1. Open the right door.

2. Disconnect five connectors and release eleven cable restraints. Remove five screws and then remove the
main drive unit.

Figure 3-168 Remove screws and main drive unit

Step 4: Remove the formater PCA

▲ Disconnect seven connectors and eight screws, and then remove formatter PCA.

242 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-169 Remove the formatter connectors and screws

Step 5: Remove the formatter cage

1. Disconnect ten connectors and two cable restraints.

2. Remove four screws and screw-caps, and then remove the left-upper cover.

Figure 3-170 Remove the left-upper cover

3. Remove one screw from the side of the formatter cage (beneath the left-upper cover location).

Figure 3-171 Remove the formatter cage side screw

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 243

 4. Remove three screws from the formatter cage face, and then release one tab to remove the formatter
cage.

Figure 3-172 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage

Step 6: Remove the main board

1. Disconnect 19 connectors, a ground wire, and three FFCs on the main board.

Figure 3-173 Remove the main board connectors and screws

2. Remove nine screws, and then remove the main board.

244 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Disconnect the MSOK from the removed main board, noting its orientation. Transfer the MSOK to the
replacement main board and install it using the same orientation.

TIP: The main board is marked to show the correct orientation of the MSOK when installed.

Figure 3-174 MSOK installation orientation

Reinstallation tip: See the screen-printed icon on the main board to ensure that the MSOK is aligned
correctly during reinstallation.

Step 7: Remove the main board cage

1. Remove the FFC retainer at the bottom-right.

2. Pinch the ground strap (callout 1) to remove it from the top of the cage.

Figure 3-175 Remove the ground strap

3. Open seven cable retainers.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 245

 4. Remove four screws.

Figure 3-176 Remove the main board cage screws

5. Lift the main board cage up slightly to release one bracket, and then pull out to remove.

Step 8: Remove the toner drive unit

1. Loosen the PCA cage by removing the two bottom screws. This enables access to the supply drive.

2. Release the cable restraint.

3. Disconnect the connector and remove three screws (callout 1). Remove the toner supply drive unit.
Disconnect the second connector.

Figure 3-177 Remove toner supply drive unit and disconnect connector

246 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 9: Remove the toner duct
▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the toner duct.

Figure 3-178 Remove screws and toner duct

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 247

 Toner collection unit sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the inner cover

● Step 2: Remove the TCU sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner collection unit sensor.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Toner collection unit sensor part number

Toner collection unit sensor

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the inner cover

1. Open the front cover. Remove the toner cartridge (callout 1) and the TCU (callout 2).

248 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-179 Remove the toner cartridge and TCU

1
2

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the inner cover.

Figure 3-180 Remove the inner cover

Step 2: Remove the TCU sensor

▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove the sensor.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 249

 Figure 3-181 Disconnect connector and remove sensor

250 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Auto size sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the auto size sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the auto size sensor.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Auto size sensor part number

Auto size sensor

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 251

 Step 1: Remove the auto size sensor
▲ Do the following:

● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.

● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 3-182 Remove screws

252 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Exit unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the exit unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the exit unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Exit unit assembly part number

Exit unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 253

 Step 1: Remove the exit unit
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Open the right door. Disconnect the exit unit connector and two cable restraints.

Figure 3-183 Disconnect exit unit connector and cable restraints

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the exit unit.

Figure 3-184 Remove screws and exit unit

254 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Fuser-out sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the fuser out sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser-out sensor assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Fuser-out sensor assembly part number

Fuser-out sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 255

 Step 1: Remove the fuser out sensor
1. Remove two screws and two plastic guides. Lift up the right-door.

Figure 3-185 Lift right-door

2. Disconnect the connector and remove the cable from the cable guide. Remove the right-door exit. Use
caution as the springs are not retained.

Figure 3-186 Remove right-door exit

256 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Separate the right-door exit after removing three plastic, self-tapping screws.

Figure 3-187 Remove screws and separate right-door exit

4. Disconnect the connector and remove the fuser-out sensor.

TIP: When removing the sensor lift the flag, compress the bottom tabs and push from hole, and then
rotate and release the top tabs.

Figure 3-188 Disconnect connector and remove fuser-out sensor

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 257

 Duplex sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the duplex sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the duplex sensor assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Duplex sensor assembly part number

Duplex sensorassembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

258 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the duplex sensor
1. Remove the transfer roller assembly. Push the rear side to release the pin and lift up to release the
sensor.

Figure 3-189 Remove transfer roller assembly

2. Remove one self-tapping screw. Open the Guide-transfer roller Upper by releasing four plastic snaps.

Figure 3-190 Open guide-transfer roller upper

NOTE: Reinstallation notes:

● Make sure the top housing locates via the plastic locator pins on either side and snap into place.

● Make sure the plastic tabs are installed properly. Move the assembly into position from a 45° angle.
Make sure the springs are located correctly and then snap into place.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 259

 3. Remove one screw. Turn over the Holder-DUP SNR. Disconnect the connector and remove the duplex
sensor.

Figure 3-191 Disconnect connector and remove duplex sensor

260 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Multipurpose (MP) unit and MP assemblies
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door

● Step 2: Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the multipurpose (MP) unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Multipurpose (MP) unit assembly part number

Multipurpose (MP) unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 261

 Step 1: Remove the right door
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-192 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 3-193 Disconnect right door connector

262 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge
to avoid injury.

Figure 3-194 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 3-195 Release left dampener

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 263

 5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to
clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 3-196 Remove right door

264 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 2: Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies
1. Open the MP tray and remove the MP roller cover. Release tabs at back of the roller cover and rotate to
release.

Figure 3-197 Remove MP front cover

2. Open the MP tray and release the hinge from the right, flexing the linker to remove.

Figure 3-198 Open MP tray and release link

3. Remove two screws and then remove the cable cover.

Figure 3-199 Remove screws and cable cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 265

 4. Remove three screws and then remove the cable cover lower.

Figure 3-200 Remove screws and cable cover lower

5. Remove one screw. Prop up the hinge on the door edge to keep it out of the way.

Figure 3-201 Remove screw and prop up hinge

6. Remove three screws.

Figure 3-202 Remove screws

266 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 7. Remove one screw.

Figure 3-203 Remove screw

8. Remove two screws from the other side of the door.

Figure 3-204 Remove screws

9. Remove four screws.

Figure 3-205 Remove screws

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 267

 10. Swing out the guide feed (C) to the right. Remove the hinge pin from the front.

Figure 3-206 Remove hinge pin

11. Gently lift up the right door.

Figure 3-207 Lift right door duplex lower

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 3-208 Remove screws

268 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 13. Disconnect three connectors near the hinge.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the connector couplers stay attached to the door.

Figure 3-209 Disconnect connectors

14. Remove one screw, and then remove the MP unit.

Figure 3-210 Remove screw and MP unit

15. Remove the MP-cover base.

Figure 3-211 Remove MP-cover base

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 269

 16. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the gear (C).

Figure 3-212 Remove e-ring and gear

17. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bushing (D).

Figure 3-213 Remove e-ring and bushing

270 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 18. Remove one screw, and then remove the Bracket-Solenoid.

Figure 3-214 Remove screw and bracket-solenoid

NOTE: Reinstallation note: Route the cable before putting the cover back on during reinstallation.

19. Remove four screws, and then release the MP bracket pickup. Release the cable from the cable harness.

Figure 3-215 Release MP bracket pickup and release cable from harness

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 271

 20. Release the cable from the cable retainer, and release the cable from the cable harness. Remove two
screws, and then remove the MP solenoid.

Figure 3-216 Release cable and remove MP solenoid

NOTE: Reinstallation note: When reinstalling, the paper stopper needs to be located in the appropriate
slot in the housing.

272 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door

● Step 2: Remove the paper trays

● Step 3: Remove the paper pickup assemblies

● Step 4: Remove the empty and level sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the registration assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Pickup unit and sensor assembly part number

Pickup unit and sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 273

 Step 1: Remove the right door
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-217 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 3-218 Disconnect right door connector

274 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge
to avoid injury.

Figure 3-219 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 3-220 Release left dampener

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 275

 5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to
clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 3-221 Remove right door

Step 2: Remove the paper trays

▲ Remove the paper trays.

Step 3: Remove the paper pickup assemblies

1. Remove one screw and one connector for each paper pickup assembly.

Figure 3-222 Remove the paper pickup assembly screw(s)

Before removing the Tray 2 paper pickup assembly, remove one screw and disconnect one connector,
and then remove the feed sensor bar.

276 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-223 Remove the feed sensor bar

2. Remove the paper pickup assemblies.

Figure 3-224 Remove the paper pickup assemblies

Step 4: Remove the empty and level sensor

1. Release the sensor after disconnecting the connector. (Empty sensor [A], level sensor [B]).

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 277

 Figure 3-225 Release the empty and level sensor

2. Remove one screw and disconnect one sensor, and then remove the sensor assembly.

278 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Feed sensor 1
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door

● Step 2: Remove the feed sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the feed sensor 1 assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Feed sensor 1 assembly part number

Feed sensor 1 assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 279

 Step 1: Remove the right door
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-226 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 3-227 Disconnect right door connector

280 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge
to avoid injury.

Figure 3-228 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 3-229 Release left dampener

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 281

 5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to
clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 3-230 Remove right door

Step 2: Remove the feed sensor

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor cover.

Figure 3-231 Remove sensor cover

2. Remove one screw. Release the sensor holder.

282 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Disconnect the connector and release the cable from the cable restraint. Remove the feed sensor.

Figure 3-232 Remove feed sensor

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 283

 Feed unit and feed sensor 2
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door

● Step 2: Remove the feed unit and feed sensor 2

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the feed unit and feed sensor 2 assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Feed unit and feed sensor 2 assembly part number

Feed unit and feed sensor 2 assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

284 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the right door
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-233 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 3-234 Disconnect right door connector

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 285

 3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge
to avoid injury.

Figure 3-235 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 3-236 Release left dampener

286 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to
clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 3-237 Remove right door

Step 2: Remove the feed unit and feed sensor 2

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the Feed Unit (A).

Figure 3-238 Remove screw and feed unit

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 287

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket (B).

Figure 3-239 Remove screws and bracket

3. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the feed sensor.

Figure 3-240 Remove feed sensor

288 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Registration unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right door

● Step 2: Remove the TCU

● Step 3: Remove the drum unit

● Step 4: Remove the registration unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the registration unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Registration unit assembly part number

Registration unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 289

 Step 1: Remove the right door
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 3-241 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 3-242 Disconnect right door connector

290 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge
to avoid injury.

Figure 3-243 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 3-244 Release left dampener

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 291

 5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to
clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 3-245 Remove right door

Step 2: Remove the TCU

▲ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit (callout A).

Figure 3-246 Remove the TCU

292 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 3: Remove the drum unit
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging to the drum unit, it must be removed to remove or install the registration
unit.

1. Disconnect the drum unit connector. Remove two screws.

Figure 3-247 Disconnect drum unit connector

2. Remove the drum unit.

Figure 3-248 Remove drum unit

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 293

 3. Disconnect the connector.

Figure 3-249 Disconnect connector

4. Remove six screws securing the rear cover.

Figure 3-250 Remove rear cover screws

5. Remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-251 Remove rear cover

294 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 6. Separate the developer unit (B) from the drum unit (A). Remove the cable from its guide.

Figure 3-252 Separate developer and drum units

7. Replace with the new drum unit. Installation is the same steps as removal in reverse order.

NOTE: The replacement drum unit ships with a dummy rear cover for support. Do not use the dummy
rear cover in the product. It is missing the gear necessary to drive the developing unit.

Step 4: Remove the registration unit

1. Remove the paper dust cleaner.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the guide feed roller.

Figure 3-253 Remove screws and guide feed roller

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 295

 3. Remove four screws, two to loosen the unit and two to remove the bracket (B).

Figure 3-254 Remove screws

NOTE: Reinstallation note: Make sure the notches on the sheet metal bracket seat fully in the grooves
on the shaft.

4. Disconnect the connector. Remove the registration sensor.

Figure 3-255 Remove registration sensor

296 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

320 GB main disk drive
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the main disk drive

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the hard disk drive (HDD) assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main disk drive assembly part number

Main isk drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 297

 Step 1: Remove the main disk drive
1. Remove the inner finisher or paper pass, if installed.

2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws from the power-switch cover.

Figure 3-256 Remove the power-switch cover

3. Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then remove the exit tray.

Figure 3-257 Remove screw-caps and screws

4. Remove one screw and cover exit right.

Figure 3-258 Remove the cover exit right

298 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 5. Remove four screws and three screw covers. Remove the cover exit rear by pulling from the right and
rotating out.

Figure 3-259 Remove screws and cover exit rear

6. Remove four screws. Disconnect the cable and remove the main disk drive assembly.

Figure 3-260 Remove screws, disconnect cable and remove main disk drive assembly

7. Remove four screws, and then remove main disk drive from its bracket.

8. Install the new main disk drive assembly.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, make sure the plastic locator tabs on the rear exit cover are seated
correctly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC parts 299

 Document feeders
Two document feeder types are available for this printer. Printers with “z” bundles are equipped with “Flow”
document feeders. Printers with “dn” bundles are equipped with the standard document feeder.

● Standard (dn bundles) document feeder

● Flow (z bundles) document feeder

300 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Standard (dn bundles) document feeder
● Document feeder whole unit (dn bundles)

● Document feeder jam access cover

● Document feeder input tray

● Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS)

● Document feeder main motor

● Document feeder feed motor

● Document feeder PCA

● Document feeder white backing (dn bundles)

ENWW Document feeders 301

 Document feeder whole unit (dn bundles)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder whole unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Document feeder whole unit (LX) assembly part number

Document feeder whole unit (LX) assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

302 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit

1. Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover.

Figure 3-261 Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover

2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 3-262 Remove the document feeder connector cover

ENWW Document feeders 303

 3. Remove the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness from the main board.
Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 3-263 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

4. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scan joint board. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

5. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 3-264 Release the document feeder hinge screws

304 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 6. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 3-265 Lift and remove the document feeder

ENWW Document feeders 305

 Document feeder jam access cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the jam access cover.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Jam access cover assembly part number

Jam access cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

306 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-266 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-267 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder jam access cover

1. Open the jam access cover, and then remove one screw.

ENWW Document feeders 307

 Figure 3-268 Remove the jam access cover screw

2. Remove the pivot pin, and then pivot the cover and release the hinge to remove the jam access cover.

Figure 3-269 Remove the jam access cover

308 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder input tray
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 3: Remove the document feeder input tray

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder input tray.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Document feeder input tray assembly part number

Document feeder input tray assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Document feeders 309

 Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-270 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-271 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

310 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-272 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-273 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 3: Remove the document feeder input tray

1. Disconnect one connector on document feeder board (callout 1), remove one screw, and then remove
the hinge pin (callout 2).

ENWW Document feeders 311

 Figure 3-274 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin

1
2

2. Remove the input tray. Carefully guide the cable out of the chassis while removing the tray.

312 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 3: Remove the pickup and feed roller assembly

● Step 4: Remove the paper path cover

● Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) part number

Contact Image Sensor (CIS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Document feeders 313

 Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-275 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-276 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

314 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-277 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-278 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 3: Remove the pickup and feed roller assembly

1. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover.

ENWW Document feeders 315

 Figure 3-279 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws

2. Remove four screws in the sheet-metal roller bracket, rotate the roller assembly over, and then
disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly.

Figure 3-280 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Step 4: Remove the paper path cover

▲ Remove four screws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.

316 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-281 Remove the separation roller assembly screws

Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover
must reinstalled with the same orientation.

Figure 3-282 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

ENWW Document feeders 317

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout
2).

Figure 3-283 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

318 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder main motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 2: Remove the main motor

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the main motor assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main motor assembly part number

Main motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Document feeders 319

 Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-284 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-285 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the main motor

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove the tension spring (callout 2), and then remove four
screws (callout 3).

320 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-286 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws

2
1

2. Carefully lift the motor out while releasing the gear belt.

Figure 3-287 Main motor and gear belt

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

ENWW Document feeders 321

 Document feeder feed motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 2: Remove the feed motor

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the feed motor assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Feed motor assembly part number

J8A10-67901 Feed motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

322 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-288 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-289 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the feed motor

1. Loosen the cables in the cable guide, remove two screws and then move the cable guide out of the way.

ENWW Document feeders 323

 Figure 3-290 Feed motor cable guide

2. Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then carefully lift the motor out to remove.

Figure 3-291 Remove the feed motor

324 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder PCA
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Document feeder PCA assembly part number

Document feeder PCA assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

ENWW Document feeders 325

 Figure 3-292 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-293 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA

1. Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, and then remove four screws.

326 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-294 Document feeder PCA

2. Remove the document feeder PCA.

ENWW Document feeders 327

 Document feeder white backing (dn bundles)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

White backing assembly part number

White backing

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

328 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing

White backing

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

Figure 3-295 Close the document feeder cover

ENWW Document feeders 329

 6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 3-296 Smooth the white backing

330 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Flow (z bundles) document feeder
● Flow ADF whole unit

● Document feeder jam access cover

● Document feeder input tray

● Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS)

● Document feeder front motor

● Document feeder rear motors

● Document feeder PCA fan

● Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan

● Document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA

● Document feeder white backing (z bundles)

Flow ADF whole unit

● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit

● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the flow ADF whole unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Flow ADF whole unit assembly part number

SAM-JC97-04868A Flow ADF

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

ENWW Document feeders 331

 After performing service
● Connect the power cable.

● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 3-297 Remove document feeder connector cover

332 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 3-298 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scan joint board. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 3-299 Disconnect document feeder harness

ENWW Document feeders 333

 4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.

Figure 3-300 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 3-301 Remove screws

334 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 3-302 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Document feeders 335

 Document feeder jam access cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the jam access cover assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Jam access cover assembly part number

SAM-JC97-04869A Jam access cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

336 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-303 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Remove two screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-304 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

ENWW Document feeders 337

 Figure 3-305 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-306 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover

1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.

338 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-307 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect the ground wire.

Figure 3-308 Remove the jam access cover ground wire

ENWW Document feeders 339

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout 2)

Figure 3-309 Remove the jam access cover door arm support

4. Remove the jam access cover.

340 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder input tray
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 3: Remove the dampening unit

● Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit

● Step 5: Remove the input tray

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the input tray assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Input tray assembly part number

SAM-JC97-04658B Input tray assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Document feeders 341

 Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-310 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-311 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

342 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-312 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-313 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 3: Remove the dampening unit

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.

ENWW Document feeders 343

 Figure 3-314 Remove the document feeder damping unit

Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit

1. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover.

Figure 3-315 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws

344 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 2. Remove four screws in the sheet-metal roller bracket, rotate the roller assembly over, and then
disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly.

Figure 3-316 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Step 5: Remove the input tray

1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.

Figure 3-317 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector

2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.

ENWW Document feeders 345

 Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

● Step 4: Remove the paper path cover

● Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

CIS assembly part number

SAM-0609-001558 CIS assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

346 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-318 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-319 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

ENWW Document feeders 347

 Figure 3-320 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-321 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

▲ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2, including one ground wire), and
then remove the pickup roller assembly.

348 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-322 Remove the pickup roller assembly

Step 4: Remove the paper path cover

▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 3-323 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover
must reinstalled with the same orientation.

ENWW Document feeders 349

 Figure 3-324 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

2. Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to pull up on the metal pin, and then slide the CIS as shown below
to remove it.

Figure 3-325 Remove the CIS

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

350 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder front motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder front motor

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the front motor assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Front motor assembly part number

SAM-JC31-00177A Front motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Document feeders 351

 Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-326 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-327 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder front motor

▲ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.

352 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-328 Remove the document feeder front motor

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

ENWW Document feeders 353

 Document feeder rear motors
● Introduction

● Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2

● Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors

● Step 5: Remove the exit motor

● Step 6: Remove the document feeder feed motor

● Step 7: Remove the REGI motor

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the rear motor assemblies.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Document feeder rear motors part number

Motor 1 (rear)

Motor 2 (rear)

Pickup motor (rear)

Pre_REGI motor (rear)

Exit motor (rear)

Feed motor (rear)

REGI motor (rear)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

354 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Document feeders 355

 Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors

Use the figure below to locate the motor.

Figure 3-329 Document feeder motors

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

Table 3-1 Document feeder motors

Callout Description

1 Motor 1

Go to Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2 on page 358.

2 Motor 2

Go to Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2 on page 358.

3 Pickup motor

Go to Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors on page 359.

4 Pre_REGI motor

Go to Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors on page 359.

5 Exit motor

Go to Step 5: Remove the exit motor on page 361.

6 Feed motor

Go to Step 6: Remove the document feeder feed motor on page 362.

7 REGI motor

Go to Step 7: Remove the REGI motor on page 363.

356 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-330 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-331 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

ENWW Document feeders 357

 Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2
▲ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

Figure 3-332 Remove the motor

358 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors

1. Loosen the cable guide

2. Disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

Figure 3-333 Disconnect one connector

ENWW Document feeders 359

 3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the motor off the
screws to remove.

Figure 3-334 Pickup motor

Figure 3-335 Pre-REGI motor

4. To reinstall the motor, do the following:

● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the
motor pulley.

● Install the tension spring.

● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

360 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 5: Remove the exit motor

1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the main fan.

Figure 3-336 Remove the main fan

2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then
remove the exit motor.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 3-337 Remove the motor

ENWW Document feeders 361

 Step 6: Remove the document feeder feed motor

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 3-338 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.

Figure 3-339 Remove the motor

362 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 7: Remove the REGI motor

1. Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor

3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to remove.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

ENWW Document feeders 363

 Document feeder PCA fan
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA fan assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Document feeder PCA fan assembly part number

SAM-JC31-00146A Document feeder PCA fan assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

364 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-340 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-341 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.

ENWW Document feeders 365

 Figure 3-342 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector

Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.

366 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS fan assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

CIS fan part number

SAM-JC31-00168A CIS fan

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Document feeders 367

 Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-343 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-344 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan

▲ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.

368 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-345 Remove the document feeder PCA fan

ENWW Document feeders 369

 Document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

● Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

● Step 4: Remove the document feeder paper path cover

● Step 5: Remove the document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly part number

Ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

370 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-346 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.

Figure 3-347 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws

Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

ENWW Document feeders 371

 Figure 3-348 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 3-349 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

▲ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2, including one ground wire), and
then remove the pickup roller assembly.

372 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-350 Remove the pickup roller assembly

Step 4: Remove the document feeder paper path cover

▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 3-351 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

Step 5: Remove the document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA

1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).

ENWW Document feeders 373

 Figure 3-352 Remove one screw

2. Remove the pick/feed cover.

Figure 3-353 Remove the pick/feed cover

374 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.

Figure 3-354 Remove the ultrasonic sensor

ENWW Document feeders 375

 Document feeder white backing (z bundles)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing

Introduction

This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

White backing assembly part number

White backing

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

376 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing

White backing

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Replace any damaged or missing velcro tabs by positioning them on the new white backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

Figure 3-355 Close the document feeder cover

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 3-356 Smooth the white backing

ENWW Document feeders 377

 Scanner unit (image scanner unit)
● Scanner whole unit

● Scan glass

● Scanner LED lamp module

● Scanner imaging unit

● Scan joint board

● Scanner APS sensor

378 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Scanner whole unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the scanner whole unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner whole unit.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Scanner whole unite part number

SAM-JC97-04520C Scanner whole unit part number

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the scanner whole unit

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 379

 Figure 3-357 Remove document feeder connector cover

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 3-358 Remove the cable choke

380 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scan joint board. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 3-359 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.

IMPORTANT: If installing a replacment document feeder, note the alignment marks on the hinge
stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled with the same alignment.

Figure 3-360 Alignment marks

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 381

 5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 3-361 Remove screws

6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 3-362 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

382 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 7. Remove three screws.

Figure 3-363 Remove three screws

8. Place the control panel in the upright position.

9. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

10. Remove two screws on the control-panel frame.

Figure 3-364 Remove two screws

11. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, the HIP USB cable, and one HDMI connector.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 383

 12. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 3-365 Remove USB interconnect cable

13. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

14. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear of the control panel, and then snap in the control
panel.

384 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 15. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge and
then pull the cover toward the back.

Figure 3-366 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover

16. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.

Figure 3-367 Release scan-left cover

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 385

 17. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.

NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the replacement
scanner whole unit.

Figure 3-368 Remove scan-right cover

2
1

18. Remove two screws.

Figure 3-369 Remove two screws

386 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 19. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.

Figure 3-370 Disconnect scan cables

20. Remove three screw-caps and three screws from the left. Release the scan-left cove

Figure 3-371 Remove screws

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 387

 21. Remove three screws. Lift the scanner straight up and off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 3-372 Remove three screws

NOTE: After reassembly, utilize the target to adjust the scanner location as necessary.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the scan bed by lowering the left side first and then lower the right. Align the
screw holes on the right, and then install the screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the lower cover and ensure the cables are routed through the opening for the
control panel and the bracket is properly aligned in the cover.

388 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Scan glass
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner glass.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Scanner glass part number

SAM-JC97-04522B Scanner glass part number

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scan glass to the right to
remove it.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 389

 Figure 3-373 Remove scan glass

390 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Scanner LED lamp module
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

● Step 2: Remove the scanner LED lamp module

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the LED lamp module assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

LED lamp module assembly part number

SAM-JC97-04521A LED lamp module assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scan glass to the right to
remove it.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 391

 Figure 3-374 Remove scan glass

392 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 2: Remove the scanner LED lamp module
1. Remove the transparent tape.

Figure 3-375 Remove transparent tape

2. Disconnect the flat cable.

Figure 3-376 Disconnect cable

3. Remove four screws. Release the LED lamp module.

Figure 3-377 Remove screws and release LED lamp module

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 393

 Scanner imaging unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

● Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner imaging unit assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Scanner imaging unit assembly part number

SAM-JC97-04523B Scanner imaging unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scan glass to the right to
remove it.

394 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 Figure 3-378 Remove scan glass

Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit

1. Remove four screws, and then release the imaging unit cover.

Figure 3-379 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover

2. Disconnect the flat cable.

Figure 3-380 Disconnect flat cable

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 395

 3. Remove two screws and release the scanner imaging unit.

CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting only.

Figure 3-381 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit

396 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Scan joint board
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the scan joint board

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scan joint board assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Scan joint board assembly part number

SAM-JC92-02964A Scan joint board assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the scan joint board

▲ Disconnect all harnesses. Remove four screws, and then release the scan joint board.

NOTE: There are two empty connectors.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 397

 Figure 3-382 Remove screws and release scan joint board

398 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Scanner APS sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

● Step 2: Remove the scanner APS sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the APS sensor assembly.

Click here to view a video of this procedure.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

APS sensor assembly part number

SAM-JC97-04507A APS sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the scanner glass

▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scan glass to the right to
remove it.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 399

 Figure 3-383 Remove scan glass

Step 2: Remove the scanner APS sensor

1. Remove the joint board cover.

Figure 3-384 Remove joint board cover

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 3-385 Remove screw

400 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Disconnect the harness.

Figure 3-386 Disconnect harness

4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.

Figure 3-387 Remove screws and release APS sensor

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 401

 Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
● Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

402 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover assembly part number

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 403

 Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-388 Remove the DCF rear cover

404 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the DCF right door

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

DCF right door part number

??? DCF right door

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the DCF right door

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 405

 Figure 3-389 Remove the lower right cover

2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).

Figure 3-390 Slide the hinge pin

406 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 3-391 Remove the DCF right door

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 407

 Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

● Step 2: Remove the DCF motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF motor assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

DCF motor assembly part number

DCF motor

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

408 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-392 Remove the DCF rear cover

Step 2: Remove the DCF motor

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.

Figure 3-393 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 409

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.

Figure 3-394 Remove the feed drive unit

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.

Figure 3-395 Remove the feed motor

410 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

● Step 2: Remove the DCF pickup motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup motor assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

DCF pickup motor assembly part number

DCF pickup motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 411

 Step 1: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-396 Remove the DCF rear cover

Step 2: Remove the DCF pickup motor

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup motor.

Figure 3-397 Remove the DCF pickup motor

412 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

● Step 2: Remove the DCF PCA

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA assembly part number

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 413

 Step 1: Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-398 Remove the DCF rear cover

Step 2: Remove the DCF PCA

▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.

Figure 3-399 Remove the DCF PCA

414 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units assembly part number

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 415

 Step 1: Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
1. Remove the DCF right door.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.

Figure 3-400 Remove two screws and the cable cover

3. At the front of the printer, remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.

Figure 3-401 Remove five screws and two brackets

416 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

 4. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide
(callout 2). Remove eight screws (callout 3).

Figure 3-402 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws

5. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.

Figure 3-403 Remove the pickup units

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 417

418 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW
4 Parts and diagrams

● For additional service and support information

● Order parts, accessories, and supplies

● How to use the parts list and diagrams

● Main parts

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF)

● Finishers

● Inner finisher

● Alphabetical parts list

● Numerical parts list

ENWW 419
 For additional service and support information
HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Work Bench (SAW) at http://h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/
home.do.

Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at https://h30125.www3.hp.com/hpcsn.

● To access HP PartSurfer information from any mobile device, go to http://partsurfermobile.hp.com/ or

scan the Quick Response (QR) code below.

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Service advisories

● Warranty and regulatory information

420 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Ordering
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts

or

partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the HP
SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.

Related documentation and software

HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Work Bench (SAW) at http://h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/
home.do.

Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at www.hp.com/partners/csn.

How to use the parts list and diagrams

The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts
list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part
number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement
unit (FRU).

NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components
described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables
and sensors.

ENWW Order parts, accessories, and supplies 421

 Main parts
Main assembly
Figure 4-1 Main assembly

422 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-1 Main assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Output SAM-JC90-01118B 1

2 Fuser, 220V SAM-JC91-01237A 1

2 Fuser, 110V SAM-JC91-01238A 1

4 Cover, side SAM-JC95-02080A 1

5 Cartridge SAM-JC96-11637A 1

6 Cover SAM-JC95-02094A 1

7 Image scanner SAM-JC97-04520C 1

8 ADF whole unit SAM-JC97-04851A 1

8 Flow ADF whole unit SAM-JC97–04868A 1

9 Laser scanner assembly SAM-JC97-04017B 1

10 HVPS, 24V SAM-JC44-000237A 1

11 LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 5H SAM-JC44-00249A 1

11 LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 4 SAM-JC44-00091D 1

11 LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 5H SAM-JC44-00250A 1

11 LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 4 SAM-JC44-00092D 1

12 Fuser drive PCA 110V (fuser drive board) SAM-JC44-00210D 1

12 Fuser drive PCA 220V (fuser drive board) SAM-JC44-00211D 1

13 Fan-type 8 SAM-JC31-00162A 1

14 HDD SAM-JC59-00037A 1

15 Main PCA SAM-JC31-02746A 1

16 ADF, white foam (Sponge-white sheet) SAM-JC63-04683A 1

19 Black developer unit SAM-JC96-11669A 1

ENWW Main parts 423

 Output
Figure 4-2 Output

424 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-2 Output

Ref Description Part number Qty

2 Photo interrupter SAM-0604–001393 1

4 Gear, output SAM-JC66-02163A 1

5 Spring, ts SAM-JC61–07185A 1

6 Actuator-bin full output SAM-JC66–04339A 1

7 Lever-actuator F_D full SAM-JC66-02218A 1

8 Lever-act full output SAM-JC66-02278A 1

10 Output guide, upper SAM-JC90-01132A 1

11 Output guide, lower SAM-JC90-01133A 1

ENWW Main parts 425

 First cassette
Figure 4-3 First cassette

426 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-3 First cassette

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Cassette SAM-JC90-01619A 1

ENWW Main parts 427

 Second cassette
Figure 4-4 Second cassette

428 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-4 Second cassette

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Cassette SAM-JC90-01620A 1

ENWW Main parts 429

 Main engine frame
Figure 4-5 Main engine frame

430 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-5 Main engine frame

Ref Description Part number Qty

2 Drive, pickup SAM-JC93-00442A 2

3 Drive, main SAM-JC93-00912B 1

3–1 Motor bldc SAM-JC31-00123B 1

3–2 Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00123A 1

3–3 Drive, main sub SAM-JC93-00911B 1

4 Drive, M fuser output (output) SAM-JC93-00449A 1

5 Drive, M toner supply SAM-JC93-00450B 1

6 Drive, duct SAM-JC93-00451A 1

8 Frame, main pickup 2nd SAM-JC93-00512A 1

9 Frame, main pickup 1st SAM-JC93-00511A 1

ENWW Main parts 431

 Fuser output drive
Figure 4-6 Fuser output drive

432 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-6 Fuser output drive

Ref Description Part number Qty

8 Motor bldc SAM-JC31-00123B 1

9 Drive, motor step SAM-JC93-00452A 1

ENWW Main parts 433

 Registration sub-frame
Figure 4-7 Registration sub-frame

434 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-7 Registration sub-frame

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Frame, sub registration SAM-JC93-01371A 1

1 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001381 1

ENWW Main parts 435

 Main frame pickup 1 and 2
Figure 4-8 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

436 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-8 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Ref Description Part number Qty

1–4 Main pickup frame SAM-JC93-00510A 1

ENWW Main parts 437

 Main frame pickup
Figure 4-9 Main pickup frame

438 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-9 Main pickup frame

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-00540A 3

2 Frame, main pickup upper SAM-JC93-00504A 1

7 Frame, main pickup lower SAM-JC93-00503A 1

7–4 Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67–00455A 1

ENWW Main parts 439

 Main frame pickup, upper
Figure 4-10 Main frame pickup, upper

440 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-10 Main frame pickup, upper

Ref Description Part number Qty

3 Actuator, empty pickup SAM-JC66-03199A 1

4 Clutch, P_one way SAM-JC66-00977A 1

5 Gear, M_PU joint SAM-JC66-00943A 1

6 Gear, M_one way SAM-JC66-00941A 1

7 Gear, M_idle PU SAM-JC66-00940A 1

10 Holder, M_idle one way SAM-JC61-01288A 1

12 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

ENWW Main parts 441

 Main frame
Figure 4-11 Main frame

442 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-11 Main frame

Ref Description Part number Qty

1–2 Frame main, switch open SAM-JC93-00466A 1

3 Frame sub, clean registration SAM-JC93-00078C 1

6 Roller idle, feed SAM-JC66-03203A 2

7–1 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001381 1

9 Frame, HV package mono SAM-JC93-00891A 1

9–1 PBA, eraser mono SAM-JC92-02747A 1

9–2 MEA unit, terminal SAM-JC97-01401A 1

10 Frame, duct SAM-JC93-00917A 1

11–2 Fan SAM-JC31-00161A 1

14–1 PBA, paper size sensor SAM-JC92-02622A 2

ENWW Main parts 443

 Cover
Figure 4-12 Cover

444 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-12 Cover

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Cover, front SAM-JC95-02096A 1

2 Cover, middle right SAM-JC95-02082A 1

3 Cover, inner SAM-JC95-02097A 1

4 Cover, scanner front SAM-JC95-02086A 1

5 Cover, left mono SAM-JC95-02095A 1

6 Cover, left upper SAM-JC63-05623A 1

7 Cover, scanner left SAM-JC63-05576A 1

8 Cover, output SAM-JC95-02087A 1

9 Cover, front lower SAM-JC63-04536B 1

10 Cover, right front mono SAM-JC63-04539B 1

11 Cover, right rear mono SAM-JC63-04540B 1

12 Cover, right front mono SAM-JC63-04520B 1

13 Cover, scanner right SAM-JC63-05575A 1

14 Cover, rear lower mono SAM-JC63-05617A 1

15 Cover, rear upper SAM-JC63-05618A 1

17 Cover, scanner rear SAM-JC63-05577A 1

18 Cover, rear output SAM-JC95-02088A 1

19 Cover, rear dummy SAM-JC63-04567B 1

ENWW Main parts 445

 Right door
Figure 4-13 Right door

446 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-13 Right door

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Cover, upper side SAM-JC63-04573B 1

2 Fan, type 6 SAM-JC31-00160C 1

3 Cover, side mono SAM-JC63-04576B 1

4 Cover, front MP SAM-JC63-03356C 1

5 MP sub tray SAM-JC90-01668A 1

6 Guide, duplex upper SAM-JC61-04795A 1

7 Cover, side output SAM-JC95-01509A 1

8 Link, side SAM-JC66-03220B 1

11 Link, D SAM-JC66-03235A 1

13 Cover, side duplex lower SAM-JC95-01519A 1

15 Cover, side take away SAM-JC95-01516A 1

16 Cover, harness mono SAM-JC63-03361C 1

18 Cover, side duplex motor SAM-JC95-01510A 1

19 Locker, side rear SAM-JC64-00711A 1

23 Cover, rear lower mono SAM-JC95-01518A 1

24 Cover, side roller TR SAM-JC95-01943A 1

25 Locker, side SAM-JC64-00710A 1

ENWW Main parts 447

 MP tray
Figure 4-14 MP tray

448 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-14 MP tray

Ref Description Part number Qty

2–1 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

2–4 Coupler, torquelimiter SAM-JC67-00455A 1

2–5 Seal, pad tray 1 SAM-JC62-01085A 1

3 Tray 1 bracket pickup SAM-JC90-01125B 1

3–1 Solenoid, tray 1 SAM-JC33-00029B 1

3–2 Tray 1 one way SAM-JC90-00918A 1

3–3 Clutch, P_one way SAM-JC66-00977A 2

7 Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-00540B 3

ENWW Main parts 449

 Right door output
Figure 4-15 Right door output

450 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-15 Right door output

Ref Description Part number Qty

2 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

3 Actuator, fuser out SAM-JC66-03307A 1

4 Spring, TS SAM-6107-001737 1

ENWW Main parts 451

 Right door duplex
Figure 4-16 Right door duplex

452 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-16 Right door duplex

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Cover, side duplex SAM-JC95-01924A 1

5 Actuator, duplex 2 SAM-JC66-02180A 1

6 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

8 Spring, TS SAM-6107-001737 1

13 Roller idle, rubber, idle SAM-JC66-02289B 2

14 Shaft, roller idle L SAM-JC66-02354A 1

15 Spring, CS 0607-001731 2

ENWW Main parts 453

 ADF (dn models)
Figure 4-17 ADF (dn models)

454 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-17 ADF (dn models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 ADF, Cover open SAM-JC97-04853A 1

2 ADF, pickup SAM-JC97-04856A 1

3 Cover, front SAM-JC63-05563A 1

4 Cover, rear SAM-JC63-05561A 1

7 ADF stacker SAM-JC97-04859A 1

7–4 Gear, DOC pinion SAM-JC66-04079A 1

7–5 Photo Interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

n/a ADF shading sheet SAM-JC63-05055A 1

ENWW Main parts 455

 ADF exterior and ADF pickup assembly (dn models)
Figure 4-18 ADF exterior and ADF pickup assembly (dn models)

456 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-18 ADF exterior and ADF pickup assembly (dn models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

1–1 PCA ADF SAM-JC92-02962A 1

1–5 ADF,hinge R SAM-JC97-04528A 1

1–6 ADF, hinge L SAM-JC97-04527A 1

2–2 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

2–5 ADF sub pickup drive SAM-JC97-04857A 1

2–5–1 ADF pickup roller SAM-JC97-04099A 1

2–5–6 ADF pickup roller SAM-JC97-04860A 1

2–11 Spring, ES SAM-6107-003581 1

ENWW Main parts 457

 ADF main frame assembly (dn models)
Figure 4-19 ADF main frame assembly (dn models)

458 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-19 ADF main frame assembly (dn models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

1–1 ADF housing separation SAM-JC97-04586A 1

1–2 ADF separation roller SAM-JC97-04852A 1

1–2–1 ADF separation sub roller SAM-JC97-04861A 1

1–3 Friction pad, guide pickup SAM-JC69-01326A 1

5–5 Actuator, output SAM-JC66-04104A 1

6–2 Actuator, feed out SAM-JC66-04105A 1

6–3 Actuator, registration SAM-JC66-04103A 1

6–4 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001381 1

6–5 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

6–4 Motor BLDC, type 1 SAM-JC31-00156A 1

16 Clutch, electric G35 SAM-JC47-00038A 1

17 Link, cover open SAM-JC66-04100A 1

19 ADF, DCISM SAM-JC97-04722A 1

ENWW Main parts 459

 ADF image scanner (dn models)
Figure 4-20 ADF image scanner (dn models)

460 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-20 ADF image scanner (dn models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Scanner glass SAM-JC97-04522B 1

2 PCA scan joint SAM-JC92-02781A 1

3 Glass tempered, scan ADF SAM-JC01-00101A 1

4 Scanner open sensor SAM-JC97-04516A 1

5–1 Scanner FR lamp SAM-JC97-04521A 1

7 Motor, step 1P SAM-JC31-00158A 1

ENWW Main parts 461

 ADF image scanner, lower (dn models)
Figure 4-21 ADF image scanner, lower (dn models)

462 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-21 ADF image scanner, lower (dn models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Image scanner, FFC CCD SAM-JC97-04509A 1

2 Image scanner guide harness SAM-JC97-04512A 1

3 Image scanner, APS SAM-JC97-04507A 1

3-1 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001453 2

4 Image scanner, lens SAM-JC97-04523B 1

ENWW Main parts 463

 Flow ADF (z models) (GX)
Figure 4-22 Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

464 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-22 Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

Ref Description Part number Qty

2 Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04872A 1

2 Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04646B 1

3 Link cover, open SAM-JC66-02270A 1

5 Flow ADF, front cover SAM-JC97-04881A 1

6 Flow ADF, dummy front SAM-JC97-04879A 1

8 Flow ADF, damper SAM-JC97-04692A 1

9 Flow ADF, bottom cover SAM-JC97-04880A 1

10 Flow ADF, main frame (GX) (z models only) SAM-JC97-04883A 1

10 Flow ADF, main frame (sGX) (dn models only) SAM-JC97-04882A 1

13 Rear cover SAM-JC63-05566A 1

n/a ADF shading sheet SAM-JC63-05055A 1

ENWW Main parts 465

 Flow ADF open cover (z models)
Figure 4-23 Flow ADF open cover (z models)

466 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-23 Flow ADF open cover (z models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Flow ADF open cover SAM-JC97-04869A 1

2 Flow ADF open cover, lower SAM-JC97-04696B 1

2-5-1 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001502 4

ENWW Main parts 467

 Flow ADF upper pickup (z models)
Figure 4-24 Flow ADF upper pickup (z models)

468 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-24 Flow ADF upper pickup (z models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

2-1 Flow ADF, sub-pickup SAM-JC97-04650A 1

2-2 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

2-5 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001502 1

ENWW Main parts 469

 Flow ADF stacker (z models)
Figure 4-25 Flow ADF stacker (z models)

470 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-25 Flow ADF stacker (z models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Flow ADF stacker SAM-JC97-04658B 1

1-6 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001490 1

6 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1

ENWW Main parts 471

 Flow ADF main frame (z models)
Figure 4-26 Flow ADF main frame (z models)

472 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-26 Flow ADF main frame (z models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

1-1 Flow ADF, housing separation roller SAM-JC97-04661A 1

1-2 Flow ADF, separation cover SAM-JC97-04652A 1

5 Flow ADF scan in lower SAM-JC97-04656B 1

7 Contact image sensor SAM-0609-001558 1

8 Flow ADF, pickup release drive SAM-JC97-04681A 1

11 Flow ADF, PCA (GX) (z models only) SAM-JC92-02964A 1

11 Flow ADF, PCA (sGX) (dn models only) SAM-JC92-02964B 1

12 Flow ADF, feed drive motor SAM-JC97-04680A 4

13 Flow ADF, hinge l SAM-JC97-04640A 1

14 Flow ADF, hinge r SAM-JC97-04641A 1

16 Fan motor housing SAM-JC61-07694A 1

17 Fan, dc SAM-JC31-00168A 1

19 Flow ADF, lift drive SAM-JC97-04679A 1

20 Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00177A 1

21 Fan SAM-JC31-00146A 1

23 Flow ADF, exterior SAM-JC97-04668B 1

26 Flow ADF, white simplex roller SAM-JC97-04687A 1

27 Flow ADF scan out SAM-JC97-04830A 1

29 Flow ADF, scan release drive SAM-JC97-04682A 1

36 Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-001730 3

ENWW Main parts 473

 Flow ADF image scanner (z models)
Figure 4-27 Flow ADF image scanner (z models)

474 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-27 Flow ADF image scanner (z models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

3 Tempered scan glass SAM-JC01-00101A 1

4 Image scanner open sensor SAM-JC97-04516A 1

6 Image scanner, lower SAM-JC97-04515A 1

7 Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00158A 1

ENWW Main parts 475

 Flow ADF image scanner, lower
Figure 4-28 Flow ADF image scanner, lower (z models)

476 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-28 Flow ADF image scanner, lower (z models)

Ref Description Part number Qty

4 Image scanner SAM-JC97-04523B 1

ENWW Main parts 477

 Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
DCF main
Figure 4-29 DCF main

478 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-29 DCF main

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Cassette, fourth SAM-JC90-01666A 1

2 DCF, left cover SAM-JC63-04607B 1

8 Cassette, fifth SAM-JC90-01664A 1

9 Caster 6109-001138 4

11 DCF, front cover SAM-JC63-04606B 1

16 DCF, main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00513A 2

17 Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003185 1

18 DCF, sub-takeaway SAM-JC90-01285A 1

19 DCF, right cover SAM-JC63-04605B 1

20 Main frame rear auto-size holder SAM-JC93-00018A 2

22 DCF, feed drive SAM-JC93-00447A 1

26 DCF, sensor harness SAM-JC39-01692A 1

29 DCF, size sensor harness SAM-JC39-01695A 1

30 DCF PCA SAM-JC92-02453A 1

31 DCF, if harness SAM-JC39-01690A 1

32 DCF, rear cover SAM-JC63-04604B 1

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 479

 DCF main frame pickup 1
Figure 4-30 DCF main frame pickup 1

480 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-30 DCF main frame pickup 1

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 DCF, main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00513A 2

1 Main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00510A 2

2 Photo interrupter 0640-001381 2

3 DCF, feed pulley SAM-JC66-03288A 2

5 Second pickup guide SAM-JC61-04717A 2

6 DCF, idle feed roller SAM-JC66-03287A 2

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 481

 DCF main frame pickup
Figure 4-31 DCF main frame pickup

482 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-31 DCF main frame pickup

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00510A 2

1 Main frame pickup roller SAM-JC93-00540A 6

2 Main frame pickup, upper SAM-JC93-00504A 2

7 Main frame pickup, lower SAM-JC93-00503A 2

7-4 Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67-00455A 2

7-7 Fixer, e-ring SAM-JC61-01367A 2

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 483

 DCF main frame pickup, upper
Figure 4-32 DCF main frame pickup, upper

484 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-32 DCF main frame pickup, upper

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Main frame pickup, upper SAM-JC93-00504A 2

3 Actuator, empty pickup SAM-JC66-03199A 2

4 Clutch one way SAM-JC66-00977A 4

5 Gear-m, joint SAM-JC66-00943A 2

6 Gear-m, one way SAM-JC66-00941A 2

7 Gear-m, idle SAM-JC66-00940A 2

12 Holder-m, idle one way SAM-JC61-01288A 2

14 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 4

ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 485

 Finishers
Booklet finisher
Figure 4-33 Booklet finisher

486 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-33 Booklet finisher

Ref Description Part number Qty

3 Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B 1

4 Cover, front SAM-JC63-04986B 1

5 Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B 1

6 Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04988B 1

7 Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B 1

8 Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B 1

9 Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B 2

13 Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A 1

17 Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B 1

18 Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B 1

20 Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478A 1

ENWW Finishers 487

 Mainline finisher 1
Figure 4-34 Mainline finisher 1

488 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-34 Mainline finisher 1

Ref Description Part number Qty

4 Finisher sub-ejector unit SAM-JC90-01409A 1

5 Roller, main-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04722A 1

12 Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 6

13 Rail SAM-6102-003369 2

14 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

16 Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A 1

19 Finisher sub-alignment rear SAM-JC90-01465A 1

20 Finisher sub-alignment front SAM-JC90-01464A 1

ENWW Finishers 489

 Mainline finisher 2
Figure 4-35 Mainline finisher 2

490 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-35 Mainline finisher 2

Ref Description Part number Qty

2 Roller, main-feed output SAM-JC66-04726A 1

3 Roller, top-feed mid output SAM-JC66-04725A 1

4 Roller, mid-feed output SAM-JC66-04724A 1

5 Roller, output-feed bm SAM-JC66-04723A 1

6 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07414A 2

9 Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A 2

11 Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 6

12 Main-brush, output SAM-JC67-00817A 1

13 Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A 1

14 Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A 1

ENWW Finishers 491

 Mainline finisher 3
Figure 4-36 Mainline finisher 3

492 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-36 Mainline finisher 3

Ref Description Part number Qty

2 Finisher sub-clutch div SAM-JC90-01474A 1

4 Finisher sub-end stopper SAM-JC90-01466A 1

5 Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A 1

6 Roller, top-feed output SAM-JC66-04727A 1

12 Gear, buffer SAM-JC66-04602A 1

17 Actuator, pusher SAM-JC66-04526A 1

18 Cover-t, tray SAM-JC63-04995B 1

19 Top-seal, guide SAM-JC62-01328A 1

22 Guide, pusher SAM-JC61-07206A 1

25 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003649 1

26 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003647 2

28 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003645 2

29 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003640 1

30 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003639 1

31 Bearing ball SAM-6601-003062 2

33 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

36 Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01459A 2

37 Finisher sub-ef mtr SAM-JC90-01467A 1

38 Finisher sub-drv buff SAM-JC90-01453A 1

39 Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A 1

43 Solenoid SAM-JC90-01675A 1

44 Motor SAM-JC90-01673A 1

ENWW Finishers 493

 Mainline finisher 4
Figure 4-37 Mainline finisher 4

494 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-37 Mainline finisher 4

Ref Description Part number Qty

2 Finisher sub-staple unit SAM-JC90-01412A 1

8 Actuator-o, staple SAM-JC66-04528A 1

9 Roller, click-feed SAM-JC66-04523A 1

10 Ground-c, safety SAM-JC63-04984A 1

17 Safety guide SAM-JC61-07192A 1

18 Guide, com ceil SAM-JC61-07189A 1

23 Frame mount SAM-JC61-06663A 1

24 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003652 2

25 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003270 1

26 Top-brush output SAM-JC67-00818A 1

27 Compiler-brush, ceiling front SAM-JC67-00820A 1

28 Compiler-brush, ceiling rear SAM-JC67-00819A 1

29 Finisher sub-stk mtr SAM-JC90-01415A 1

31 Finisher sub-scu mtr SAM-JC90-01414A 1

ENWW Finishers 495

 Mainline finisher 5
Figure 4-38 Mainline finisher 5

496 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-38 Mainline finisher 5

Ref Description Part number Qty

7 Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A 1

12 Front cover SAM-JC63-04986B 1

13 Shaft, hinge-door SAM-JC66-04767A 2

14 Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B 1

15 Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B 1

16 Rear cover SAM-JC63-04988B 1

17 Finisher sub-tray bm unit SAM-JC90-01417B 1

20 Finisher sub-regist guide SAM-JC90-01448B 1

22 Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B 1

25 Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B 1

ENWW Finishers 497

 Mainline finisher 6
Figure 4-39 Mainline finisher 6

498 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-39 Mainline finisher 6

Ref Description Part number Qty

3 Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B 2

4 Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B 1

5 Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B 1

ENWW Finishers 499

 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output
Figure 4-40 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output

500 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-40 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-3 fold mtr SAM-JC90-01396A 1

1-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01154A 1

1-2 Gear, double SAM-JC66-04579A 1

1-4 E-ring SAM-6044-000125 2

1-5 Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 4

1-6 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

1-7 Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A 1

2-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01153A 1

3 Finisher sub-curl pawl SAM-JC90-01398A 1

4 Finisher sub-3 fold output SAM-JC90-01399A 1

4-5 C-ring SAM-6044-000159 1

ENWW Finishers 501

 Low output, hb motor, and top guide
Figure 4-41 Low output, hb motor, and top guide

502 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-41 Low output, hb motor, and top guide

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-low output SAM-JC90-01400A 1

1-2 Roller, output-3 fold SAM-JC66-04744A 1

1-3 Roller, feed-fold output SAM-JC66-04721A 1

1-7 Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A 4

1-8 E-ring SAM-6044-000129 2

2-2 Motor, step ip SAM-JC31-00163B 2

2-3 Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 1

3 Finisher sub-guide top SAM-JC90-01406A 1

3-3 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07431A 2

3-4 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07430A 4

ENWW Finishers 503

 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide
Figure 4-42 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide

504 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-42 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-scu motor SAM-JC90-01414A 1

1-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01156A 1

1-2 Gear-db, gear SAM-JC66-04604A 1

1-5 Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 1

1-6 E-ring SAM-6044–000125 2

2 Finisher sub-stk motor SAM-JC90-01415A 1

2-1 Cartridge, ICT-PIN SAM-JC70-40542A 1

2-2 Stacker, CSP-worm SAM-JC81-07637A 1

2-9 Motor, DC-stacker SAM-JC31-00178A 1

2-11 Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 3

2-12 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

3 Finisher sub-entrance guide SAM-JC90-01424A 1

3-1 Bush, D6/L4 SAM-JC61-02372A 2

3-3 Guide-l, entrance SAM-JC61-07247A 1

3-11 Actuator, entrance feed SAM-JC66-04520A 1

3-13 Actuator, te-press1 SAM-JC66-04644A 1

ENWW Finishers 505

 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor
Figure 4-43 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor

506 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-43 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor

Ref Description Part number Qty

1-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A 1

1-2 Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01152A 1

1-5 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

2 Finisher sub-low paddle SAM-JC90-01429A 1

2-1 Rooler, feed-lower bm SAM-JC66-04719A 8

2-3 Paddle holder SAM-JC61-07225A 4

4-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A 1

ENWW Finishers 507

 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam
Figure 4-44 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam

508 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-44 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam

Ref Description Part number Qty

1-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A 1

1-2 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

2 Finisher sub-top lower SAM-JC90-01454A 1

2-1 Actuator, top-output SAM-JC66-04525A 1

2-3 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07411A 1

2-6 Harness, 3k finisher output path SAM-JC39-02322A 1

2-7 Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A 1

3 Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A 2

3-6 Guide, seal-top SAM-JC62-01328A 1

3-7 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07417A 1

3-8 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07415A 4

3-9 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07410A 1

3-10 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07409A 2

3-11 Guide, diverter SAM-JC61-07205A 1

3-12 Guide, top jam SAM-JC61-07196A 1

ENWW Finishers 509

 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade
Figure 4-45 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade

510 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-45 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-fd stopper unit SAM-JC90-01432A 1

1-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A 1

1-5 Timing pulley SAM-JC66-04583A 2

1-11 Spring, cs SAM-JC61-07403A 1

1-12 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07401A 1

1-22 Solenoid SAM-JC33-00038A 1

2 Finisher sub-jam clear SAM-JC90-01433A 1

3 Finisher sub-bkt main blade SAM-JC90-01435A 1

3-1 Gear, helical 4 SAM-JC66-04595A 1

3-2 Gear, helical 3 SAM-JC66-04594A 1

3-4 Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A 1

ENWW Finishers 511

 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame
Figure 4-46 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame

512 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-46 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame

Ref Description Part number Qty

1-1 Gear, helical 2 SAM-JC66-04593A 1

1-2 Gear, helical 1 SAM-JC66-04592A 1

1-3 Gear, double SAM-JC66-04573A 1

1-5 Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A 1

2 Finisher sub-main blade SAM-JC90-01437A 1

2-3 Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A 1

2-4 Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A 2

2-13 Gear, helical SAM-JC66-04591A 2

3 Finisher sub-top frame SAM-JC90-01440A 1

3-3 Harness, 3k finisher top cover SAM-JC39-02310A 1

ENWW Finishers 513

 Three fold blade
Figure 4-47 Three fold blade

514 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-47 Three fold blade

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-output roller SAM-JC90-01395A 1

2 Finisher sub-guide three fold SAM-JC90-01394A 1

2-4 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07391A 2

3 Sheet-jam guide SAM-JC63-05044A 3

4 Sheet-fold output SAM-JC63-05041A 2

ENWW Finishers 515

 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide
Figure 4-48 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide

516 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-48 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-door SAM-JC90-01444A 1

1-2 Cover, link SAM-JC63-05004A 2

2 Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B 1

3 Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B 1

3-1 PCA, 3k switch SAM-JC92-02789A 1

3-2 Magnet, as SAM-JC81-08263A 1

3-3 Button lens SAM-JC64-00996A 1

3-4 Button, staple SAM-JC64-00995A 1

ENWW Finishers 517

 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output
Figure 4-49 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output

518 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-49 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output

Ref Description Part number Qty

1-4 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07408A 2

1-7 Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A 1

2 Finisher sub-mid jam SAM-JC90-01450A 1

3 Finisher sub-output main SAM-JC90-01451A 1

ENWW Finishers 519

 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor
Figure 4-50 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor

520 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-50 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A 1

1-3 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07413A 2

1-4 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07409A 2

1-5 Guide, buff div SAM-JC61-07204A 1

1-7 Harness, 3k finisher bm path SAM-JC39-02320A 1

1-8 Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A 1

2 Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A 1

2-1 Magent, as by3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A 1

2-2 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07418A 1

3 Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A 1

3-1 Ict-pin, paralled, p/u SAM-JC70-40360A 1

4 Finisher sub-hb motor SAM-JC90-01459A 2

4-1 Motor step, ip SAM-JC31-00163B 2

5-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A 1

5-3 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

ENWW Finishers 521

 Front alignment (tamper)
Figure 4-51 Front alignment (tamper)

522 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-51 Front alignment (tamper)

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01464A 1

13 Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A 1

14 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

15 Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 1

ENWW Finishers 523

 Rear alignment (tamper)
Figure 4-52 Rear alignment (tamper)

524 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-52 Rear alignment (tamper)

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01465A 1

1 Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A 1

12 Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 1

15 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

ENWW Finishers 525

 Shield
Figure 4-53 Shield

526 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-53 Shield

Ref Description Part number Qty

1-1 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

1-9 Cover, stacker SAM-JC63-04999B 1

1-10 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07428A 1

1-11 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07427A 1

2-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A 1

3 Finisher sub-base low SAM-JC90-01476A 1

3-2 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07392A 1

3-3 Leg bracket SAM-JC61-07279A 1

ENWW Finishers 527

 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle
Figure 4-54 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle

528 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-54 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-pcb bm SAM-JC90-01477A 1

2 Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478B 1

3 Finisher sub-idle fold SAM-JC90-01479A 1

4 Finisher sub-paddle SAM-JC90-01480A 1

4-1 Finisher sub-paddle, wing SAM-JC90-01463A 2

4-2 Finisher sub-paddle, mid SAM-JC90-01462A 1

ENWW Finishers 529

 Finisher sub booklet
Figure 4-55 Finisher sub booklet

530 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-55 Finisher sub booklet

Ref Description Part number Qty

0 Finisher sub-booklet 4 SAM-JC90-01502A 1

ENWW Finishers 531

 IPTU (bridge)
Figure 4-56 IPTU (bridge)

532 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-56 IPTU (bridge)

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A 2

3 AS-Magnet BY3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A 1

4 Roller, brg-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04733A 1

5 Roller, brg-feed SAM-JC66-04732A 2

7 Actuator, sensor SAM-JC66-04569A 1

10 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07432A 1

17 Bush-6, d(l) SAM-JC61-00884A 3

18 Cable, 3k finisher IPTU PA SAM-JC39-02328A 1

19 Cable, 3k finisher IPTU sub SAM-JC39-02327A 1

20 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003648 2

21 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003645 1

22 Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 2

23 Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 1

24 E-ring SAM-6044-000125 2

25 Screw, tap type SAM-6003-001256 4

26 Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 4

27 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 1

28 Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01402A 1

ENWW Finishers 533

 Inner finisher
Sub-inner finisher
Figure 4-57 Sub-inner finisher

534 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-57 Sub-inner finisher

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-paper support SAM-JC90-01310A 1

2 Finisher sub-paper support, rear SAM-JC90-01311A 1

3 Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01315A 1

4 Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01317A 1

5 Finisher sub-ejector SAM-JC90-01332A 1

6 Finisher sub-motor tray SAM-JC90-01334A 1

7 Finisher sub-guide output, lower SAM-JC90-01336A 1

8 Finisher sub-tray SAM-JC63-04797B 1

10 Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01342A 1

11 Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01343A 1

ENWW Inner finisher 535

 Finisher sub 1
Figure 4-58 Finisher sub 1

536 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-58 Finisher sub 1

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-cover, front SAM-JC90-01321B 1

2 Finisher sub-cover, middle SAM-JC90-01322B 1

3 Finisher sub-cover, compile SAM-JC90-01323B 1

4 Finisher sub-stacker plate SAM-JC90-01324B 1

4-1 Photo, tr SAM-0603–001309 1

5 Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04750B 1

6 Cover, main SAM-JC63-04792B 1

ENWW Inner finisher 537

 Finisher sub 7
Figure 4-59 Finisher sub 7

538 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-59 Finisher sub 7

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01342A 1

1-1 Stapler-etc assembly SAM-JC98-04473A 1

2 Finisher sub-punch dummy SAM-JC90-01343A 1

2-1 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001381 1

ENWW Inner finisher 539

 Finisher sub 8
Figure 4-60 Finisher sub 8

540 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-60 Finisher sub 8

Ref Description Part number Qty

1 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 2

2 Inner finisher PCA SAM-JC92-02774A 1

4 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 1

5-1 Paddle absorber, rubber a SAM-JC63-04957A 2

5-2 Paddle absorber, rubber b SAM-JC63-04958A 2

8 Roller, feed-entrance SAM-JC66-04243A 2

10 Finisher sub-entrance motor SAM-JC90-01344A 1

13 Actuator, feed sensor SAM-JC66-04199A 1

14 Finisher sub-actuator tray SAM-JC90-01313A 1

15 Finisher sub-actuator tray sensor SAM-JC90-01314A 1

15-2 Solenoid SAM-JC33-00037A 1

16 Finisher sub-tray lower limit SAM-JC90-01320A 1

16-3 Actuator tray limit SAM-JC66-04200A 1

17-1 Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00149A 1

19-1 Roller, feed-output SAM-JC66-04244A 1

19-2 Compile guide, front SAM-JC61-07449A 1

19-3 Compile guide, rear SAM-JC61-07450A 1

20-1 Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00169B 1

21 Finisher sub-tray frame SAM-JC90-01319A 1

22 Rear join PCA SAM-JC92-02780A 1

ENWW Inner finisher 541

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list
Description Part number Table and page

Actuator tray limit SAM-JC66-04200A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Actuator, duplex 2 SAM-JC66-02180A Right door duplex on page 453

Actuator, empty pickup SAM-JC66-03199A Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

Actuator, empty pickup SAM-JC66-03199A DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

Actuator, entrance feed SAM-JC66-04520A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Actuator, feed out SAM-JC66-04105A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Actuator, feed sensor SAM-JC66-04199A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Actuator, fuser out SAM-JC66-03307A Right door output on page 451

Actuator, output SAM-JC66-04104A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Actuator, pusher SAM-JC66-04526A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Actuator, registration SAM-JC66-04103A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Actuator, sensor SAM-JC66-04569A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Actuator, te-press1 SAM-JC66-04644A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Actuator, top-output SAM-JC66-04525A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Actuator-bin full output SAM-JC66–04339A Output on page 425

Actuator-o, staple SAM-JC66-04528A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

ADF housing separation SAM-JC97-04586A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

ADF pickup roller SAM-JC97-04099A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

ADF pickup roller SAM-JC97-04860A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

ADF separation roller SAM-JC97-04852A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

ADF separation sub roller SAM-JC97-04861A ADF main frame assembly (dn
models) on page 459

ADF shading sheet SAM-JC63-05055A ADF (dn models) on page 455

ADF shading sheet SAM-JC63-05055A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

542 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

ADF stacker SAM-JC97-04859A ADF (dn models) on page 455

ADF sub pickup drive SAM-JC97-04857A ADF exterior and ADF pickup
assembly (dn models)
on page 457

ADF whole unit SAM-JC97-04851A Main assembly on page 423

ADF, Cover open SAM-JC97-04853A ADF (dn models) on page 455

ADF, DCISM SAM-JC97-04722A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

ADF, hinge L SAM-JC97-04527A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

ADF, pickup SAM-JC97-04856A ADF (dn models) on page 455

ADF, white foam (Sponge-white sheet) SAM-JC63-04683A Main assembly on page 423

ADF,hinge R SAM-JC97-04528A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

AS-Magnet BY3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Bearing ball SAM-6601-003062 Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Black developer unit SAM-JC96-11669A Main assembly on page 423

Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

Bush, D6/L4 SAM-JC61-02372A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

Bush-6, d(l) SAM-JC61-00884A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Button lens SAM-JC64-00996A Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

Button, staple SAM-JC64-00995A Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 543

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

C-ring SAM-6044-000159 Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Cable, 3k finisher IPTU PA SAM-JC39-02328A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Cable, 3k finisher IPTU sub SAM-JC39-02327A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Cartridge SAM-JC96-11637A Main assembly on page 423

Cartridge, ICT-PIN SAM-JC70-40542A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Cassette SAM-JC90-01619A First cassette on page 427

Cassette SAM-JC90-01620A Second cassette on page 429

Cassette, fifth SAM-JC90-01664A DCF main on page 479

Cassette, fourth SAM-JC90-01666A DCF main on page 479

Caster 6109-001138 DCF main on page 479

Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B Booklet finisher on page 487

Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Clutch one way SAM-JC66-00977A DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

Clutch, electric G35 SAM-JC47-00038A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Clutch, P_one way SAM-JC66-00977A Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

Clutch, P_one way SAM-JC66-00977A MP tray on page 449

Compile guide, front SAM-JC61-07449A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Compile guide, rear SAM-JC61-07450A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Compiler-brush, ceiling front SAM-JC67-00820A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Compiler-brush, ceiling rear SAM-JC67-00819A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Contact image sensor SAM-0609-001558 Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67–00455A Main pickup frame on page 439

Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67-00455A DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

Coupler, torquelimiter SAM-JC67-00455A MP tray on page 449

Cover SAM-JC95-02094A Main assembly on page 423

544 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, front SAM-JC95-02096A Cover on page 445

Cover, front SAM-JC63-05563A ADF (dn models) on page 455

Cover, front SAM-JC63-04986B Booklet finisher on page 487

Cover, front lower SAM-JC63-04536B Cover on page 445

Cover, front MP SAM-JC63-03356C Right door on page 447

Cover, harness mono SAM-JC63-03361C Right door on page 447

Cover, inner SAM-JC95-02097A Cover on page 445

Cover, left mono SAM-JC95-02095A Cover on page 445

Cover, left upper SAM-JC63-05623A Cover on page 445

Cover, link SAM-JC63-05004A Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

Cover, main SAM-JC63-04792B Finisher sub 1 on page 537

Cover, middle right SAM-JC95-02082A Cover on page 445

Cover, output SAM-JC95-02087A Cover on page 445

Cover, rear SAM-JC63-05561A ADF (dn models) on page 455

Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04988B Booklet finisher on page 487

Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04750B Finisher sub 1 on page 537

Cover, rear dummy SAM-JC63-04567B Cover on page 445

Cover, rear lower mono SAM-JC63-05617A Cover on page 445

Cover, rear lower mono SAM-JC95-01518A Right door on page 447

Cover, rear output SAM-JC95-02088A Cover on page 445

Cover, rear upper SAM-JC63-05618A Cover on page 445

Cover, right front mono SAM-JC63-04539B Cover on page 445

Cover, right front mono SAM-JC63-04520B Cover on page 445

Cover, right rear mono SAM-JC63-04540B Cover on page 445

Cover, scanner front SAM-JC95-02086A Cover on page 445

Cover, scanner left SAM-JC63-05576A Cover on page 445

Cover, scanner rear SAM-JC63-05577A Cover on page 445

Cover, scanner right SAM-JC63-05575A Cover on page 445

Cover, side SAM-JC95-02080A Main assembly on page 423

Cover, side duplex SAM-JC95-01924A Right door duplex on page 453

Cover, side duplex lower SAM-JC95-01519A Right door on page 447

Cover, side duplex motor SAM-JC95-01510A Right door on page 447

Cover, side mono SAM-JC63-04576B Right door on page 447

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 545

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, side output SAM-JC95-01509A Right door on page 447

Cover, side roller TR SAM-JC95-01943A Right door on page 447

Cover, side take away SAM-JC95-01516A Right door on page 447

Cover, stacker SAM-JC63-04999B Shield on page 527

Cover, upper side SAM-JC63-04573B Right door on page 447

Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B Booklet finisher on page 487

Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B Booklet finisher on page 487

Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B Mainline finisher 6 on page 499

Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B Booklet finisher on page 487

Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B Mainline finisher 6 on page 499

Cover-t, tray SAM-JC63-04995B Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B Booklet finisher on page 487

Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B Mainline finisher 6 on page 499

DCF PCA SAM-JC92-02453A DCF main on page 479

DCF, feed drive SAM-JC93-00447A DCF main on page 479

DCF, feed pulley SAM-JC66-03288A DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

DCF, front cover SAM-JC63-04606B DCF main on page 479

DCF, idle feed roller SAM-JC66-03287A DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

DCF, if harness SAM-JC39-01690A DCF main on page 479

DCF, left cover SAM-JC63-04607B DCF main on page 479

DCF, main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00513A DCF main on page 479

DCF, main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00513A DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

DCF, rear cover SAM-JC63-04604B DCF main on page 479

DCF, right cover SAM-JC63-04605B DCF main on page 479

DCF, sensor harness SAM-JC39-01692A DCF main on page 479

DCF, size sensor harness SAM-JC39-01695A DCF main on page 479

DCF, sub-takeaway SAM-JC90-01285A DCF main on page 479

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01154A Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01153A Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

546 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01156A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Shield on page 527

Drive, duct SAM-JC93-00451A Main engine frame on page 431

Drive, M fuser output (output) SAM-JC93-00449A Main engine frame on page 431

Drive, M toner supply SAM-JC93-00450B Main engine frame on page 431

Drive, main SAM-JC93-00912B Main engine frame on page 431

Drive, main sub SAM-JC93-00911B Main engine frame on page 431

Drive, motor step SAM-JC93-00452A Fuser output drive on page 433

Drive, pickup SAM-JC93-00442A Main engine frame on page 431

Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01152A Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

E-ring SAM-6044-000125 Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

E-ring SAM-6044-000129 Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

E-ring SAM-6044–000125 SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

E-ring SAM-6044-000125 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Fan SAM-JC31-00161A Main frame on page 443

Fan SAM-JC31-00146A Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 547

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Fan motor housing SAM-JC61-07694A Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

Fan, dc SAM-JC31-00168A Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

Fan, type 6 SAM-JC31-00160C Right door on page 447

Fan-type 8 SAM-JC31-00162A Main assembly on page 423

Finisher sub-3 fold mtr SAM-JC90-01396A Three fold motor, curl pawl
motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Finisher sub-3 fold output SAM-JC90-01399A Three fold motor, curl pawl
motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Finisher sub-actuator tray SAM-JC90-01313A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Finisher sub-actuator tray sensor SAM-JC90-01314A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Finisher sub-alignment front SAM-JC90-01464A Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

Finisher sub-alignment rear SAM-JC90-01465A Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01464A Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01315A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01465A Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01317A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-base low SAM-JC90-01476A Shield on page 527

Finisher sub-bkt main blade SAM-JC90-01435A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
BKT main blade on page 511

Finisher sub-booklet 4 SAM-JC90-01502A Finisher sub booklet on page 531

Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A Booklet finisher on page 487

Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Finisher sub-clutch div SAM-JC90-01474A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478A Booklet finisher on page 487

Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478B PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

Finisher sub-cover, compile SAM-JC90-01323B Finisher sub 1 on page 537

Finisher sub-cover, front SAM-JC90-01321B Finisher sub 1 on page 537

Finisher sub-cover, middle SAM-JC90-01322B Finisher sub 1 on page 537

548 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Finisher sub-curl pawl SAM-JC90-01398A Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Finisher sub-door SAM-JC90-01444A Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

Finisher sub-drv buff SAM-JC90-01453A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Finisher sub-ef mtr SAM-JC90-01467A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Finisher sub-ejector SAM-JC90-01332A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-ejector unit SAM-JC90-01409A Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

Finisher sub-end stopper SAM-JC90-01466A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Finisher sub-entrance guide SAM-JC90-01424A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Finisher sub-entrance motor SAM-JC90-01344A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Finisher sub-fd stopper unit SAM-JC90-01432A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
BKT main blade on page 511

Finisher sub-guide output, lower SAM-JC90-01336A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-guide three fold SAM-JC90-01394A Three fold blade on page 515

Finisher sub-guide top SAM-JC90-01406A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Finisher sub-hb motor SAM-JC90-01459A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01459A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01402A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Finisher sub-idle fold SAM-JC90-01479A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

Finisher sub-jam clear SAM-JC90-01433A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Finisher sub-low output SAM-JC90-01400A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Finisher sub-low paddle SAM-JC90-01429A Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

Finisher sub-main blade SAM-JC90-01437A Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 513

Finisher sub-mid jam SAM-JC90-01450A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 549

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Finisher sub-motor tray SAM-JC90-01334A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-output main SAM-JC90-01451A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

Finisher sub-output roller SAM-JC90-01395A Three fold blade on page 515

Finisher sub-paddle SAM-JC90-01480A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

Finisher sub-paddle, mid SAM-JC90-01462A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

Finisher sub-paddle, wing SAM-JC90-01463A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

Finisher sub-paper support SAM-JC90-01310A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-paper support, rear SAM-JC90-01311A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-pcb bm SAM-JC90-01477A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

Finisher sub-punch dummy SAM-JC90-01343A Finisher sub 7 on page 539

Finisher sub-regist guide SAM-JC90-01448B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Finisher sub-scu motor SAM-JC90-01414A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Finisher sub-scu mtr SAM-JC90-01414A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Finisher sub-stacker plate SAM-JC90-01324B Finisher sub 1 on page 537

Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01342A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01343A Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01342A Finisher sub 7 on page 539

Finisher sub-staple unit SAM-JC90-01412A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Finisher sub-stk motor SAM-JC90-01415A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Finisher sub-stk mtr SAM-JC90-01415A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B Booklet finisher on page 487

Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B Door, top door, top cover, and
registration guide on page 517

Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B Booklet finisher on page 487

Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

550 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B Door, top door, top cover, and
registration guide on page 517

Finisher sub-top frame SAM-JC90-01440A Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 513

Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

Finisher sub-top lower SAM-JC90-01454A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Finisher sub-tray SAM-JC63-04797B Sub-inner finisher on page 535

Finisher sub-tray bm unit SAM-JC90-01417B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Finisher sub-tray frame SAM-JC90-01319A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Finisher sub-tray lower limit SAM-JC90-01320A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Fixer, e-ring SAM-JC61-01367A DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

Flow ADF open cover SAM-JC97-04869A Flow ADF open cover (z models)
on page 467

Flow ADF open cover, lower SAM-JC97-04696B Flow ADF open cover (z models)
on page 467

Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04872A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04646B Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Flow ADF scan in lower SAM-JC97-04656B Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF scan out SAM-JC97-04830A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF stacker SAM-JC97-04658B Flow ADF stacker (z models)

on page 471

Flow ADF whole unit SAM-JC97–04868A Main assembly on page 423

Flow ADF, bottom cover SAM-JC97-04880A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Flow ADF, damper SAM-JC97-04692A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Flow ADF, dummy front SAM-JC97-04879A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Flow ADF, exterior SAM-JC97-04668B Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 551

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Flow ADF, feed drive motor SAM-JC97-04680A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, front cover SAM-JC97-04881A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Flow ADF, hinge l SAM-JC97-04640A Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

Flow ADF, hinge r SAM-JC97-04641A Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

Flow ADF, housing separation roller SAM-JC97-04661A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, lift drive SAM-JC97-04679A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, main frame (GX) (z models only) SAM-JC97-04883A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)
on page 465

Flow ADF, main frame (sGX) (dn models only) SAM-JC97-04882A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)
on page 465

Flow ADF, PCA (GX) (z models only) SAM-JC92-02964A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, PCA (sGX) (dn models only) SAM-JC92-02964B Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, pickup release drive SAM-JC97-04681A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, scan release drive SAM-JC97-04682A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, separation cover SAM-JC97-04652A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Flow ADF, sub-pickup SAM-JC97-04650A Flow ADF upper pickup (z

models) on page 469

Flow ADF, white simplex roller SAM-JC97-04687A Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

Frame main, switch open SAM-JC93-00466A Main frame on page 443

Frame mount SAM-JC61-06663A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Frame sub, clean registration SAM-JC93-00078C Main frame on page 443

Frame, duct SAM-JC93-00917A Main frame on page 443

Frame, HV package mono SAM-JC93-00891A Main frame on page 443

Frame, main pickup 1st SAM-JC93-00511A Main engine frame on page 431

Frame, main pickup 2nd SAM-JC93-00512A Main engine frame on page 431

Frame, main pickup lower SAM-JC93-00503A Main pickup frame on page 439

Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-00540A Main pickup frame on page 439

Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-00540B MP tray on page 449

552 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Frame, main pickup upper SAM-JC93-00504A Main pickup frame on page 439

Frame, sub registration SAM-JC93-01371A Registration sub-frame

on page 435

Friction pad, guide pickup SAM-JC69-01326A ADF main frame assembly (dn
models) on page 459

Front cover SAM-JC63-04986B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Fuser drive PCA 110V (fuser drive board) SAM-JC44-00210D Main assembly on page 423

Fuser drive PCA 220V (fuser drive board) SAM-JC44-00211D Main assembly on page 423

Fuser, 110V SAM-JC91-01238A Main assembly on page 423

Fuser, 220V SAM-JC91-01237A Main assembly on page 423

Gear, buffer SAM-JC66-04602A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Gear, DOC pinion SAM-JC66-04079A ADF (dn models) on page 455

Gear, double SAM-JC66-04579A Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Gear, double SAM-JC66-04573A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

Gear, helical SAM-JC66-04591A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

Gear, helical 1 SAM-JC66-04592A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

Gear, helical 2 SAM-JC66-04593A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

Gear, helical 3 SAM-JC66-04594A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Gear, helical 4 SAM-JC66-04595A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Gear, M_idle PU SAM-JC66-00940A Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

Gear, M_one way SAM-JC66-00941A Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

Gear, M_PU joint SAM-JC66-00943A Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

Gear, output SAM-JC66-02163A Output on page 425

Gear-db, gear SAM-JC66-04604A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Gear-m, idle SAM-JC66-00940A DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

Gear-m, joint SAM-JC66-00943A DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 553

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Gear-m, one way SAM-JC66-00941A DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

Glass tempered, scan ADF SAM-JC01-00101A ADF image scanner (dn models)
on page 461

Ground-c, safety SAM-JC63-04984A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Guide, buff div SAM-JC61-07204A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Guide, com ceil SAM-JC61-07189A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Guide, diverter SAM-JC61-07205A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Guide, duplex upper SAM-JC61-04795A Right door on page 447

Guide, pusher SAM-JC61-07206A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Guide, seal-top SAM-JC62-01328A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Guide, top jam SAM-JC61-07196A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

Guide-l, entrance SAM-JC61-07247A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Harness, 3k finisher bm path SAM-JC39-02320A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Harness, 3k finisher output path SAM-JC39-02322A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

Harness, 3k finisher top cover SAM-JC39-02310A Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 513

HDD SAM-JC59-00037A Main assembly on page 423

Holder, M_idle one way SAM-JC61-01288A Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

Holder-m, idle one way SAM-JC61-01288A DCF main frame pickup, upper
on page 485

HVPS, 24V SAM-JC44-000237A Main assembly on page 423

Ict-pin, paralled, p/u SAM-JC70-40360A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Image scanner SAM-JC97-04520C Main assembly on page 423

Image scanner SAM-JC97-04523B Flow ADF image scanner, lower

(z models) on page 477

Image scanner guide harness SAM-JC97-04512A ADF image scanner, lower (dn
models) on page 463

Image scanner open sensor SAM-JC97-04516A Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

554 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Image scanner, APS SAM-JC97-04507A ADF image scanner, lower (dn

models) on page 463

Image scanner, FFC CCD SAM-JC97-04509A ADF image scanner, lower (dn
models) on page 463

Image scanner, lens SAM-JC97-04523B ADF image scanner, lower (dn

models) on page 463

Image scanner, lower SAM-JC97-04515A Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

Inner finisher PCA SAM-JC92-02774A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Laser scanner assembly SAM-JC97-04017B Main assembly on page 423

Leg bracket SAM-JC61-07279A Shield on page 527

Lever-act full output SAM-JC66-02278A Output on page 425

Lever-actuator F_D full SAM-JC66-02218A Output on page 425

Link cover, open SAM-JC66-02270A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Link, cover open SAM-JC66-04100A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Link, D SAM-JC66-03235A Right door on page 447

Link, side SAM-JC66-03220B Right door on page 447

Locker, side SAM-JC64-00710A Right door on page 447

Locker, side rear SAM-JC64-00711A Right door on page 447

LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 4 SAM-JC44-00091D Main assembly on page 423

LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 5H SAM-JC44-00249A Main assembly on page 423

LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 4 SAM-JC44-00092D Main assembly on page 423

LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 5H SAM-JC44-00250A Main assembly on page 423

Magent, as by3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Magnet, as SAM-JC81-08263A Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

Main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00510A DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

Main frame pickup SAM-JC93-00510A DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

Main frame pickup roller SAM-JC93-00540A DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

Main frame pickup, lower SAM-JC93-00503A DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

Main frame pickup, upper SAM-JC93-00504A DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 555

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Main frame pickup, upper SAM-JC93-00504A DCF main frame pickup, upper
on page 485

Main frame rear auto-size holder SAM-JC93-00018A DCF main on page 479

Main PCA SAM-JC31-02746A Main assembly on page 423

Main pickup frame SAM-JC93-00510A Main frame pickup 1 and 2

on page 437

Main-brush, output SAM-JC67-00817A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

MEA unit, terminal SAM-JC97-01401A Main frame on page 443

Motor SAM-JC90-01673A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Motor bldc SAM-JC31-00123B Main engine frame on page 431

Motor bldc SAM-JC31-00123B Fuser output drive on page 433

Motor BLDC, type 1 SAM-JC31-00156A ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Motor step, ip SAM-JC31-00163B Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00123A Main engine frame on page 431

Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

Motor, DC-stacker SAM-JC31-00178A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Motor, step 1P SAM-JC31-00158A ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

Motor, step ip SAM-JC31-00163B Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

MP sub tray SAM-JC90-01668A Right door on page 447

Output SAM-JC90-01118B Main assembly on page 423

Output guide, lower SAM-JC90-01133A Output on page 425

Output guide, upper SAM-JC90-01132A Output on page 425

Paddle absorber, rubber a SAM-JC63-04957A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Paddle absorber, rubber b SAM-JC63-04958A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Paddle holder SAM-JC61-07225A Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

PBA, eraser mono SAM-JC92-02747A Main frame on page 443

PBA, paper size sensor SAM-JC92-02622A Main frame on page 443

556 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

PCA ADF SAM-JC92-02962A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

PCA scan joint SAM-JC92-02781A ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

PCA, 3k switch SAM-JC92-02789A Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

Photo Interrupter SAM-0604-001393 ADF (dn models) on page 455

Photo interrupter SAM-0604–001393 Output on page 425

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001381 Registration sub-frame

on page 435

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001381 Main frame on page 443

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 MP tray on page 449

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Right door output on page 451

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Right door duplex on page 453

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001381 ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001453 ADF image scanner, lower (dn

models) on page 463

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001502 Flow ADF open cover (z models)

on page 467

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Flow ADF upper pickup (z

models) on page 469

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001502 Flow ADF upper pickup (z

models) on page 469

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001490 Flow ADF stacker (z models)

on page 471

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Flow ADF stacker (z models)

on page 471

Photo interrupter 0640-001381 DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001393 DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

Photo, tr SAM-0603–001309 Finisher sub 1 on page 537

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 557

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Shield on page 527

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001381 Finisher sub 7 on page 539

Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Rail SAM-6102-003369 Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

Rear cover SAM-JC63-05566A Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

Rear cover SAM-JC63-04988B Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Rear join PCA SAM-JC92-02780A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Roller idle, feed SAM-JC66-03203A Main frame on page 443

Roller idle, rubber, idle SAM-JC66-02289B Right door duplex on page 453

Roller, brg-feed SAM-JC66-04732A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Roller, brg-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04733A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Roller, click-feed SAM-JC66-04523A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Roller, feed-entrance SAM-JC66-04243A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Roller, feed-fold output SAM-JC66-04721A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Roller, feed-output SAM-JC66-04244A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Roller, main-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04722A Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

Roller, main-feed output SAM-JC66-04726A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Roller, mid-feed output SAM-JC66-04724A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

558 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Roller, output-3 fold SAM-JC66-04744A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Roller, output-feed bm SAM-JC66-04723A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Roller, top-feed mid output SAM-JC66-04725A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Roller, top-feed output SAM-JC66-04727A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Rooler, feed-lower bm SAM-JC66-04719A Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

Safety guide SAM-JC61-07192A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Scanner FR lamp SAM-JC97-04521A ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

Scanner glass SAM-JC97-04522B ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

Scanner open sensor SAM-JC97-04516A ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Screw, tap type SAM-6003-001256 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Seal, pad tray 1 SAM-JC62-01085A MP tray on page 449

Second pickup guide SAM-JC61-04717A DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Shaft, hinge-door SAM-JC66-04767A Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

Shaft, roller idle L SAM-JC66-02354A Right door duplex on page 453

Sheet-fold output SAM-JC63-05041A Three fold blade on page 515

Sheet-jam guide SAM-JC63-05044A Three fold blade on page 515

Solenoid SAM-JC90-01675A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Solenoid SAM-JC33-00038A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Solenoid SAM-JC33-00037A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Solenoid, tray 1 SAM-JC33-00029B MP tray on page 449

Spring, CS 0607-001731 Right door duplex on page 453

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 559

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Spring, cs SAM-JC61-07403A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Spring, ES SAM-6107-003581 ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07414A Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07431A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07430A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07415A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07409A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07391A Three fold blade on page 515

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07408A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

Spring, TS SAM-6107-001737 Right door output on page 451

Spring, TS SAM-6107-001737 Right door duplex on page 453

Spring, ts SAM-JC61–07185A Output on page 425

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07411A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07417A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07410A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07401A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07413A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07409A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07418A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07428A Shield on page 527

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07427A Shield on page 527

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07392A Shield on page 527

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07432A IPTU (bridge) on page 533

560 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-61 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Stacker, CSP-worm SAM-JC81-07637A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

Stapler-etc assembly SAM-JC98-04473A Finisher sub 7 on page 539

Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00149A Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00169B Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00177A Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00158A Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

Tempered scan glass SAM-JC01-00101A Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-001730 Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003185 DCF main on page 479

Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

Timing pulley SAM-JC66-04583A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003649 Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003647 Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003645 Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003640 Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003639 Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003652 Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003270 Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003648 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003645 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 Finisher sub 8 on page 541

Top-brush output SAM-JC67-00818A Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

Top-seal, guide SAM-JC62-01328A Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

Tray 1 bracket pickup SAM-JC90-01125B MP tray on page 449

Tray 1 one way SAM-JC90-00918A MP tray on page 449

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 561

 Numerical parts list
Table 4-62 Numerical parts list
Part number Description Table and page

0607-001731 Spring, CS Right door duplex on page 453

0640-001381 Photo interrupter DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

6109-001138 Caster DCF main on page 479

SAM-0603–001309 Photo, tr Finisher sub 1 on page 537

SAM-0604-001381 Photo interrupter Registration sub-frame

on page 435

SAM-0604-001381 Photo interrupter Main frame on page 443

SAM-0604-001381 Photo interrupter ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter MP tray on page 449

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter Right door output on page 451

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter Right door duplex on page 453

SAM-0604-001393 Photo Interrupter ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (z

models) on page 469

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter Flow ADF stacker (z models)

on page 471

SAM-0604-001393 Photo interrupter DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

562 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Shield on page 527

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-0604-001453 Photo interrupter ADF image scanner, lower (dn

models) on page 463

SAM-0604-001490 Photo interrupter Flow ADF stacker (z models)

on page 471

SAM-0604-001502 Photo interrupter Flow ADF open cover (z models)

on page 467

SAM-0604-001502 Photo interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (z

models) on page 469

SAM-0604–001381 Photo-interrupter Finisher sub 7 on page 539

SAM-0604–001393 Photo interrupter Output on page 425

SAM-0609-001558 Contact image sensor Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-6001-000130 Screw, machine Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-6001-000130 Screw, machine IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-6003-001256 Screw, tap type IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-6044-000125 E-ring Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-6044-000125 E-ring IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-6044-000129 E-ring Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-6044-000159 C-ring Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-6044–000125 E-ring SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-6102-003369 Rail Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-6107-001737 Spring, TS Right door output on page 451

SAM-6107-001737 Spring, TS Right door duplex on page 453

ENWW Numerical parts list 563

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-6107-003581 Spring, ES ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-6502-001131 Cable clamp Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-6502-001131 Cable clamp SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-6502-001131 Cable clamp IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-6601-001478 Bearing ball Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-6601-001478 Bearing ball Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-6601-001478 Bearing ball SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-6601-001478 Bearing ball IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-6601-003062 Bearing ball Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-6602-001730 Timing belt, gear Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-6602-003185 Timing belt, gear DCF main on page 479

SAM-6602-003270 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-6602-003639 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-6602-003640 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-6602-003644 Timing belt, gear Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

SAM-6602-003644 Timing belt, gear Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

SAM-6602-003644 Timing-belt, gear Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-6602-003645 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-6602-003645 Timing-belt, gear IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-6602-003647 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-6602-003648 Timing-belt, gear IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-6602-003649 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-6602-003652 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC01-00101A Glass tempered, scan ADF ADF image scanner (dn models)
on page 461

SAM-JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

SAM-JC31-00123A Motor, bldc Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC31-00123B Motor bldc Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC31-00123B Motor bldc Fuser output drive on page 433

564 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC31-00144A Motor, bldc FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC31-00144A Motor, bldc Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

SAM-JC31-00146A Fan Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-JC31-00149A Step motor ip Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC31-00156A Motor BLDC, type 1 ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC31-00158A Motor, step 1P ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

SAM-JC31-00158A Step motor, ip Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

SAM-JC31-00160C Fan, type 6 Right door on page 447

SAM-JC31-00161A Fan Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC31-00162A Fan-type 8 Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC31-00163B Motor, step ip Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC31-00163B Motor step, ip Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC31-00168A Fan, dc Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-JC31-00169B Step motor ip Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC31-00177A Step motor, ip Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-JC31-00178A Motor, DC-stacker SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC31-02746A Main PCA Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC32-00020A Sensor, rp Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC32-00020A Sensor, rp Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

SAM-JC32-00020A Sensor, rp Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC33-00029B Solenoid, tray 1 MP tray on page 449

SAM-JC33-00037A Solenoid Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC33-00038A Solenoid FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC39-01690A DCF, if harness DCF main on page 479

ENWW Numerical parts list 565

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC39-01692A DCF, sensor harness DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC39-01695A DCF, size sensor harness DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC39-02310A Harness, 3k finisher top cover Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 513

SAM-JC39-02320A Harness, 3k finisher bm path Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC39-02322A Harness, 3k finisher output path Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

SAM-JC39-02327A Cable, 3k finisher IPTU sub IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC39-02328A Cable, 3k finisher IPTU PA IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC44-000237A HVPS, 24V Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC44-00091D LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 4 Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC44-00092D LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 4 Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC44-00210D Fuser drive PCA 110V (fuser drive board) Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC44-00211D Fuser drive PCA 220V (fuser drive board) Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC44-00249A LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 5H Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC44-00250A LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 5H Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC47-00038A Clutch, electric G35 ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC59-00037A HDD Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC61-00423A Bush-6, d Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-JC61-00423A Bush-6, d Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

SAM-JC61-00426A Bush, 8/5 Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC61-00426A Bush, 8/5 Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC61-00426A Bush, 8/5 Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

SAM-JC61-00884A Bush-6, d(l) IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC61-01288A Holder, M_idle one way Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

SAM-JC61-01288A Holder-m, idle one way DCF main frame pickup, upper
on page 485

SAM-JC61-01367A Fixer, e-ring DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

SAM-JC61-02372A Bush, D6/L4 SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

566 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC61-04717A Second pickup guide DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

SAM-JC61-04795A Guide, duplex upper Right door on page 447

SAM-JC61-06663A Frame mount Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC61-07189A Guide, com ceil Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC61-07192A Safety guide Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC61-07196A Guide, top jam Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

SAM-JC61-07204A Guide, buff div Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC61-07205A Guide, diverter Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC61-07206A Guide, pusher Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC61-07225A Paddle holder Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

SAM-JC61-07247A Guide-l, entrance SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC61-07279A Leg bracket Shield on page 527

SAM-JC61-07391A Spring, es Three fold blade on page 515

SAM-JC61-07392A Spring, ts Shield on page 527

SAM-JC61-07401A Spring, ts FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC61-07403A Spring, cs FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC61-07408A Spring, es Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

SAM-JC61-07409A Spring, es Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC61-07409A Spring, ts Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC61-07410A Spring, ts Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC61-07411A Spring, ts Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC61-07413A Spring, ts Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC61-07414A Spring, es Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

ENWW Numerical parts list 567

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC61-07415A Spring, es Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC61-07417A Spring, ts Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC61-07418A Spring, ts Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC61-07427A Spring, ts Shield on page 527

SAM-JC61-07428A Spring, ts Shield on page 527

SAM-JC61-07430A Spring, es Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC61-07431A Spring, es Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC61-07432A Spring, ts IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC61-07449A Compile guide, front Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC61-07450A Compile guide, rear Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC61-07694A Fan motor housing Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-JC61–07185A Spring, ts Output on page 425

SAM-JC62-01085A Seal, pad tray 1 MP tray on page 449

SAM-JC62-01328A Top-seal, guide Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC62-01328A Guide, seal-top Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC63-03356C Cover, front MP Right door on page 447

SAM-JC63-03361C Cover, harness mono Right door on page 447

SAM-JC63-04520B Cover, right front mono Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-04536B Cover, front lower Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-04539B Cover, right front mono Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-04540B Cover, right rear mono Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-04567B Cover, rear dummy Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-04573B Cover, upper side Right door on page 447

SAM-JC63-04576B Cover, side mono Right door on page 447

SAM-JC63-04604B DCF, rear cover DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC63-04605B DCF, right cover DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC63-04606B DCF, front cover DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC63-04607B DCF, left cover DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC63-04683A ADF, white foam (Sponge-white sheet) Main assembly on page 423

568 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC63-04750B Cover, rear Finisher sub 1 on page 537

SAM-JC63-04792B Cover, main Finisher sub 1 on page 537

SAM-JC63-04797B Finisher sub-tray Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC63-04957A Paddle absorber, rubber a Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC63-04958A Paddle absorber, rubber b Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC63-04984A Ground-c, safety Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC63-04985B Caster cover Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC63-04985B Caster cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC63-04986B Cover, front Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC63-04986B Front cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC63-04987B Cover-f, lower Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC63-04987B Cover-f, lower Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC63-04988B Cover, rear Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC63-04988B Rear cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC63-04995B Cover-t, tray Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC63-04996B Cover-t, tray 2 Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC63-04996B Cover-t, tray 2 Mainline finisher 6 on page 499

SAM-JC63-04999B Cover, stacker Shield on page 527

SAM-JC63-05002B Cover-m, tray Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC63-05002B Cover-m, tray Mainline finisher 6 on page 499

SAM-JC63-05003B Cover-s, tray Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC63-05003B Cover-s, tray Mainline finisher 6 on page 499

SAM-JC63-05004A Cover, link Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC63-05041A Sheet-fold output Three fold blade on page 515

SAM-JC63-05044A Sheet-jam guide Three fold blade on page 515

SAM-JC63-05055A ADF shading sheet ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-JC63-05055A ADF shading sheet Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC63-05561A Cover, rear ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-JC63-05563A Cover, front ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-JC63-05566A Rear cover Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC63-05575A Cover, scanner right Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-05576A Cover, scanner left Cover on page 445

ENWW Numerical parts list 569

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC63-05577A Cover, scanner rear Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-05617A Cover, rear lower mono Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-05618A Cover, rear upper Cover on page 445

SAM-JC63-05623A Cover, left upper Cover on page 445

SAM-JC64-00710A Locker, side Right door on page 447

SAM-JC64-00711A Locker, side rear Right door on page 447

SAM-JC64-00995A Button, staple Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC64-00996A Button lens Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC66-00940A Gear, M_idle PU Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

SAM-JC66-00940A Gear-m, idle DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

SAM-JC66-00941A Gear, M_one way Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

SAM-JC66-00941A Gear-m, one way DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

SAM-JC66-00943A Gear, M_PU joint Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

SAM-JC66-00943A Gear-m, joint DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

SAM-JC66-00977A Clutch, P_one way Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

SAM-JC66-00977A Clutch, P_one way MP tray on page 449

SAM-JC66-00977A Clutch one way DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

SAM-JC66-02163A Gear, output Output on page 425

SAM-JC66-02180A Actuator, duplex 2 Right door duplex on page 453

SAM-JC66-02218A Lever-actuator F_D full Output on page 425

SAM-JC66-02270A Link cover, open Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC66-02278A Lever-act full output Output on page 425

SAM-JC66-02289B Roller idle, rubber, idle Right door duplex on page 453

SAM-JC66-02354A Shaft, roller idle L Right door duplex on page 453

SAM-JC66-03199A Actuator, empty pickup Main frame pickup, upper

on page 441

SAM-JC66-03199A Actuator, empty pickup DCF main frame pickup, upper

on page 485

570 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC66-03203A Roller idle, feed Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC66-03220B Link, side Right door on page 447

SAM-JC66-03235A Link, D Right door on page 447

SAM-JC66-03287A DCF, idle feed roller DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

SAM-JC66-03288A DCF, feed pulley DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

SAM-JC66-03307A Actuator, fuser out Right door output on page 451

SAM-JC66-04079A Gear, DOC pinion ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-JC66-04100A Link, cover open ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC66-04103A Actuator, registration ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC66-04104A Actuator, output ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC66-04199A Actuator, feed sensor Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC66-04200A Actuator tray limit Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC66-04243A Roller, feed-entrance Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC66-04244A Roller, feed-output Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC66-04520A Actuator, entrance feed SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC66-04523A Roller, click-feed Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC66-04525A Actuator, top-output Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 509

SAM-JC66-04526A Actuator, pusher Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC66-04528A Actuator-o, staple Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC66-04569A Actuator, sensor IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC66-04573A Gear, double Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

SAM-JC66-04579A Gear, double Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-JC66-04583A Timing pulley FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC66-04591A Gear, helical Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

SAM-JC66-04592A Gear, helical 1 Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

ENWW Numerical parts list 571

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC66-04593A Gear, helical 2 Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 513

SAM-JC66-04594A Gear, helical 3 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC66-04595A Gear, helical 4 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC66-04602A Gear, buffer Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC66-04604A Gear-db, gear SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC66-04644A Actuator, te-press1 SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC66-04719A Rooler, feed-lower bm Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

SAM-JC66-04721A Roller, feed-fold output Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC66-04722A Roller, main-feed entrance Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-JC66-04723A Roller, output-feed bm Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC66-04724A Roller, mid-feed output Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC66-04725A Roller, top-feed mid output Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC66-04726A Roller, main-feed output Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC66-04727A Roller, top-feed output Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC66-04732A Roller, brg-feed IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC66-04733A Roller, brg-feed entrance IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC66-04744A Roller, output-3 fold Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC66-04767A Shaft, hinge-door Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC66–04339A Actuator-bin full output Output on page 425

SAM-JC67-00455A Coupler, torquelimiter MP tray on page 449

SAM-JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

SAM-JC67-00817A Main-brush, output Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC67-00818A Top-brush output Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC67-00819A Compiler-brush, ceiling rear Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC67-00820A Compiler-brush, ceiling front Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC67–00455A Coupler, torque limiter Main pickup frame on page 439

SAM-JC69-01326A Friction pad, guide pickup ADF main frame assembly (dn
models) on page 459

572 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC70-40360A Ict-pin, paralled, p/u Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC70-40542A Cartridge, ICT-PIN SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC81-07637A Stacker, CSP-worm SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC81-08263A Magnet, as Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC81-08263A Magent, as by3-32-1 Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC81-08263A AS-Magnet BY3-32-1 IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC90-00918A Tray 1 one way MP tray on page 449

SAM-JC90-01118B Output Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC90-01125B Tray 1 bracket pickup MP tray on page 449

SAM-JC90-01132A Output guide, upper Output on page 425

SAM-JC90-01133A Output guide, lower Output on page 425

SAM-JC90-01285A DCF, sub-takeaway DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC90-01310A Finisher sub-paper support Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01311A Finisher sub-paper support, rear Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01313A Finisher sub-actuator tray Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC90-01314A Finisher sub-actuator tray sensor Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC90-01315A Finisher sub-alignment, front Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01317A Finisher sub-alignment, rear Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01319A Finisher sub-tray frame Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC90-01320A Finisher sub-tray lower limit Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC90-01321B Finisher sub-cover, front Finisher sub 1 on page 537

SAM-JC90-01322B Finisher sub-cover, middle Finisher sub 1 on page 537

SAM-JC90-01323B Finisher sub-cover, compile Finisher sub 1 on page 537

SAM-JC90-01324B Finisher sub-stacker plate Finisher sub 1 on page 537

SAM-JC90-01332A Finisher sub-ejector Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01334A Finisher sub-motor tray Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01336A Finisher sub-guide output, lower Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01342A Finisher sub-staple Sub-inner finisher on page 535

SAM-JC90-01342A Finisher sub-staple Finisher sub 7 on page 539

SAM-JC90-01343A Finisher sub-staple Sub-inner finisher on page 535

ENWW Numerical parts list 573

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC90-01343A Finisher sub-punch dummy Finisher sub 7 on page 539

SAM-JC90-01344A Finisher sub-entrance motor Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC90-01394A Finisher sub-guide three fold Three fold blade on page 515

SAM-JC90-01395A Finisher sub-output roller Three fold blade on page 515

SAM-JC90-01396A Finisher sub-3 fold mtr Three fold motor, curl pawl
motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-JC90-01398A Finisher sub-curl pawl Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-JC90-01399A Finisher sub-3 fold output Three fold motor, curl pawl
motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-JC90-01400A Finisher sub-low output Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC90-01402A Finisher sub-hb mtr IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC90-01404A Finisher sub-clutch drive Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC90-01404A Finisher sub-clutch drive IPTU (bridge) on page 533

SAM-JC90-01406A Finisher sub-guide top Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 503

SAM-JC90-01409A Finisher sub-ejector unit Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-JC90-01412A Finisher sub-staple unit Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC90-01414A Finisher sub-scu mtr Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC90-01414A Finisher sub-scu motor SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC90-01415A Finisher sub-stk mtr Mainline finisher 4 on page 495

SAM-JC90-01415A Finisher sub-stk motor SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC90-01416A Finisher sub-booklet unit Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC90-01416A Finisher sub-booklet unit Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC90-01417B Finisher sub-tray bm unit Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC90-01424A Finisher sub-entrance guide SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC90-01429A Finisher sub-low paddle Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

SAM-JC90-01432A Finisher sub-fd stopper unit FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC90-01433A Finisher sub-jam clear FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

574 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC90-01435A Finisher sub-bkt main blade FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC90-01437A Finisher sub-main blade Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 513

SAM-JC90-01440A Finisher sub-top frame Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 513

SAM-JC90-01444A Finisher sub-door Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC90-01445B Finisher sub-top door Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC90-01445B Finisher sub-top door Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC90-01445B Finisher sub-top door Door, top door, top cover, and
registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC90-01446B Finisher sub-top cover Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC90-01446B Finisher sub-top cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC90-01446B Finisher sub-top cover Door, top door, top cover, and
registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC90-01448B Finisher sub-regist guide Mainline finisher 5 on page 497

SAM-JC90-01450A Finisher sub-mid jam Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

SAM-JC90-01451A Finisher sub-output main Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 519

SAM-JC90-01453A Finisher sub-drv buff Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC90-01454A Finisher sub-top lower Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

SAM-JC90-01455A Finisher sub-top jam Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC90-01455A Finisher sub-top jam Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

SAM-JC90-01456A Finisher sub-trans buff Mainline finisher 2 on page 491

SAM-JC90-01456A Finisher sub-trans buff Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC90-01457A Finisher sub-right jam Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-JC90-01457A Finisher sub-right jam Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC90-01458A Finisher sub-div cam Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC90-01458A Finisher sub-div cam Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC90-01459A Finisher sub-hb mtr Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

ENWW Numerical parts list 575

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC90-01459A Finisher sub-hb motor Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC90-01462A Finisher sub-paddle, mid PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

SAM-JC90-01463A Finisher sub-paddle, wing PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

SAM-JC90-01464A Finisher sub-alignment front Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-JC90-01464A Finisher sub-alignment, front Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

SAM-JC90-01465A Finisher sub-alignment rear Mainline finisher 1 on page 489

SAM-JC90-01465A Finisher sub-alignment, rear Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

SAM-JC90-01466A Finisher sub-end stopper Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC90-01467A Finisher sub-ef mtr Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC90-01474A Finisher sub-clutch div Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC90-01476A Finisher sub-base low Shield on page 527

SAM-JC90-01477A Finisher sub-pcb bm PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

SAM-JC90-01478A Finisher sub-cover f bm Booklet finisher on page 487

SAM-JC90-01478B Finisher sub-cover f bm PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

SAM-JC90-01479A Finisher sub-idle fold PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

SAM-JC90-01480A Finisher sub-paddle PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 529

SAM-JC90-01502A Finisher sub-booklet 4 Finisher sub booklet on page 531

SAM-JC90-01619A Cassette First cassette on page 427

SAM-JC90-01620A Cassette Second cassette on page 429

SAM-JC90-01664A Cassette, fifth DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC90-01666A Cassette, fourth DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC90-01668A MP sub tray Right door on page 447

SAM-JC90-01673A Motor Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC90-01675A Solenoid Mainline finisher 3 on page 493

SAM-JC91-01237A Fuser, 220V Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC91-01238A Fuser, 110V Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC92-02453A DCF PCA DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC92-02622A PBA, paper size sensor Main frame on page 443

576 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC92-02747A PBA, eraser mono Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC92-02774A Inner finisher PCA Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC92-02780A Rear join PCA Finisher sub 8 on page 541

SAM-JC92-02781A PCA scan joint ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

SAM-JC92-02789A PCA, 3k switch Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 517

SAM-JC92-02962A PCA ADF ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-JC92-02964A Flow ADF, PCA (GX) (z models only) Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC92-02964B Flow ADF, PCA (sGX) (dn models only) Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC93-00078C Frame sub, clean registration Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC93-00442A Drive, pickup Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC93-00447A DCF, feed drive DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC93-00449A Drive, M fuser output (output) Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC93-00450B Drive, M toner supply Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC93-00451A Drive, duct Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC93-00452A Drive, motor step Fuser output drive on page 433

SAM-JC93-00466A Frame main, switch open Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC93-00503A Frame, main pickup lower Main pickup frame on page 439

SAM-JC93-00503A Main frame pickup, lower DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

SAM-JC93-00504A Frame, main pickup upper Main pickup frame on page 439

SAM-JC93-00504A Main frame pickup, upper DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

SAM-JC93-00504A Main frame pickup, upper DCF main frame pickup, upper
on page 485

SAM-JC93-00510A Main pickup frame Main frame pickup 1 and 2

on page 437

SAM-JC93-00510A Main frame pickup DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

SAM-JC93-00510A Main frame pickup DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

SAM-JC93-00511A Frame, main pickup 1st Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC93-00512A Frame, main pickup 2nd Main engine frame on page 431

ENWW Numerical parts list 577

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC93-00513A DCF, main frame pickup DCF main on page 479

SAM-JC93-00513A DCF, main frame pickup DCF main frame pickup 1

on page 481

SAM-JC93-00540A Frame, main pickup roller Main pickup frame on page 439

SAM-JC93-00540A Main frame pickup roller DCF main frame pickup

on page 483

SAM-JC93-00540B Frame, main pickup roller MP tray on page 449

SAM-JC93-00891A Frame, HV package mono Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC93-00911B Drive, main sub Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC93-00912B Drive, main Main engine frame on page 431

SAM-JC93-00917A Frame, duct Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC93-01001A Drive motor, step Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

SAM-JC93-01001A Drive motor, step Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle
motor on page 521

SAM-JC93-01001A Driver motor, step Front alignment (tamper)

on page 523

SAM-JC93-01001A Driver motor, step Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 525

SAM-JC93-01001A Drive motor, step Shield on page 527

SAM-JC93-01152A Driver motor, step Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

SAM-JC93-01153A Drive motor, step Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-JC93-01154A Drive motor, step Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 501

SAM-JC93-01155A Drive motor, step Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 507

SAM-JC93-01155A Drive motor, step Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 509

SAM-JC93-01155A Drive motor, step FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 511

SAM-JC93-01156A Drive motor, step SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 505

SAM-JC93-01371A Frame, sub registration Registration sub-frame

on page 435

SAM-JC95-01509A Cover, side output Right door on page 447

578 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC95-01510A Cover, side duplex motor Right door on page 447

SAM-JC95-01516A Cover, side take away Right door on page 447

SAM-JC95-01518A Cover, rear lower mono Right door on page 447

SAM-JC95-01519A Cover, side duplex lower Right door on page 447

SAM-JC95-01924A Cover, side duplex Right door duplex on page 453

SAM-JC95-01943A Cover, side roller TR Right door on page 447

SAM-JC95-02080A Cover, side Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC95-02082A Cover, middle right Cover on page 445

SAM-JC95-02086A Cover, scanner front Cover on page 445

SAM-JC95-02087A Cover, output Cover on page 445

SAM-JC95-02088A Cover, rear output Cover on page 445

SAM-JC95-02094A Cover Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC95-02095A Cover, left mono Cover on page 445

SAM-JC95-02096A Cover, front Cover on page 445

SAM-JC95-02097A Cover, inner Cover on page 445

SAM-JC96-11637A Cartridge Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC96-11669A Black developer unit Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC97-01401A MEA unit, terminal Main frame on page 443

SAM-JC97-04017B Laser scanner assembly Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC97-04099A ADF pickup roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-JC97-04507A Image scanner, APS ADF image scanner, lower (dn

models) on page 463

SAM-JC97-04509A Image scanner, FFC CCD ADF image scanner, lower (dn
models) on page 463

SAM-JC97-04512A Image scanner guide harness ADF image scanner, lower (dn
models) on page 463

SAM-JC97-04515A Image scanner, lower Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

SAM-JC97-04516A Scanner open sensor ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

SAM-JC97-04516A Image scanner open sensor Flow ADF image scanner (z

models) on page 475

SAM-JC97-04520C Image scanner Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC97-04521A Scanner FR lamp ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

ENWW Numerical parts list 579

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC97-04522B Scanner glass ADF image scanner (dn models)

on page 461

SAM-JC97-04523B Image scanner, lens ADF image scanner, lower (dn

models) on page 463

SAM-JC97-04523B Image scanner Flow ADF image scanner, lower

(z models) on page 477

SAM-JC97-04527A ADF, hinge L ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-JC97-04528A ADF,hinge R ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-JC97-04586A ADF housing separation ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC97-04640A Flow ADF, hinge l Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-JC97-04641A Flow ADF, hinge r Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-JC97-04646B Flow ADF pickup, upper Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC97-04650A Flow ADF, sub-pickup Flow ADF upper pickup (z

models) on page 469

SAM-JC97-04652A Flow ADF, separation cover Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04656B Flow ADF scan in lower Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04658B Flow ADF stacker Flow ADF stacker (z models)

on page 471

SAM-JC97-04661A Flow ADF, housing separation roller Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04668B Flow ADF, exterior Flow ADF main frame (z models)

on page 473

SAM-JC97-04679A Flow ADF, lift drive Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04680A Flow ADF, feed drive motor Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04681A Flow ADF, pickup release drive Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04682A Flow ADF, scan release drive Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04687A Flow ADF, white simplex roller Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04692A Flow ADF, damper Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

580 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

 Table 4-62 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SAM-JC97-04696B Flow ADF open cover, lower Flow ADF open cover (z models)
on page 467

SAM-JC97-04722A ADF, DCISM ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC97-04830A Flow ADF scan out Flow ADF main frame (z models)
on page 473

SAM-JC97-04851A ADF whole unit Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC97-04852A ADF separation roller ADF main frame assembly (dn

models) on page 459

SAM-JC97-04853A ADF, Cover open ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-JC97-04856A ADF, pickup ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-JC97-04857A ADF sub pickup drive ADF exterior and ADF pickup
assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-JC97-04859A ADF stacker ADF (dn models) on page 455

SAM-JC97-04860A ADF pickup roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

assembly (dn models)
on page 457

SAM-JC97-04861A ADF separation sub roller ADF main frame assembly (dn
models) on page 459

SAM-JC97-04869A Flow ADF open cover Flow ADF open cover (z models)
on page 467

SAM-JC97-04872A Flow ADF pickup, upper Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC97-04879A Flow ADF, dummy front Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC97-04880A Flow ADF, bottom cover Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC97-04881A Flow ADF, front cover Flow ADF (z models) (GX)

on page 465

SAM-JC97-04882A Flow ADF, main frame (sGX) (dn models only) Flow ADF (z models) (GX)
on page 465

SAM-JC97-04883A Flow ADF, main frame (GX) (z models only) Flow ADF (z models) (GX)
on page 465

SAM-JC97–04868A Flow ADF whole unit Main assembly on page 423

SAM-JC98-04473A Stapler-etc assembly Finisher sub 7 on page 539

ENWW Numerical parts list 581

582 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW
5 Problem solving

● Troubleshooting process

● Tools for troubleshooting

● Clear paper jams

● Service mode (tech mode)

● Print quality troubleshooting guide

● Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew

ENWW 583
 Troubleshooting process
Determine the problem source
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to
the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the
problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of
this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart
guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are
in good condition.

Power subsystem

Power-on checks

The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the
power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to
isolate and solve the problem.

If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-panel
display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview

During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place your
hand over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the scanner. If the
fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer and hear the fan
operating.

A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set up
functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam condition is
sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the
main motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.

If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:

1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that
delivers the correct voltage.

2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.

3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

584 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.

6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation

Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to collect
as much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.

Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:

● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).

● The control Panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.

● The control Panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).

Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:

● No power to the printer.

● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.

● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.

● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network PCA,
USB device, or other component).

● The formatter is defective.

● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.

● The DC controller is defective.

Following are some questions to ask the customer:

● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?

◦ For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.

◦ Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?

● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?

◦ Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?

◦ Has a lightning storm recently occurred?

◦ Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?

● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.

◦ Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?

◦ Is the control-panel display back light on?

◦ Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed to
print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.

ENWW Troubleshooting process 585

 Recommended actions

If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the
printer is getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.

If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.

TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.

2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power supply
is operational).

3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.

4. Turn the printer power off.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and fully
seated), and then turn the printer power on again.

6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run different
diagnostic tests.

7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check if the
contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the control-panel
display becomes visible.

8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.

NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.

9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot and
is fully seated.

NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers have
third-party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.

10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive, solid-
state drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).

● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.

IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might be
defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.

11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.

12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.

13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.

586 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the formatter.

14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the
control panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics are
functioning, then replace the formatter.

ENWW Troubleshooting process 587

 Control panel checks

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.

● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).

● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.

● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

● No control panel sound.

● Home button is unresponsive.

● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

588 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 5-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)

Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.

Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?

Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y

Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.

Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N

Replace the
control panel.

ENWW Troubleshooting process 589

 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 5-2 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone

Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.

Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?

Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.

Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?

Do not replace the

control panel.

590 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

No control panel sound

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 5-3 No control panel sound

Control panel
has no
sound

Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save

Can sounds
be heard?

N
Y

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.

Can sounds
be heard?
Y

N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

ENWW Troubleshooting process 591

 Home button is unresponsive

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 5-4 Home button is unresponsive

Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illumated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
tunr the power off, and
then on agian.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?

Turn the product power off,

and then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y

Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

592 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Figure 5-5 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Individual component diagnostics

Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.

Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.

Figure 5-6 LEDs

1 Heartbeat LED

2 HP Jetdirect LEDs

ENWW Troubleshooting process 593

 HP Jetdirect LEDs

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the
green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a
link has failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link
settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Networking

● Ethernet

● Link Speed

3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

594 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics

The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper
path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks

Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power supplies when
the printer is turned on.

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

1. Open the toner cartridge door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.

Figure 5-7 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Defeat the front door interlock

1. Open the front door.

ENWW Troubleshooting process 595

 2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.

Figure 5-8 Defeat the front door interlock

596 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.

Access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Select one of the following tests:

● Continuous Scan

● Run Fax Test

3. Select the component test options for the test.

ENWW Troubleshooting process 597

 Tools for troubleshooting
Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.

● Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

● Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

● Step 3: Test print functionality

● Step 4: Test copy functionality

● Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

● Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

● Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

● Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality

● Factors that affect printer performance

Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white light.
If it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following conditions.

● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.

● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.

2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the doors
are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.

Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.

Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.

NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual individual life
or yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated
life is not an implied warranty.

Step 3: Test print functionality

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration Page
item, and then touch the Print button to print the report.

3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel to
see if paper is jammed inside the printer.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.

598 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Step 4: Test copy functionality
1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly through the
ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the paper meets
specifications for this printer.

2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.

3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small glass
strip.

Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.

3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.

Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.

3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.

4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.

Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.

2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.

3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the
control panel.

2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.

3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.

Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:

● The software program that you are using and its settings

● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)

● Printer processing and download time

● The complexity and size of graphics

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 599

 ● The speed of the computer you are using

● The USB or network connection

● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome

● The type of USB drive, if you are using one

● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity

600 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Print menu map
To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.

Print the menu map from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print current settings pages

Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in
the troubleshooting process.

Print the current settings page from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Current Settings Page option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print event log

Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the
Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.

Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Event Log

3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.

Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 601

 ● 04072517

4. Touch the Event Log item.

Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● 04072517

5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.

602 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Pre-boot menu options
The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization for the
entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely
lost. HP does not recommend this action.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin on page 613.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 5-9 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 603

 2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 5-10 Pre-boot menu

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

604 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 5-11 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.

4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version of the
printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support these
options.

Table 5-1 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu and
continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30

seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the same as
selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not

apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required

to open the Pre-boot menu.

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not already

signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required to
sign in.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 605

 Table 5-1 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download process. A

USB Thumbdrive option will work on all FutureSmart
USB printers. USB or Network connections are not currently
supported.
USB Thumbdrive

Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67

error displays on the control panel. A firmware download
must be performed to return the system to a bootable state.

Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the
firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is
downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data

except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation
prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations

and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations
and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the

firmware image from the active directory without having to
download new firmware code (printer remains bootable).

Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password.

Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from
the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually
cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the
password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm
the action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button

to clear the password.

Table 5-2 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an external device
for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the
(continued) Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error
is displayed.

606 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-2 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to
this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will remain

accessible to this printer. Use this function to have more than
one encrypted disk accessible by the printer when using them
interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this printer

always remains accessible to this printer.

Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an
unlocked mode for a single service event. The secure disk
that is already locked to this printer will remain accessible to
this printer and uses the old disk's encryption password with
the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer remains

accessible to this printer.

Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non-
secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet-
to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk
for this session only, and then search for the missing secure
disk in future sessions.

Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files

are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a one-pass
overwrite, which erases the entire disk including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all

data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files

are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The encryption
key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Table 5-3 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or
get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 607

 Table 5-3 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files

are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the
entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of

the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain
access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files

are reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is
erased.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

External Device Select the External Device item to erase the external device
or get status about the external device.

Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files

are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,

including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of

the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files

are reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the disk
becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Table 5-4 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [DHCP] The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from
only active when the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot menu
is open. IP Mode [STATIC] Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.

IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.

Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.

608 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-4 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.

Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Table 5-5 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can
be set for the next time the printer is turned on and
(continued) initializes to the Ready state.

Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item
to allow the printer to initialize and show the firmware
version when the printer reaches the Ready state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time, the

Show Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware
revision is not shown.

Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all
customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to
factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-
party applications.

Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer calibration for
the very next power-initialization cycle only.

Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the
Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot menu and the
Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator remove the

Lock Service setting before they can open the Service
menu.

Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume

during startup.

Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the printer to
initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
(continued) (continued)
For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time
settings like date/time, language, and other settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the
printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time, this

item is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are
used during configuration, and the first-time setting
prompt is not used.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 609

 Table 5-5 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Embedded Jetdirect Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the
Off embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is

always enabled.

WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.

Table 5-6 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose

hardware components and their interface
(continued) connections. Use these items to
troubleshoot specific hardware
components, and the interface between
them and other components.

Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic when executing
multiple diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to select a brief

memory test.

NOTE: This test requires about four

minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item to select an extended

memory test.

NOTE: This test requires about twenty

minutes to execute.

Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the
Disk diagnostic when executing multiple
diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to select a brief

firmware self-test.

NOTE: This test requires about two or

three minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item to select an extended

firmware self-test.

NOTE: This test requires about sixty

minutes to execute.

Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that

checks the active sectors on the disk.

NOTE: This test requires about thirty

minutes to execute.

610 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-6 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that

checks every sector on the disk.

NOTE: This test requires about fifty

minutes to execute.

Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief

test that checks the drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting technology (SMART)
status—the drive detects and reports
reliability indicators to help anticipate disk
failures (SMART status).

CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of

the copy processor board (CPB) and the
formatter PCA connections.

Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the

integrity of the interconnect PCA (ICB) and
its connections.

Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a

selected test.

NOTE: If more than one test is selected,

they are executed in sequence.

Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
(continued) navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.

NOTE: For more information about using the Remote

Admin function, see Remote Admin on page 613.

Stop Telnet

Refresh IP

System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage item
to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive at the
next printer start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Change Svc PWD Use this item to change the Service menu personal
identification number (PIN).

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 611

 Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number (PIN)
has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.

Developer Tools Netexec

612 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The printer
functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer
(with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and interact with the
Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

● Required software and network connection

● Connect a remote connection

● Disconnect a remote connection

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and enabled,
on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a Windows®
operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are other
operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and configuring
the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that operating system.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 613

 Telnet client

Enable the Windows telnet client

All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet client
function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system. Screens
and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 5-12 Open the Control Panel

2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 5-13 Turn Windows features on or off

614 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the box
to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Figure 5-14 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection

The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the printer.
The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access network
security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network (VPN)
connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 615

 3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-15 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-16 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-17 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.

Figure 5-18 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

616 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Figure 5-19 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

● The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

● The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information
on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 5-20 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the OK
button to open a Windows command window.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 617

 Figure 5-21 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 5-22 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet
server function at the printer on page 615.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or
on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection on page 615.

Figure 5-23 Establish a telnet connection

618 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer on page 615 at
the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates
the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See Start
the telnet server function at the printer on page 615.

Figure 5-24 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options
on page 603.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection, the
following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

Figure 5-25 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet client
computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote telnet
client computer.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 619

 1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 5-26 Access the administrator menu

2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press the
Enter key.

Figure 5-27 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at
the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

620 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Figure 5-28 Terminate the telnet connection

Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more
advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name in
the address bar of a web browser.

● Reports menu

● Settings menu

● Copy menu (MFP only)

● Scan menu (MFP only)

● Fax menu (fax models only)

● Print menu

● Supplies menu

● Trays menu

● Troubleshooting menu

● Maintenance menu

Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-8 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire control
panel system and the selected
View values for each setting.

Current Settings Page Print Shows a summary of the current

settings for the printer. This might
View be helpful if you plan to make
changes and need a record of the
present configuration.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 621

 Table 5-8 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings and

installed accessories.
View

How to Connect Page Print Shows the network information

typically needed to connect the
View printer to a network.

Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate remaining

life for the supplies; reports
View statistics on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial number,
page counts, and maintenance
information.

HP provides approximations of the

remaining life for the supplies as a
customer convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels might be
different from the approximations
provided.

Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes

that have passed through the
View printer; lists whether they were
simplex, duplex, monochrome, or
color; and reports the page count.

File Directory Print Shows the file name and folder

name for files that are stored in the
View printer memory.

Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services
for the printer.
View

Color Usage Job Log Print Shows color jobs completed by the
printer.
View

Fax Reports (MFP fax models only) Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that
have been sent from or received by
View this printer.

Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes that

have been used for outgoing faxes.
View This report shows how many sent
faxes were billed to each code.

Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are

blocked from sending faxes to this
View printer.

Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have
been set up for this printer.
View

Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax

operation, either sent or received.
View

Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page.

622 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-8 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

RGB samples Print Prints color samples for different

RGB values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.

CMYK samples Print Prints color samples for different

CMYK values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.

PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.

PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 623

 Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-9 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and to
YYYY/MMM/DD configure date/
time settings.

Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Date/Time Date Select the time zone Select the time

from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.

Time Select the date from a

pop-up calendar.

Time Zone Select the time from a

pop-up keypad.

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled + (Add) Use to configure

events displays. the printer to
Edit automatically
wake up or go to
Delete sleep at specific
times on specific
days. Using this
feature saves
energy.

NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time and
the days for the
wake or sleep
event.

Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.

624 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.

Sleep Settings Auto Off After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number of
Sleep minutes minutes after
which the printer
Sleep After Default = 0 minutes enters Sleep or
Inactivity Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
HP Auto Off/Auto number to open
On the virtual keypad,
and then increase
Shut Down or decrease the
number of
minutes.

Wake/Auto On to All Events*

These Events
Network port

Power button only

Display Settings Display Brightness Automatic* The Manual setting Use to specify the
uses a slider to intensity of the
Manual manually control the LCD control panel
display brightness. display.

System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear
Off a sound when you
touch the screen
or press buttons
on the control
panel.

Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a

languages that the different language
printer supports. for control panel
messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.

Keyboard Layout Each language has a Select the default

default keyboard keyboard layout
M681z/M682z layout. To change it, that matches the
only select from a list of language you want
layouts. to use.

Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display or
hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 625

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DisplayDate and Show Date and Time* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
Hide Date and Time date and time on
M681/M682 only the control panel
Home screen.

Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 seconds between any
activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the
control panel
display returns to
the Home menu,
and any user
signed in to the
printer is signed
out.

Clearable On Use this feature to

Warnings set the period that
Job* a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the On
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
appear until the
Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job that
generated the
warning and
disappear from the
display when the
next job starts.

626 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option to

Events seconds)* configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to continue when the printer
encounters certain
errors. If the Auto-
continue (10
seconds) option is
selected, the job
will continue after
10 seconds. If the
Touch OK to
continue option is
selected, the job
will stop and
require the user to
touch the OK
button before
continuing.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 627

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Jam Recovery Auto* This printer

provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:

Auto: The printer

attempts to reprint
jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used to
store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs
out of paper and
the job is being
printed on both
sides, some pages
can be lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to
store the last few
pages printed. This
might cause a
decrease in overall
performance.

Auto Recovery Enabled The printer

attempts to reprint
Disabled* jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.

628 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature

if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from
the control panel.
Held print jobs
start printing after
the copy job is
finished, provided
that no other copy
job is in the print
queue.

Restore Factory Restore Use to restore all

Settings printer settings to
Cancel their factory
defaults.

Copy/Print Copy Settings Image Preview Display a preview

of the image
before printing it.

Enable Device USB Enabled Enables the printer

to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.

Manage Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option allows
Jobs you list the jobs
Date either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs
Personal jobs only will be retained in
the event of a
All temporary jobs printer reboot.

Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.

The Temporary Job

Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 629

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Temporary Stored 1-300 Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Standard Stored 1-300 Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
standard jobs that
can be stored on
the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default

Options number of copies for
Default = 1 a copy job. This
default applies when
the Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Paper Selection Select from a list Configures the default

of sizes that the paper size used for
printer supports. print jobs.

Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the default

Paper Size inches paper size that is used
when the user selects
Default = 8.5 Custom as the paper
inches size for a print job.

Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches

Default = 14
inches

Use Inches Enabled*

Disabled

630 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the original
2-sided document is printed
on one or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or both
sides. For example,
select the 1-sided
original, 2-sided
output option when
the original is printed
on one side, but you
want to make two-
sided copies.

Staple None Sets the position

of the staple on
Top left the page.

Top right

Top left or right

Output Bin Automatically select

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Resolution FastRes1200 Sets the resolution

for sent
1200x1200dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
have more dots
per inch (dpi), so
they show more
detail. Lower
resolution images
have fewer dots
per inch and show
less detail, but the
file size is smaller.
Some file types,
for example a file
that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 631

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Edge-to-Edge Normal Use to avoid

(recommended)* shadows that can
appear along the
Edge-to-Edge output edges of copies
when the original
document is
printed close to
the edges.

PCL and Courier Font Regular* Select which

PostScript version of the
Settings Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

Wide A4 Enabled Changes the

printable area of
Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters
can be printed on a
single line of A4
paper.

Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature to

select whether a
Disabled* PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

632 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific printer
language, the
printer does not
automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font

number for the
Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source menu.
The printer assigns
a number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the
Font # column of
the printout.

Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the
Default = 10 Font Number
setting indicate a
contour font, then
use this feature to
select a default
pitch (for a fixed-
spaced font).

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 633

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is a
set of printer
commands that HP
developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user-
soft default
vertical form
length.

Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of

symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set is a
unique grouping of
all the characters
in a font. The
factory default
value for this
option is PC-8.
Either PC-8 or
PC-850 are
recommended for
line-draw
characters.

634 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Append CR to LF No* Configure whether

a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended
to each line feed
(LF) encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments,
such as UNIX,
indicate a new line
by using only the
line-feed control
code. This option
allows the user to
append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.

Suppress Blank No* This option is for

Pages users who are
Yes generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be
printed. When the
Yes option is
selected, form
feeds are ignored
if the page is
blank.

Media Source Standard* Use to select and

Mapping maintain input
Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer HP
LaserJet models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on HP
LaserJet 4 and
older models.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 635

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print Quality Adjust Color Tonal Range Highlights

Midtones

Shadows

Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Black

Image Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

Registration adjusted
Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Depends upon
number of trays
installed

636 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin

Horizontal Shift alignment to
center the image
Front-side Vertical on the page from
Shift top to bottom and
from left to right.
Back-side You can also align
Horizizontal Shift the image on the
front with the
Back-side Vertical image printed on
Shift the back.

The direction that

is perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through
the printer is
referred to as X.
This is also known
as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.

The direction that

the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as Y.
Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the
feed direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.

Use the Adjust

Tray <X> menu to
adjust the
registration
settings for each
tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides
in the X and Y
directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 637

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print Test Page Use the Print Test

Page option to
print a page to test
the image
registration. It
provides
alignment guides
in the X and Y
directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.

Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page

Behavior
Sense first page

Sense transparency
ony

All Other Trays Sense first page

Sense transparency
only

Adjust paper types Select from a list of

paper types

Reset Paper Types

Optimize Normal Paper

Heavy paper

Envelope control

Tray 1

Background

Background 1

Uniformity Control

Tracking Control

Registration

Transfer Control

Moisture Control

Reset Optimize

Edge Control Off

Light

Normal

Maximum

638 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a specific
input tray. Two
options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the specified
tray is empty, even
though the user
specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.

Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether a

Prompt prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified tray
and the printer
pulls from the
multipurpose tray
instead. Two
options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 639

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a tray is
closed. Two
options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the tray
configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Use Another Tray Enabled* Use to turn on or

off the control
Disabled panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty. Two
options are
available:

Enabled: When this

option is selected,
the user is
prompted either to
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.

Disabled: When
this option is
selected, the user
is not given the
option of selecting
a different tray.
The printer
prompts the user
to add paper to the
tray that was
initially selected.

640 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Alternative Disabled* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
Enabled preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you
would for printing
on both sides. See
the user
documentation
that came with the
printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on
both sides. When
this option is
selected, the
printer speed
slows to the speed
required for
printing on both
sides.

Duplex Blank Auto* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Yes two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs the
printer not to
process blank
pages.

Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is printed
on only one side.
This might be
preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 641

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-

size paper when an
No A4 job is sent but
no A4-size paper is
loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job is
sent but no letter-
size paper is
loaded). This
option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper
and ledger with
A3-size paper.

Scan/Digital Send E-mail Settings E-mail Setup Use to configure

settings that apply
Network Folder NOTE: Email to sending
Settings Settings only documents
through email or
SharePoint saving documents
Settings to a folder on the
network or on a
Scan to USB Drive USB multi-drive.
Settings
The E-mail Setup
NOTE: The same Wizard feature
options are configures the
available for each printer to send
of these features, scanned images as
except where email
noted. attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded Web
Server and set up
the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

642 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating the
job, the default
options are used.
For complete
setup, go to the HP
Embedded Web
Server by typing
the IP address of
the printer into a
Web browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the
job. Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 643

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default File Name The printer is

shipped with a
factory default file
name of [Untitled]
for any scanned
files that are sent
or saved. Use this
feature to specify
a different default
file name. If you
are saving a file to
a network folder
or USB storage
printer and a file
with the default
file name already
exists, a number is
appended to the
file name, for
example,
[Untitled]001.

644 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Document File Select from a list of PDF provides the

Type file types. best overall image
and text quality.

JPEG is a good
choice for most
graphics. Most
computers have a
browser that can
view .JPEG files.
This file type
produces one file
per page.

TIFF is a standard
file format that
many graphics
programs support.
This file type
produces one file
per page.

MTIFF: stands for

multi-page TIFF.
This file type saves
multiple scanned
pages in a single
file.

XPS (XML Paper

Specification)
creates an XML file
that preserves the
original formatting
of the document
and supports color
graphics and
embedded fonts.

NOTE: OCR file

types are not
supported on this
printer unless
attached to DSS.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 645

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Manually Adjust* Use to optimize

Picture the output for a
Text particular type of
content. You can
Printed picture optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or
a mixture.

Manually Adjust:
Use to manually
optimize the
setting for text or
for pictures.

Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture:
Use for line
drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Output Quality High (large file) Use to select the

quality for the
Medium* output. Higher-
quality images
Low (small file) require a larger file
size than lower-
quality images.
Larger files take
more time to send,
and some
recipients might
have trouble
receiving larger
files.

646 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Then touch the
Orientation setting
to indicate
whether the
original has
portrait or
landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.

Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 647

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

2-Sided Format Book-style Book-style: The

back side of the
Flip-style original is printed
right-side-up, and
the back side of
the copy is printed
the same way. Use
this option for
originals and
copies that are
bound along the
left edge.

Flip-style: The
back side of the
original is printed
upside-down, and
the back side of
the copy is printed
the same way. Use
this option for
originals and
copies that are to
be bound along
the top edge.

Resolution 400 dpi Sets the resolution

for sent
300 dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
200 dpi have more dots
per inch (dpi), so
150 dpi* they show more
detail. Lower
75 dpi resolution images
have fewer dots
per inch and show
less detail, but the
file size is smaller.
Some file types,
for example a file
that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

648 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features

Orientation to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.

2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure

the default style
Flip-style for 2-sided print
jobs. If the Book-
style option is
selected, the back
side of the page is
printed the right
way up. This
option is for print
jobs that are
bound along the
left edge. If the
Flip-style option is
selected, the back
side of the page is
printed upside-
down. This option
is for print jobs
that are bound
along the top
edge.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 649

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or

disable color
Color scanning.

Black/Gray Automatically
detect:
Black Automatically
scans documents
in color if at least
one page has color.

Color: Scans
documents in
color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.

Black: Scans
documents in
black and white
with a compressed
file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.

Notification Do not notify* Configure to

receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify:

Turns off this
Print feature.

E-mail Notify when job

completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only if job

fails: Select to
receive notification
only if the job is
not sent
successfully.

Print: Select to
print the
notification at this
printer.

E-mail: Select to
receive the
notification to an
email account.

650 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Notification E- E-mail: Select to

mail address receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the
email address for
the notification.

Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of
the copy.

Adjust the
Darkness setting
to increase or
decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.

Contrast Adjust the

Contrast setting to
increase or
decrease the
difference
between the
lightest and
darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the

Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.

Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 651

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Automatic Tone The printer

automatically
adjusts the
Darkness,
Contrast, and
Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned
document.

Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment
setting the default
value.

Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine

several original
Job Build on documents into
one job. Also use
to scan an original
document that has
more pages than
the document
feeder can
accommodate at
one time. The
printer temporarily
saves all the
scanned images.
After you have
scanned all the
pages for the job,
touch Finish to
finish the job.

Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu

item to
Crop to content automatically crop
the scan for digital
Crop to paper sending. Use the
Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable
content.

652 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu

item to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such as
dark borders or
Front side erase staple marks, by
cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned
image. In each of
the text boxes
enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom
edge, left edge,
and right edge to
clean.

Multi-feed Disabled This setting stops

Detection the scanning
Enabled* process if it
detects multiple-
page feeds
through the
document feeder.

Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the
Enabled original document
from being
included in the
output document.

Create Multiple Disabled* Enable this item to

Files scan pages into
Enabled separate files
based on a
specified page
limit.

A page is one side

of an original
document.

JPEG and TIFF have

a limit of one page
per file.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 653

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Digital Sending Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how the

Software Setup Server printer interacts
Enabled* with the HP Digital
Allow Transfer to Sending Software
New DSS server (DSS) server.
HP DSS handles
digital sending
tasks, such as
faxing, emailing,
and sending
scanned
documents to a
network folder or
USB storage
device.

Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server
and Allow Transfer
to New DSS server
options to
configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.

Fax Internal Fax

Modem Setup

Fax Send Settings Image Preview

Fax Dialing Fax Dial Volume Off These settings

Settings control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.

Dialing Mode Tone*

Pulse

Redial Interval 1-5 Minutes

Default = 5 minutes

Fax Send Speed Fast*

Medium

Slow

Dialing Prefix

Detect Dial Tone

Redial on Error Range: 0-9

Default = 2

Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0

654 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Redial on Busy Range: 0-9

Default = 3

General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is

Settings Confirmation enabled, you must
Disabled* enter the fax
number twice.

PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users who

have the correct
Disabled driver installed to
send faxes
through the printer
from their
computers.

JBIG Compression Enabled* The JBIG

compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission time,
which can result in
lower phone
charges. However,
using JBIG
compression
sometimes causes
compatibility
problems with
older fax
machines. If this
occurs, turn off the
JBIG compression.

Error Correction Enabled* When error-

Mode correction mode is
Disabled enabled and an
error occurs during
fax transmission,
the printer sends
or receives the
error portion
again.

Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend or

overlay the fax
Overlay header page.

Fax Number Enabled Use this item to

Speed Dial match the fax
Matching Disabled* number that you
type to numbers
that are saved as a
speed dial.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 655

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the user
to enter the billing
code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.

You can also use

the billing codes
report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used for
faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.

Default Billing Specify a default

Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the user
sends an outgoing
fax. If this field is
blank, no default
billing code is
provided for the
user.

Minimum Length Range: 1-16 Specify the

required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can
be between 1 and
16 characters long.

Allow users to edit Off

billing codes
On*

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.

High

656 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Rings To Answer Range: 1-6

Default = 1

Fax Receive Speed Fast*

Medium

Slow

Ring Interval Range: 220-600 ms

Default = 600 ms

Ring Frequency Range: 1-200

Default = 68hz

Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about the
Always print faxes* security of private
faxes, use this
Use Fax Printing feature to store
Schedule faxes rather than
having them
automatically
print. Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.

Schedule + (Add) Print incoming faxes If you are using a

fax printing
Touch this to set Edit Store incoming faxes schedule, use this
up a fax printing menu to configure
schedule if you Delete (trash Time when to print
selected the Use can) faxes.
Fax Printing Event Days
Schedule option.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 657

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax

Numbers Block list can contain up
to 30 numbers.
When the printer
receives a call
from one of the
blocked fax
numbers, it
deletes the
incoming fax. It
also logs the
blocked fax in the
activity log along
with job-
accounting
information.

Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number to
Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.

To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax
list.

To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.

You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

658 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure to

Options receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify:

Turns off this
feature.

Notify when job

completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only if job

fails: Select to
receive notification
only if the job is
not sent
successfully.

Print E-mail: Select to

receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Notification E- Touch this text

mail address field, provide the
email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.

Stamp Received Enabled Use this option to

Faxes add the date, time,
Disabled* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 659

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger
Disabled than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto a
Letter-size or A4-
size page. If this
feature set to
Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.

Paper Tray Automatic*

Select from a list of

the trays.

Output Bin Automatically select

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the

layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.

Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding received faxes to
Enabled another fax
machine.

Type of Fax Job to All faxes Use to select the

Forward type of fax jobs
Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes

Fax Forwarding Provide the

Number forwarding phone
number, and then
touch the OK
button.

Clear Fax Activity Clears all events

Log from the fax
activity log.

660 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Supplies Low Warning Black Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated
Thresholds percentage at
Cyan Cartridge Default = 5% which the printer
notifies you when
Magenta a toner cartridge is
Cartridge very low.

Yellow Cartridge

Low Warning On Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel when
a cartridge is very
low.

Very Low Behavior Black Cartridge Stop

Color Cartridges Continue

Transfer Kit Prompt to continue

Fuser Kit

Document Feeder
Kit

Staples Stop

Prompt to continue

Restrict Color Use Enable Use this feature to

enable, restrict, or
Disable Color disable color
printing or
Color if allowed* copying.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 661

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Color/Black Mix Auto Instructs the

printer when to
Mostly Color Pages switch between
color and
Mostly Black Pages monochrome
printing modes for
the best overall
performance.

Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for the
first page of the
job. If necessary,
the printer
switches modes
during the middle
of a job and then
stays in that mode
until the job is
finished.

Mostly Color
Pages: The printer
uses color mode
for all jobs, even if
the job contains no
color pages.

Mostly Black
Pages: The printer
uses monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back to
monochrome
mode when it
detects a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

662 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Store Usage Data On supplies The Store Usage

Data provides a
Not on supplies way to suppress
the toner
cartridges from
storing most of the
information
gathered
exclusively for the
purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select the
On supplies
setting to store the
data on the toner
cartridge memory
chip. Select the
Not on supplies
setting to
suppress the
information from
being stored on
the memory chip.

Cartridge Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Cartridges protect cartridges
so that they can be
used only in this
product or fleet of
products.

Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized HP

to allow only
Authorized HP genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.

Manage Stapler/ Operation Mode Mailbox

Stacker
Stacker

Function Separator

Job Offset On

Off

Networking Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a page

Report that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 663

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow buttons An alphanumeric

to edit the host name. string, up to 32
characters, used to
NPIXXXXXX* identify the
printer. This name
is listed on the
HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the last
six digits of the
LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the

method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
Auto IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server. If
selected and a
DHCP lease exists,
the DHCP Release
menu and the
DHCP Renew menu
are available to set
DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use for

automatic link-
local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

664 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP

address to default
Legacy to when the print
server is unable to
obtain an IP
address from the
network during a
forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration
(for example,
when manually
configured to use
BootP or DHCP).

NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might
interfere with a
managed network.

Auto IP: A link-

local IP address
169.254.x.x is set.

Legacy: The
address
192.0.0.192 is set,
consistent with
older HP Jetdirect
printers.

Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n)
Default = of a Primary
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Domain Name
System (DNS)
Server.

Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n)
Default = 0.0.0.0 of a Secondary
DNS Server.

IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to

enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

Address Manual Settings Use this item to

enable and
Enable manually
configure a TCP/
Address IPv6 address.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 665

 Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:

The stateful auto-
Router Unavailable* configuration
method to be used
Always by the print server
is determined by a
router. The router
specifies whether
the print server
obtains its
address, its
configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If a
router is not
available, the print
server should
attempt to obtain
its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts
to obtain its
stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n)
Default = of a Primary
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Domain Name
System (DNS)
Server.

Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n)
Default = 0.0.0.0 of a Secondary
DNS Server.

666 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy

provided list. server to be used
by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a proxy
server, enter its
IPv4 address or
fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

Proxy Port Default = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.

Idle Timeout Default = 0270 The time period, in

seconds, after
which an idle TCP
print data
connection is
closed (default is
270 seconds, 0
disables the
timeout).

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 667

 Copy menu (MFP only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether the

original document is
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether the

copies should be printed on
2-sided one or both sides.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should

be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.

Color: Prints documents in

color.

Black: Prints documents in

black and white or
grayscale.

Quick Sets and Defaults Load

Save

Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Output Sides 1-sided

2-sided

668 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should

be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.

Color: Prints documents in

color.

Black: Prints documents in

black and white or
grayscale.

Staple None Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled

Top right angled

Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the user

to scan pages from a book.
Book Mode
2–sided ID allows the user
2–sided ID to scan both sides of an
identification card onto one
sheet.

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the size of the

document up or down.
Manual Select one of the
predefined percentages, or
select the Scaling field and
type a percentage between
25 and 400. The Auto
option automatically scales
the image to fit the paper
size in the tray.

NOTE: To reduce the

image, select a scaling
percentage that is less than
100. To enlarge the image,
select a scaling percentage
that is greater than 100.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes Describes the page size of
that the printer supports. the original document.

Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and

image quality, select the
Paper Type appropriate paper type
from the control panel
Paper Tray menu or from the print
driver.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 669

 Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or more

pages onto one sheet of
paper so you can fold the
sheets in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages in the
correct order. For example,
if the original document
has eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on the
same sheet.

Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features to work

correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of the
original document is placed
Landscape on the page. Portrait
orientation means the
short edge of the page is
along the top. Landscape
orientation means the long
edge of the page is along
the top. In the Orientation
area, select whether the
original document has a
portrait or landscape
orientation.

Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages onto

one sheet of paper.
Two (2)
NOTE: Before using this
Four (4) screen, use the Content
Orientation screen to
describe the original
document orientation.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Darkness Use to improve the overall

quality of the copy.

Adjust the Darkness setting

to increase or decrease the
amount of white and black
in the colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest color
on the page.

670 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the
output for text, printed
Mixed pictures, or a mixture.

Printed picture Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the
Photograph setting for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to optimize the

text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.

Printed picture: Use for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.

Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.

Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Use to avoid shadows that

can appear along the edges
Edge-to-Edge output of copies when the original
document is printed close
to the edges.

Erase Edges Front Side Use inches Use this menu item to
remove blemishes, such as
Apply same width to all dark borders or staple
edges marks, by cleaning the
specified edges of the
Top edge scanned image. In each of
the text boxes enter the
Bottom edge measurements, in
millimeters or inches, for
Left edge how much of the top edge,
bottom edge, left edge, and
Right edge
right edge to clean.

Back Side Use inches

Mirror front side

Top edge

Bottom edge

Left edge

Right edge

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 671

 Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more

order)* than one copy, select the
Collate on (Sets in page
Collate off (Pages grouped) order) option to assemble
the pages in the correct
order in each set of copies.

Select the Collate off (Pages

grouped) option to group
the same pages together.
For example, if you are
making five copies of an
original document that has
two pages, all five first
pages would be grouped
together and all five second
pages would be grouped
together.

Multi-feed Detection Enabled* This setting stops the

scanning process if it
Disabled detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.

Output Bin Automatically select

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

672 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Scan menu (MFP only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Email

Scan to Network Folder Paths

Folder
File Name

Quick Sets and

Defaults

Options File Type and

Resolution

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the original
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or

disable color
Color scanning.

Black/Gray Automatically detect:

Automatically scans
Black documents in color if
at least one page has
color.

Color: Scans
documents in color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.

Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 673

 Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Content Orientation Orientation Automatically Detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document has
a portrait or
landscape orientation.

Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the
colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase or
decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

Automatic Tone The printer

automatically adjusts
the Darkness,
Contrast, and
Background Cleanup
settings to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

674 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.

Optimize Text/Picture

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to

remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
right edge to clean.

Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to

automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.

Automatically
Straighten

Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the

scanning process if it
Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.

Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to

scan pages into
Enabled separate files based
on a specified page
limit.

A page is one side of

an original document.

JPEG and TIFF have a

limit of one page per
file.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 675

 Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns

off this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.

Notify only if job fails:

Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.

Print: Select to print

the notification at this
printer.

E-mail: Select to
receive the
notification to an
email account.

Include Thumbnail Select Include

Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of the
job in your
notification.

Notification Email E-mail: Select to

receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the text
box following Email
Address, and then
type the email
address for the
notification.

Scan to USB Drive Destination

Job Name

Options File Type and

Resolution

676 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the original
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or

disable color
Color scanning.

Black/Gray Automatically detect:

Automatically scans
Black documents in color if
at least one page has
color.

Color: Scans
documents in color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.

Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.

Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document has
a portrait or
landscape orientation.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 677

 Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the
colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase or
decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

Automatic Tone The printer

automatically adjusts
the Darkness,
Contrast, and
Background Cleanup
settings to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.

Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.

678 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the

output for a particular
Text type of content. You
can optimize the
Printed picture output for text,
printed pictures, or a
Photograph mixture.

Manually Adjust: Use

to manually optimize
the setting for text or
for pictures.

Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use

for line drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to

remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
right edge to clean.

Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to

automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.

Automatically
Straighten

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 679

 Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the

scanning process if it
Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.

Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to

scan pages into
Enabled separate files based
on a specified page
limit.

A page is one side of

an original document.

JPEG and TIFF have a

limit of one page per
file.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns

off this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.

Notify only if job fails:

Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.

Print: Select to print

the notification at this
printer.

E-mail: Select to
receive the
notification to an
email account.

Include Thumbnail Select Include

Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of the
job in your
notification.

680 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Email E-mail: Select to

receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the text
box following Email
Address, and then
type the email
address for the
notification.

Scan to Job Storage Folder

Job Name

Scan to SharePoint

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 681

 Fax menu (fax models only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Dialing Prefix

Fax Recipients

Quick Sets and Defaults

Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the layout

for each side of the original
2-sided document. First select
whether the original
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate whether
the original has portrait or
landscape orientation. If it
is printed on both sides,
also select the 2-sided
format that matches the
original document.

Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi)* Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution,
faxes might be clearer but
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) they could transmit more
slowly. Some file types, for
example a file that will be
processed with OCR,
require a specific
resolution. When these file
types are selected, the
Resolution setting might be
automatically changed to a
valid value.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes Use to describe the page
that the printer supports. size of the original
document.

Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of the
original document is placed
on the page.

Portrait: This setting

means the short edge of
the page is along the top.

Landscape: This setting

means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

682 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall

quality of the copy.

Adjust the Darkness setting

to increase or decrease the
amount of white and black
in the colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest color
on the page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic Tone The printer automatically

adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the
most appropriate for the
scanned document.

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 683

 Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the
output for text, printed
Printed picture pictures, or a mixture.

Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to optimize the

text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.

Printed picture: Use for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.

Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.

Blank Page Suppression Disabled* Prevents blank pages in the

original document from
Enabled being included in the
output document.

Multi-feed Detection Disabled Use this feature to prevent

multiple pages being fed
Enabled* through the document
feeder during document
scans.

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive notification

about the status of a sent
Notify when job completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive
notification for this job
only.

Notify only if job fails:

Select to receive
notification only if the job is
not sent successfully.

Print Print: Select to print the

notification at this printer.
E-mail
E-mail: Select to receive
the notification in an email.
Touch the text box
following Email Address,
and then enter the email
address for the notification.

684 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Include Thumbnail When sending an analog

fax, select Include
Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of the
first page of the fax in your
notification.

Notification E-mail address Provide the email address

that will receive
notifications.

2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure the

default style for 2-sided
Flip-style print jobs. If the Book-style
option is selected, the back
side of the page is printed
the right way up. This
option is for print jobs that
are bound along the left
edge. If the Flip-style
option is selected, the back
side of the page is printed
upside-down. This option is
for print jobs that are
bound along the top edge.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 685

 Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-13 Print Options menu

First level Second level Values Description

Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the printer.

Stored Faxes

Print from USB Drive Stored Job to Print Choose file to print on USB drive. Print a job stored on a USB drive.

Fax Polling Fax Polling Number

686 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-14 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Supplies Summary

Black Cartridge Status

Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part

Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed

Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining

Toner Collection Unit Status

Transfer Kit Order HP Part

Fuser Kit

Document Feeder Kit

Stapler 1

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 687

 Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-15 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list of Choose the paper size for the tray
supported sizes.
Tray 2–x

Type Select paper type from a list of Choose the paper type for the tray.
supported types.

688 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Troubleshooting
menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-16 Troubleshooting

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Configuration/ ● Settings Menu Select the

Status Pages Map configuration/
Status reports to
● Current review, and then
Settings Page touch the Print or
View button.
● Configuration
Page

● How to
Connect Page

● Supplies
Status Page

● sage Page

● File Directory
Page

● Web Services
Status Page

● Color Usage
Job Log

Reports

Other Pages ● Demonstratio

n Page

● RGB Samples

● CMYK Samples

● PCL Font List

● PS Font List

Event Log Print Prints the 50 most

recent events in the
Event Log. For each
event, the printed
log shows the error
number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.

Paper Path Page View Shows how many

pages were printed
Print from each tray.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 689

 Table 5-16 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax (Fax is optional) Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print or
configure the fax T.
30 trace report. T.30
is the standard that
specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and error
correction between
fax machines.

When to Print Never automatically Configure the T.30

Report print* report to print after
certain events. You
Print after every fax can choose to print
the report after
Print only after fax every fax job, every
send jobs fax job sent, every
fax job received,
Print after any fax every send error, or
error every receive error.

Print only after fax

send errors

Print only after fax

receive errors

Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable V.34

modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred or if
phone line
conditions require
it.

Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician

to evaluate and
Diagnostic diagnose fax issues
by listening to the
sounds of fax
modulations

Fax Log Entries On The standard fax

log includes basic
Off* information such as
the time and
whether the fax was
successful. The
detailed fax log
shows the
intermediate results
of the redial process
not shown in the
standard fax log.

Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you
resolve problems
with print quality.

Diagnostic Tests

Continuous Scan 2-sided

690 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-16 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Run Fax Test Start Use this menu to

perform a test on
specific
components within
the product to
determine whether
the components are
functioning
correctly.

Retrieve Diagnostic Insert a US drive Create files that

Data into the USB port. contain information
The exported data about the product
might contain that can help
personally identify the cause
identifiable of problems.
information.

Generate Debug Start

Data

Maintenance menu

Backup/Restore menu

To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the
Backup/Restore menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-17 Backup/Restore menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time

Days Between Backups Enter the number of days

Backup Now

Export Last Backup

Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/
Cleaning menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 691

 Table 5-18 Calibrate/Cleaning menu
First level Second level Values Description

Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning page

that was created by using the
Create Cleaning Page menu. The
process takes up to 1.5 minutes.

Color Calibrations (color models) Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use
this feature to perform a partial
calibration. Use this calibration if
color density or tone seems
incorrect.

Before calibrating the product,

make sure that the Ready indicator
displays on the control-panel
display. If a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that job is
complete.

692 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Table 5-18 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use
this feature to perform a full
calibration, which can take up to
three minutes. Use this calibration
if the color layers seem to be
shifted on the page.

Before calibrating the product,

make sure that the Ready indicator
displays on the control-panel
display. If a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that job is
complete.

Delay Calibration at Wake/Power No Delay Controls the timing of power-on

On calibration when the product
Delay 15 minutes wakes up or is turned on.

Wake: Select if you are not using

the feature and want to print jobs
immediately when the product
wakes up or is turned on, before
calibration begins.

No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up or is
turned on. The product will not
print any jobs until it finishes
calibrating.

Yes: Enables the product that is

asleep to accept print jobs before it
calibrates. It might start calibrating
before it has printed all the jobs it
has received. This option allows
quicker printing when coming out
of sleep mode or when you turn
the product on, but print quality
might be reduced.

NOTE: For the best results, allow

the product to calibrate before
printing. Print jobs performed
before calibration might not be of
the highest quality.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 693

 USB Firmware Upgrade menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware
Upgrade menu.

Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

694 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Clear paper jams
Clear paper jams in the document feeder
When an original becomes jammed while passing through the automatic document feeder (ADF) or flow ADF,
an error message displays on the control panel.

1. Remove any remaining paper from the ADF.

2. Open the ADF cover.

Figure 5-29 Open the ADF cover

ENWW Clear paper jams 695

 3. Gently remove any jammed paper from the ADF.

Figure 5-30 Remove jam from ADF

4. Open the input tray.

Figure 5-31 Open input tray

696 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 5. Pull any jammed paper gently out of the ADF.

Figure 5-32 Remove jam from ADF

6. Close the ADF cover and the ADF input tray.

ENWW Clear paper jams 697

 7. Open the ADF.

Figure 5-33 Open ADF

698 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 8. Grasp the jammed paper and remove it from the feed area by pulling it with both hands.

Figure 5-34 Remove jam from the feed area

9. Close the ADF.

Clear paper jams in Tray 1

When a paper jam occurs, an error message displays on the control panel.

▲ If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.

ENWW Clear paper jams 699

 Figure 5-35 Remove paper

Clear paper jams in Trays 2 or 3

When a paper jam occurs, an error message displays on the control panel

CAUTION: The fuser area is hot. Use caution when removing paper from the printer.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-36 Open right door

700 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 2. Remove any jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.

Figure 5-37 Remove jam

NOTE: To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. The following steps
describe how to clear the jam.

ENWW Clear paper jams 701

 3. Open Tray 2 or 3 and remove any jammed paper from the printer.

Figure 5-38 Remove jam

4. Insert Tray 2 or 3 back into the machine until it is firmly seated. Printing automatically resumes.

Clear paper jams in Trays 4 or 5

When a paper jam occurs, an error message displays on the control panel

1. Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder.

702 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Figure 5-39 Open bottom right door

2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.

Figure 5-40 Remove jam

Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door.

ENWW Clear paper jams 703

 3. Open Tray 4 or 5, and then remove any jammed paper from the printer.

4. Insert Tray 4 or 5 back into the machine until it is firmly seated. Printing automatically resumes.

Clear paper jams in the fuser area

When a paper jam occurs, an error message displays on the control panel

CAUTION: The fuser area is hot. Use caution when removing paper from the machine.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 5-41 Open right door

704 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.

Figure 5-42 Remove jam

3. Close the right door.

Clear paper jams in an output bins

When a paper jam occurs, an error message displays on the control panel

1. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.

Figure 5-43 Remove paper

ENWW Clear paper jams 705

 2. Open and close the front door. Printing automatically resumes.

If the paper jam persists, make sure the bin full sensor is unfolded. The bin full sensor is located in the
output tray.

Figure 5-44 Bin full sensor

706 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Service mode (tech mode)
● Entering service mode

● Service mode menu tree

● Information tab

● Maintenance Counts tab

● Diagnostics tab

● Service Functions tab

Entering service mode

1. From the control panel, select Support Tools, and then select Service.

2. Enter the Service PIN ID.

● 04072517

3. Select Service Tools.

Service mode menu tree

The tables below provide descriptions of the menus within the printer service mode.

Table 5-19 Service mode Information tab

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Information General Engine Board Serial Number

Supply Status Customer Replacement Unit Toner CMYK

Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (Drum) CMYK

Development Unit

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 707

 Table 5-19 Service mode Information tab (continued)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Toner Collection Unit

Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)

Fuser

Tray X Rollers

ADF Pickup Roller

ADF Separation Roller

Software Version System FW Version

Main FW Version

Engine FW Version

Boot ROM Version

File System Version

ADF FW Version

Scanner Version

Finisher Version

Scanner Version

Scan Control Version

Tray 2–5 Version

Fuser Version

Transfer Version

Toner Version

Print CMS Version

Copy CMS Version

Scan CMS Version

Print Reports Print Supplies Information

Report

Usage Counter

Error Information

Fax Protocol Dump (Line 1)

Fax Protocol Dump (Line 2)

Fax Diagnostics (Line 1)

Fax Diagnostics (Line 2)

Auto Color Registration

Job Duty

708 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-19 Service mode Information tab (continued)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Auto Toning History

Full Auto Color Registration

ID Calibration History

Maintenance

Toner Event

Export Reports RTF Format

XML Format

PDF Format

Table 5-20 Service mode Maintenance Counts tab

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Maintenance Counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge CMYK

Imaging Unit (Drum) CMYK

Development Unit (Developer)

CMYK

Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)

ITB Cleaner

Transfer Roller/T2 Roller

Fuser

Tray X Rollers

Filter

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 709

 Table 5-20 Service mode Maintenance Counts tab (continued)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

ADF Pickup Roller

ADF Separation Roller

Table 5-21 Service mode Diagnostics tab

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine NVM Initialization

Engine NVM Read/Write

Engine Test Routines

Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write

Fax Test Routines

Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report

Print Last Shade Report

Shade and Print Report

(ADF)

Print Last Shade Report

(ADF)

Scanner/ADF NVM Read/

Write

Scanner/ADF Test
Routines

Adjustment Print Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Image Position

Print Test Patterns

710 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-21 Service mode Diagnostics tab (continued)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Copy Adjustment Image Position

Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

ACS ACS Page Adjustment

Image Management Auto Tone Adjustment Normal

Activation
Full

Auto Tone Adjustment Normal

Full

Print Test Patterns Skew Pattern

Table 5-22 Service functions

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Service Functions Debug Log Info

Job Status

TR Control Mode T2 Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/Paper

Direction/T2 PWM

Vertical Streak Correction

Drain Off

On

Low Temperature Idling Mode

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 711

 Table 5-22 Service functions (continued)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Capture Log All

Period Start Date/End Date

IP Setting IP address (manual entry)

Subnet Mask (manual entry)

Default Gateway (manual

entry)

Footer

FW Upgrade

File Dump Mode Enable Dump Generate RGBa

Generate Raw File

Generate CMYK

No Print Mode

Debugging Mode

Max Output file No 10

Enable

Retrieve Dump Image Safely Remove USB

Retrieve Dump Image

Delete Dump Image Delete Dump Image

Disable Dump Disable

Copy Original Thickness Thin (42-60 g/m2)

Normal*

Thick (163-220 g/m2)

Scan Original Thickness Thin (42-60 g/m2)

Normal*

Thick (163-220 g/m2)

Altitude Adjustment Normal (~1,000 m/3,280 ft)*

High 1 (~2,000 m/6562 ft)

High 2 (~3000 m/9842 ft)

High 3 (~4000 m/13123 ft)

High 4 (~5000 m/16404 ft)

Humidity Normal*

High 1

High 2

High 3

712 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-22 Service functions (continued)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Vapor Mode

Booklet Sub Tray

Event Logging

Information tab
This section provides detailed information about the service mode Information tab.

General

Information > General

This menu displays the following information:

● Machine serial number

Supply Status
Customer Replacement Unit (CRU)

Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list
to check the information of the selected unit. This menu allows users to reset the counter if new supply
has been replaced and a reset is required.

Field Replacement Unit (FRU))

Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit. This menu allows users to reset a counter if a supply has
been replaced, if a reset is required.

In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, and Count. Some items have the Maximum Life
option.

● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.

◦ OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.

◦ Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.

◦ OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.

● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.

● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.

The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.

Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the unit.

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 713

 Software Version

Information > Software Version

● This menu allow the user to see firmware and software versions across the entire printer.

Fault Log

Information > Fault Log

● This menu displays faults that have occurred while the system was operating.

Pressing the Clear button will clear all the saved fault logs.

Print Reports

Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to print:

● Supplies Information

● Auto Toning History

Auto Toning History

Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History

● NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.

This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color consistency
against changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the
history report is to check if the TRC control is working normally.

● If the TRC control performs normally, “Pass” count must be a non-zero value and “Fail” count must be
zero.

● If “Fail” count is not zero, check the image density sensor.

Maintenance Counts tab

This section provides detailed information about the service mode Maintenance Counts tab.

Fault Count

Maintenance Counts > Fault Count

● This menu displays fault counts. The technician can select one fault group and press OK to see detailed
fault descriptions. The detailed fault description window displays engine diagnostic codes, descriptions
of the fault, and the number of occurrences.

The following table shows the fault groups defined for the system:

A1 Motor H2 Output (Bins) System S3 Scan System

A2 Fan M1 Input (Trays) System S5 UI System

714 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 A3 Sensor M2 Media Path System S6 Network System

C1 Toner Cartridge Unit M3 Output (Bins) System S7 HDD System

C3 Imaging Unit M4 ADF System U1 Fusing Unit

C7 Fusing Unit S1 Video System U2 Laser Scanner Assembly Unit

H1 Input (Trays) System S2 Engine System

Part Replacement Count

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and press
“OK” to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.

The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:

Unit Item Sensing Method

Toner Cartridge Toner (Black) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (Black) Auto Sensing

Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing

Transfer Roller Transfer roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear

Tray 3 Roller Count Clear

Tray 4 Roller Count Clear

Tray 5 Roller Count Clear

ADF Roller ADF Pickup Roller Count Clear

ADF Separation Roller

Filter Ozone filter

Diagnostics tab
This section provides detailed information about the service mode Diagnostics tab.

Engine Diagnostics

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization

● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 715

 Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write
●
Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware

Operation Procedure When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list
of codes with descriptions and saved values.

Users can also input a code through the text box to find a configuration value directly.

After selecting one value, press the “Edit” button to open an interface for user input.

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

109-0200 StandBy Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0201 StandBy Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0205 Warmup Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0255 Thin Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0256 Thin Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0265 Plain Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0266 Plain Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0275 Heavy Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0276 Heavy Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0280 Extra Heavy Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0281 Extra Heavy Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0300 Envelopes Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0301 Envelopes Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0305 Labels Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0306 Labels Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0310 Thick Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0311 Thick Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0315 Recycled Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0316 Recycled Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0320 Special Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0321 Special Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0325 1200 dpi_thin Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0326 1200 dpi_thin Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0330 1200 dpi_plain Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0331 1200 dpi_plain Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0335 1200 dpi_thick Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0336 1200 dpi_thick Side Temperature offset 10 10

111–0030 Toner Vcon Black Toner Vcon Black 100/100 100/100

716 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Engine Test Routines
● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines

Purpose To perform test routines for the engine

Operation Procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through
the list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can directly input an EDC
code through the text box to search for a routine. A maximum of three routines can
be selected at the same time.

After selecting one or more routines, select OK to open the test window. The
selected routines will display and users can start/start the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Code Display Meaning

100–0000 Main BLDC Motor Main BLDC Motor is On/Off

100–0001 Main BLDC Motor Slow Main BLDC Motor Slow On/Off

100-0010 Main BLDC Motor Ready Detects if Main BLDC Motor is running at normal
speed

100-0044 OPC Motor K Black OPC BLDC Motor is On/Off

100-0049 K OPC Motor Ready Detects if Black OPC BLDC Motor is running at
normal speed

100-0076 Ozone Suction Fan Run Start/Stop Ozone Suction Fan run

100-0077 Ozone Suction Fan Ready Detects if Ozone Suction Fan is running at normal
speed.

100-0120 Exit Motor Forward Fast Exit Motor Forward Fast On/Off

100-0130 Exit Motor Forward Slow Exit Motor Forward Slow On/Off

100-0140 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex Motor Forward On/Off

100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex Motor Forward Slow On/Off

100-0160 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/Stop Duplex Fan 1 run

100-0180 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if Duplex Fan 1 is running at normal
speed

100-0200 T1 Elevating Motor T1 Elevate Motor On/Off

100-0210 T2 Elevating Motor T2 Elevate Motor On/Off (Optional)

100-0220 T3 Elevating Motor T3 Elevate Motor On/Off (Optional)

100-0230 T4 Elevating Motor T4 Elevate Motor On/Off (Optional)

100-0241 Waste Toner LED Waste Toner LED On/Off

100-0250 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detects if the waste toner is full or not

100-0260 LVPS Fan Run Start/Stop LVPS Fan run

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 717

 Code Display Meaning

100-0270 LVPS Fan Run Ready Detects if LVPS Fan is running at normal speed

100-0340 Feed Motor Feed Motor is On/Off

100-0370 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 Motor is On/Off

100-0371 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 Motor Slow On/Off

100-0380 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Tray 3 Motor is On/Off

100-0381 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 3 Motor Slow On/Off

100-0390 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Tray 4 Motor is On/Off

100-0391 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 4 Motor Slow On/Off

100-0400 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Tray 5 Motor is On/Off

100-0401 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 5 Motor Slow On/Off

100-0430 Exit 2 Motor Forward Exit 2 Motor is On/Off

100-0431 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slow Exit 2 Motor Slow On/Off

100-0440 Exit 2 Motor Backward Exit 2 Motor is On/Off

100-0441 Exit 2 Motor Backward Slow Exit 2 Motor Slow Backward On/Off

100-0470 Dual Cassette Feeder Feed Motor Dual Cassette Feeder Feed Motor is On/Off

100-0480 Duct Motor Duct Motor On/Off

100-0481 Duct Motor Sensor Duct Motor Rib Sensing

101-0050 Registration Clutch Engages drive to registration roller

101-0121 T1 Feed Motor Slow T1 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0131 T2 Feed Motor Slow T2 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0141 T3 Feed Motor Slow T3 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0151 T4 Feed Motor Slow T4 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0110 T4 Feed Clutch T4 Feed Clutch On/Off

101-0140 T3 Feed Motor T3 Feed Motor On/Off

101-0150 T4 Feed Motor T4 Feed Motor On/Off

101-0190 Out bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at Out bin Full Sensor

101-0191 Out-bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at Out-bin 2 Full Sensor

101-0270 MP Clutch MP Clutch On/Off

101-0271 MP Solenoid MP Solenoid On/Off

101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Return Gate Solenoid On/Off

102-0000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed

102-0010 T1 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2

102-0041 T1 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 2 size.

102-0050 T1 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the

sensor

718 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Code Display Meaning

102-0070 Tray 3 Home Position Detects when Tray 3 is closed

102-0080 T2 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 3

102-0111 T2 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 3 size.

102-0120 T2 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 3 is elevated to the

sensor

102-0140 Tray 4 Home Position Detects when Tray 4 is closed

102-0150 T3 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4

102-0181 T3 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray3 size.

102-0190 T3 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 4 is elevated to the

sensor

102-0210 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed.

102-0220 T4 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 5

102-0251 T4 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 5 size

102-0260 T4 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 5 is elevated to the

sensor

102-0280 Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray (MP Tray)

102-0290 Feed Sensor Detects when paper is at the Feed sensor

102-0300 T2 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at T2 Feed sensor
(Optional)

102-0320 T3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at T3 Feed sensor
(Optional)

102-0340 T4 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at T4 Feed sensor
(Optional)

102-0360 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the Registration sensor

102-0361 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the Fuser Out sensor.

102-0371 Exit 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at Exit 2 sensor.

102-0380 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at Duplex Jam 1 sensor.

102-0435 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover

102-0436 Side Cover Sensor Detects status of side cover

104-0000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed

109-0030 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser Motor Forward On/Off

109-0031 Fuser Motor Backward Fuser Motor Backward On/Off

109-0034 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if Fuser Motor runs at each speed

109-0140 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located Home
position

110-0000 Laser Scanner Assembly Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if Laser Scanner Assembly motor 1 runs
at normal speed

110-0060 Laser Scanner Assembly Motor 1 Run Laser Scanner Assembly Motor 1 On/Off

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 719

 Code Display Meaning

110-0170 Laser Scanner Assembly HSync 4 Detects Laser Scanner Assembly HSync 4 (black)

111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner Dispense (Supply) Motor On/Off

111-0070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank

113-0350 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detects when paper is at Entrance Sensor

113-0360 Finisher Exit Sensor Detects when paper is at Exit Sensor

113-0370 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detects Paddle Home position

113-0380 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detects Lift Tamper Home position

113-0390 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detects Right Tamper Home position

113-0410 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detects if Stapler Door Cover is closed

113-0420 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detects if Jam Door Cover is closed

113-0430 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detects Stapler Home position

113-0440 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detects Stapler level

113-0450 Finisher Stapler Self-priming Sensor Detects Stapler Self-priming Sensor

113-0460 Finisher Ejector Home Sensor Detects Ejector Home position

113-0470 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detects Main Tray Home position

113-0480 Finisher Stacker Height sensor Detects Stacker Height sensor

113-0490 Finisher Letter Size Sensor Detects Paper Size

113-0500 Finisher Transport Motor Finisher Transport Motor On/Off

113-0510 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher Paddle Motor On/Off

113-0520 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher Left Tamper Motor On/Off

113-0530 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher Right Tamper Motor On/Off

113-0540 Finisher Media Height Solenoid Finisher Media Height Solenoid On/Off

113-0550 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher Staple Unit Motor On/Off

113-0560 Finisher Ejector Motor Finisher Ejector Motor On/Off

113-0570 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher Main Tray Motor On/Off

113-0580 Finisher SCU Solenoid Finisher SCU Solenoid On/Off

113-0590 Finisher Safety Cover Solenoid Finisher Safety Cover Solenoid On/Off

Scanner Diagnostics

Shading Test
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test

720 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Purpose ● To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical
devices such as the lens, mirror, or lamp.

● Check the quality problem as shown below:

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 721

 Operation Procedure For Image Scanner Unit

Press “Shade and Print report” to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green, and
blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading value is
needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.

For ADF (Flow ADF) unit

1. Load the shading sheet on the Flow ADF tray.

2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:

Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (ADF)

Press “Print Last Shade Report (ADF)” for the previous shading value report.

3. Check if the printed results are correct.

NOTE:

● When executing Flow ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).

● A Shading Test for the ADF Unit must be completed after replacing the Flow ADF unit or main
board.

Verification

Scanner/ADF NVM Read/Write

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/ADF NVM Read/Write

722 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and ADF memory.

Operation Procedure When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the
list of codes with descriptions and saved values. Users can also directly input a code
through the text box to search for an NVM.

After selecting a code, the “Edit” button will be enabled only if the code is writable.

If the selected code is writable and the “Edit” button is enabled, press the button to
configure the desired value for the code.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Code NVM Description Default Flow ADF ADF

05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O O

05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O O

05-0030 Simplex Registration Value (Regi 1) 0 O O

05-0040 Duplex Registration Value (Regi 2) 0 X O

05-0050 Width Guide Max Value Depends on ADF O O

05-0060 Width Guide Min Value Depends on ADF O O

Scanner/ADF Test Routines

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/ADF Test Routines

Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and ADF.

Operation Procedure When the main Scanner/ADF Test Routines window displays, users can navigation
through the list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can input a code
through the text box to search for a routine.

After selecting a routine, press “OK” to open the test window that lists the selected
routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference Table below

Code Name Value Flow ADF ADF

06-0000 Scanner Original Size High/Low O O

Detecting Sensor 1

06-0001 Scanner Original Size High/Low O O

Detecting Sensor 2

06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O O

Close Sensor 1

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 723

 Code Name Value Flow ADF ADF

06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O O

Close Sensor 2

06-0020 Scanner Image Scanner Start/Stop O O

Motor Forward

06-0030 Scanner Image Scanner Start/Stop O O

Motor Backward

06-0040 Scanner Image Scanner High/Low O O

Home Position Sensor

05-0000 Document Length .1 High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0001 Document Length .2 High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0020 Document Cover Open High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0040 Document Detect High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O O

Registration Sensor

05-0061 Document Duplex High/Low X O

Registration Sensor

05-0070 Document Scan Read High/Low O O

Sensor1

05-0071 Document Scan Read High/Low O X

Sensor2

05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low O O

05-0110 Document Motor Start/Stop O O

Forward

05-0111 Document Motor Start/Stop O O

Backward

05-0140 Document Pickup High/Low O O

Roller Detect Sensor

05-0160 Document Registration Start/Stop O X

1 Motor Forward

05-0162 Document Registration Start/Stop O X

1 Motor Backward

05-0190 Document Width Guide 10Bit (0~1023) O O

ADC Sensor

05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Start/Stop O O

Speed Simplex

05-0230 Document Jig Test High Start/Stop O O

Speed Simplex

724 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Adjustment

Print Adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose To calibrate/adjust the lengths of vertical and horizontal images and image position
automatically in the print engine.

Operation Procedure 1. Press the “Paper Supply” button and select a tray.

2. Press the “Paper Size” button and select a paper size.

3. Press the “Print” button. A test pattern prints.

4. Place the printed pattern on image scanner.

● The words “front side” on the chart face the glass

● The arrows face the left edge of the image scanner

● Press “Scan 1”

5. Press the “OK” button. The scan begins automatically.

6. Place the printed pattern on image scanner.

● The words “back side” on the chart face the glass

● The arrows face the left edge of the image scanner

● Press “Scan 2”

7. Press the “OK” button. The scan begins automatically.

8. The system will automatically calculate the proper value based on the result of
scanning the test pattern.

9. The new values are saved to the system.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the printed image on the paper in the print engine.

Operation Procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.

2. Change the adjustment value using the “+” or “-” buttons, then press the “OK”
button to save the changes.

● Simplex Leading Edge

● Simplex Side Edge

● Duplex Leading Edge

● Duplex Side Edge

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 725

 NOTE:

● Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray 2, 2, 3, 4, and MP).

● Do not choose “ALL” for the tray selection.

● Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image is adjusted. If not, repeat step
2.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Test Patterns

This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.

Copy Adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the copy engine.

Operation Procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:

● Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same as the
values of the print adjustment.

● Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose “All” for tray selection, as
this can confuse the adjustment.

NOTE:

● Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 2, 2, 3, 4, and MP).

● Do not choose “All” for tray selection.

● Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.

1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass.

2. Change the adjustment value using the “+” or “-” button, and then press “OK”
to save the changes.

● Simplex Leading Edge

● Simplex Side Edge

● Duplex Leading Edge

● Duplex Side Edge

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. It not, repeat step
2.

Scan Area Adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

726 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Note that the “Lead Edge” arrows point to the left side of the scanner glass and are placed
face down. The Scanner A/S Chart comes in two sizes, A4 and Letter.

2. Press “OK”. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper value
based on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the scanner
glass.

5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart to
the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” from the chart to the scanned
image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation Procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 727

 ● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: —6/+6)

● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: —6/+6)

● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the “Edit” button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification,
press “+”, otherwise press “-”.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press
“-”, otherwise, press “+”.

6. Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned
from the scanner glass.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b)
from the chart to the scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

ADF Adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the Flow
ADF/ADF automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

728 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 2. Press “OK”. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the
proper value based on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned
from the Flow ADF/ADF.

5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b)
from the chart to the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

NOTE: After executing the ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to
“Scanner Diagnostics”.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation Procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 729

 ● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: —6/+6)

● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: —6/+6)

● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the “Edit” button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification,
press “+”, otherwise press “-”.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press
“-”, otherwise, press “+”.

6. Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned
from the Flow ADF/ADF.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b)
from the chart to the scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

NOTE: After executing the ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to
“Scanner Diagnostics”.

Auto Color Sensing (ACS)

● Diagnostics > ACS

Purpose To set the color coverage ratio of auto color mode in the copy function.

● Color Coverage Ratio: The ratio of color contents in the original document.

Operation Procedure Change the level from 1 to 5.

● Classifies a document as color, if color coverage of the document is higher than

a predefined level.

● Level 1 has a higher probability of classifying documents to color, while level 5

has lower probability.

Verification Copy the “mono copied” original with auto color mode and check if the print out is
monochrome.

Specification Color coverage

● Level 1: 0.01%

● Level 2: 0.05%.

● Level 3: 0.1%

● Level 4: 0.25%

● Level 5: 0.5%

730 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Image Management

Auto Tone Adjustment Activation

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal

Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is
recommended after changing a unit, such as a toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB,
or after restarting the printer.

Operation Procedure 1. Select “On” or “Off” for Normal TRC Control execution.

● Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.

● On: Normal TRC Control will execute during the determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.

● Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC Control based on the count
of printed pages since the last execution.

● Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal TRC Control when the
system returns from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the
configured value.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full

Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced, the life of the OPC drum is
changed, the density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or humidity in the
room changes suddenly.

Operation Procedure 1. Select “On” or “Off” for Full TRC Control execution.

● Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.

● On: Full TRC Control will execute during the determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC Control.

● Page Count: The system executes Full TRC Control based on the count of
printed pages since the last execution.

● Time Left Alone: The system executes Full TRC Control when the system
returns from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the
configured value.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.

Auto Tone Adjustment

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Normal

Purpose To correct image quality when image density is poor. Normal TRC Control is
recommended after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB,
or after restarting the printer.

Operation Procedure Select “OK” to execute Normal TRC.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 731

 Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is changed, the life of the OPC drum is
changed, the image density is poor, or the temperature and/or humidity in the room
changes suddenly.

Operation Procedure Select “OK” to execute Full TRC.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > CTD Sensor Cleaning

Purpose To solve the “CTD Sensor Failure” error.

Operation Procedure After cleaning the CTD/CPR sensor, execute this menu.

Print Test Patterns

Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns > Skew Pattern

● The skew pattern stored in the machine will be printed out as the selected size.

Service Functions tab

This section provides detailed information about the service mode Service Functions tab.

Main Memory Clear

Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can be
used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User configured
values return to the default values.

To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the
printer.

Debug Log

Service Functions > Debug Log

● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:

◦ Off: This option disables the logging option.

◦ Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.

◦ Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This option
might effect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the system
performs abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.

Capture Log

Service Functions > Capture Log

● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the
system log could reach up to 1GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time to
copy to the USB flash drive.

732 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.

2. Tap the Service Mode app.

3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to “DETAILS”.

4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.

5. Select “All” or “Period”. If selecting “Period”, enter the start and end date.

6. Press the Capture Log button.

7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to “JOB
STATUS”.

NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash drive.

8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.

TR Control Mode

Service Functions > TR Control Mode

●
Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer value to
optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.

Operation Procedure ● T2 Control Mode

● Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.

● Adjust PWM value based on the problem type.

● Blur: Increase PWM value

● Poor Transfer: Increase PWM value

● Re-transfer: Decrease PWM value

● White Spot: Decrease PWM value

● OPC Cylic Ghost: Decrease PWM value

Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 733

 Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Part Replacement Alert

Service Functions > Part Replacement Alert

● This function enables/disables the alert message of the consumable’s life time.

◦ ON: Alert message on (Level: Low, Empty, Exhaust, Worn)

◦ OFF: Alert message off

Envelope Rotate

Service Functions > Envelope Rotate

● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded envelopes
with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF direction and the
machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.

This function provides the following setting options:

◦ Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction

◦ 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.

◦ 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.

NOTE: If the paper source is “Auto”, the device will feed from the MP Tray because the LEF envelope
can only be loaded in the MP Tray according to paper specification.

If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the customer width, the device will not rotate the
image and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model supports
custom sizes like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL Env
(110x220), No 9 Env (98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.

Drain

Service Functions > Drain

● This menu recovers toner density. The printer prints grayed images after operating over 500 low
coverage images. This menu supports 10 level.

This function provides the following setting options:

734 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 ◦ Off (default)

◦ On

◦ Yellow [1~10]

◦ Cyan [1~10]

◦ Magenta [1~10]

◦ Black [1~10]

ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 735

 Print quality troubleshooting guide
Image quality problems and solutions (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535)
Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external
software applications, and environmental conditions.

To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.

First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that has
been acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.

Figure 5-45 A/S chart (A3)

736 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Figure 5-46 A/S chart

[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and magnification

[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error

[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the barcode

[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions, etc.

[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K 50%)

[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution

[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction

[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction

[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and uniformity

[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of 7 colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/

10~100%)

[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of color, mono text

[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of small text

[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to mono white gap

[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit: cm)

[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit: inch)

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 737

 How to analyze image defects

See the following flowchart.

TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the remaining life
of the part.

Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.

Figure 5-47 Defect analysis flowchart

738 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Vertical black lines
Figure 5-48 Typical faulty images

Table 5-23 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Check the OPC for scratches or contamination in a vertical Replace the Drum unit.
direction.

2 Check the Charge Scorotron in the Developer unit for Clean the Scorotron with the Cleaning bar.
contamination.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 739

 Table 5-23 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

3 Check the Charge Scorotron for defects. Replace the Drum unit.

4 Scanner unit is contaminated (ADF glass/mirror/CCD sensor) Wipe the surface of the contaminated parts with a soft
cloth.

Vertical light or white lines

Figure 5-49 Typical faulty images

740 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-24 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Check item Action

1 A foreign substance is between the DR and the Blade. Remove the foreign substance.

No toner on DR.

2 The Developer is empty. Replace the Developer Unit.

● Check the remaining toner.

● Make sure that the toner layer is uniform on the

Magnetic Roller.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 741

 Table 5-24 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.

(Foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly

window.)

4 The OPC is scratched or contaminated in a vertical direction. Replace the Drum unit.

Horizontal periodic black lines, dots

Figure 5-50 Typical faulty images

742 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-25 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Poor connection between the CR terminal and Set. Wipe clean the surface of the contaminated CR terminal.

2 Poor charge voltage of HVPS (MHV) Check the connection between the MHV terminal and the
connector.

Replace the HVPS.

Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots

Figure 5-51 Typical faulty images

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 743

 Table 5-26 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Horizontal periodic bands (OPC, 94.2 mm) This problem is likely to resolve itself over time.

● OPC was exposed for too long. If the problem persists, replace the Drum unit.

● Damage was caused by a high voltage in a short

amount of time.

2 Poor charge voltage of HVPS (MHV) Replace Developer unit.

Blurred image
Figure 5-52 Typical faulty images

Table 5-27 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, high quality paper.

744 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-27 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Cause Action

2 THV transfer voltage is low. Increase the THV transfer voltage.

3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between THV high voltage
terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.

Check if the connection between the HVPS and TR is

correct.

Foggy image
Figure 5-53 Typical faulty images

Table 5-28 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Voltage of OPC is abnormally low. Replace the Drum unit.

2 Toner is over supplied by abnormal TC sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.

3 T1 voltage is abnormally high. Check the HVPS connection.

● Connection of transfer rollers in THV and TR.

Replace HVPS.

4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace HVPS.

HVPS is damaged or broken.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 745

 Light image
Figure 5-54 Typical faulty images

Table 5-29 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 A poor transfer has occurred. Replace HVPS.

2 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS.

● Color density decreases.

3 TC Sensor operates abnormally. Replace toner cartridge.

Uneven pitch and jitter image

Figure 5-55 Typical faulty images

Table 5-30 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Remove foreign substance from the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.

● Toner cartridge gears

746 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Table 5-30 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Cause Action

● OPC unit gears.

Replace abnormal units.

● Toner cartridge

● Drum unit

● Main drive unit

2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled correctly. If
occurred. not, replace the screws.

Replace the laser scanner assembly.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 747

 Skewed image
Figure 5-56 Typical faulty images

Table 5-31 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Is the tray properly installed? Reinstall the tray correctly.

2 Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Remove some paper.

3 Are the paper guides properly set? Adjust the paper guides.

4 Is the surface of the pickup/reverse/feed roller dirty? Clean or replace the contaminated roller.

5 Is the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) installed properly? Reinstall the ITB unit.

6 Is the flow ADF installed and adjusted properly? Reinstall the flow ADF unit.

Adjust the flow ADF skew.

748 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Poor fusing performance
Figure 5-57 Typical faulty images

Table 5-32 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Check the paper type. Check that the paper type displayed on the control panel
is the same type of paper being used for the print job.
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed
varies.

● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed

● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed

● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half

Speed

2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.

3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure roller for Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.

4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor

● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally

● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally

Check the halogen lamp.

If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the Fuser

unit.

5 Check if the pressure control system operates properly. Check the pressure control system.

If the problem persists, replace the Fuser unit.

6 Paper is wrapped on the Heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.

If the problem persists, replace the Fuser unit.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 749

 Stain on the paper back side
Figure 5-58 Typical faulty images

Table 5-33 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Clean or replace the Transfer Roller Assembly.

2 Is the fuser belt or pressure roller dirty? Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.

3 Check the pressure roller surface for damage or Replace the fuser.
scratches.

Other Errors
Image problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535)

No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 Toner cartridge detection error

2 Paper edge contamination

Toner cartridge detection error

Symptom
● Toner cartridge is installed, but “Not Installed” message displays.

750 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Cause
● Toner cartridge is not properly installed.

● Toner cartridge CRUM harness is defective.

● CRUM PCA or CRUM Chip is defective.

● CRUM connection (modular connector) is defective.

● CRUM joint PCA is defective.

● Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PCA.

Troubleshooting
● Toner cartridge installation problem:

◦ Check if the toner cartridge is properly installed.

◦ If the cartridge comes out automatically, check the cartridge fixing hook.

◦ If the cartridge fixing hook is damaged, replace the cartridge cap or cartridge.

● CRUM harness problem:

◦ Make sure the CRUM harness is correctly connected.

Check the modular jack for damage or abnormal assembly.

◦ If the modular jack harness is defective, replace it with a new one.

If the modular jack has moved into the toner cartridge, remove it.

● CRUM PCA problem or CRUM data problem:

◦ Replace the toner cartridge.

● CRUM connection (modular connector) installation problem:

◦ Open the front cover. Remove the toner cartridge.

◦ Make sure that the CRUM connection (modular connector) is correctly installed.

◦ If the modular connector is not installed correctly, open the rear cover and reinstall.

● CRUM joint PCA problem:

◦ If the CRUM joint PCA, modular jack pin, or main board interface connector are damaged, replace
the PCA (see the previous step).

● Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM joint PCA,:

◦ Check the connection between the main board and the CRUM joint PCA. If the connection is bad,
replace the harness, the CRUM joint PCA,, or the main board.

Paper edge contamination

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 751

 Symptom
● Paper tail edge is contaminated by toner. Contamination positions correspond to paper guide rib
positions.

Figure 5-59 Paper edge contamination

Cause
● The paper guide rib can be contaminated by splattered toner from the Development unit after long term
use of the printer. The paper tail edge contamination cab occur when the paper edge touches the paper
guide rib.

Troubleshooting
● This problem can occur after long term use. (150,000 images or more)

● The service technician must clean the contaminated paper guide ribs when replacing the transfer roller
unit. Cleaning the contaminated paper guide ribs will prevent paper edge contamination.

Figure 5-60 Paper guide rib contamination

Fuser problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535)

No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 Acoustic noise in Fuser unit

Acoustic noise in Fuser unit

752 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 ● Symptom: Acoustic noise from the fuser assembly in the early stages of printing.

● Cause: Fuser gear is damaged.

Troubleshooting
▲ Replace the fuser unit.

Scanner and ADF problems (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535)

No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 How to resolve CCD lock due to spring-wire

2 Noise of ADF hinge/Crack of ADF hinge/ADF will not stay open

3 ADF paper jam (multi-feed)

4 Scanner Locked

5 How to adjust image distortion

6 Paper jam occurs due to registration ROLLER-IDLE of ADF

7 ADF is not recognized. An S3–3211 error occurs or copying must be

performed from the scanner glass.

8 During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occur.

How to resolve CCD lock because of spring wire

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 753

 Symptom
● The control panel displays a CCD Lock message when turning on the printer. The FR Carriage cannot
move on the rail.

Figure 5-61 CCD lock

Cause
● The printer is tilted more than 20 degrees.

● When completing a scan with the FR pushed.

Troubleshooting
● Open the top cover, showing the scanner glass.

754 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 ● Bend the spring as shown in the following image:

Figure 5-62 Bend FR carriage spring

Noise of ADF hinge/Crack of ADF/ADF does not stay open

Symptom
● A noise comes from the ADF hinges when it is opened or closed.

● The ADF hinge is cracked.

● When the ADF is opened to access the scanner glass, the unit should remain at a 50° angle (±10°). The
ADF does not remain open as expected.

Troubleshooting

1. Remove the ADF connector cover.

Figure 5-63 Remove ADF connector cover

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 755

 2. Remove the connector and one screw.

Figure 5-64 Remove connector and screw

3. Lift and remove the ADF unit.

Figure 5-65 Remove ADF unit

4. Remove four screws from the hinge unit. Remove and replace the hinge unit.

5. Reassemble the ADF.

ADF paper jam (multi-feed)

● Symptom: Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller causing a paper jam.

● Troubleshooting: When a registration out jam occurs during multi-feeding, the guide pickup must be
replaced. This also stabilizes the paper path.

NOTE: The friction pad must be replaced at the time that the guide pickup is replaced.

Replacement procedure

1. Open the ADF assembly cover.

756 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Figure 5-66 Open ADF assembly cover

2. Remove the ADF separation pad. Replace with a new separation pad.

3. Remove the guide pickup by pressing the side as shown below.

Figure 5-67 Remove guide pickup

4. Install the new guide pickup.

5. Update the firmware to the latest version.

Scanner locked/#U1–2115 error

● Symptom: Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller causing a paper jam.

● Cause: All 24V channels output voltage is off (24V output voltage is nearly 0V) and 5V channels output is
normal.

● Troubleshooting

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 757

 1. Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) whether or not 24V voltage occurs.

Figure 5-68 Check all 24V output channels

2. If 24V voltage does not occur, check the “24V on/off signal pin” on the main board.

Figure 5-69 Check 24V on/off signal pin

The voltage at “24V on/off signal pin” is 0V: Main board and signal is normal.

The voltage at signal pin 4~5.3V: Main board and signal is abnormal.

3. If the main board and signal is normal, and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check out parts
(such as the Fuser motor, scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the LVPS.

4. If the main board and signal is normal, and only 1–3 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the
harness from the abnormal 24V output channel(s) before replacing the LVPS.

5. If the main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the
harness, connector, and main board.

How to adjust image distortion

Symptom
● Image distortion occurs when paper is fed from the ADF.

758 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Troubleshooting

1. Loosen the four screws on the left hinge, and then loosen the four screws on the right hinge. Adjust the
ADF.

2. Perform a copy job from the ADF and check if image distortion occurs. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if there is
distortion.

3. If the problem is resolved, tighten the screws on the hinges.

Paper jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of ADF

Symptom
● Paper jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of ADF.

When a paper jam occurs during original document scanning, the registration sensor and spring tension
need to be checked. Otherwise, the Registration ROLLER-IDLE needs to be checked.

Cause
● A screw was tightened too much during ADF cover assembly. The cover presses the Registration
ROLLER-IDLE and it cannot rotate smoothly, causing a paper jam.

Troubleshooting

1. Open the ADF cover.

2. Rotate the Registration ROLLER-IDLE by hand. If the Registration ROLLER-IDLE is too close to a screw, it
will not rotate smoothly.

3. If the roller does not rotate smoothly, loosen the screw until the roller does rotate smoothly.

4. If loosening the screw does not resolve the problem, remove the ADF cover and scrape the contact point
with a knife or sharp edge until the roller rotates smoothly. Install the ADF and adjust the screw.

● Remove the ADF cover.

● Remove the ADF pickup assembly.

● Use a razor knife to shave the cover area which is in contact with the Registration ROLLER-IDLE.

ADF is not recognized. An S3–3211 error occurs or copying must be performed from the scanner glass

Symptom
● The ADF installation is not recognized.

● S3–3211 error occurs and a copy job must be performed using the scanner glass.

Cause
● The ADF power cable fails.

Troubleshooting

1. Reassemble the ADF power cable. If the problem is not resolved, replace the power cable.

2. Adjust the harness and fix it with a cable tie.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 759

 During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occur

Symptom
● During a copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occur.

Troubleshooting
● Make sure the “Sponge-Damper Separation” is moved to other position.

Figure 5-70 Check Sponge-Damper Separation position

● If the “Sponge-Damper Separation” is in other position, do the following:

◦ Remove three screws.

Figure 5-71 Remove screws

◦ Remove the linker that has the upper side pressed to the inner direction. Remove the front cover.

Figure 5-72 Remove linker and front cover

760 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 ◦ Remove four screws.

Figure 5-73 Remove screws

◦ Remove the Pickup Assembly.

Figure 5-74 Remove pickup assembly

E8xxxx series E7xxxx series

◦ Replace the flow ADF-HOUSING SEPARATION.

Figure 5-75 Replace housing separation

Drive unit problem

No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 Machine makes noise during print job

Machine makes noise during print job

Symptom
● Machine makes noise during a print job.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 761

 Cause
● The gear train needs to be greased.

● An old type gear is assembled.

Troubleshooting

1. Enter service mode.

2. Execute a fuser motor test.

Service Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Fuser Motor Forward

3. Remove the fuser unit and execute the fuser motor test again.

4. If the printer still makes a noise during a print job, replace the DRIVE-FUSER EXIT assembly.

5. If the problem is not resolved, replace the Fuser unit.

Feeding system problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535)

No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 How to resolve tray locking

2 Tray 2, Tray 3, and MP Tray cannot pick up paper

3 Printer cannot feed paper

How to resolve tray locking

Symptom
● Tray does not open or does not open easily.

Figure 5-76 Tray does not open

762 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Cause
● Tray operation is not smooth because toner powder is attached to the tray locker.

Troubleshooting

1. Wipe the toner powder that is attached to the tray locker.

Figure 5-77 Remove toner powder

2. Apply a small amount of grease to the tray locker.

3. HANARL grease:

● Product name: HANARL SN-250

● Manufacturer: KANTO KASEI, Inc.

● Appearance: Orange

● Directions: Soak the object in HANARL, or apply HANARL to the object using a brush.

● After the object has dried for 30 minutes, apply HANARL to the assembly.

Tray 2, Tray 3, and MP Tray cannot pick up paper

Symptom
● Tray 2, Tray 3, and MP Tray cannot pick up paper.

Cause
● Bad harness connection on the main board.

● Connector defect of the main board.

Troubleshooting

1. Check the harness connection. Reconnect the harness if it is not connected correctly.

2. Check the pickup connector on the main board.

If the connector has a problem with the soldering, replace the main board.

Printer cannot feed paper

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 763

 Symptom
● The printer cannot feed paper from Tray 2 or Tray 3.

Cause
● Feed motor problem

● Feed motor connection problem

● Main board defect

Troubleshooting
● Check the feed motor operation.

◦ Open the right door and push the cover switch forcibly.

Figure 5-78 Open right door and push cover switch

◦ Enter service mode.

Press the 1, 2, and 3 keys simultaneously and enter the password (1934).

764 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 ◦ Select the following menu items:

EDC Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routine > Feed motor > On/Off

Check the operating status of the two feed rollers.

Figure 5-79 Check feed rollers

◦ If the feed rollers cannot rotate, open the rear cover and check the motor and gears.

● Check the connection between the main board (CN27) and the feed motor.

● If the problem persists, replace the main board.

Laser scanner assembly problem (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535)

No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 Laser scanner assembly motor makes a loud noise

Symptom
● The laser scanner assembly motor makes a loud noise while in printing mode.

Cause
● The laser scanner assembly motor is defective.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 765

 Troubleshooting

1. Enter service mode and execute the laser scanner assembly motor test.

2. If the laser scanner assembly motor running sound is loud, replace the laser scanner assembly.

Electrical circuit problem

No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page

1 Right door recognition error

2 LVPS output voltage drop error

3 HDD makes a loud noise

4 Networking not functioning

5 Control panel malfunction

6 Different language displays on control panel when installing printer

7 Home screen icon not visible or control panel is broken

8 No power problem

9 Active NFC does not detect NFC tag

Right door recognition error

Symptom
● The right door is closed but the right door open message displays on the control panel.

Cause
● The right door open sensor spring plate is damaged by the right door stopper.

Figure 5-80 Right door sensor spring plate is damaged

766 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Troubleshooting
● Replace the right door open sensor assembly, or manually reshape the spring plate.

Figure 5-81 Right door open sensor assembly

LVPS output voltage drop error

Symptom
● A error message occurs on the OPE (C3–1312, S3–3121, M1–4111, M1–4211).

Cause
● 24V channel output voltage drops to under 21.6V and 5V channel output is normal.

Troubleshooting

1. Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) for 24V voltage.

Figure 5-82 Check all 24V output channels

2. Troubleshooting

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 767

 1. Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) whether or not 24V voltage occurs.

Figure 5-83 Check 24V output channels

2. If 24V voltage does not occur, check the “24V on/off signal pin” on the main board.

The voltage at “24V on/off signal pin” is 0V: Main board and signal is normal.

The voltage at signal pin 4~5.3V: Main board and signal is abnormal.

3. If the main board and signal is normal, and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check out parts
(such as the Fuser motor, scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the LVPS.

4. If the main board and signal is normal, and only 1–3 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the
harness from the abnormal 24V output channel(s) before replacing the LVPS.

5. If the main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the
harness, connector, and main board.

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) makes a loud noise

Symptom
● The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) makes a loud noise.

Cause
● The HDD has defects.

Troubleshooting
● Replace the HDD.

Networking not function

768 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

Symptom
● Network is not functioning.

Cause
● Network line itself is not working properly.

● Network configuration is wrong.

● Some related electronic components in the main board have defects.

Troubleshooting

1. Connect a network line to the PC and complete a ping test.

2. Complete a ping test after connecting the network line. If the connection is working, check the network
configuration which might have been set incorrectly.

3. If the ping test does not have a result, open the rear cover and check the main board for visible defects
on the network related components such as the connector (CN16), capacitor (C192), and other close
components. Surge voltage from the outside can cause defects.

4. If any of the components have visible defects, then replace the main board.

ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 769

 Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew
1. Open the ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.

Figure 5-84 Open ADF and loosen screws

2. Adjust the position of the ADF hinge according to the skew status.

770 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 Figure 5-85 Adjust ADF hinge

a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

ENWW Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew 771

 Figure 5-86 Adjust hinge

772 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

 b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the arrow.
(1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 5-87 Adjust hinge

3. Detach the ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the ADF sponge on the scanner glass. Close the
ADF unit to attach the sponge.

ENWW Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew 773

774 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW
6 Diagrams

● Diagrams

ENWW 775
 Diagrams
NOTE: The connection diagram includes the harness part code as shown below:

● Blue text harness codes are for both color and mono models.

● Green text harness codes are for mono models.

● Red text harness codes are for color models.

Figure 6-1 Connection diagram

E-LABEL

E-LABEL

776 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

Diagrams (FUSER EXIT)
Figure 6-2 Fuser exit diagram
HDD
FUSER
1. 6
FUSER
JC 39-01336A . .
FUSER POS EEPROM JC 39-01613A . .
. .
6 1

JC 39-01669A JC 39-01668A
*X4300 :Draw er
K4350 :W allconnector

SATA POW ER ,YW 396-02F

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
1. N
FUSER ,2-292229-8
NC THERM ISTOR 0 . .

SATA SIGNAL ,
CN40 -FUSER

67800-5001
JC 39-01677A . . 5V1_LP
1
JC 39-01638A . . 3_3V_CRUM

CN16-SATA POW ER

CN20-SATA SIGNAL
2
. .
M ono only.
THERM ISTOR . .
3 nFUSER_POS1
GND
SIDE 4
N 1

SATA_RX_P
SATA_RX_N
SDA1_CRUM _FUSER

SATA_TX_P
SATA_TX_N
5

5V2_SLP
6 SCL1_CRUM _FUSER

DGND

DGND
DGND
Coloronly.

DGND

DGND

DGND
7 GND

NC
NC
8 NC0_TD_OUT
NC THERM ISTOR 1 9 NC0_TC_OUT
10 THERM _SIDE2
11 THERM _SIDE1
GND
EXIT ,3-292229-0
12
13 NC1_TD_OUT CN6 -EXIT
10
9 14 NC1_TC_OUT 5V1_LP (N.C)
1
8 15 DIR_BLDC_FUSER GND (N.C)
JC 39-02111A 7 2
FDB JC 39-02076A 16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER nPAPER_EXIT1 (N.C)
JC 39-02076A FUSER BLDC BLDC 6
5
4
17 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
nEN_BLDC_FUSER
3
4 5V1_SLP
18 5 GND
3 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
2 19 6 nBIN_FULL_EXIT1
1 20 BRAKE_BLDC_FUSER A_EXIT2
7
21 GND nA_EXIT2
8
22 GND nB_EXIT2
9
23 24V3 B_EXIT2
10
24 24V3 PW M _RETURN_DUPLEX
11
25 A_EXIT1 24V3
12
EXIT1 STEP 26 nA_EXIT1
nB_EXIT1
13 5V1_LP
27
28 B_EXIT1
14
15
GND
nDETECT_T1_POS1
5V1_LP
M AIN PBA
16
17 GND
18 nPAPER_EXIT2
19 5V1_SLP
20 GND
21 nBIN_FULL_EXIT2

OPTION 22
23
24
nDETECT_EXIT2
GND
GND
25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
26 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE
27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
JC 39-02075A nDETECT_FAN_FUSER
28
EXIT2 STEP 1 7 EXIT1 FULL JC 39-01607A 1 3
JC 39-02089A
29
30
GND
NC
2 2
2 6 3 1
3 5
4 4
5 3
6 2
7 1
SOL

DUPLEX RETURN 1 8
Coloronly. 2
3
7
6
T1 POSITON 4 5
JC 39-01629A
5 4
6 3
7 2
8 1
1 8
EXIT2 2 7
3 6
4 5
5 4
EXIT2 FULL 6 3
7 2
8 1
1 3
SIDE 2 2
COVER OPEN JC 39-01610A 3 1

Coloronly.

FUSER FA

ENWW Diagrams 777

 Diagrams (PICKUP/PH DRIVE/SIDE)
Figure 6-3 Pickup/PH drive/side diagram

10
9 PH DRIVER ,3-292229-6
8
7
M AINBLDC BLDC 6
5
4
1
CN47 -PH DRIVER
DIR_BLDC_M AIN
3 2 CLK_BLDC_M AIN
2 3 nREADY_BLDC_M AIN
1 4 nEN_BLDC_M AIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_M AIN
1 6
6 BRAKE_BLDC_M AIN
FEED1 2 5 7 GND
JC39- 02085A 3 4
8 GND
JC39- 02113A 4 3 9 24V1_LP
1 3
REGI 5 2
JC39-01632 A 2 2 10 24V1_LP
6 1
3 1 11 GND
12 nPAPER_FEED1
REGICLUTCH
CL 13
14
5V1_LP
GND
M P CLUTCH 15 nPAPER_REGI

M ono only.
CL 16
17
5V1_LP
REGI_CLUTCH _CON
FEED CLUTCH 18 24V1_LP
CL JC39- 02095A
JC39- 02074A
19
20
M P_CLUTCH_CON
24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
Coloronly. 23
24
A_T1
nA_T1
25 nB_T1
T1 STEP STEP 26
27
B_T1
DIR_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
28 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
29 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
10
9 30 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
8 31 GAIN_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
7 32 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
OPC BLDC(@M ONO)/
ITBBLDC(@C OLOR)
BLDC 6
5
4
33
34
GND
GND
3 35 24V1_LP
2
36 24V1_LP
1

1 6
PAPER _EM PTY1 JC39-01588 A 2 5
3 4 PICKUP,2-292229-8
4 3
5 2 CN 46-PICKUP
PAPER _LIF
T1 6 1 1 5V1_LP
2 GND
3 nPAPER_EM PTY1
4 5V1_LP
5 GND
6 nPAPER_LIFT1
PICKUP1 STEP STEP 7
8
A_PICKUP1
nA_PICKUP1

SIDEUnit
1 3 9 nB_PICKUP1
M P_EM PTY JC 39-01604A 2
3
2
1 Coloronly. 10
11
B_PICKUP1
A_FEED
12 nA_FEED
STEP
SOL

M P SOLENOID 1 2
13 nB_FEED
2 1 FEED STEP 14 B_FEED
HYBRID JC39 -02093A 15 5V1_LP
JC39 -02078A 16 GND
17 nPAPER_EM PTY2
18 5V1_LP
19 GND
DUPLEX STEP STEP PAPER_EM PTY2
1
2
6
5
20
21
nPAPER_LIFT2
GND
3 4 22 nPAPER_FEED2
JC39-01588A
4 3 23 5V1_LP
PAPER_LIF
T2 5 2 24 A_PICKUP2
6 1
25 nA_PICKUP2
1 3 26 nB_PICKUP2
FUSER OU T 1 3
JC39- 01604A 2 2 JC 39-01589A 2 27 B_PICKUP2
FEED2 2
3 1 28 NC
3 1

SIDE,3-292229-0
M ono only. CN36 -SIDE
1 3
CTD CTD
CTD JC39-02097 A 2
3
2
1
PICKUP2 STEP STEP 1
2
5V1_SLP
GND
3 nPAPER_M P_EM PTY
4 PW M _M P_SOL
Coloronly
CURL1
. 1
2
9
8
5
6
24V3
A_DUP
3 7 7 nA_DUP
JC39-0160 3A 4 6 8 nB_DUP
5 5 9 B_DUP
6 4 10 5V1_LP
7 3 11 GND
CURL2 1 30 12 nPAPER_FUSER_OUT
8 2 . .
9 1 13 ADC_INNER_TEM P(N.C)
. .
JC 39-02096A JC39-02088A 14 GND(N .C)
. . 15 NC
JC 39-02083A . . JC39-01601A
1 5 16 5V_ACR (5V1_SLP)
2 4 . . 17 CTD_LED_CENT(GND)
DUPLEX JAM 3 3 30 1
JC 39-01654A 18 CTD_P_MON O(nPAPER_CURL1)
4 2 19 5V1_SLP
5 1 20 GND
21 nPAPER_CURL2
22 5V1_SLP
1 3 23 GND
DUPLEX 2 2 24 nPAPER_JAM _DUPLEX
FAN 3 1 25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX
26 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX
27 GND
28 3.3V
29 ADC_M P_SIZE
1 4
M P SIZE 1 3 30 GND
2 3
2 2 JC 39-02073A
SENSOR 3 2
3 1
JC39 -02087A 4 1

MAIN PC A

778 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

Diagrams (laser scanner assembly/HVPS)
Figure 6-4 Laser scanner assembly/HVPS diagram

Color only.

MAIN PCA
HVPS PWR ,1-292230-0
CN37 HVPS POWER
1 24V1_LP
2 24V1_LP
3 24V1_LP
4 24V1_LP
5 3.3V_LP
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 GND
10 GND

LSU COLOR,
CN29 -LSU COLOR
1 GND
2 GND
3 nVDO_DN_Y_1B_CON
4 nVDO_DP_Y_1B_CON
5 GND
6 nHSYNC_DN_Y
JC39-01680A 78 nHSYNC_DP_Y
GND
9 nSH_LSU_Y_1B_OUT
10 nLDON_Y_OUT
11 GND

Color only.
12 LSU_LD_POWER_Y_OUT
13 GND HVPS COLOR ,
14 nVDO_DN_M_1B_CON
15 nVDO_DP_M_1B_CON CN25 -HVPS COLOR
16 GND 1 PWM_DEV_DC_Y_CON
17 nSH_LSU_M_1B_OUT 2 PWM_I THV_Y_CON
18 nLDON_M_OUT 3 PWM_AC_VPP_Y_CON
19 GND 4 nEN_AC_Y_CON
M ono only.
20 LSU_LD_POWER_M_OUT 5 PWM_AC_PREQ_CON
21 GND LSU MONO ,05005HS- 26F 6 PWM_MHV_Y_CON
22 nVDO_DN_C_1B_CON 7 PWM_FUSER_BI AS_CON
23 nVDO_DP_C_1B_CON 8 PWM_SAW_CON
CN26 -LSU MONO
24 GND 9 PWM_THV_CON
1 nDETECT_LSU
25 nSH_LSU_C_1B_OUT 10 PWM_THV_CLEAN_CON

M ono only.
2 24V3
26 nLDON_C_OUT 11 ADC_THV_P_CON
3 24V3
27 GND 12 ADC_HVPS_24_CON
4 GND
28 LSU_LD_POWER_C_OUT 13 PWM_DEV_DC_K_CON HVPS MONO ,
5 nSTART_LSU_OUT
29 GND 14 PWM_DEV_DC_C_CON
6 nREADY_LSU_I N
30 nVDO_DN_K_1B_CON 15 PWM_DEV_DC_M_CON CN45 -HVPS MONO
7 CLK_LSU_OUT
31 nVDO_DP_K_1B_CON 16 PWM_I THV_K_CON 1 PWM_FUSER_BI AS_CON
8 5V1_LP_LSU
32 GND 17 PWM_I THV_C_CON 2 GND
9 5V1_LP_LSU
33 nHSYNC_DN_K 18 PWM_I THV_M_CON 3 3.3V_LP
10 LSU_LD_POWER_K_OUT
34 nHSYNC_DP_K 19 ADC_MHV_K_CON 4 NC
11 GND
35 GND 20 ADC_MHV_C_CON 5 ADC_THV_P_CON
12 nLDON_K_OUT
36 nSH_LSU_K_1B_OUT 21 ADC_MHV_M_CON 6 GND
13 nSH_LSU_K_1B_OUT
37 nLDON_K_OUT 22 ADC_MHV_Y_CON 7 ADC_MHV_K_CON
14 GND
38 GND 23 PWM_MHV_K_CON 8 GND
15 nHSYNC_DP_K
39 LSU_LD_POWER_K_OUT 24 PWM_MHV_C_CON 9 GND
16 nHSYNC_DN_K
40 GND 25 PWM_MHV_M_CON 10 PWM_SAW_CON
17 GND
41 ADC_LSU_TEMP_CON 26 PWM_AC_VPP_K_CON 11 PWM_DEV_DC_K_CON
18 nVDO_DP_K_1B_CON
42 5V1_LP 27 PWM_AC_VPP_C_CON 12 PWM_AC_FREQ_CON
19 nVDO_DN_K_1B_CON
43 5V1_LP 28 PWM_AC_VPP_M_CON 13 nEN_AC_K_CON
20 GND
44 CLK_LSU_OUT 29 nEN_AC_K_CON 14 PWM_AC_VPP_K_CON
21 nVDO_DP_K_2B
45 nREADY_LSU_I N 30 nEN_AC_C_CON 15 PWM_MHV_K_CON
22 nVDO_DN_K_2B
46 nSTART_LSU_OUT 31 nEN_AC_M_CON 16 24V1
23 GND
47 GND 32 ADC_I THV_K_CON 17 PWM_THV_CON
24 nSH_LSU_K_2B_OUT
48 24V3 33 ADC_I THV_C_CON 18 24V1
25 GND
49 24V3 34 ADC_I THV_M_CON 19 PWM_THV_CLEAN_CON
26 GND
50 nDETECT_LSU 35 ADC_I THV_Y_CON 20 NC

JC39-02 114A
JC39-01657 A JC39-02 114A JC39-02 115A
HVPS COLOR

HVPS MONO
LSU LD COLOR

LSU LD MONO

LSU COLOR, LSU HVPS COLOR HVPS

1 GND 35 PWM_DEV_DC_Y_CON 20 PWM_FUSER_BI AS_CON

2 GND 1 nDETECT_LSU 34 PWM_I THV_Y_CON 19 GND
3 nVDO_DN_Y_1B_CON 2 24V3 33 PWM_AC_VPP_Y_CON 18 3.3V_LP
4 nVDO_DP_Y_1B_CON 3 24V3 32 nEN_AC_Y_CON 17 NC
5 GND 4 GND 31 PWM_AC_PREQ_CON 16 ADC_THV_P_CON
6 nHSYNC_DN_Y 5 nSTART_LSU_OUT 30 PWM_MHV_Y_CON 15 GND
7 nHSYNC_DP_Y 6 nREADY_LSU_I N 29 PWM_FUSER_BI AS_CON 14 ADC_MHV_K_CON
8 GND 7 CLK_LSU_OUT 28 PWM_SAW_CON 13 GND
9 nSH_LSU_Y_1B_OUT 8 5V1_LP_LSU 27 PWM_THV_CON 12 GND
10 nLDON_Y_OUT 9 5V1_LP_LSU 26 PWM_THV_CLEAN_CON 11 PWM_SAW_CON
11 GND 10 LSU_LD_POWER_K_OUT 25 ADC_THV_P_CON 10 PWM_DEV_DC_K_CON
12 LSU_LD_POWER_Y_OUT 11 GND 24 ADC_HVPS_24_CON 9 PWM_AC_FREQ_CON
13 GND 12 nLDON_K_OUT 23 PWM_DEV_DC_K_CON 8 nEN_AC_K_CON
14 nVDO_DN_M_1B_CON 13 nSH_LSU_K_1B_OUT 22 PWM_DEV_DC_C_CON 7 PWM_AC_VPP_K_CON
15 nVDO_DP_M_1B_CON 14 GND 21 PWM_DEV_DC_M_CON 6 PWM_MHV_K_CON
16 GND 15 nHSYNC_DP_K 20 PWM_I THV_K_CON 5 24V1
17 nSH_LSU_M_1B_OUT 16 nHSYNC_DN_K 19 PWM_I THV_C_CON 4 PWM_THV_CON
18 nLDON_M_OUT 17 GND 18 PWM_I THV_M_CON 3 24V1
19 GND 18 nVDO_DP_K_1B_CON 17 ADC_MHV_K_CON 2 PWM_THV_CLEAN_CON
20 LSU_LD_POWER_M_OUT 19 nVDO_DN_K_1B_CON 16 ADC_MHV_C_CON 1 NC
21 GND 20 GND 15 ADC_MHV_M_CON
22 nVDO_DN_C_1B_CON 21 nVDO_DP_K_2B 14 ADC_MHV_Y_CON
23 nVDO_DP_C_1B_CON 22 nVDO_DN_K_2B 13 PWM_MHV_K_CON
24 GND 23 GND 12 PWM_MHV_C_CON
25 nSH_LSU_C_1B_OUT 24 nSH_LSU_K_2B_OUT 11 PWM_MHV_M_CON
26 nLDON_C_OUT 25 GND 10 PWM_AC_VPP_K_CON
27 GND 26 GND 9 PWM_AC_VPP_C_CON
28 LSU_LD_POWER_C_OUT 8 PWM_AC_VPP_M_CON
29 GND 7 nEN_AC_K_CON
30 nVDO_DN_K_1B_CON 6 nEN_AC_C_CON
31 nVDO_DP_K_1B_CON 5 nEN_AC_M_CON
32 GND 4 ADC_I THV_K_CON
33 nHSYNC_DN_K 3 ADC_I THV_C_CON
34 nHSYNC_DP_K 2 ADC_I THV_M_CON
35 GND 1 ADC_I THV_Y_CON
36 nSH_LSU_K_1B_OUT
37 nLDON_K_OUT
38 GND
39 LSU_LD_POWER_K_OUT
40 GND
41 ADC_LSU_TEMP_CON
42 5V1_LP
43 5V1_LP
44 CLK_LSU_OUT
45 nREADY_LSU_I N
46 nSTART_LSU_OUT
47 GND
48 24V3
49 24V3
50 nDETECT_LSU

ENWW Diagrams 779

 Diagrams (toner)
Figure 6-5 Toner diagram
C olor only. TO N ER DC ,3-292229-6
CN 15 TO N ER
1 4 B O TTLE
2 5 1 nA_TO N ER _D C _K
TO N ER K JC 39-01665A 3 3 2 GN D
DC M TR DC TO N ER K
4 2 3 5V1_LP
5 1 4 GN D
C O UN T 5 TO N ER _COUN T_K
6 nA_TO N ER _D C _C
1 4 7 GN D
TO N ER C JC 39-01665A 2 5 8 5V1_LP
DC M TR DC TO N ER C
3
4
3
2
9 GN D
10 TO N ER _COUN T_C
C O UN T 5 1 11 3_3V_CRU M
12 SD A_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
TO N ER K
13 SC L_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
CRU M 14 GN D
TO N ER C 15 3_3V_CRU M
16 SD A_CRU M _BO TTLE_C
CRUM 17 SC L_CRU M _BO TTLE_C
TO N ER M JC 39-01665A 1 4 JC 39-02081A 18 GN D
DC M TR DC TO N ER M
2
3
5
3
19 nA_TO N ER _D C _M
20 GN D
C O UN T 4 2 21 5V1_LP
5 1 22 GN D
23 TO N ER _COUN T_M
TO N ER Y JC 39-01665A 24 nA_TO N ER _D C _Y
DC M TR DC 1 4 25 GN D
TO N ER Y 2
3
5
3
26
27
5V1_LP
GN D
M ono only.
C O UN T 4 2 28 TO N ER _COUN T_Y TO N ER ,1-292230-5
5 1 29 3_3V_CRU M
TO N ER M 30 SD A_CRU M _BO TTLE_
CN 7 TO N ER
CRU M A_D U C T
31 M 1
nA_DUC T
32 SC L_CRU M _BO TTLE_M 2
TO N ER Y 3
nB_DUC T
33 GN D
CRUM B_D U C T
34 3_3V_CRU M 4
GN D
35 SD A_CRU M _BO TTLE_Y 5
nA_TO N ER _DC _K
36 SC L_CRU M _BO TTLE_Y 6
DUC T STEP GN D 7
5V1_LP
GN D
8
TO N ER _COUN T_K_C O
9
N
10
5V_LP
11
O N _ER ASE R _K
1 4 12
3_3V_CRU M
TO N ER DC M TR DC JC 39-01665A
2
3
5
3
JC 39-02091A
13
14
SD A_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
SC L_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
4 2 15
GN D
5 1
TO N ER CN T

1 2 SHUTTER ,PW M -0002-

ERA SER JC 39-02100A
2 1 C olor only. CN 22 009-A1TTER
SHU
TO N ER A CR GN D
CR U M SHU TTER DC 1
2
D M O T_ACR SHU TTER
5V_LP
AC R 3 GN D
JC 39-02084A 4 nSEN S_ACR _SHU TTER _H
SH U TTER OME
5
6 GN D
W A STE 1 3 7 AD C _W AST E_LEVE L_C
JC 39-01295A ON
LEVEL 2 2 8 ID SE N SO R ,2-292229-
3 1 9 O N _W ASTE_LED
5V_LP 2
CN 12 D I SE N SO R
1 C TD _P_R EAR
C TD R EA R 2 5V_AC R
C TD 3 GN D
4 C TD _LED _R EAR
5 C TD _P_FR ON T
C TD FR O N T C TD 6 5V_AC R
7 GN D
8 C TD _LED _FRON T
JC 39-02077A C TD _P_C EN T
9
C TD C EN TER C TD 10 5V_AC R
11 GN D
12 C TD _S_C EN T
13 C TD _LED _C EN T
IN N ER TEMP 14 ADC _INN ER _TEM P
15 GN D
16 NC

780 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

ENWW
HEATER S/W

MAIN SWITCH
Diagrams (FDB/LVPS)

HEATER

AC

INLET
Figure 6-6 FDB/LVPS diagram

JC39-01583A
JC39-01584A

JC39-01581A
4
3
2
1
2

JC39-01582A
FUSER MAIN I
F
FU SER M A IN IF
1 LAMP 1 ZERO_CROSS_I N 1
2 LAM P2 DGN D 2

1 HEATER
3 COMM O N DGND 3
ON_MA IN_R ELA Y 4

HEATER S/W

GND
24V1 5

HEATER IF

HEATER S/W
ON_FUSER_RELAY 6
FU SER _24V 7
DGND 8
MAIN SWI TCH ON_FU SER _M AIN 1 9 SMPS TYPE5 12P
ON_FUSER_MAI N2 10
FDB CN30
1 5V1
1 2 5V2
MAIN PCA

2 MAIN SWITCH 3 24V1

4 24V2
3 5 24V3
JC39-01687A

4 6 24V4
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 DGND
10 DGND
11 DGND
TYPE5 12 DGND
INLET
INLET TYPE5
1 LIVE LIVE 1
2 NEUTR AL NEUTRAL 2

FDB IF ,2-292229-8
CN4 -FDB IF
1 ZERO CROSS IN
2 GND
3 GND
4 ON MAIN REL AY
TYPE 5 SIGNAL 5 24V1
6 ON FUSER RELAY
TYPE5 SIGNAL 7 FUSER 24V
8 GND
DGND 9 ON FUSER MAIN1
1
FAN

10 ON FUSER M AIN 0
SMPS

nEN _24V_SMP S
2 11 O UT FAN SMPS
_O 12 nDETECT_FAN_SMPS
3
DGND 13 GND
14 NC
15 nEN_24V_SMPS_O
16 GND
17 nPAPER_SIZE1
JC39-02333A
JC39-02332A

18 GND
PAPER
SIZE1

19 ADC_PAPER_SI ZE1
20 3.3V_SLP
SMPS TYP E 5 21 nPAPE R _SIZE2
22 GN D
PAPER
SIZE2

SMPS TYPE 5 23 ADC_PAPER_SI ZE2

5V1 1 24 3.3V_SLP
25 ADC OUTER TEMP
5V2 2 26 GND
24V1 3 27 ADC OUTER HUMI
28 3.3V_SLP

JC39-01585A
Mono

24V2 4
only.

HUMI DITY
OUT TEMP/

24V3 5
24V4 6
SMPS TYPE5

DGND 7
4
3
2
1

DG N D 8
LIVE

DGND 9
only.

TYPE5
1
2
3
4
Color

DGND 10
HUMI DITY

NEUTRAL
OUT TEMP/

DGND 11
JC39-02080A

D GND 12
TYPE5

2
1

Diagrams 781
 Diagrams (UI)
OPTION
USB IF
1
2
VBUS
DM
HUB JOINT
3 DP
4 GND WIFIIF HUB IF
NC 6 1 RESET_WIFI
3.3V
DM
DP
5
4
3
2
3
4
3.3V
DM
DP
WIFI
GND 2 5 GND

NFC IF
GND 1 6 GND
7 HOSTWAKE

VBUS

3.3V
GND
DM
DP
5
4
3
2
1
NFC IF
VBUS

3.3V
GND
DM
DP
NFC

1
2
3
4
5
UI

USB HOST3
CN8 SPEAKER
nRST_USB_HUB

nKEY_SOFT_PW

USB HOST4
nWA KEUP_EUI
nWAKEUP_ENG
CB POWER

SP EAKER

CN7 USB HOST3

MCB

CN5 USB HOST4

SPEAKER
SPEAKER
nRST_UI

SPEAKER
SPEAKER

1 VBUS_USB_HOST2
1 VBUS_USB_HOST2
POWER

2 DM_HOST3
_MCB

2 DM_HOST4
GND
M CN2

5VS
5VS

5VS

GND
GND

3 DP_HOST3
3 DP_HOST4
R

4 GND
4 GND
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2

MCB USB IF
USB HOST2
nKEY_S O FT_PW

CN1 MCB USB IF

nWAKEUP_ENG

1 5VS
nWAKEUP_UI
POWER

CN6 USB HOST2

CN2 OPE

2 DM_MCB
nRST _U I

3 DP_MCB 1 VBUS_USB_HOST1
POWER

4 GND 2 DM_HOST2
GN D
GND
5VS
5VS

GND
5VS

3 DP_HOST2
OPE

5 GND
R

6 GND 4 GND
10

7 GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

8 GND
9 GND
CN5 USB HOST1
VBUS_USB_HOST1
USB HO ST1

D M _HO ST 1
DP_HOST1
GND

USB HUB
1
2
3
4

JC39-02071A

JC39-02086A

OPE POWER ,1-

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

292230-4
OPE USB ,MNC2Y-

CN8 FRONT USB HUB

CN14 OPE
GND 1
5K5P10

GND 2
DM_FRONT_HUB
DP_FRONT_HUB

GND 3
WKUP2OPE 4
nWKUP2MCB 5
5V_OPE

5V_OPE 6
nKEY_SOFT_PWR_AVR 7
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

5V_OPE 8
5V_OPE 9
5V_OPE 10
RST_USB_HUB_OPE 11
nRST_UI 12
GND 13
GND 14

MAIN PCA

782 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

ENWW
FRONT ,2-292229
-4

3
2
1
CN49 FRO N T M O N O
1 GN D

FRO N T
1
2
3
2 CO VER_OPEN _FRON T

COVER OPEN
3 3.3V_SB

JC39-01610A
4 GN D

M ono only.
5 nDETECT_W ASTE_IN ST
M A IN P C A

IN ST
4
3
2
1

W ASTE
6 GN D
7 ADC_W ASTE_LEVEL
8 EN _W ASTE_LED

LEVEL
1
2
3
4

W ASTE
9 5V_LP
10 O U T_FAN _FUSER

JC 39-01295A
11 nDETECT_FAN _FUSER_CO N

FAN
12 GN D

FUSER
JC39-02094A
13 5V_LP
14 GN D
15 DUCT_CO UNT
16 GN D

DU CT
17 TC_VIN _K

CO U N T
8
1
18 24V1_LP

.
.
19 TSEN _VCO NT_K FRO N T ,2-292229
-6
Diagrams (FRONT/OPC)

TC SEN SO R
20 3.3V_CRUM

1
8

.
.
21 SDA_CRUM _DEVE0 CN32 FRO N T CO LO R

4
3
2
1
CRU M
DEVE
22 SCL_CRUM _DEVE0 1 GN D

JC 39-02098A
23 GN D 2 TC_VIN _K
Color only.

24

1
2
3
4
NC 3 24V1_LP
4 TSEN_VCO NT_K

JC39-01675A
5 GN D
6 CO VER_OPEN _FRON T

Color only.
7 3.3V_SB
Figure 6-7 Front/OPC diagram

TC K SEN SO R FRO N T
8 GN D
9 nDETECT_W ASTE_IN ST

CO VER O PEN
10 A_W ASTE
11 nA_W ASTE

IN ST
12 nB_W ASTE

JC39-02080A

W ASTE
13 B_W ASTE
14 GN D
15 TC_VIN _C
16 24V2

STEP
17 TSEN_VCO NT_C
18 GN D
19 TC_VIN _M

4
3
2
1
20 24V2
21 TSEN_VCO NT_M
22 GN D

1
2
3
4
23 TC_VIN _Y

W TB STEP TC C SEN SO R
24 24V2

JC39-01675A
4
3
2
1
25 TSEN_VCO NT_Y
26 NC

1
2
3
4

TC M SEN SO R
JC39-01675A
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

JC39-01675A

TC Y SEN SO R
O PC SENSOR ,3-292229
-6

ERASER K
PBA
M odular

CN19 O PC SEN SO R
JC39-01658A O PC DRIVE ,4-292229
-0 1

CRU M
10 5V_LP
JC39-02079A

D EVE K
9 2 O N _ERASER_K
8 CN22 OPC DRIVE 3 3.3V_CRUM
Coloronly.

7 1 DIR_BLDC_O PC_K
6 4 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_K
5 2 CLK_BLDC_O PC_K 5 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_K
BLDC
O PC K

ERASER C
4 3 nREADY_BLDC_O PC_K
PBA
BLDC

6 GN D
3 4 nEN _BLDC_O PC_K
M odular

2 7 5V_LP
1 5 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_K 8 O N _ERASER_C

CRU M
JC 39-01658A

DEVE C
6 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_K 9 3.3V_CRUM
7 GN D 10 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_C
8 GN D 11 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_C
9 24V2 12 GN D
10 10 24V2
OPC K
13
PHASE
9 5V_LP
8 11 DIR_BLDC_O PC_C 14 GN D
7 12 CLK_BLDC_O PC_C 15 O PC_PHASE_K
6 13 nREADY_BLDC_O PC_C
5 16 5V_LP
BLDC
O PC C

4 14 nEN _BLDC_O PC_C 17 GN D

BLDC

OPC C

3
PHASE

15 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_C 18 O PC_PHASE_C

2 16 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_C
1 19 5V_LP
17 GN D 20 O N _ERASER_M
18 GN D 21 3.3V_CRUM
19 24V2 22 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_M
20 24V2 23 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_M
ERASER M

21 DIR_BLDC_O PC_M 24 GN D
PBA

10 22 CLK_BLDC_O PC_M 25 5V_LP

M odular

9 23 nREADY_BLDC_O PC_M
JC39-01635A

8 26 O N _ERASER_Y
CRU M
JC39-01658A

DEVE M

7 24 nEN _BLDC_O PC_M 27 3.3V_CRUM

6 25 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_M 28 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_Y
5 26 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_M
BLDC
O PC M

4 29 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_Y
BLDC

3 27 GN D 30 GN D
2 28 GN D 31 5V_LP
ERASER Y

1
PBA

29 24V2 32 GN D
M odular

30 24V2 33 O PC_PHASE_M
31 DIR_BLDC_O PC_Y
JC39-01658A

34 5V_LP
32 CLK_BLDC_O PC_Y 35 GN D
33 nREADY_BLDC_O PC_Y 36 O PC_PHASE_Y
10 34 nEN _BLDC_O PC_Y
9
D EVE Y OPC M

35 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_Y

CRU M PHASE

8
7 36 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_Y
6 37 GN D
5
BLDC

38 GN D
OPC Y

4
BLDC

3 39 24V2
OPC Y
PHASE

2 40 24V2
1

Diagrams 783
 Diagrams (scanner)
Figure 6-8 Scanner diagram

DSD F

ScannerUnit

JC 39-02157A
JC 39-02128A JC 39-02119A

CCD M IF , D SD F DC IS ,4-292229-0
SC AN IF ,3-292229-4 05002H R -H 50G 4 CN 24 D SD F D C IS
CN 3 SCAN IF CN 9 CCD M F I SC AN _VC LK_2_P 1
1 SC AN _M TR _M S1 GN D 1 SC AN _VC LK_2_N 2
2 PW M _SC AN _M O T SC AN _VC LK_1_P 2 GN D 3
3 SC AN _M TR _D IR SC AN _VC LK_1_N 3 LVDO _D C IS_4_P 4
4 nEN _SC AN _M TR GN D 4 LVDO _D C IS_4_N 5
5 SC AN _M TR _PLS SLO AD _AFE 5 GN D 6
6 PW M _W H ITE_LED SC LK_AFE 6 LVDO _D C IS_3_P 7
7 nFLAT_C O VE R _O PE N 2 SD I_AFE 7 LVDO _D C IS_3_N 8
8 nFLAT_C O VE R _O PE N 1 GN D 8 GN D 9
9 nCCD _HO M E PITG 1 9 LVDO _D C IS_2_P 10
10 nAPS _SE N SO R 2 nR ST_CCD _AFE 10 LVDO _D C IS_2_N 11
11 nAPS _SE N SO R 1 SD O _AFE 11 GN D 12
12 nD ETEC T_D AD F GN D 12 LVC K_DC IS_P 13
13 nD ETEC T_PAP ER _D AD F LVD O 4_N 13 LVC K_DC IS_N 14
14 nSC AN _R EA D 1 LVD O 4_P 14 GN D 15
15 D AD F_TXD GN D 15 LVDO _D C IS_1_P 16
16 D AD F_R XD LVD O 3_N 161 LVDO _D C IS_1_N 17
17 nR ST_D AD F LVD O 3_P 7 GN D 18
18 nSC AN _R EA D 2 GN D 18 LVDO _D C IS_0_P 19
19 GN D LVC K_N 19 LVDO _D C IS_0_N 20
20 GN D LVC K_P 20 GN D 21
21 GN D GN D 21 GN D 22
22 GN D LVD O 2_N 22 SD I_DC IS 23
23 3.3V_LP LVD O 2_P 23 SC LK_DC IS 24
24 GN D GN D 24 SD O _DC IS 25
25 5V1_W KS RC _SC AN LVD O 1_N 25 SLO AD _D IC S 26
26 GN D LVD O 1_P 26 GN D 27
27 5V_LP GN D 27 GN D 28
28 5V_LP LVD O 0_N 28 PITG 2 29
29 GN D LVD O 0_P 29 GN D 30
30 24V3 GN D 30 3.3V_A1000 31
31 24V3 3.3V_LP 31 3.3V_A1000 32
32 24V3 3.3V_LP 32 3.3V_A1000 33
33 24V3 3.3V_LP 33 3.3V_A1000 34
34 SC AN _M TR _M S2 3.3V_LP 34 3.3V_A1000 35
3.3V_LP 35 3.3V_A1000 36
3.3V_LP 36 3.3V_A1000 37
3.3V_LP 37 3.3V_A1000 38
3.3V_LP 38 GN D 39
GN D 39 GN D 40
GN D 40
5V2_LP 41
5V2_LP 42
5V2_LP 43
5V2_LP 44
GN D 45
GN D 46
10V_CC D 47
10V_CC D 48
10V_CC D 49
10V_CC D 50

784 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

ENWW
FEED2
FEED1

EMPTY2
EMPTY1

COVER OPEN
LIFT2
LIFT1
OPTION

2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
OPTION

nSI
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

24V4
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP

nSENS_LI
nSENS_LI
CN6 SENSOR IF

FT2_LI
FT1_LI
SENSORIF

nSENS_P_FEED2
nSENS_P_FEED1

MIT
MIT

nSENS_P_EMPTY2
nSENS_P_EMPTY1

DECOVER_OPEN
INNER

SIDE COVEROPEN
FINISHER

CN3 SIDE COVER OPEN

FINISHER3K
MINICUBE2
MT R IF
CN1
CN5 M TR IF 3.3V 1
1 N.C nRESET 2
2 N.C SOF3_DEBUG 3
Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder)

3 A_FEED 3.3V 4
4 nA_FEED SIF3_DEBUG 5
5 nB_FEED nSCKF3_DEBUG 6

FEED STEP
STEP
6 B_FEED HS_DEBUG 7
Figure 6-9 2x520 sheet feeder diagram

7 N.C FLMD1 8
8 N.C FLMD0 9
9 A_PICKUP1 NC 10
10 nA_PICKUP1
11 nB_PICKUP1

STEP
12 B_PICKUP1

PICKUP1STEP
13 A_PICKUP2
14 nA_PICKUP2 ENGINE IF
15 nB_PICKUP2
16 B_PICKUP2
MO LEX
17 N.C CN7 ENGINE IF 55515-1605/
NC 1
nCMD_REQ 2
NC 3

STEP
NC 4

PICKUP1STEP
GND 5
M OLEX
GND 6 54678-1619/
GND 7
GND 8
GND 9
24V4 10
TYCO
TYCO

24V4 11
2-292249-2/
2-292246-2/

24V4 12
5V_SUSP 13
5V_SUSP 14
5V_SUSP 15

2x520 sheet feeder

nRST_DCF 16
RXD 17
TXD 18
JC39-02072A

DUBUG
USB
CN2 DEBUG
3.3V 1
JC39-02112A

CN4 USB TXD_DEBUG 2

1 NC RXD_DEBUG 3
2 DM GND 4
3 DP
4 GND
GND
GND

3.3V
3.3V

FINISHER ,PW W-0002-016-A1

DCF,1-2922230-8
CN28 -FINISHER
ADC_P_SI
ADC_P_SI

ZE2
ZE1

CN27 -DCF 1 nRST_FINISHER

1 DCF_RXD 2 FINISHER_TXD
2
CN9 PAER SIZE1,

2 DCF_TXD 3 FINISHER_RXD
nCASSETTE2_OPEN
nCASSETTE1_OPEN

3 nRST_DCF 4 nCMD_REQ_FI NISHER

PAERSIZE1,2

4 5V1_SLP 5 NC
5 5V1_SLP 6 nDETECT_FINISHER
7 5V1_SLP
MAIN PCA

6 5V1_SLP
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7 24V1 8 DGND
8 24V1 9 24V4
9 24V1 10 24V4
10 DGND 11 24V4
11 DGND 12 24V4
12 DGND 13 DGN D
13 DGND 14 DGND
14 nDETECT_DCF 15 DGND
15 NC 16 DGND
16 NC
17 nCMD_REQ_DCF
18 NC
PAPERSIZE2
PAPERSIZE1

Diagrams 785
786 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW
7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet
Booklet Finisher

● Precautions

● Product specification and description

● Service approach

● Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers)

● Problem solving

● Finisher system diagram

ENWW 787
 Precautions
Caution for safety
Electric shock and fire safety precautions
Failure to follow these instructions could result in electric shock or cause a fire.

1. Use the correct voltage. Failure to do so could damage the printer and cause fire or electric shock.

2. Use the power cable supplied with the printer. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause
overheating and fire.

3. Do not overload the power socket. This could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and cause
fire.

4. Keep water and other liquids, paper clips, pins, and other foreign objects away from the printer. Contact
with liquids or these objects might cause electric shock or fire.

5. Do not touch the plugs on the ends of the power cable with wet hands. When servicing the printer,
remove the power plug from the wall socket.

6. Use caution when connecting or disconnecting the power cable.

7. Take care of the power cable. Do not allow the power cable to become twisted or sharply bent around
corners as this will cause damage. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. Damage to the power
cable might cause overheating and fire. Exposed cables might cause electric shock. Replace damaged
power cable immediately. Do not reuse or repair a damaged power cable. Certain chemicals can damage
the coating on the power cable, weakening the coating or exposing cables which might cause electric
shock or fire.

8. Make sure that the power outlet and plugs are not cracked or broken. Repair these defects as soon as
possible. Be careful to not cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the printer.

788 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 9. Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. HP recommends the printer be disconnected from the
power source when thunder or lightning is expected. Do not touch the printer or the power cable if it is
still connected to the power outlet during these weather conditions.

10. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas. Install the printer in a clean, well-ventilated location. Do
not position the printer near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust build up
inside the printer can lead to overheating and cause fire or rust.

11. Do not place the printer in direct sunlight. Direct sunlight can cause the temperature inside the printer to
rise causing failure to work properly, and in extreme conditions, might lead to fire.

12. Do not insert metal objects into the printer through the ventilator fan or other parts of the casing. Doing
so could lead to the metal object making contact with the high voltage conductor inside the printer,
causing electric shock.

13. Wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cable before replacing the LVPS board to avoid electric
shock.

Handling precautions
The following instructions are for the user’s personal safety, to avoid injury, and to avoid damage to the
printer.

1. Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface capable of supporting the weight of the printer. Failure
to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall.

2. The printer contains rollers, gears, and fans. Make sure to not catch fingers, hair, or clothing in any these
rotating devices.

3. Do not place any small metal objects, or containers of water, chemicals, or other liquids close to the
printer. If spilled, these objects or liquids could get into the printer and cause damage, or cause electric
shock or fire.

4. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas, near an open window, or close to a humidifier or heater.
These conditions can cause damage to the printer.

ENWW Precautions 789

 5. Do not place candles or burning cigarettes on the printer. Doing so could cause fire.

6. Make sure that the printer is installed and operated in an area that meets temperature and humidity
specifications.

● The printer cannot be used immediately after being stored at below zero Celsius for long periods of
time. Doing so could cause malfunction. Place the printer in an area where it can reach room
temperature before operation.

Removal and replacement precautions

1. Use caution when replacing parts. Always use HP parts. Make sure to note the exact location of parts
and cable routing before dismantling any part of the printer. Make sure all parts and cables are replaced
correctly. Complete the following procedures before dismantling the printer or replacing any parts.

2. Make sure that the power cable is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.

3. Disconnect interface cables and power cables.

4. Use approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, printer name, voltage, and current or
temperature ratings are correct.

5. Do not excessive force to remove or refit parts, especially when fitting screws into plastic.

6. Make sure not to drop any small parts into the printer.

7. Be careful when handling the OPC drum:

● The OPC Drum can be permanently damaged if exposed to light. Be careful not to expose the OPC
Drum to direct sunlight, fluorescent light, or incandescent room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5
minutes can damage the surface of the photoconductive properties and will result in print quality
degradation. Be careful when servicing the printer. Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black
bag or other lightproof container. Be careful when working with the printer if the covers, especially
the top cover, are open, as light is admitted to the OPC area and can damage the OPC Drum.

● Make sure not to scratch the green surface of the OPC Drum Unit. If the green surface of the Drum
Cartridge is scratched or touched, the print quality will be compromised.

Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

1. Be careful with high temperature parts.

The fuser unit operates at high temperatures. Wait for the fuser unit to cool down before disassembly.

2. Keep fingers, hair, and clothes away from moving parts.

To avoid injury, do not put fingers, hair, or clothes near moving parts such as the paper feeding entrance,
motor, and fan.

790 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Use safe lifting and handling techniques to move the printer.

The printer is heavy. To avoid injury, use the lifting handles located on each side of the printer and lift
carefully.

4. Make sure the printer is installed safely.

Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface that is capable of supporting the weight of the printer.
Failure to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall, possibly causing personal injury or damage to the
printer.

5. Do not install the printer on a sloping or unstable surface. After installation, make sure that the printer is
stable.

ESD precautions

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching
an ESD-sensitive assembly.

Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

ENWW Precautions 791

 Product specification and description
Finisher system
Finisher sectional view

Sensor location

Figure 7-1 Sensor locations

Table 7-1 Sensor locations

Item Name Item Name

1 IPTU Entrance Sensor 10 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)

2 IPTU Output Sensor 11 Feed Buffer Output Sensor

3 Feed Entrance Paper Sensor 12 Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor

4 Diverter Home Sensor 13 Stacker Full Sensor

792 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Table 7-1 Sensor locations (continued)

Item Name Item Name

5 Feed Main Output Sensor 14 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)

6 Feed Top Output Sensor 15 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)

7 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Detector) 16 Fold Output Paper Sensor

8 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Emitter) 17 Booklet Compile Paper Sensor

9 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)

Roller location

Figure 7-2 Roller location

Table 7-2 Roller location

Item Name Item Name

1 Top Output Roller 8 TB Entrance Roller

ENWW Product specification and description 793

 Table 7-2 Roller location (continued)

Item Name Item Name

2 Top Middle Roller 9 Feed Buffer Output Roller

3 Finisher Compile Output Roller 10 BM Compile Output Roller

4 Middle Roller 11 BM Folding Roller

5 Entrance Roller 12 BM C-Folding Roller

6 TB Output Roller 13 BM Folding Output Roller

7 TB Middle Roller

794 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Jam removal guide

Figure 7-3 Jam removal guide

Table 7-3 Jam removal guide

Item Name Item Name

1 Top Door Guide 6 SD Jam Clear Cover

2 IPTU Door 7 Booklet Feed Jam Clear Cover

3 Booklet Module 8 BM C-Folding Roller Knob

4 Middle Roller Knob 9 Booklet Lower Feed Jam Clear Cover

5 Feed Buffer Output Roller Knob

ENWW Product specification and description 795

 Paper path
Figure 7-4 Paper path

Table 7-4 Paper path

Item Name

1 Finisher Main Tray - Staple & Punch (Optional)

2 Finisher Top Tray - Punch (Optional)

3 Booklet Tray – Folding & Staple

796 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Electrical parts layout

Finisher and booklet module

Figure 7-5 Electrical parts layout (1 of 2)

ENWW Product specification and description 797

 Figure 7-6 Electrical parts layout (2 of 2)

Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout

Item Part code Description Function

S1 Sensor-RP A Feed Entrance Paper Sensor

S2 Photo Sensor Feed Top Output Sensor

S3 Sensor-RP A Feed Main Output Sensor

S4 Sensor-RP A Feed Buffer Output Sensor

S5 Photo Sensor Diverter Home Sensor

S6 Photo Sensor Buffer Home Sensor

S7 Photo Sensor Rear Tamper Home Sensor

798 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout (continued)

Item Part code Description Function

S8 Photo Sensor Front Tamper Home Sensor

S9 AS-Sensor EF Home Sensor

S10 Photo Sensor Main Paddle Home Sensor

S11 Photo Sensor Main Tray Front Level Sensor

S12 Photo Sensor Main Tray Rear Level Sensor

S13 Photo Sensor SCU Home Sensor

S14 AS-Sensor Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)

S15 AS-Sensor Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)

S16 Photo Sensor Main Tray Encoder Sensor

S17 Photo Sensor Offline Staple Position Sensor

S18 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Offline Sensor

S19 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Home Sensor

S20 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Mid-Rear Sensor

S21 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Mid-Front Sensor

S22 Photo Sensor Stacker Full Sensor

S23 AS-Sensor Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)

S24 AS-Sensor Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)

S25 Photo Sensor Grip Home Sensor

S26 Photo Sensor PE EJT Home Sensor

S27 Photo Sensor PE EJT Away Sensor

S28 Sensor-RP A Compile Paper Sensor

S29 Photo Sensor GE Encoder Sensor

S30 Photo Sensor PE Encoder Sensor

S31 Photo Sensor Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor

S32 Photo Sensor TE Presser Home Sensor

S33 Photo Sensor Blade Home Sensor

S34 Sensor-RP A Fold Output Paper Sensor

S35 Photo Sensor Separate Pawl Home Sensor

S36 Photo Sensor Guide Home Sensor

S37 Photo Sensor Booklet Paddle Home Sensor

S38 Photo Sensor Booklet Tamper Home Sensor

S39 Sensor-RP A Booklet Compile Paper Sensor

S40 Photo Sensor Stopper Home Sensor

ENWW Product specification and description 799

 Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout (continued)

Item Part code Description Function

S41 AS-Sensor Sub Tray Full Sensor (Detector)

S42 AS-Sensor Sub Tray Full Sensor (Emitter)

SW1 Micro Switch Front Door I/L Switch

SW2 Micro Switch Top Door I/L Switch

SW3 Micro Switch Stacker Upper Limit Switch

P1 3K Main PCA Finisher Main PCA

P2 Switch PCA Offline Staple OP PCA

P3 Booklet PCA Booklet Main PCA

M1 Assembly, HB Motor Feed Entrance Motor

M2 Assembly, HB Motor Feed Output Motor

M3 Assembly, PM Motor Buffer Motor

M4 Assembly, PM Motor End Fence Motor

M5 Assembly, PM Motor Main Paddle Motor

M6 Assembly, PM Motor Front Tamper Motor

M7 Assembly, PM Motor Rear Tamper Motor

M8 AS-Motor DC Ejector Grip-Eject Motor

M9 AS-Motor DC Ejector Pre-Eject Motor

M10 Assembly, PM Motor SCU Motor

M11 Assembly, 3657 DC Motor Main Tray Moving Motor

M12 Assembly, HB Motor Stapler Move Motor

M13 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Feed Entrance Motor

M14 Assembly, PM Motor TE Presser Motor

M15 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Tamper Motor

M16 Assembly, PM Motor Stopper Moving Motor

M17 Assembly, PM Motor Separate Pawl Motor

M18 Motor BLDC-Main Folding Roller Motor

M19 Motor BLDC-Main Blade Motor

M20 Assembly, PM Motor C Fold Motor

M21 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Paddle Motor

M22 Solenoid Stopper Solenoid

800 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

IPTU

Figure 7-7 IPTU

Table 7-6 IPTU

Item Part code Description Function

M23 Assembly, HB Motor IPTU Feed Motor

S43 Photo Sensor IPTU Door Sensor

S44 Sensor-RP A IPTU Entrance Sensor

S45 Photo Sensor IPTU Output Sensor

Punch unit

Figure 7-8 Punch unit

Table 7-7 Punch unit

Item Part code Description Function

M24 AS-HB Motor Punch Scan Motor

ENWW Product specification and description 801

 Table 7-7 Punch unit (continued)

Item Part code Description Function

S46 AS-Sensor Punch Scan Home Motor

S47 AS-Sensor Hole Punch Hopper Sensor

P4 AS-PCB Punch Punch PCA

P5 AS-PCB Punch Sensor Punch Scan Sensor PCA

Each unit functions

Figure 7-9

Item Unit Function

1 Frame unit Finisher main frame and exterior.

2 Stapler unit Device used for putting staples in to sheets of paper.

802 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 (continued)

Item Unit Function

3 Feed unit Transports the paper to the compile and eject unit.

4 Compile unit Compiles the paper.

5 Eject unit Transports the stacked paper to the tray.

6 Stacker unit Stacks the stapled papers on the tray.

7 Booklet unit Folds paper, completes stapling jobs, and transports paper to
the tray.

8 IPTU Transports the paper from the main machine to the finisher
entrance.

9 Punch unit Device used for punching on the paper.

PCA connection information

Finisher PCA

Figure 7-10 Finisher PCA

Table 7-9 Finisher PCA

CN No. Connection CN No. Connection

CN1 PSU, ENGINE INTERFACE CN9 SAFETY SWITCH

CN2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH CN10 STAPLER

ENWW Product specification and description 803

 Table 7-9 Finisher PCA (continued)

CN No. Connection CN No. Connection

CN3 TOP DOOR SWITCH CN11 EJECTOR

CN4 FRONT PATH CN12 FRONT LOWER

CN5 FRONT COMPILE CN13 SCU

CN6 IPTU CN14 STACKER

CN7 PUNCH CN15 BOOKLET

CN8 REAR UPPER CN16 LOG

Switch PCA

Figure 7-11 Switch PCA

Table 7-10 Switch PCA

CN No. Connection

CN1 Offline Staple LED and Button

Booklet maker PCA

Figure 7-12 Booklet maker PCA

CN No. Connection

CN1 Finisher interface

CN3 Log

804 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 CN No. Connection

CN4 Stapler/Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor

CN5 Booklet Feed Entrance Motor/TE Presser Motor

CN6 Blade Home Sensor/Booklet Tamper Home Sensor/ Booklet Compile Paper Sensor

CN7 Booklet Paddle Motor/Separate Pawl Motor

CN8 Fold Output Paper Sensor/Guide Home Sensor/C Fold Motor

CN9 Stopper Solenoid/Stopper Moving Motor

CN10 Folding Roller Motor/Blade Motor

Service approach
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under
the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the printer, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains 19 different screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or electric
shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

◦ Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

◦ Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

ENWW Service approach 805

 ◦ Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

◦ Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

◦ Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a
PCA.

◦ Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.

◦ Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in
their original positions.

◦ Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully.
To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

806 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

After performing service
● Plug in the power cable.

● Verify the functions of the printer that might have been impacted by service procedures. Make sure the
printer is in complete working order.

● Replace any accessories removed for service.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Ordering

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts

or

partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the HP
SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.

ENWW Service approach 807

 Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and
booklet finishers)
● Top output bin

● Right top cover

● Top cover

● Front door

● Rear cover

● Front cover

● Front lower cover

● Booklet tray

● Caster cover

● Lower shield assembly

● Upper shield assembly

● Controller PCA

● Stapler unit

● Dummy feed guide

● Top jam access cover

● Top lower feed assembly

● Ejector unit

● Front tamper unit

● Rear tamper unit

● Feed entrance motor (M1)

● Feed exit motor (M2)

● Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3)

● Front tamper motor (M6)

● Rear tamper motor (M7)

● SCU motor (M10)

● Main tray moving motor (M11)

● Booklet finisher front cover

● Booklet finisher

● Booklet finisher PCA

808 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ● Booklet finisher fold stopper unit

● Booklet feed entrance motor (M13)

● TE presser motor (M14)

● Stopper moving motor (M16)

● Separate pawl motor (M17)

● Folding roller motor (M18)

● Blade motor (M19)

● C fold motor (M20)

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 809
 Top output bin
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the top output bin

● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output bin on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Top output bin part number

SAM-JC63-05002B Cover, M Tray

Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

810 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the top output bin

▲ Raise the end of the top output bin (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 7-13 Remove the top output bin

Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 811
 NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

812 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Right top cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover

● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right top cover of the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Right top cover (finisher) part number

SAM-JC90-01448B Finisher sub - regist guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 813
 Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-14 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

814 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 815
 Top cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Top cover (finisher) part number

SAM-JC90-01446B Cover, top

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

816 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-15 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 817
 Figure 7-16 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-17 Remove six screws

818 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-18 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 819
 Front door
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Front door (finisher) part number

SAM-JC90-01444A Finisher sub - door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

820 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-19 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 821
 Figure 7-20 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-21 Remove six screws

822 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-22 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-23 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 823
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-24 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-25 Release the lower hinge pin

824 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-26 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-27 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 825
 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

826 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Rear cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Rear cover (finisher) part number

SAM-JC63-04988B Cover, rear

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 827
 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-28 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

828 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-29 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-30 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 829
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-31 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-32 Remove seven screws

830 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-33 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 831
 Front cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Front cover (finisher) part number

SAM-JC63-04986B Cover, front

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

832 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-34 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 833
 Figure 7-35 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-36 Remove six screws

834 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-37 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-38 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 835
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-39 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-40 Release the lower hinge pin

836 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-41 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-42 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 837
 Figure 7-43 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-44 Remove one screw

838 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-45 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 839
 Front lower cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher)

● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Front lower cover (finisher) part number

SAM-JC63-04987B Cover, front lower

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

840 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

After performing service
◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-46 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 841
 Figure 7-47 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-48 Remove six screws

842 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-49 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-50 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 843
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-51 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-52 Release the lower hinge pin

844 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-53 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-54 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 845
 Figure 7-55 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-56 Remove one screw

846 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-57 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher)

▲ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-58 Remove three screws and the front lower cover

Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 847
 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

848 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Booklet tray
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet tray

● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tray on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Booklet tray part number

SAM-JC90-01419A Booklet tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 849
 Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet tray

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-59 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Booklet tray

▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

850 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-60 Install the booklet tray

Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 851
 Caster cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only)

● Step 2: Remove the caster cover

● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Caster cover part number

SAM-JC63-04985A Caster cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

852 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only)

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-61 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Booklet tray

▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 853
 Figure 7-62 Install the booklet tray

Step 2: Remove the caster cover

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-63 Remove four screws

854 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-64 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 855
 Lower shield assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower shield assembly on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Lower shield assembly (finisher) part number

SAM-JC90-01417A Lower shield assembly (finisher)

856 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-65 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 857
 Figure 7-66 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-67 Remove six screws

858 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-68 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-69 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 859
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-70 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-71 Release the lower hinge pin

860 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-72 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-73 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 861
 Figure 7-74 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-75 Remove one screw

862 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-76 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-77 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 863
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-78 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-79 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

864 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-80 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-81 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 865
 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-82 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-83 Remove four screws

866 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-84 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-85 Disconnect two connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 867
 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-86 Locate sensors

Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

868 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Upper shield assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 10: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the upper shield assembly on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Upper shield assembly (finisher) part number

SAM-JC90-01475A Finisher sub - shield

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 869
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-87 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

870 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-88 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-89 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 871
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-90 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-91 Lift the top hinge pin

872 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-92 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-93 Release the lower hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 873
 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-94 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-95 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

874 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-96 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-97 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 875
 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-98 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-99 Remove seven screws

876 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-100 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-101 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 877
 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-102 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-103 Remove four screws

878 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-104 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-105 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 879
 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-106 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-107 Disconnect two connectors

880 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-108 Locate sensors

Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-109 Lower the output tray

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 881
 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-110 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-111 Release the shield

882 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-112 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-113 Locate sensors

Step 10: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 883
 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

884 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Controller PCA
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the controller PCA

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the controller PCA on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Controller PCA (finisher) part number

XXXXX Controller PCA (finisher)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 885
 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-114 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

886 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-115 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-116 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 887
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-117 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-118 Remove seven screws

888 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-119 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the controller PCA

▲ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.

Reinstallation tip: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-120 Remove the controller PCA

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 889
 Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

890 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Stapler unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 6: Remove the staple unit

● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the staple unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Staple unit part number

SAM-JC90-01412A Finisher Sub - Staple Unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 891
 After performing service
◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Staple a document and verify that the stapler functions correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-121 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

892 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-122 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-123 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 893
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-124 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-125 Lift the top hinge pin

894 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-126 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-127 Release the lower hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 895
 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-128 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-129 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

896 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-130 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-131 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 897
 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-132 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-133 Remove seven screws

898 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-134 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the staple unit

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 7-135 Move the staple unit to the front

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 899
 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 7-136 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and
then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 7-137 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

900 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-138 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-139 Remove the staple unit

Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 901
 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

902 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Dummy feed guide
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Dummy feed guide part number

SAM-JC93-01161A Assy-Guide Dummy-Feed

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 903
 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-140 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

904 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-141 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-142 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 905
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-143 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-144 Remove seven screws

906 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-145 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)

▲ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-146 Remove two screws and the feed guide

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 907
 Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

908 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Top jam access cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor

● Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover

● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam access cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Top jam access cover part number

SAM-JC90-01455A Finisher Sub - Top Jam

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 909
 After performing service
◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-147 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

910 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-148 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-149 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 911
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-150 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-151 Lift the top hinge pin

912 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-152 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-153 Release the lower hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 913
 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-154 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-155 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

914 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-156 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-157 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 915
 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-158 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-159 Remove seven screws

916 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-160 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed exit motor.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-161 Remove the feed exit motor

4
3

1
2

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 917
 Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-162 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-163 Remove the top jam access cover

Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

918 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 919
 Top lower feed assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher)

● Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover

● Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Top lower feed assembly part number

SAM-JC90-01454A Finisher Sub-Top Lower

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

920 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

After performing service
◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-164 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 921
 Figure 7-165 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-166 Remove six screws

922 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-167 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-168 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 923
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-169 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-170 Release the lower hinge pin

924 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-171 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-172 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 925
 Figure 7-173 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-174 Remove one screw

926 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-175 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-176 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 927
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-177 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher)

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed exit motor.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-178 Remove the feed exit motor

4
3

1
2

928 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-179 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-180 Remove the top jam access cover

Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the buffer motor housing, and then tilt the
motor aside to access the screws under it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 929
 Figure 7-181 Remove two screws

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).

Figure 7-182 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

930 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-183 Remove three screws

4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 7-184 Remove the feed assembly

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 931
 5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement part.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-185 Locate sensors and connector

Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

932 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Ejector unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

● Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Ejector unit part number

SAM-JC90-01409A Finisher Sub - Ejector Unit

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 933
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-186 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

934 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-187 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-188 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 935
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-189 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-190 Lift the top hinge pin

936 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-191 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-192 Release the lower hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 937
 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-193 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-194 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

938 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-195 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-196 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 939
 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-197 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-198 Remove seven screws

940 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-199 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-200 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 941
 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-201 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-202 Remove four screws

942 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-203 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-204 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 943
 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-205 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-206 Disconnect two connectors

944 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-207 Locate sensors

Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-208 Lower the output tray

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 945
 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-209 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-210 Release the shield

946 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-211 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-212 Locate sensors

Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 947
 Figure 7-213 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 7-214 Disconnect three connectors

948 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-215 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-216 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 949
 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 7-217 Rotate the sensor

1
3

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-218 Remove one screw

950 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 7-219 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 7-220 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 951
 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-221 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 7-222 Remove the rear tamper shaft

952 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-223 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-224 Disconnect one connector

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 953
 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 7-225 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-226 Remove two screws

954 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 7-227 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the
rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet
metal frame.

Figure 7-228 Remove the ejector unit

1 2
3

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 955
 Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-229 Reinstall the front tamper shaft

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-230 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft

Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

956 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 957
 Front tamper unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

● Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit

● Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Front tamper unit part number

SAM-JC90-01464A Finisher Sub - Tamper Front

958 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-231 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 959
 Figure 7-232 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-233 Remove six screws

960 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-234 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-235 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 961
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-236 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-237 Release the lower hinge pin

962 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-238 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-239 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 963
 Figure 7-240 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-241 Remove one screw

964 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-242 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-243 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 965
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-244 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-245 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

966 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-246 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-247 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 967
 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-248 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-249 Remove four screws

968 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-250 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-251 Disconnect two connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 969
 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-252 Locate sensors

Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-253 Lower the output tray

970 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-254 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-255 Release the shield

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 971
 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-256 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-257 Locate sensors

Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

972 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-258 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 7-259 Disconnect three connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 973
 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-260 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-261 Remove one screw

974 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 7-262 Rotate the sensor

1
3

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-263 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 975
 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 7-264 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 7-265 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

976 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-266 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 7-267 Remove the rear tamper shaft

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 977
 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-268 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-269 Disconnect one connector

978 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 7-270 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-271 Remove two screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 979
 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 7-272 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the
rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet
metal frame.

Figure 7-273 Remove the ejector unit

1 2
3

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

980 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-274 Reinstall the front tamper shaft

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-275 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft

Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit

▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 981
 Figure 7-276 Remove the front tamper

Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

982 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Rear tamper unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

● Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit

● Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Rear tamper unit part number

SAM-JC90-01465A Finisher Sub - Tamper Rear

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 983
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-277 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

984 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-278 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-279 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 985
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-280 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-281 Lift the top hinge pin

986 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-282 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-283 Release the lower hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 987
 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-284 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-285 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

988 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-286 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-287 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 989
 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-288 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-289 Remove seven screws

990 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-290 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-291 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 991
 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-292 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-293 Remove four screws

992 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-294 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-295 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 993
 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-296 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-297 Disconnect two connectors

994 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-298 Locate sensors

Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-299 Lower the output tray

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 995
 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-300 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-301 Release the shield

996 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-302 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-303 Locate sensors

Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 997
 Figure 7-304 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 7-305 Disconnect three connectors

998 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-306 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-307 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 999
 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 7-308 Rotate the sensor

1
3

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-309 Remove one screw

1000 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 7-310 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 7-311 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1001
 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-312 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 7-313 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1002 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-314 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-315 Disconnect one connector

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1003
 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 7-316 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-317 Remove two screws

1004 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 7-318 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the
rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet
metal frame.

Figure 7-319 Remove the ejector unit

1 2
3

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1005
 Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-320 Reinstall the front tamper shaft

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-321 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft

Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit

▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1006 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-322 Remove the rear tamper

Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1007
 Feed entrance motor (M1)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1)

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed entrance motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Feed entrance motor (M1) part number

SAM-JC31-00163B Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1008 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-323 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1009
 Figure 7-324 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-325 Remove six screws

1010 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-326 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-327 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1011
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-328 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1)

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed entrance motor.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-329 Remove the feed entrance motor

3 4

1
2

1012 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1013
 Feed exit motor (M2)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2)

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed exit motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Feed exit motor (M2) part number

SAM-JC31-00163B Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1014 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-330 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1015
 Figure 7-331 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-332 Remove six screws

1016 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-333 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-334 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1017
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-335 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2)

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed exit motor.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-336 Remove the feed exit motor

4
3

1
2

1018 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1019
 Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor, gear, and sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Finisher sub - drive buffer part number

SAM-JC90-01453A Finisher sub - drive buffer

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1020 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-337 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1021
 Figure 7-338 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-339 Remove six screws

1022 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-340 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 7-341 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1023
 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-342 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-343 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

1024 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-344 Disconnect two connectors and remove two screws

2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft.

Figure 7-345 Slide the gear off of the shaft

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1025
 3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.

Figure 7-346 Remove the sensor

4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following:).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

a. Remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 7-347 Remove two screws

1026 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-348 Remove the buffer motor

Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1027
 Front tamper motor (M6)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

● Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher)

● Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7)

● Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

1028 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Front tamper motor (M6) part number

SAM-JC93-01001A Drive Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-349 Remove six screws and the right top cover

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1029
 Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 7-350 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-351 Remove six screws

1030 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-352 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-353 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1031
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-354 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-355 Release the lower hinge pin

1032 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-356 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-357 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1033
 Figure 7-358 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-359 Remove one screw

1034 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-360 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-361 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1035
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-362 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-363 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

1036 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-364 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-365 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1037
 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-366 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-367 Remove four screws

1038 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-368 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-369 Disconnect two connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1039
 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-370 Locate sensors

Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-371 Lower the output tray

1040 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-372 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-373 Release the shield

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1041
 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-374 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-375 Locate sensors

Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

1042 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-376 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 7-377 Disconnect three connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1043
 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-378 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-379 Remove one screw

1044 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 7-380 Rotate the sensor

1
3

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-381 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1045
 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 7-382 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 7-383 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1046 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-384 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 7-385 Remove the rear tamper shaft

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1047
 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-386 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-387 Disconnect one connector

1048 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 7-388 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-389 Remove two screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1049
 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 7-390 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the
rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet
metal frame.

Figure 7-391 Remove the ejector unit

1 2
3

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

1050 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-392 Reinstall the front tamper shaft

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-393 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft

Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher)

▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1051
 Figure 7-394 Remove the front tamper

Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-395 Remove two screws

1052 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-396 Release the belt and remove the motor

Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1053
 Rear tamper motor (M7)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

● Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher)

● Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7)

● Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

1054 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Rear tamper motor (M7) part number

SAM-JC93-01001A Drive Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-397 Remove six screws and the right top cover

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1055
 Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 7-398 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-399 Remove six screws

1056 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-400 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-401 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1057
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-402 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-403 Release the lower hinge pin

1058 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-404 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-405 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1059
 Figure 7-406 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-407 Remove one screw

1060 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-408 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-409 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1061
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-410 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-411 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

1062 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-412 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-413 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1063
 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-414 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-415 Remove four screws

1064 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-416 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-417 Disconnect two connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1065
 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-418 Locate sensors

Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-419 Lower the output tray

1066 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-420 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-421 Release the shield

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1067
 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-422 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-423 Locate sensors

Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

1068 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-424 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 7-425 Disconnect three connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1069
 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-426 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-427 Remove one screw

1070 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).

Figure 7-428 Rotate the sensor

1
3

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-429 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1071
 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 7-430 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 7-431 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1072 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-432 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 7-433 Remove the rear tamper shaft

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1073
 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-434 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 7-435 Disconnect one connector

1074 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 7-436 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-437 Remove two screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1075
 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 7-438 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the
rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet
metal frame.

Figure 7-439 Remove the ejector unit

1 2
3

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

1076 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-440 Reinstall the front tamper shaft

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in
the notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-441 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft

Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher)

▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1077
 Figure 7-442 Remove the rear tamper

Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-443 Remove two screws

1078 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-444 Release the belt and remove the motor

Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1079
 SCU motor (M10)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

● Step 5: Remove the rear cover

● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

● Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10)

● Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the SCU motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

SCU motor (M10) part number

SAM-JC93-01156A Motor, Step

1080 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-445 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1081
 Figure 7-446 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-447 Remove six screws

1082 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-448 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 7-449 Lift the top hinge pin

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1083
 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 7-450 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it
away from the finisher.

Figure 7-451 Release the lower hinge pin

1084 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 7-452 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-453 Remove one screw and the front door

Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1085
 Figure 7-454 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 7-455 Remove one screw

1086 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-456 Remove five screws and the front cover

Step 5: Remove the rear cover

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-457 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1087
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-458 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-459 Remove the booklet tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

1088 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 7-460 Install the booklet tray

Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 7-461 Remove four screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1089
 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover
when reinstalling the caster cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-462 Remove the caster cover

3
1 2

Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 7-463 Remove four screws

1090 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-464 Release the lower shield

2 1

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-465 Disconnect two connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1091
 4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-466 Locate sensors

Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-467 Lower the output tray

1092 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-468 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.

Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 7-469 Release the shield

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1093
 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-470 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 7-471 Locate sensors

Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10)

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).

1094 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-472 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.

Figure 7-473 Remove two screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1095
 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.

Figure 7-474 Remove two screws and the motor

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: SCU motor (M10)

▲ When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and
slot in the printer.

Figure 7-475 Install the motor and bracket

Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

1096 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1097
 Main tray moving motor (M11)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11)

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main tray moving motor (M11) on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main tray moving motor (M11) part number

SAM-JC90-01415A Motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1098 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-476 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1099
 Figure 7-477 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-478 Remove six screws

1100 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-479 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-480 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1101
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-481 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the
tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 7-482 Lower the output tray

1102 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).

Figure 7-483 Open two retainers

1
2

3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 7-484 Disconnect three connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1103
 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of the
bracket.

Figure 7-485 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.

Figure 7-486 Remove four screws and the motor assembly

1104 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 7-487 Remove the motor assembly

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)

a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

Figure 7-488 Remove the bushing

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1105
 b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly
bracket, and then install the bushing.

Figure 7-489 Install the bushing

c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.

Figure 7-490 Install the motor assembly

Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

1106 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1107
 Booklet finisher front cover
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher front cover.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Booklet finisher front cover part number

SAM-JC90-01478B Finisher Sub - Cover F Bm

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

1108 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-491 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1109
 NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

1110 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Booklet finisher
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Booklet finisher part number

SAM-JC90-01416A Finisher Sub - Booklet Unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1111
 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-492 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

1112 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-493 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-494 Remove six screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1113
 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-495 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-496 Remove seven screws

1114 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-497 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher

1. Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher.

Figure 7-498 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1115
 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 7-499 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

2
3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 7-500 Release the metal bracket

1116 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet finisher.

Figure 7-501 Remove one screw

1 2

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 7-502 Slide the right rail

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1117
 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet finisher.

Figure 7-503 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet finisher up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly
to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet finisher.

Figure 7-504 Remove the booklet finisher

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Booklet finisher

▲ When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
finisher.

1118 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-505 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 7-506 Align arrows

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1119
 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 7-507 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet finisher slot.

Figure 7-508 Extend the right rail

Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

1120 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1121
 Booklet finisher PCA
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher

● Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA

● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher PCA.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Booklet finisher PCA part number

XXXXX Booklet finisher PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

1122 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-509 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1123
 Figure 7-510 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-511 Remove six screws

1124 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-512 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-513 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1125
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-514 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher

1. Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher.

Figure 7-515 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher

1126 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 7-516 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

2
3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 7-517 Release the metal bracket

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1127
 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet finisher.

Figure 7-518 Remove one screw

1 2

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 7-519 Slide the right rail

1128 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet finisher.

Figure 7-520 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet finisher up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly
to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet finisher.

Figure 7-521 Remove the booklet finisher

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Booklet finisher

▲ When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
finisher.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1129
 Figure 7-522 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 7-523 Align arrows

1130 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 7-524 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet finisher slot.

Figure 7-525 Extend the right rail

Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1131
 Figure 7-526 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.

Figure 7-527 Remove one screw and the metal cover

1132 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet finisher
PCA.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-528 Remove four screws and the PCA

Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1133
 Booklet finisher fold stopper unit
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield

● Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit

● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher fold stopper unit.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Booklet finisher fold stopper unit part number

SAM-JC90-01432A Finisher Sub - Face Down Stopper Unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1134 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

After performing service
◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-529 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1135
 Figure 7-530 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-531 Remove six screws

1136 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-532 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-533 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1137
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-534 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-535 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

1138 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet finisher (callout 1).

Figure 7-536 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet finisher (callout 1).

Figure 7-537 Remove two screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1139
 3. Slide the booklet finisher out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the lower right shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet finisher to remove it.

Figure 7-538 Remove the lower right shield

Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit

1. On the left side of the booklet finisher, remove two screws through access openings in the jam access
cover (callout 1).

Figure 7-539 Remove two screws

1140 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 2. Raise the jam access cover.

Figure 7-540 Raise the jam access cover

3. Raise the booklet width guide.

Figure 7-541 Raise the booklet width guide

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1141
 4. On the right side of the booklet finisher, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three
connectors (callout 2).

Figure 7-542 Disconnect three connectors

5. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-543 Remove two screws

1142 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 7-544 Release the guide arm

7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.

Figure 7-545 Lower the width guide

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1143
 8. On the right side of the booklet finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 7-546 Remove one screw

9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the right
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 7-547 Remove the fold stopper unit

10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit

▲ Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the
alignment gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through

1144 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 the finisher and verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust
the alignment, and run another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.

Figure 7-548 Adjust the alignment gauge

Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1145
 Booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13)

● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet feed entrance motor on the
booklet finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Booklet feed entrance motor (M13) part number

SAM-JC93-01152A Drive Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

1146 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-549 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away from
the booklet finisher and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1147
 Figure 7-550 Remove the booklet feed entrance motor

Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

1148 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

TE presser motor (M14)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14)

● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the TE presser motor on the booklet finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

TE presser motor (M14) part number

SAM-JC93-01155A Drive Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1149
 Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-551 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the TE presser
motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1150 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-552 Remove the TE presser motor

Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1151
 Stopper moving motor (M16)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield

● Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16)

● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stopper moving motor on the booklet
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Stopper moving motor (M16) part number

SAM-JC93-01155A Drive Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1152 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-553 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet finisher (callout 1).

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1153
 Figure 7-554 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet finisher (callout 1).

Figure 7-555 Remove two screws

1154 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Slide the booklet finisher out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the lower right shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet finisher to remove it.

Figure 7-556 Remove the lower right shield

Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stopper
moving motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-557 Remove the stopper moving motor

Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1155
 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

1156 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Separate pawl motor (M17)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17)

● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the separate pawl motor on the booklet
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Separate pawl motor (M17) part number

SAM-JC93-01001A Drive Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1157
 Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-558 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the separate pawl
motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1158 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-559 Remove the separate pawl motor

1
2

Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1159
 Folding roller motor (M18)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

● Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18)

● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the folding roller motor on the booklet
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Folding roller motor (M18) part number

SAM-JC31-00144B Folding roller motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

1160 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover
away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-560 Remove six screws and the right top cover

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1161
 Figure 7-561 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 7-562 Remove six screws

1162 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-563 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 7-564 Remove seven screws

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1163
 2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-565 Remove four screws and the rear cover

Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding roller
motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-566 Remove the folding roller motor

1164 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1165
 Blade motor (M19)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield

● Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19)

● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the blade motor on the booklet finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Finisher sub - bm main blade part number

SAM-JC90-01435A Finisher sub - bm main blade

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1166 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 ◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-567 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet finisher (callout 1).

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1167
 Figure 7-568 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet finisher (callout 1).

Figure 7-569 Remove two screws

1168 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 3. Slide the booklet finisher out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the lower right shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet finisher to remove it.

Figure 7-570 Remove the lower right shield

Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the blade motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-571 Remove the blade motor

Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1169
 NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

1170 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

C fold motor (M20)
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

● Step 2: Remove the C fold motor

● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the C fold motor on the booklet finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down
before removing the power cable.

◦ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

◦ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

C fold motor (M20) part number

SAM-JC93-01154A Drive Motor, Step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

◦ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

◦ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

◦ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

◦ Connect the printer power cable.

◦ Turn the printer power on.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1171
 Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 7-572 Remove five screws and the cover

1 4

2
3

Step 2: Remove the C fold motor

1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).
These arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.

1172 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 Figure 7-573 Check arrow alignment

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 7-574 Disconnect two connectors

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1173
 3. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 7-575 Remove four screws

4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release the
belt (callout 3).

Figure 7-576 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt

1 2

1174 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet finisher.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft might
become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet finisher PCA
shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

Figure 7-577 Remove the bracket and motor

6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.

Figure 7-578 Remove two screws

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1175
 Special installation instructions: C fold motor

a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while installing
the gear and belt.

Figure 7-579 Install one screw

b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor
(callout 1).

Figure 7-580 Check arrow alignment

1176 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

 c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear
(callout 1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.

Figure 7-581 Align arrows

Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or
pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1177
 Problem solving

1178 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

Control panel message document (CPMD)
Control-panel messages and event log entries
The CPMD is not provided in this service manual. The CPMD for this printer is available on the HP Service
Access Workbench (SAW) Web site. Go to h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/home.do.

ENWW Problem solving 1179

 Finisher system diagram
PCA structure diagram

Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH PCA.

Figure 7-582 Finisher system diagram

PCA function
● FINISHER PCA

This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

● SWITCH PCA

This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple operation.

● BOOKLET MAKER PCA

This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

● HOLE PUNCH PCA

This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

1180 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

8 Inner finisher

● Precautions

● Product Specification and Description

● Service approach

● Removal and replacment (inner finisher)

● Problem solving

● Block Diagram

ENWW 1181
 Precautions
Caution for safety
Electric shock and fire safety precautions
Failure to follow these instructions could result in electric shock or cause a fire.

1. Use the correct voltage. Failure to do so could damage the printer and cause fire or electric shock.

2. Use the power cable supplied with the printer. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause
overheating and fire.

3. Do not overload the power socket. This could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and cause
fire.

4. Keep water and other liquids, paper clips, pins, and other foreign objects away from the printer. Contact
with liquids or these objects might cause electric shock or fire.

5. Do not touch the plugs on the ends of the power cable with wet hands. When servicing the printer,
remove the power plug from the wall socket.

6. Use caution when connecting or disconnecting the power cable.

7. Take care of the power cable. Do not allow the power cable to become twisted or sharply bent around
corners as this will cause damage. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. Damage to the power
cable might cause overheating and fire. Exposed cables might cause electric shock. Replace damaged
power cable immediately. Do not reuse or repair a damaged power cable. Certain chemicals can damage
the coating on the power cable, weakening the coating or exposing cables which might cause electric
shock or fire.

8. Make sure that the power outlet and plugs are not cracked or broken. Repair these defects as soon as
possible. Be careful to not cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the printer.

1182 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 9. Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. HP recommends the printer be disconnected from the
power source when thunder or lightning is expected. Do not touch the printer or the power cable if it is
still connected to the power outlet during these weather conditions.

10. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas. Install the printer in a clean, well-ventilated location. Do
not position the printer near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust build up
inside the printer can lead to overheating and cause fire or rust.

11. Do not place the printer in direct sunlight. Direct sunlight can cause the temperature inside the printer to
rise causing failure to work properly, and in extreme conditions, might lead to fire.

12. Do not insert metal objects into the printer through the ventilator fan or other parts of the casing. Doing
so could lead to the metal object making contact with the high voltage conductor inside the printer,
causing electric shock.

13. Wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cable before replacing the LVPS board to avoid electric
shock.

Handling precautions
The following instructions are for the user’s personal safety, to avoid injury, and to avoid damage to the
printer.

1. Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface capable of supporting the weight of the printer. Failure
to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall.

2. The printer contains rollers, gears, and fans. Make sure to not catch fingers, hair, or clothing in any these
rotating devices.

3. Do not place any small metal objects, or containers of water, chemicals, or other liquids close to the
printer. If spilled, these objects or liquids could get into the printer and cause damage, or cause electric
shock or fire.

4. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas, near an open window, or close to a humidifier or heater.
These conditions can cause damage to the printer.

ENWW Precautions 1183

 5. Do not place candles or burning cigarettes on the printer. Doing so could cause fire.

6. Make sure that the printer is installed and operated in an area that meets temperature and humidity
specifications.

● The printer cannot be used immediately after being stored at below zero Celsius for long periods of
time. Doing so could cause malfunction. Place the printer in an area where it can reach room
temperature before operation.

Removal and replacement precautions

1. Use caution when replacing parts. Always use HP parts. Make sure to note the exact location of parts
and cable routing before dismantling any part of the printer. Make sure all parts and cables are replaced
correctly. Complete the following procedures before dismantling the printer or replacing any parts.

2. Make sure that the power cable is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.

3. Disconnect interface cables and power cables.

4. Use approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, printer name, voltage, and current or
temperature ratings are correct.

5. Do not excessive force to remove or refit parts, especially when fitting screws into plastic.

6. Make sure not to drop any small parts into the printer.

7. Be careful when handling the OPC drum:

● The OPC Drum can be permanently damaged if exposed to light. Be careful not to expose the OPC
Drum to direct sunlight, fluorescent light, or incandescent room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5
minutes can damage the surface of the photoconductive properties and will result in print quality
degradation. Be careful when servicing the printer. Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black
bag or other lightproof container. Be careful when working with the printer if the covers, especially
the top cover, are open, as light is admitted to the OPC area and can damage the OPC Drum.

● Make sure not to scratch the green surface of the OPC Drum Unit. If the green surface of the Drum
Cartridge is scratched or touched, the print quality will be compromised.

Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

1. Be careful with high temperature parts.

The fuser unit operates at high temperatures. Wait for the fuser unit to cool down before disassembly.

2. Keep fingers, hair, and clothes away from moving parts.

To avoid injury, do not put fingers, hair, or clothes near moving parts such as the paper feeding entrance,
motor, and fan.

1184 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Use safe lifting and handling techniques to move the printer.

The printer is heavy. To avoid injury, use the lifting handles located on each side of the printer and lift
carefully.

4. Make sure the printer is installed safely.

Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface that is capable of supporting the weight of the printer.
Failure to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall, possibly causing personal injury or damage to the
printer.

5. Do not install the printer on a sloping or unstable surface. After installation, make sure that the printer is
stable.

ESD precautions

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching
an ESD-sensitive assembly.

Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

ENWW Precautions 1185

 Product Specification and Description
Specification
Item Description

Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm

Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open

Media Sizes ● Main: 148 - 320 mm x 140-457.2 mm (58.3-126 inch x 55.1-180 inch)

● Top: 98 - 297 mm x 140-432 mm (38.6-116.9 inch x 55.1-170.1 inch)

Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/Glossy/

Envelope

Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)

● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)

Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)

Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)

Weight 15 kg (33 lb.)

Tray1 Finishing Capacity 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Tray1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Center)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)

Tray2 Finishing Capacity 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm

Table 8-1 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X

Monarch 98.4 x 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

Env 190.5

PostCard 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

4X6 152.4

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X

1186 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 Table 8-1 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R 1

X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Tabloid 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

Extra 457.2

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O O X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 — W X W 98-297 X X X

~ 148-320
L 140-1200 -L
L 5.5-47 -L 140-1200
140-1200
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

ENWW Product Specification and Description 1187

 Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O

B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O

B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X

Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env

PostCard 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6 152.4

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O

Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

342.9

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O

1188 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O

Tabloid 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

EXtra 457.2

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ - X X X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

Table 8-2 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O

Heavy weight (106-175 O O O O

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 1 O O O O

(176-216 g/m²)

Extra Heavy weight 2 O O O O

(217-256 g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 3 X O X X

(257-300 g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 4 X O X X

(301-325 g/m2)

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 O O O O
g/m2)

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O

Bond O O O O

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O

LetterHead O O O O

Pre-Punched O O O X

ENWW Product Specification and Description 1189

 Table 8-2 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Thin Cardstock (105-163 O O O O

g/m2)

Thick Cardstock O O O X
(170-216 g/m2)

Heavy Cardstock O O O X
(217-256 g/m2)

Extra Heavy Cardstock X O X X

1(257-300 g/m²)

Extra Heavy Cardstock X O X X

2(301-325 g/m2)

Thin Glossy (106-169 O O O O

g/m2)

Thick Glossy (170-216 O O O X

g/m²)

Heavy Glossy (217-256 O X X X

g/m2)

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X

Thick Envelope O X X X
(217-256 g/m2)

Tab O X X O

Perforated Paper (75-90 X O X X

g/m2)

1190 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Finisher System
Sectional view
Figure 8-1 Finisher system—sectional view

Table 8-3 Finisher system—sectional view

Item Description Item Description

1 Entrance sensor 7 Jam Door Open Sensor

2 Passthru Sensor 8 Front Door Open Sensor

3 Paddle Home Sensor 9 Stacker Tray Home Sensor

4 Tamper Home_F Sensor 10 Paper Feed roller

5 Tamper Home_R Sensor 11 Paper Exit roller

6 Eject Home Sensor 12 Turning Knob

ENWW Product Specification and Description 1191

 Paper path
Figure 8-2 Finisher system—paper path

Table 8-4 Finisher system—paper path

Item Description

1 Finisher Main Tray – Staple / offset / Punch

2 Finisher Top Tray – Stack only

1192 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Electrical parts layout
Figure 8-3 Finisher system—electrical parts layout

Table 8-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout

Item Description Function

S1 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Entrance Sensor

S2 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Shaft Docking Sensor

S3 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Dust Box Sensor

S4 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Sub Stay Sensor

S5 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler Position Sensor_Rear

S6 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple Position Sensor_ Center 1

S7 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple Position Sensor_ Center 2

S8 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Exit Sensor

S9 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler Position Sensor_Front

S10 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) End Defence Sensor

S11 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject Sensor

S12 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper Support Sensor

ENWW Product Specification and Description 1193

 Table 8-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout (continued)

Item Description Function

S13 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject 2 Motor Sensor

S14 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tamper Position Sensor_Rear

S15 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper Holder Position Sensor

S16 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tray Home Position Sensor

S17 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tamper Position Sensor_Front

S18 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Main Paddle Position Sensor

S19 JC81-07403A AS- Sensor

S20 JC81-07396A AS- Sensor

S21 JC39-01610A Switch Front cover open

S22 JC39-02175A Switch Jam door open

M1 JC31-00169A Entrance Motor

M2 JC31-00009C EJECTOR_1_Motor

M3 Mabuchi EJECTOR_2_Motor

M4 JC31-00149A Tamper_Motor_Front

M5 JC31-00149A Tamper_Motor_Rear

M6 JC31-00149A Paper Support

M7 KIG Tray Motor

M8 JC31-00149A Main Paddle Motor

M9 JC31-00169A Exit Motor

M10 JC31-00149A Traverse Motor

M11 TDS-10SL Paper Holder Solenoid

1194 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Block Diagram
Figure 8-4 Finisher system—block diagram

PBA Connection Information

Figure 8-5 Finisher system—PBA connection information

Table 8-6 Finisher system—PBA connection information

No. Connection

1 CN3 : REAR Joint I/F

2 CN1 : REAR Sensor

3 CN10 : Traverse Mid Sensor

4 CN8 : Debug

5 CN2 : REAR I/F

6 CN7 : FRONT I/F

7 CN6 : Stacker Switch

8 CN9 : Solenoid

9 CN4 : Ejector & Supporter I/F

10 CN5 : Main I/F

ENWW Product Specification and Description 1195

 Service approach
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under
the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the printer, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains 19 different screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or electric
shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

◦ Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

◦ Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

◦ Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

◦ Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

◦ Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a
PCA.

◦ Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.

1196 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 ◦ Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in
their original positions.

◦ Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully.
To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

After performing service

● Plug in the power cable.

● Verify the functions of the printer that might have been impacted by service procedures. Make sure the
printer is in complete working order.

● Replace any accessories removed for service.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

ENWW Service approach 1197

 Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Ordering

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts

or

partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the HP
SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.

1198 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Removal and replacment (inner finisher)
● Entrance sensor

● Entrance motor

● Exit sensor

● Exit motor

● Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly

● Front Jogger Motor

● Front Jogger Home Sensor

● Rear Jogger Motor

● Rear Jogger Home Sensor

● Stapler

● Stapler position sensor assembly

● Traverse Motor

● Stacker Motor

● Stacker Encoder Sensor

● Stacker Lower Limit Switch

● Stack Beam Sensor

● Stack Position Sensor

● Paper Holding Lever Solenoid

● Paper Support Motor

● Paper Support Home Sensor

● Ejector Motor assembly

● Main Paddle Motor

● Main Paddle Home Sensor

● Main Paddle

● Ejector assembly

● Punch Dust Full Sensor

● Door Switch

● Top Door Switch

● End Fence Home Sensor

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1199

 Entrance sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Entrance sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Entrance sensor assembly part number

Entrance sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1200 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor
1. On the right-side of the printer remove three screws, and then remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-6 Remove the entrance sensor (1 of 7)

2. On the right, back-side of the printer remove the e-ring, and then remove the shaft-side plate. Unplug
the connector.

Figure 8-7 Remove the entrance sensor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1201

 3. On the right, front-side of the printer remove the sheet-punch front.

Figure 8-8 Remove the entrance sensor (3 of 7)

4. Remove the e-ring and washer, and then remove the punch dummy.

Figure 8-9 Remove the entrance sensor (4 of 7)

1202 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove, four screws. Remove the handle, and then remove
the punch dummy cover.

Figure 8-10 Remove the entrance sensor (5 of 7)

6. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the sensor bracket.

Figure 8-11 Remove the entrance sensor (6 of 7)

7. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 8-12 Remove the entrance sensor (7 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1203

 Entrance motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the entrance motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Entrance motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Entrance motor assembly part number

Entrance motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1204 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-13 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-14 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1205

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-15 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-16 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

1206 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-17 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1207

 Step 2: Remove the entrance motor
1. Disconnect the sensor cable at the rear.

2. Remove the cable restraint at the rear.

3. Release two tabs that engage with the frame, and then remove the guide middle lower.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flag.

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 8-18 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

5. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.

Figure 8-19 Remove the entrance motor (6 of 7)

1208 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 6. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 8-20 Remove the entrance motor (7 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1209

 Exit sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the exit sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Exit sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Exit sensor assembly part number

Exit sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1210 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-21 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-22 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1211

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-23 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-24 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

1212 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-25 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1213

 Step 2: Remove the exit sensor
▲ Remove the hook, and then remove the exit sensor.

Figure 8-26 Remove the exit sensor

1214 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Exit motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the exit motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Exit motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Exit motor assembly part number

Exit motor

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1215

 Step 1: Remove the exit motor
1. Remove the front cover.

Figure 8-27 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3)

2. Remove two screws, and then unplug the motor connector.

Figure 8-28 Remove the exit motor (2 of 3)

1216 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove the exit motor from the BKT motor feed exit.

Figure 8-29 Remove the exit motor (3 of 3)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1217

 Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly part number

Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1218 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
1. Open the cover top tray sub-assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.

Figure 8-30 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (1 of 6)

2. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.

Figure 8-31 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (2 of 6)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1219

 3. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.

Figure 8-32 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6)

4. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 8-33 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6)

1220 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.

Figure 8-34 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1221

 Front Jogger Motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Front Jogger Motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Front Jogger Motor assembly part number

Front Jogger Motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1222 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-35 Remove the front jogger motor (1 of 22)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-36 Remove the front jogger motor (2 of 22)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1223

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-37 Remove the front jogger motor (3 of 22)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-38 Remove the front jogger motor (4 of 22)

1224 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-39 Remove the front jogger motor (5 of 22)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-40 Remove the front jogger motor (6 of 22)

7. Remove two screws and then remove the lower PBA cover.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1225

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-41 Remove the front jogger motor (7 of 22)

9. Remove one screw, and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-42 Remove the front jogger motor (8 of 22)

1226 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

Figure 8-43 Remove the front jogger motor (9 of 22)

11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Figure 8-44 Remove the front jogger motor (10 of 22)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1227

 12. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-45 Remove the front jogger motor (11 of 22)

13. Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.

Figure 8-46 Remove the front jogger motor (12 of 22)

1228 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 14. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.

Figure 8-47 Remove the front jogger motor (13 of 22)

15. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.

Figure 8-48 Remove the front jogger motor (14 of 22)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1229

 16. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 8-49 Remove the front jogger motor (15 of 22)

17. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.

Figure 8-50 Remove the front jogger motor (16 of 22)

1230 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 18. Remove the ring-c, actuator-home paddle, AS pulley S2M48T, and cam-paddle A.

Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite
side.

Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out

Figure 8-51 Remove the front jogger motor (17 of 22)

19. Remove the e-ring and bush-6_D.

Figure 8-52 Remove the front jogger motor (18 of 22)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1231

 20. Remove the main paddle A unit / B unit, and then carefully remove the shaft from its retainer.

NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the
paddle.

Figure 8-53 Remove the front jogger motor (19 of 22)

21. Remove four screws.

Figure 8-54 Remove the front jogger motor (20 of 22)

1232 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 22. Unplug the connector, and then pull the finisher sub-tamper front up to remove.

Reinstallation tip: Position the upper left-corner of the sub tamper, and then carefully rotate it
counter-clockwise into position.

Figure 8-55 Remove the front jogger motor (21 of 22)

23. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 8-56 Remove the front jogger motor (22 of 22)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1233

 Front Jogger Home Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number

Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1234 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-57 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-58 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1235

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-59 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-60 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)

1236 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-61 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-62 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1237

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-63 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-64 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)

1238 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

Figure 8-65 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)

11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Figure 8-66 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1239

 12. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-67 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 15)

13. Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.

Figure 8-68 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (1 of 6)

1240 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 14. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.

Figure 8-69 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (2 of 6)

15. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.

Figure 8-70 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (3 of 6)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1241

 16. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 8-71 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6)

17. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.

Figure 8-72 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6)

1242 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 18. Remove the ring-C, actuator-home paddle, AS pulley S2M48T, and cam-paddle A.

Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite
side.

Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out

Figure 8-73 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 15)

19. Remove the e-ring and bush-6_D.

Figure 8-74 Remove the front jogger home sensor (11 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1243

 20. Remove the main paddle A unit / B unit, and then carefully remove the shaft from its retainer.

NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the
paddle.

Figure 8-75 Remove the front jogger home sensor (12 of 15)

21. Remove four screws.

Figure 8-76 Remove the front jogger home sensor (13 of 15)

1244 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 22. Unplug the connector, and then remove the front jogger home sensor.

Figure 8-77 Remove the front jogger home sensor

23. Remove the tamper front sub assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1245

 Rear Jogger Motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Rear Jogger Motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Rear Jogger Motor assembly part number

Rear Jogger Motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1246 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-78 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-79 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1247

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-80 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-81 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)

1248 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-82 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-83 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1249

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-84 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-85 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)

1250 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 10. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-86 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 15)

11. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guide out of position to access the screws.

Figure 8-87 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1251

 12. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-tamper rear.

Figure 8-88 Remove the rear jogger motor (2 of 3)

13. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger motor.

Figure 8-89 Remove the rear jogger motor (3 of 3)

1252 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 14. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guide out of position to access the screws.

Figure 8-90 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3)

15. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-tamper rear.

Figure 8-91 Remove the rear jogger motor (2 of 3)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1253

 16. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger motor.

Figure 8-92 Remove the rear jogger motor (3 of 3)

1254 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Rear Jogger Home Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number

Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1255

 Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor

Remove the rear jogger home sensor

1. Remove the finisher sub-cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-93 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 11)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-94 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 11)

1256 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-95 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 11)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-96 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 11)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1257

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-97 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 11)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-98 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 11)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

1258 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-99 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 11)

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-100 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 11)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1259

 10. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-101 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 11)

11. Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger home sensor.

Figure 8-102 Remove the rear jogger home sensor (11 of 11)

1260 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Stapler
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the stapler

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the stapler assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Stapler assembly part number

SAM-JC90-01342A Stapler assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1261

 Step 1: Remove the stapler
1. Remove the front cover.

Figure 8-103 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3)

2. Remove two screws, and then unplug the motor connector.

Figure 8-104 Remove the exit motor (2 of 3)

1262 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler unit.

NOTE: Ensure the tab on the back of the stapler unit clears the chassis while removing.

Figure 8-105 Remove the stapler (1 of 2)

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the finisher sub-staple.

Figure 8-106 Remove the stapler (2 of 2)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1263

 Stapler position sensor assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly

● Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stapler position sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Stapler position sensor assembly part number

Stapler position sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1264 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-107 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-108 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1265

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-109 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-110 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

1266 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-111 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1267

 Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
1. Open the cover top tray sub-assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.

Figure 8-112 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (1 of 6)

2. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.

Figure 8-113 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (2 of 6)

1268 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.

Figure 8-114 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6)

4. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 8-115 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1269

 5. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.

Figure 8-116 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6)

1270 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly
1. Remove two screws from the front of the printer. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket
support.

Figure 8-117 Remove the stapler position sensor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two screws from the rear of the printer.

Figure 8-118 Remove the stapler position sensor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1271

 3. Loosen three cable restraints. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the finisher sub-
stay bracket.

Figure 8-119 Remove the stapler position sensor (3 of 7)

4. Remove one screw from the front of the printer.

Figure 8-120 Remove the stapler position sensor (4 of 7)

1272 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove one screw from the rear of the printer.

Figure 8-121 Remove the stapler position sensor (5 of 7)

6. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable restraints, and then unplug the FFC cable.

NOTE: The FFC is glued to the support bracket. However, the sensors can be replaced without removal
of the FFC.

Reinstallation tip: Connect the sensors, lock the cable restraints, and then connect the FCC.

Figure 8-122 Remove the stapler position sensor (6 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1273

 7. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 8-123 Remove the stapler position sensor (7 of 7)

1274 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Traverse Motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the traverse motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Traverse Motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Traverse Motor assembly part number

??? Traverse Motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1275

 Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-124 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-125 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

1276 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-126 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-127 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1277

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-128 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

1278 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 2: Remove the traverse motor
1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the finisher sub-staple travers.

Figure 8-129 Remove the traverse motor (1 of 2)

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 8-130 Remove the traverse motor (2 of 2)

3. Use the following steps when reinstalling the traverse motor:

a. Apply tension to the spring by pushing toward the center of the printer, and then tighten the screw.
Tightening the screw puts maximum slack in the belt.

b. Lower the motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley.

c. Secure the bracket with three screws.

d. Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt.

e. Tighten the screw.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1279

 Stacker Motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the stacker motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Keyboardr assembly part number

??? Stacker Motor

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1280 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the stacker motor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-131 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-132 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1281

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-133 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-134 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)

1282 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-135 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-136 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove Lower PBA cover.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1283

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-137 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-138 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)

1284 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

Figure 8-139 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)

11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Figure 8-140 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1285

 12. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the stacker motor.

Figure 8-141 Remove the stacker motor

1286 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Stacker Encoder Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly part number

Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1287

 Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-142 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-143 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

1288 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-144 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-145 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1289

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-146 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-147 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

1290 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-148 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-149 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1291

 10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

Figure 8-150 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)

11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Figure 8-151 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)

1292 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 12. Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 8-152 Remove the stacker encoder sensor

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1293

 Stacker Lower Limit Switch
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly part number

Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1294 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-153 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-154 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1295

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-155 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-156 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)

1296 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-157 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-158 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1297

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-159 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-160 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)

1298 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

Figure 8-161 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)

11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Figure 8-162 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1299

 12. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-163 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (1 of 2)

13. Open three clamps, unplug the connector, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 8-164 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (2 of 2)

1300 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Stack Beam Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stack Beam Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Stack Beam Sensor assembly part number

Stack Beam Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1301

 Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-165 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-166 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

1302 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-167 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-168 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1303

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-169 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-170 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

1304 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 8. Remove two screws from both sides of the finisher sub-stacker plate. Remove the bracket, and then
remove the sensor.

Figure 8-171 Remove the stack beam sensor

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1305

 Stack Position Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stack Position Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Stack Position Sensor assembly part number

Stack Position Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1306 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-172 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-173 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1307

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-174 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-175 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

1308 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-176 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1309

 Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.

Figure 8-177 Remove the tray

2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.

Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.

Figure 8-178 Remove the sub-tray

1310 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-179 Remove the PBA

4. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).

Figure 8-180 Remove the PBA

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1311

 5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-181 Remove the sub-stacker plate

6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-182 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly

1312 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.

Figure 8-183 Release the motor paddle sub assembly

8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness
front.

Figure 8-184 Remove the guide harness front

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1313

 9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-185 Release the finisher sub-motor tray

10. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-186 Remove one screw

1314 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.

Figure 8-187 Release the sensor

12. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the sensor.

b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

c. Remove the stack position sensor.

Figure 8-188 Remove the sensor

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1315

 Paper Holding Lever Solenoid
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly part number

Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1316 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-189 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-190 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1317

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-191 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-192 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)

1318 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-193 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-194 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1319

 8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-195 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-196 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)

1320 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

Figure 8-197 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)

11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Figure 8-198 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1321

 12. Remove one screw, and then remove stack lower limit switch bracket.

Figure 8-199 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)

13. Remove the second screw.

Figure 8-200 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)

1322 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 14. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 8-201 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)

15. Remove two screws on the solenoid bracket.

Figure 8-202 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)

16. Disconnect the connector from the main board.

17. Remove the solenoid assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1323

 Paper Support Motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor

● Step 2: Remove the paper support motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Support Motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Paper Support Motor assembly part number

Paper Support Motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1324 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.

Figure 8-203 Remove the tray

2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.

Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.

Figure 8-204 Remove the sub-tray

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1325

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-205 Remove the PBA

4. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).

Figure 8-206 Remove the PBA

1326 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-207 Remove the sub-stacker plate

6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-208 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1327

 7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.

Figure 8-209 Release the motor paddle sub assembly

8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness
front.

Figure 8-210 Remove the guide harness front

1328 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-211 Release the finisher sub-motor tray

10. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-212 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1329

 11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.

Figure 8-213 Release the sensor

12. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the sensor.

b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

c. Remove the stack position sensor.

Figure 8-214 Remove the sensor

1330 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 2: Remove the paper support motor

1. Disconnect one connector.

2. Remove four screws.

3. Remove the cables from their restraints at the front of the ejector.

4. Disconnect the motor and the sensor cable at the rear

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1331

 5. Remove the cables from the cable restraints at the rear.

NOTE: The black paddle is inside the chrome bracket at rear of ejector

6. Remove the ejector.

1332 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Paper Support Home Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor

● Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Support Home Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Paper Support Home Sensor assembly part number

Paper Support Home Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1333

 Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-215 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-216 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

1334 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-217 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-218 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1335

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-219 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

1336 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.

Figure 8-220 Remove the tray

2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.

Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.

Figure 8-221 Remove the sub-tray

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1337

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-222 Remove the PBA

4. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).

Figure 8-223 Remove the PBA

1338 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-224 Remove the sub-stacker plate

6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-225 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1339

 7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.

Figure 8-226 Release the motor paddle sub assembly

8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness
front.

Figure 8-227 Remove the guide harness front

1340 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-228 Release the finisher sub-motor tray

10. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-229 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1341

 11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.

Figure 8-230 Release the sensor

12. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the sensor.

b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

c. Remove the stack position sensor.

Figure 8-231 Remove the sensor

1342 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor
1. Disconnect one connector.

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-232 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4)

3. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 8-233 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1343

 4. Remove the paper support with attention for pinion.

Figure 8-234 Remove the paper support home sensor (3 of 4)

5. Remove the sensor from the paper support.

Figure 8-235 Remove the paper support home sensor (4 of 4)

1344 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Ejector Motor assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor

● Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Ejector Motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Ejector Motor assembly part number

Ejector Motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1345

 Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-236 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-237 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

1346 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-238 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-239 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1347

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-240 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

1348 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.

Figure 8-241 Remove the tray

2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.

Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.

Figure 8-242 Remove the sub-tray

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1349

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-243 Remove the PBA

4. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).

Figure 8-244 Remove the PBA

1350 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-245 Remove the sub-stacker plate

6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-246 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1351

 7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.

Figure 8-247 Release the motor paddle sub assembly

8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness
front.

Figure 8-248 Remove the guide harness front

1352 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-249 Release the finisher sub-motor tray

10. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-250 Remove one screw

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1353

 11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.

Figure 8-251 Release the sensor

12. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the sensor.

b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

c. Remove the stack position sensor.

Figure 8-252 Remove the sensor

1354 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
1. Disconnect one connector on the paper support motor.

2. Remove one screw on the paper support home sensor.

Figure 8-253 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4)

3. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 8-254 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1355

 4. Remove the e-clip and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.

Figure 8-255 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6)

Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).

5. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-256 Remove the ejector motor assembly (2 of 6)

1356 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 6. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two belt-timing gears, and then remove one screw.

Figure 8-257 Remove two belt-timing gears

7. Remove the clip, remove the belt-timing gear, and then remove one screw.

Figure 8-258 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1357

 8. Remove the cable from restraint, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Remove the motor assembly.

Figure 8-259 Disconnect connectors

Figure 8-260 Remove the motor assembly

1358 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Main Paddle Motor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle Motor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main Paddle Motor assembly part number

Main Paddle Motor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1359

 Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor
1. Remove the front cover.

2. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor assembly.

Figure 8-261 Remove the motor assembly

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 8-262 Remove the main paddle motor

1360 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Main Paddle Home Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly part number

Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1361

 Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor
1. Remove the front cover.

2. Remove one screw. Open the clamp, and then remove the bracket-paddle sensor.

Figure 8-263 Remove the bracket-paddle sensor

3. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 8-264 Remove the main paddle home sensor

1362 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Main Paddle
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the main paddle

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Main Paddle assembly part number

Main Paddle assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1363

 Step 1: Remove the main paddle
▲ Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove the main paddle A unit and main paddle B unit.

Figure 8-265 Remove the main paddle

1364 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Ejector assembly
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor

● Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly

● Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Ejector assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Ejector assembly part number

Ejector assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1365

 Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.

Figure 8-266 Remove the tray

2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.

Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.

Figure 8-267 Remove the sub-tray

1366 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-268 Remove the PBA

4. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).

Figure 8-269 Remove the PBA

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1367

 5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.

Figure 8-270 Remove the sub-stacker plate

6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.

Figure 8-271 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly

1368 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.

NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.

Figure 8-272 Release the motor paddle sub assembly

8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness
front.

Figure 8-273 Remove the guide harness front

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1369

 9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.

Figure 8-274 Release the finisher sub-motor tray

10. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-275 Remove one screw

1370 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.

Figure 8-276 Release the sensor

12. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the sensor.

b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

c. Remove the stack position sensor.

Figure 8-277 Remove the sensor

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1371

 Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
1. Disconnect one connector on the paper support motor.

2. Remove one screw on the paper support home sensor.

Figure 8-278 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4)

3. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 8-279 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4)

1372 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 4. Remove the e-clip and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.

Figure 8-280 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6)

Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).

5. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-281 Remove the ejector motor assembly (2 of 6)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1373

 6. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two belt-timing gears, and then remove one screw.

Figure 8-282 Remove two belt-timing gears

7. Remove the clip, remove the belt-timing gear, and then remove one screw.

Figure 8-283 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw

1374 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 8. Remove the cable from restraint, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Remove the motor assembly.

Figure 8-284 Disconnect connectors

Figure 8-285 Remove the motor assembly

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1375

 Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly
1. Remove two screws.

Figure 8-286 Remove two screws

2. Unplug the harness, and then remove the ejector assembly.

Figure 8-287 Remove the ejector assembly

1376 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Punch Dust Full Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers

● Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly part number

Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1377

 Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub-cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-288 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-289 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)

1378 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller
feed.

Figure 8-290 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)

Figure 8-291 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1379

 4. Remove six screws.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Figure 8-292 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)

1380 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor
1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly.

Figure 8-293 Remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch dust full sensor.

Figure 8-294 Remove the punch dust full sensor

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1381

 Door Switch
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the door switch

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Door Switch assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Door Switch assembly part number

??? Door Switch assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1382 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the door switch
1. On the right-side of the printer remove three screws, and then remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-295 Remove three screws

2. On the right, back-side of the printer remove the e-ring, and then remove the shaft-side plate and
unplug the connector.

Figure 8-296 Remove the e-ring

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1383

 3. On the right, front-side of the printer, remove the sheet-punch front.

Figure 8-297 Remove the sheet-punch front

4. Remove the e-ring and washer, and then remove the punch dummy.

Figure 8-298 Remove the punch dummy

1384 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket-SPT B.

Figure 8-299 Remove the bracket-SPT B

6. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the door switch.

Figure 8-300 Remove the door switch

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1385

 Top Door Switch
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the top door switch

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Top Door Switch assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Top Door Switch assembly part number

Top Door Switch assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1386 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Step 1: Remove the top door switch
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.

a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.

b. Remove the handle.

c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner
to remove the finisher sub cover front.

d. Remove the cover-rear.

Figure 8-301 Remove the cover-rear

2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle
and finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 8-302 Remove the finisher sub-cover middle and finisher sub-cover compile

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1387

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.

Figure 8-303 Remove the tray

4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.

Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The
rack and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

Figure 8-304 Remove the finisher sub-tray frame

1388 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

 5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.

Figure 8-305 Remove the PBA cover

6. Remove four screws from both sides.

Figure 8-306 Remove four screws

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1389

 8. Remove one screw.

Figure 8-307 Remove one screw

9. Unplug the connector, and then remove the switch assembly.

Figure 8-308 Remove the switch assembly

10. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 8-309 Remove the sensor

1390 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

End Fence Home Sensor
● Introduction

● Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the End Fence Home Sensor assembly.

***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of
the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

Before performing service

◦ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

End Fence Home Sensor assembly part number

End Fence Home Sensor assembly part number

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

◦ Connect the power cable.

◦ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1391

 Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor
1. Follow steps 1-5 in the traverse front home sensor disassembly procedure.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 8-310 Remove the end fence home sensor

1392 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Problem solving

ENWW Problem solving 1393

 Control panel message document (CPMD)
Control-panel messages and event log entries
The CPMD is not provided in this service manual. The CPMD for this printer is available on the HP Service
Access Workbench (SAW) Web site. Go to h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/home.do.

1394 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

Block Diagram

ENWW Block Diagram 1395

1396 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW
A Appendix: Printer specifications

● Printer dimensions and wieght

● Printer space requirements

● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

ENWW 1397
 Printer dimensions and wieght
Table A-1 Printer dimensions and wieght

Product Length Width Height Weight

Single function printer base 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 761 mm (30.0 in) 50.3 kg (111 lbs)

Single function printer base with the 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 993 mm (39.1 in) 59.9 kg (132 lbs)
1x550-sheet input feeder

Multi function printer base 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 877 mm (34.5 in) 59.4 kg (131 lbs)

Multi function printer base with 1x550- 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 1365 mm (53.7 in) 94.3 kg (208 lbs)
sheet input feeder with storage cabinet

Multi function printer base with 3x550- 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 1365 mm (53.7 in) 113.9 kg (251 lbs)
sheet input feeder

Multi function printer base with high 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 1365 mm (53.7 in) 121.6 kg (268 lbs)
capacity input (HCI) feeder

1x550-sheet input feeder 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 232 m m (9.1 in) 9.5 kg (21 lbs)

1x550-sheet input feeder with storage 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 619 mm (24.4 in) 29.9 kg (66 lbs)
cabinet

3x550-sheet input feeder 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 619 mm (24.4 in) 33.6 kg (74 lbs)

High capacity input (HCI) feeder 790 mm (31.1 in) 760 mm (29.9 in) 619 mm (24.4 in) 42,9 kg (93 lbs)

Printer space requirements

HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this chapter to make
sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation. See Printer
dimensions and wieght on page 1398.

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic

emissions
See www.hp.com/support/lje72500mfp for current information.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

1398 Appendix A Appendix: Printer specifications ENWW

B Glossary

● Glossary of terms

ENWW 1399
 Glossary of terms
The following glossary includes terminology commonly used with printing, as well as terminology used in this
service manual.

802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g/n 802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11
Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer
interferences from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices
together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN
radio signals.

ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of
paper for scanning.

AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was
included with the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

BIT depth Computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a
bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1–bit color is
commonly called monochrome or black and white.

BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI) and used
commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.

BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This
is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP
servers assigns an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless
workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. The CCD locking mechanism is also
used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.

Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an
entire set before printing additional copies.

Control Panel The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where control or monitoring instruments are
displayed. The control panel is found on the front of the printer.

Coverage Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage
means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has complicated
images or a large amount of text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as
much as the coverage.

CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A CSV is a type of file format used to exchange data between disparate
applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a defacto standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.

Default The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.

DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server
provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all data
within the machine, such as printing data and received fax data.

DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share
information with each other across the network.

1400 Appendix B Glossary ENWW

 DNS The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a
distributed database on networks, such as the internet.

Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the
page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.

DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher
DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.

DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to
use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.

Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on
both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during
one print cycle.

Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-
outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.

ECM Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax
modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes
caused by telephone line noise.

Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the
functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet has become
the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.

EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original
Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

FDI Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a
coin operated device or card reader. Those devices allow for pay-for-print service on the machine.

Flow document feeder A flow document feeder is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of
paper so that the machine can scan both sides of the paper.

FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that
supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the internet or an intranet).

Fuser Unit The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller
and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to
make sure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of
a laser printer.

Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very
popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.

Grayscale Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to
grayscale. Colors are represented by various shades of gray.

Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a
large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.

HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device
which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

ENWW Glossary of terms 1401

 IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). The term “1284–B” refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches
to the peripheral (for example, a printer).

Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public
telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization’s information or operations with its
employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.

IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and
communicate with other devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.

IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs, media
size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP also
supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing solution.

IPX/SPX IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. IPX/SPX is a networking
protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP. IPX is similar to IP and SPX is similar to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area
networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose. Typically, performance exceeds that of
TCP/IP on a LAN.

ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
composed of representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.

ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and
regulate international radio and telecommunications. The organization’s main tasks include
standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries/regions to allow international phone calls. A-T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.

ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.

JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or
quality. It was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for
other images.

JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.

LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying
directory services running over TCP/IP.

LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.

MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is
a unique 48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e.g., 00–00–
0c-34–11–4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by the manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a large network.

MFP Multi Function Printer (MFP) is an office printer that includes multiple functionality in one physical body,
such as a printer, copier, fax, scanner, etc.

MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be
transmitted between fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-
based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist
primarily of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.

MMR Modified Modified Read (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.

Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier
signal to decode transmitted information.

1402 Appendix B Glossary ENWW

 MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line
using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences are determined, and then the differences
are encoded and transmitted.

NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. NetWare initially used cooperative multitasking to
run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
NetWare supports TCP/IP and IPX/SPX.

OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam
emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit
containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced
appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and
paper.

Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or
translated to produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.

OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that
divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The
layers are, from top to bottom: Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link, and
Physical.

PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private
enterprise.

PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer
protocol. PCL has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has been
released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.

PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF
represents two dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PostScript (PS) PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in electronic and
desktop publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

Print Media Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or
copier.

PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning
the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

PRN file An interface for a device driver which allows software to interact with the device driver using standard
input/output system calls, simplifying many tasks.

Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
between two computing endpoints.

PSTN The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world’s public circuit switched
telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.

RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and
accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data, such as usernames and
passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.

Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the resolution.

SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and
miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated
Interprocess communication mechanism.

ENWW Glossary of terms 1403

 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP is a
relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message are specified and the
message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to
the server.

SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a wireless local area network (WLAN) name. All wireless devices in a WLAN
use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a
maximum length of 32 characters.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is
the network address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.

TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status,
transmission result, and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.

TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image
data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the
image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures
that have been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used in
laser printers and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be fused
by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.

TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-
compliant software, a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other
Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>

URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The first
part of the address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the domain
name where the resource is located.

USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears ligher when viewed by transmitted
light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government
documents to discourage counterfeiting.

WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of
security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected
as it is transmitted from one end point to another.

WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that was originally introduced in Windows
Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant
scanner.

WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is class of systems used to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks. It was
created to improve upon the security features of WEP.

WPA-PSK WPA Pre-Shared Key (WPA-PSK) is a special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key,
or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices.
WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for
more advanced security.

1404 Appendix B Glossary ENWW

 WPS The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If a wireless
access point supports WPS, it can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer.

XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document
format developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic documents. It is an
XML-based specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-independent document
format.

ENWW Glossary of terms 1405

1406 Appendix B Glossary ENWW
Index

A caster cover (finisher) control panel diagnostic flowcharts

acoustic specifications 1398 removing and replacing 852 588
ADF jams, clearing 695 caution for moving the scanner 62 control panel menus 621
after-service checklist 104, 807, cautions iii controller PCA (finisher)
1197 checklists removing and replacing 885
APS sensor 399 after-service 104, 807, 1197 conventions, document iii
auto size sensor 251 preservice 104, 806, 1197 Copy menu (MFP only), control
CIS panel 668
B cleaning 107 copy specifications 15
blade motor (M19) maintenance 107 current settings pages 601
removing and replacing 1166 cleaning
blurred image 744 CIS 107 D
booklet feed entrance motor (M13) flow document feeder white bar debug log 732
removing and replacing 1146 107 defeating
booklet finisher laser scanner assembly 109 interlocks 595
removing and replacing 1111 scan glass 108 determine problem source 584
booklet finisher fold stopper unit transfer roller 111 developer
removing and replacing 1134 cleaning page 692 fan 214
booklet finisher front cover component test developer fan 214
removing and replacing 1108 special mode test 597 developer unit 38
booklet finisher PCA components remove 144
removing and replacing 1122 diagnostic tests 597 replace 144
booklet tray scanning system 56 diagnostics
removing and replacing 849 control panel 120 component 597
buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3) Backup/Restore menu 691 engine 595
removing and replacing 1020 Calibrate/Cleaning menu 691 LED 593
BYOD table Copy menu (MFP only) 668 diagrams 776
card reader 133 Fax menu (fax models only) 682 DCF 785
NFC kit 133 messages, types of 1179, 1394 FDB 781
Print menu 686 finisher system 1180
C Reports menu 621 front/opc 783
C fold motor (M20) Scan menu (MFP only) 673 fuser exit 777
removing and replacing 1171 Settings menu 624 HVPS 779
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control Supplies menu 687 information 775
panel 691 Trays menu 688 laser scanner assembly 779
capture log 732 troubleshooting menu 689 LVPS 781
card reader 132 USB Firmware Upgrade menu pickup/ph drive/side 778
install 133 694 scanner 784

ENWW Index 1407

 toner 780 dual cassete feeder (DCF) pickup feed roller 156
UI 782 units 415 MP 161
dimensions, printer 1398 dual cassete feeder (DCF) rear multipurpose 161
document conventions iii cover 403 feed sensor 1 279
document feeder pickup 165 dual cassete feeder (DCF) right feed unit
document feeder pickup roller 165, door 405 feed sensor 2 284
175 dual cassette feeder diagram 785 feeding system 33
document feeder problems 753 duct drive 51 main components and
document feeder reverse roller dummy feed guide functions 31
170, 179 removing and replacing 903 overview 30
document feeder skew 770 duplex tray 1 feed assembly 35
document feeders 300 sensor 258 feeding system information 30
flow (z bundles) document duplex sensor 258 feeding system problem 762
feeder 331 FIH
standard (dn bundles) document E HP Foreign interface harness (FIH)
feeder 301 each unit functions solution, install 130
drain 734 finisher system 802 finisher sectional view 792
drive ejector unit finisher system 792
motors 46 removing and replacing 933 diagrams 1180
system 46 electrical circuit problem 766 each unit functions 802
drive system 46 electrical parts layout electrical parts layout 797
duct drive 51 finisher system layout 797 finisher sectional view 792
fuser/exit drive 52 electrical specifications 1398 paper path 796
main drive unit 47 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 6, PCA connection information 803
pickup drive 50 791, 1185 flow (z bundles) document feeder
toner supply drive 53 engine 331
drive unit problems 761 diagnostics 595 document feeder contact image
drum unit engine diagnostics 715 sensor (CIS) 346
remove 139 envelope rotate 734 document feeder contact image
replace 139 error messages sensor (CIS) fan 367
dual cassete feeder (DCF) motor types of 1179, 1394 document feeder front motor
408 ESD electrostatic discharge (ESD) 6, 351
dual cassete feeder (DCF) PCA 413 791, 1185 document feeder input tray 341
dual cassete feeder (DCF) pickup event log 601 document feeder jam access
motor 411 clear using touchscreen control cover 336
dual cassete feeder (DCF) pickup panel 602 document feeder PCA fan 364
units 415 exit drive unit 224 document feeder rear motors
dual cassete feeder (DCF) rear 354
cover 403 F document feeder ultrasonic
dual cassete feeder (DCF) right fault count 714 sensor with PCA 370
door 405 fault log 714 document feeder white backing
dual cassete feeder (DCF) unit 402 Fax menu (fax models only), control 376
dual cassete feeder (DCF) motor panel 682 flow ADF
411 FDB diagram 781 whole unit 331
dual cassete feeder (DCF) PCA feed entrance motor (M1) flow ADF skew 770
413 removing and replacing 1008 flow document feeder white bar
dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit 91 feed exit motor (M2) cleaning 107
dual cassete feeder (DCF) motor removing and replacing 1014 maintenance 107
408 foggy image 745

1408 Index ENWW

folding roller motor (M18) HP Foreign interface harness (FIH), exit sensor 1210
removing and replacing 1160 install 130 front jogger home sensor 1234
formatter 114 HP Jetdirect print server front jogger motor 1222
formatter lights 593 lights 593 main paddle 1363
front cover HVPS board 86 main paddle home sensor 1361
open switch’ 184 HVPS diagram 779 main paddle motor 1359
front cover (finisher) paper holding lever solenoid
removing and replacing 832 I 1316
front cover open switch 184 image creation 37 paper support home sensor
front door (finisher) developer unit 38 1333
removing and replacing 820 imaging unit 37 paper support motor 1324
front lower cover (finisher) overview 37 punch dust full sensor 1377
removing and replacing 840 image management 731 rear jogger home sensor 1255
front tamper motor (M6) image problem 750 rear jogger motor 1246
removing and replacing 1028 image quality 736 remove and replace 1199
front tamper unit blurred image 744 specifications 95
removing and replacing 958 drive unit problems 761 stack beam sensor 1301
front/opc diagram 783 electrical circuit problem 766 stack position sensor 1306
fuser 151 feeding system problem 762 stacker encoder sensor 1287
drive assembly board 220 flow ADF or ADF skew 770 stacker lower limit switch 1294
out sensor 255 foggy image 745 stacker motor 1280
fuser drive assembly board 220 fuser problem 752 stapler 1261
fuser drive unit 224 horizontal black lines 742 stapler position sensor
fuser exit diagram 777 horizontal periodic light/dark lines assembly 1264
fuser problem 752 or dots 743 sub paddle shaft sub assembly
fuser unit 40, 151 image problem 750 1218
fuser unit temperature control laser scanner assembly top door switch 1386
41 problem 765 traverse motor 1275
overview 40 light image 746 install
fuser unit drive, mono models 41 other errors 750 HP Foreign interface harness (FIH)
fuser unit temperature control 41 paper stained 750 solution 130
fuser-out sensor 255 poor fusing performance 749 interlocks
fuser/exit drive 52 scanner and ADF problems 753 defeating 595
fuser/exit drive unit 224 skewed image 748 interpret control-panel messages and
fusing performance problems 749 uneven pitch and jitter 746 event log entries 1179, 1394
vertical black lines 739
G vertical light lines 740 J
General Settings menu, control image scanner unit 378 jam removal 695
panel 624 imaging unit 37 clearing ADF jams 695
general specifications 9 individual component diagnostics Jetdirect print server
593 lights 593
H inner finisher jitter image 746
hard disk drive 112 block diagram 1395
hardware configuration 78, 89 door switch 1382 K
HVPS board 86 ejector assembly 1365 keyboard 123
main controller (main board) 81 ejector motor assembly 1345
hardware integration pocket (HIP) is end fence home sensor 1391 L
not functioning 593 entrance motor 1204 laser scanner assembly 43
HDD 112, 297 entrance sensor 1200 cleaning 109
home button is unresponsive 592 exit motor 1215 information 43

ENWW Index 1409

 laser scanning optical path 44 Copy (MFP only) 668 DCF main frame pickup 482
maintenance 109 Fax (fax models only) 682 DCF main frame pickup 1 480
laser scanner assembly diagram General Settings 624 DCF main frame pickup, upper
779 Manage Trays 688 484
laser scanner assembly overview Print 686 div cam (finisher) 520
43 Reports 621 door (finisher) 516
laser scanner assembly problem Scan (MFP only) 673 drive buffer (finisher) 508
765 Supplies 687 dual cassette feeder (DCF) 478
laser scanning optical path 44 messages entrance guide (finisher) 504,
LED lamp module 391 types of 1179, 1394 518
LEDs. See lights motors 46 entrance motor (finisher) 506
left cover mp unit 261 FD stopper unit (finisher) 510
remove 192 multipurpose unit 261 finisher sub 1 536
replace 192 finisher sub 7 538
light image 746 N finisher sub 8 540
lights NFC kit 132 finisher sub booklet 530
formatter 593 install 133 first cassette 426
troubleshooting with 593 no control panel sound 591 Flow ADF (z models) 464
lower shield assembly notes iii Flow ADF image scanner (z
removing and replacing 856 models) 474
LVPS O Flow ADF main frame (z
board 217 optional accessories 23 models) 472
LVPS board 217 ordering 807, 1198 Flow ADF open cover (z models)
LVPS diagram 781 466
P Flow ADF stacker (z models) 470
M paper handling specifications 17 Flow ADF upper pickup (z
machine external view 28 paper path models) 468
main controller (main board) 81 finisher system 796 fold roller (finisher) 512
main disk drive 297 paper stained 750 front alignment (tamper)
main drive 227 part replacement alert 734 (finisher) 522
main drive unit 47, 227 part replacement count 715 fuser output drive 432
main memory clear 732 parts and accessories 807, 1198 hb motor (finisher) 502, 520
main tray moving motor (M11) parts and diagrams 419 idle fold (finisher) 528
removing and replacing 1098 ADF (dn models) 454 idle fold paddle(finisher) 528
maintenance 106 ADF exterior (dn models) 456 inner finisher 534
CIS 107 ADF image scanner (dn models) IPTU (bridge) 532
flow document feeder white bar 460 jam clear (finisher) 510
107 ADF image scanner, lower (dn low ADF image scanner, lower (z
laser scanner assembly 109 models) 462 models) 476
machine cleaning for ADF main frame assembly (dn low output (finisher) 502
maintenance 106 models) 458 low paddle (finisher) 506
scan glass 108 ADF pickup assembly (dn main assembly 422
transfer roller 111 models) 456 main blade (finisher) 512
maintenance counts alignment (finisher) 506 main engine frame 430
fault count 714 BKT main blade (finisher) 510 main frame 442
part replacement count 715 booklet finisher 486 main frame pickup 438
maintenance parts 23 cover 444 main frame pickup 1 436
menu map 601 cover f bm (finisher) 528 main frame pickup 2 436
menus, control panel curl pawl (finisher) 500 main frame pickup, upper 440
Calibrate/Cleaning 691 curl pawl motor (finisher) 500 main output (finisher) 518
DCF main 478

1410 Index ENWW

 main parts 422 pickup unit removal and replacement
mainline finisher 1 488 sensor 273 dual cassete feeder (DCF) unit
mainline finisher 2 490 pickup/ph drive/side diagram 778 402
mainline finisher 3 492 plastic latches information 103, right top cover (finisher) 813
mainline finisher 4 494 806, 1197 removal and replacement
mainline finisher 5 496 post-service tests 104, 807, 1197 precautions 102, 805, 1196
mainline finisher 6 498 power removal order
mid jam (finisher) 518 consumption 1398 removing order 105
MP tray 448 power subsystem 584 remove
output 424 power supply left cover 192
paddle motor (finisher) 506, 520 troubleshooting 584 rear top cover 194
PCB bm (finisher) 528 power-on troubleshooting remove and replace
rear alignment (tamper) overview 584 inner finisher 1199
(finisher) 524 pre-boot menu options 603 removing and replacing
registration guide (finisher) 516 precations blade motor (M19) 1166
registration sub-frame 434 information 102, 805, 1196 booklet feed entrance motor
right door 446 preservice checklist 104, 806, 1197 (M13) 1146
right door duplex 452 print adjustment 725 booklet finisher 1111
right door output 450 Print menu, control panel 686 booklet finisher fold stopper
right jam (finisher) 520 print quality unit 1134
SCU motor (finisher) 504 test 104, 807, 1197 booklet finisher front cover
second cassette 428 print quality problems 736 1108
shield (finisher) 526 print quality troubleshooting 736 booklet finisher PCA 1122
STK motor (finisher) 504 print reports 714 booklet tray 849
sub-inner finisher 534 print specifications 11 buffer motor, gear, and sensor
three fold blade (finisher) 514 Print Test Page 638 (M3) 1020
three fold motor (finisher) 500 print test patterns 732 C fold motor (M20) 1171
three fold output (finisher) 500 printer space requirements 1398 caster cover (finisher) 852
top cover (finisher) 516 printing process overview 37 controller PCA (finisher) 885
top door (finisher) 516 problem-solving dummy feed guide 903
top frame (finisher) 512 messages, types of 1179, 1394 ejector unit 933
top guide (finisher) 502 Process Cleaning Page 692 feed entrance motor (M1) 1008
top jam (finisher) 508 product overview feed exit motor (M2) 1014
top lower (finisher) 508 specifications 8 folding roller motor (M18) 1160
transfer buffer (finisher) 520 front cover (finisher) 832
PCA connection information R front door (finisher 820
finisher system 803 rear cover (finisher) front lowercover (finisher) 840
PCA precautions 103, 805, 1196 removing and replacing 827 front tamper motor (M6) 1028
periodic black dots 742 rear tamper motor (M7) front tamper unit 958
periodic horizontal light/dark lines or removing and replacing 1054 lower shield assembly 856
dots 743 rear tamper unit main tray moving motor (M11)
pickup 156 removing and replacing 983 1098
pickup drive 50, 230 rear top cover rear cover (finisher) 827
pickup drive unit 230 remove 194 rear tamper motor (M7) 1054
pickup roller 156 replace 194 rear tamper unit 983
document feeder 165, 175 registration unit 289 SCU motor (M10) 1080
MP 161 removal 126 separate pawl motor (M17)
multipurpose 161 1157
pickup sensor 273 stapler unit 891

ENWW Index 1411

 stopper moving motor (M16) SCU motor (M10) stain on back of paper 750
1152 removing and replacing 1080 standard (dn bundles) document
TE presser motor (M14) 1149 separate pawl motor (M17) feeder 301
top cover (finisher) 816 removing and replacing 1157 document feeder contact image
top jam access cover 909 service and support information sensor (CIS) 313
top lower feed assembly 920 102, 420, 421 document feeder feed motor
top output bin 810 service approach 102, 805, 1196 322
upper shield assembly 869 service functions 732 document feeder input tray 309
removing parts service mode document feeder jam access
checklists 104, 806, 1197 adjustment 725 cover 306
replace capture log 732 document feeder main motor
remove 192, 194 debug log 732 319
replacement 126 drain 734 document feeder PCA 325
Reports menu, control panel 621 engine diagnostics 715 document feeder white backing
reverse roller 156 envelope rotate 734 328
document feeder 170, 179 fault count 714 document feeder whole unit
MP 161 fault log 714 302
multipurpose 161 how to enter 707 stapler unit
right door 188 image management 731 removing and replacing 891
open switch 197 information 707 static, precautions for 6, 791, 1185
right door open switch 197 information, general 713 status
right top cover (finisher) main memory clear 732 messages, types of 1179, 1394
removal and replacement 813 menu tree 707 stopper moving motor (M16)
part replacement alert 734 removing and replacing 1152
S part replacement count 715 supplies 23, 807, 1198
scan glass 389 print reports 714 Supplies menu, control panel 687
scan joint board 397 print test patterns 732 supply status 713
Scan menu (MFP only), control scanner diagnostics 720
panel 673 service functions 732 T
scan specifications 13 software version 714 TE presser motor (M14)
scanner supply status 713 removing and replacing 1149
caution for moving 62 TR control mode 733 tech mode
imaging unit 394 size sensor 251 information 707
scan glass 389 skewed image 748 temperature sensor 258
scan joint board 397 software and solution tests
scanner diagnostics 720 specifications 22 post-service 104, 807, 1197
scanner diagram 784 software version 714 print-quality 104, 807, 1197
scanner glass space requirements, printer 1398 tips iii
cleaning 108 specifications 9 toner
maintenance 108 copy specifications 15 collection unit 248
scanner imaging unit 394 electrical and acoustic 1398 sensor 248
scanner problems 753 general specifications 9 toner collection unit sensor 248
scanner system maintenance parts 23 toner diagram 780
information 54 optional accessories 23 toner duct 233, 240
scanner system overview 54 paper handling specifications 17 toner duct drive unit 233
scanner unit print specifications 11 toner supply 237
image scanner 378 scan specifications 13 toner supply drive 53, 237
scanning system software and solution 22 toner supply drive unit 237
components 56 space requirements 1398 top cover (finisher)
scanning system components 56 supplies 23 removing and replacing 816

1412 Index ENWW

top jam access cover
removing and replacing 909
top lower feed assembly
removing and replacing 920
top output bin
removing and replacing 810
touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no
image) 589
touchscreen has an unresponsive
zone 590
TR control mode 733
transfer roller 154
cleaning 111
maintenance 111
tray selection - use requested tray
639
Trays menu, control panel 688
troubleshooting
checklist 598
control panel checks 483
lights, using 593
power 584
process 584
trusted platform module
removing and replacing 127
trusted platform module, removing
and replacing 127

U
UI diagram 782
understand lights on the formatter
formatter lights 593
understand the lights on the
formatter
HP Jetdirect LEDs 594
uneven pitch and jitter 746
upper shield assembly
removing and replacing 869
Use Requested Tray 639

V
vertical black lines 739
vertical light lines 740
vertical white lines 740

W
warnings iii
weight, printer 1398
working table
card reader 133
NFC kit 133

ENWW Index 1413

1414 Index ENWW